RU2648884C2 - Expandable tissue thickness compensator - Google Patents

Abstract

FIELD: medical equipment.

SUBSTANCE: invention relates to medical equipment. Tissue thickness compensator comprises a biocompatible material, a first component, and a second component. First component and the second component form the reaction product for expansion of the tissue thickness compensator. First component comprises a first hydrogel precursor, the second component comprises a second hydrogel precursor. Reaction product contains a hydrogel. Reaction product can be formed in vivo and/or in situ by contacting the first component and the second component. First component and/or second component is encapsulated and is configured to release components upon rupture. Reaction product contains a compound swelling in the liquid.

EFFECT: tissue thickness compensator is proposed.

5 cl, 540 dwg

Description

CROSS RELATIONS TO RELATED APPLICATIONS

This unconditional patent application is a partial extension in accordance with §120 of section 35 of the US Code, US patent application serial number 13/097891, entitled "Tissue Thickness Compensator for Surgical Stapler Containing an Adjustable Resistant Member", filed April 29, 2011 of the year, which is an application with a partial continuation according to §120 of section 35 of the US Code, US patent application serial number 12/894377, entitled "Selectively Oriented Implantable Staple Cartridge", filed September 30, 2010 ode, the full text of which is considered incorporated herein by reference.

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION

The present invention relates to surgical instruments, surgical dissecting and stapling instruments, and cartridges with brackets used in them that are capable of dissecting and stapling tissue with brackets.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

The following is a non-exhaustive list of embodiments of the present invention that are claimed or may be claimed.

1. A tissue thickness compensator comprising:

biocompatible material;

first component; and

second component;

wherein the first component and the second component are adapted to form a reaction product that expands the tissue thickness compensator.

2. The tissue thickness compensator of Embodiment 1, further comprising an encapsulated component comprising one of the first component and the second component, while the other of the first component or second component may be placed in a biocompatible material.

3. The tissue thickness compensator of Embodiment 1, wherein the first component comprises a hydrophilic material placed in a biocompatible material and the second component is body fluid.

4. The tissue thickness compensator of embodiment 1 comprising a first encapsulated component comprising a first component and a second encapsulated component containing a second component.

5. The tissue thickness compensator of embodiment 4, wherein the biocompatible material comprises at least one capsule containing a first encapsulated component and a second encapsulated component.

6. The tissue thickness compensator of Embodiment 4, wherein the first encapsulated component is configured to release the first component when the first encapsulated component is broken, and the second encapsulated component is configured to release the second component when the second encapsulated component is broken.

7. A tissue thickness compensator from any previous embodiment in which the biocompatible material comprises albumin, alginate, carbohydrates, casein, cellulose, chitin, chitosan, collagen, blood, dextran, elastin, fibrin, fibrinogen, gelatin, heparin, hyaluronic acid, keratin , proteins, whey, starch, polylactic acid, polyglycolic acid, polyhydroxybutyrate, polyphosphazine, polyester, polyethylene glycol, polyalkylene oxide, polyacrylamide, polycarbonate, polyhydroxyethyl methyl acrylate, polyvinylpyrrolidone, polyvinyl spin t, polycaprolactone, polydioxanone, polyacrylic acid, polyacetate, polypropylene, glycerol, polyamino acids, copolymers of esters and ethers, polyalkylene oxalate, polyamide, poliiminokarbonat, polioksoefir, polyorthoester, polyphosphazene, or a combination thereof.

8. The tissue thickness compensator of Embodiment 1, wherein the reaction product is formed in situ upon contact of the first component with the second component.

9. A tissue thickness compensator from any previous embodiment, wherein the reaction product is a composition that swells in a liquid.

10. The tissue thickness compensator of any of embodiments 1 and 4-9, wherein the first component comprises a first hydrogel precursor, the second component contains a second hydrogel precursor, and the reaction product contains a hydrogel.

11. A tissue thickness compensator from any previous embodiment, wherein the first component and the second component are independently selected from albumin, alginate, carbohydrates, casein, cellulose, chitin, chitosan, collagen, blood, dextran, elastin, fibrin, fibrinogen, gelatin, heparin hyaluronic acid, keratin, proteins, whey, starch, polylactic acid, polyglycolic acid, polyhydroxybutyrate, polyphosphazine, polyester, polyethylene glycol, polyalkylene oxide, polyacrylamide, polyhydroxyethylmethyl acrylate, watering vinyl pyrrolidone, polyvinyl alcohol, polycaprolactone, polydioxanone, polyacrylic acid, polyacetate, polypropylene, glycerol, polyamino acids, copolymers of ethers and esters, polyalkylene oxalate, polyamide, polyiminocarbonate, polyoxyether, polyorthoester, polyorthoester, combination polyorthoester, polyorth ether.

12. A tissue thickness compensator from any previous embodiment having an outer layer consisting of a waterproof material, an inner layer consisting of a biocompatible material, and at least one first component and a second component.

13. The tissue thickness compensator of embodiment 12, wherein the waterproof material comprises polylactic acid, polyglycolic acid, polyhydroxybutyrate, polyphosphazine, polyester, polyethylene glycol, polyalkylene oxide, polyacrylamide, polycarbonate, polyhydroxyethylmethyl acrylate, polyvinyl polyacrylate, polyvinyl polyvinyl acetone, polyvinyl acetone, polyvinyl acetate , polypropylene, glycerin, polyamino acids, copolymers of ethers and esters, polyalkylene oxalate, polyamide, polyiminocarbonate, poly ksoefir, polyorthoester, polyphosphazene, or a combination thereof.

14. A tissue thickness compensator from any previous embodiment, wherein the biocompatible material comprises a reinforcing material, the reinforcing material comprising a net, fibers, particles, powder, or a combination of the above.

15. The tissue thickness compensator of embodiment 14, wherein the reinforcing material comprises collagen, gelatin, fibrin, fibrinogen, elastin, keratin, albumin, hydroxyethyl cellulose, cellulose, oxidized cellulose, hydroxypropyl cellulose, carboxyethyl cellulose, carboxymethyl cellulose, chitol, chitol, polyglycolic acid, polyhydroxybutyrate, polyphosphazine, polyester, polyethylene glycol, polyalkylene oxide, polyacrylamide, polyhydroxyethylmethyl acrylate, polyvinylpyrrolidone, polyvinyl alcohol, p likaprolakton, polydioxanone, polyacrylic acid, polyacetate, polycaprolactone, polypropylene, aliphatic polyester, glycerol, polyamino acids, copolymers of esters and ethers, polyalkylene oxalate, polyamide, poliiminokarbonat, polyalkylene oxalate, polioksoefir, polyorthoester, polyphosphazene, or a combination thereof.

16. A tissue thickness compensator from any previous embodiment, comprising a hemostatic agent, anti-inflammatory agent, antibacterial agent, antimicrobial agent, anti-adhesive agent, anticoagulant, drug, pharmaceutical active ingredient, or a combination of the above.

17. The product selected from the thrust element of the stapler and the cartridge with the staples of the stapler, the product contains:

tissue thickness compensator of embodiment 1, fabric thickness compensator comprises:

an outer layer containing non-porous material;

an inner layer containing a porous material, a first encapsulated component containing said first component, and a second encapsulated component containing said second component.

18. The product of embodiment 17, wherein:

the outer layer contains polyglycolic acid, polylactic acid, polydioxanone, polyhydroxyalkanoate, polyglexaprone, polycaprolactone, or a combination thereof;

the porous material contains oxidized regenerated cellulose, the first component contains a first hydrogel precursor, and the second component contains a second hydrogel precursor; and

wherein the reaction product is a hydrogel, and the first hydrogel precursor and the second hydrogel precursor are adapted to form said hydrogel to expand the tissue thickness compensator upon rupture of the first encapsulated component and the second encapsulated component.

19. The product of embodiment 17 or embodiment 18, in which the product forms at least part of the path for forming a bracket along which the bracket moves from a particular cartridge to any stop element or from any cartridge to a specific stop element, depending on the case, and in which the first and second encapsulated components are located relative to the path for forming the brackets so that the bracket moving along this path punctures or otherwise ruptures the capsules.

20. A method of forming an expanding tissue thickness compensator in situ using the tissue thickness compensator of Embodiment 4, the method comprising:

rupture of the first encapsulated component and the second encapsulated component to allow an in situ reaction to occur between the first encapsulated component and the second encapsulated component to form said reaction product;

wherein the reaction product expands the tissue thickness compensator to compensate for the difference in tissue thickness.

21. The method of embodiment 20, wherein:

tissue thickness compensator contains:

an outer layer comprising polyglycolic acid, polylactic acid, polydioxanone, polyhydroxyalkanoate, polyglexaprone, polycaprolactone, or a combination of the above; and

the inner layer containing oxidized regenerated cellulose;

a first encapsulated component comprising a first hydrogel precursor;

a second encapsulated component comprising a second hydrogel precursor; and

hydrogel containing reaction product.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

Features and advantages of the present invention, as well as a method of achieving them, will become more apparent, and the invention itself will become more apparent after reading the following description of the present invention in conjunction with the accompanying figures, in which:

In FIG. 1 is a sectional view of an embodiment of a surgical apparatus.

In FIG. 1A is a perspective view of one embodiment of an implantable cartridge with brackets;

In FIG. 1B-1E show portions of an end clamp holding and stitching tissue with an implantable cartridge with brackets;

In FIG. 2 is a partial cross-sectional side view of another end clamp connected to a part of the surgical apparatus, the end clamp holding the surgical cartridge with brackets and its stop member in the open position;

In FIG. 3 shows another cross-sectional side view of the end clamp of FIG. 2 in the closed position.

In FIG. 4 is another cross-sectional side view of the end clamp of FIG. 2 and 3 at the moment when the holder of the cutting element begins to advance through the end clamp.

In FIG. 5 is another cross-sectional side view of the end clamp of FIG. 2-4 with the holder of the cutting element passing through it.

In FIG. 6 is a perspective view of an alternative embodiment of a cartridge with brackets mounted in a surgical dissecting and stapling device;

In FIG. 7 is a top view of a surgical cartridge with brackets and an elongated channel of the device shown in FIG. 6.

In FIG. 8 is a top view of another embodiment of a surgical cartridge with brackets mounted in an elongated end clamp channel;

In FIG. 9 is a bottom view of a thrust member;

In FIG. 10 is a partial perspective view of a plurality of brackets forming part of a series of brackets;

In FIG. 11 is another partial perspective view of a series of brackets shown in FIG. 10, wherein the brackets are shown after being formed as a result of contact with the thrust element of a surgical dissecting and stapling device;

In FIG. 12 is a partial perspective view of an alternative embodiment of brackets forming part of another series of brackets;

In FIG. 13 is a partial perspective view of an alternative embodiment of brackets forming part of another series of brackets.

In FIG. 14 is a partial perspective view of an alternative embodiment of brackets forming part of another row of brackets of an embodiment of the present invention;

In FIG. 15 is a sectional view of an end clip holding a cartridge with brackets;

In FIG. 16 is a sectional view of a portion of the elongated channel of the end clamp of FIG. 15 after removing the body of the implantable cartridge with brackets and the brackets themselves;

In FIG. 17 is a cross-sectional view of an end clip holding another cartridge with brackets;

In FIG. 18A-18D is a diagram of a deformation of a surgical brace located inside a crushable cartridge body with brackets in accordance with at least one embodiment.

In FIG. 19A is a diagram showing a bracket arrangement inside a squeezable cartridge body with brackets.

In FIG. 19B is a diagram illustrating the compression by a stop member of a compressible cartridge body with brackets of FIG. 19A.

In FIG. 19C is a diagram showing further compression by a stop member of a squeezable cartridge body with brackets of FIG. 19A.

In FIG. 19D is a diagram showing a bracket with FIG. 19A in a fully formed configuration and a squeezable cartridge with brackets from FIG. 19A in a completely crushed state.

In FIG. 20 is a diagram showing the position of the brackets relative to the bearing surface of the cartridge with brackets and their potential mutual movement.

In FIG. 21 is a cross-sectional view of the bearing surface of the cartridge with brackets in which there is a groove (or trough) that is configured to stabilize the base of the bracket with FIG. twenty.

In FIG. 22 is a cross-sectional view of a bracket including an additional crown formed on top and a groove (or trough) for holding a portion of the crown in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment.

In FIG. 23, in accordance with at least one embodiment, a top view of a cartridge is shown with brackets with charged brackets placed in a creaseable cartridge case with brackets.

In FIG. 24 is a vertical projection of a cartridge with brackets of FIG. 23.

In FIG. 25, in accordance with at least one embodiment, a vertical projection of a bracketed cartridge is provided, comprising a protective layer surrounding the brackets inside the wrinkled cartridge body of the cartridge.

In FIG. 26 is a cross-sectional view of a cartridge with brackets of FIG. 25 (section along the line 26-26 in FIG. 25).

In FIG. 27, in accordance with at least one embodiment, is a vertical projection of a cartridge with brackets that extend at least partially outside the creaseable cartridge case with brackets and a protective layer surrounding the cartridge case with brackets.

In FIG. 28 is a cross-sectional view of the cartridge with brackets of FIG. 27 (section along the line 28-28 in FIG. 27).

In FIG. 29, in accordance with at least one embodiment, a partial perspective view of individual cartridge parts with brackets that are at least partially enclosed in a crushable cartridge case with brackets is provided, with the brackets at least partially immersed in a recess with brackets provided in the cartridge case with brackets.

In FIG. 30 is a cross-sectional view of a cartridge with brackets of FIG. 29 (section along the line 30-30 in FIG. 29).

In FIG. 31 is a partial perspective view of individual cartridge parts with brackets in accordance with at least one embodiment.

In FIG. 32, in accordance with at least one embodiment, a partial perspective view of individual cartridge parts with brackets that are at least partially enclosed in a creaseable cartridge housing with brackets, as well as an alignment matrix that connects the brackets and aligns them with each other, is presented.

In FIG. 33 is a cross-sectional view of a cartridge with brackets of FIG. 32 (section along line 33-33 of FIG. 32).

In FIG. 34 is a partial sectional view of the inner layer of a compressible cartridge body with brackets.

In FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an inner layer shown in FIG. 34, compressed between the transfer plate and the support plate;

In FIG. 36 is a diagram showing brackets inserted in a compressed inner layer in accordance with FIG. 35.

In FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a support plate of FIG. 35 withdrawn from the inner layer.

In FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a substructure consisting of an inner layer of FIG. 34 and the brackets of FIG. 36 passing through the outer layer.

In FIG. 39 is a diagram showing how the outer layer depicted in FIG. 38 is insulated to form a sealed cartridge with brackets.

In FIG. 40 is a cross-sectional view of a sealed cartridge with brackets of FIG. 39.

In FIG. 41 is a cross-sectional view of a cartridge with brackets and a channel for a cartridge with brackets in accordance with at least one embodiment.

In FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a portion of the cartridge with brackets of FIG. 41 in deformed form.

In FIG. 43 is a vertical projection of an end clamp of a surgical stapler comprising a stop member in an open position and a cartridge with brackets located inside the channel for the cartridge with brackets.

In FIG. 44 is a vertical projection of an end clip of FIG. 43, which shows the stop element in the closed position and the cartridge with brackets sandwiched between the stop element and the channel for the cartridge with brackets.

In FIG. 45 is a vertical projection of an end clip of FIG. 43, which shows a cartridge with brackets from FIG. 43, located alternatively inside the channel for the cartridge with brackets.

In FIG. 46 is a cross-sectional view of an end clamp of a surgical stapler with a compressible cartridge with brackets located inside the channel for the cartridge with brackets, and with additional supporting material attached to the abutment element.

In FIG. 47 is a cross-sectional view of an end clip of FIG. 46, in which the thrust member is depicted in the closed position.

In FIG. 48 is a cross-sectional view of an alternative embodiment of an end clamp of a surgical stapler comprising a cartridge with brackets and a waterproof layer.

In FIG. 49 is a cross-sectional view of another alternative embodiment of an end clamp of a surgical stapler.

In FIG. 50 is a cross-sectional view of an alternative embodiment of an end clamp of a surgical stapler comprising a stepped stop member and a cartridge with brackets, the housing of which also has a stepped shape.

In FIG. 51 is a cross-sectional view of another alternative embodiment of an end clamp of a surgical stapler.

In FIG. 52 is a cross-sectional view of an alternative embodiment of an end clamp of a surgical stapler with inclined surfaces in contact with body tissues.

In FIG. 53 is a cross-sectional view of another alternative embodiment of an end clamp of a surgical stapler with inclined surfaces in contact with body tissues.

In FIG. 54 is a cross-sectional view of an alternative embodiment of an end clamp of a surgical stapler comprising a support insert for holding a cartridge with brackets.

In FIG. 55 is a cross-sectional view of an alternative embodiment of an end clamp of a surgical stapler comprising a cartridge with brackets and several compressible layers.

In FIG. 56 is a cross-sectional view of an alternative embodiment of an end clamp of a surgical stapler comprising a cartridge with brackets, the compressible body of which has a stepped shape.

In FIG. 57 is a cross-sectional view of another alternative embodiment of an end clamp of a surgical stapler comprising a cartridge with brackets, the compressible body of which has a stepped shape.

In FIG. 58 is a cross-sectional view of an alternative embodiment of an end clamp of a surgical stapler comprising a cartridge with brackets in which surfaces in contact with body tissues are curved.

In FIG. 59 is a cross-sectional view of an alternative embodiment of an end clamp of a surgical stapler comprising a cartridge with brackets in which surfaces in contact with body tissues are oblique.

In FIG. 60 is a cross-sectional view of a compressible cartridge with brackets, within which there are brackets and at least one drug.

In FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a compressible cartridge of FIG. 60 after it was compressed and the brackets contained in it were deformed.

In FIG. 62 is a partial sectional view of individual cartridge parts with brackets in accordance with at least one embodiment.

In FIG. 63 is a cross-sectional view of a cartridge with brackets of FIG. 62.

In FIG. 64 is a perspective view of an implantable cartridge with brackets corresponding to at least one alternative embodiment.

In FIG. 65 is a cross-sectional view of an implantable cartridge with brackets of FIG. 64.

In FIG. 66 is a perspective view of an alternative embodiment of a cartridge with brackets, including deformable parts protruding outward from the outer layer of the cartridge body with brackets.

In FIG. 67 is a perspective view of an alternative embodiment of a cartridge with brackets, including an outer portion of the cartridge housing with brackets, attached to the inside.

In FIG. 68 is a cross-sectional view of an alternative embodiment of a cartridge with brackets with multiple brackets, a compressible layer and a layer of gaskets.

In FIG. 69 is a perspective view of the gasket layer of FIG. 68.

In FIG. 70 is a perspective view of a gasket separated from the gasket layer shown in FIG. 68, and brackets aligned with the groove in the gasket.

In FIG. 71 is a perspective view of two connected gaskets from the gasket layer of FIG. 68.

In FIG. 72 is a perspective view of the support frame of the gasket layer of FIG. 68 during the separation of the gaskets.

In FIG. 73 is a three-dimensional perspective view with details of individual components for an alternative embodiment of a compressible cartridge with brackets containing brackets and a system for moving brackets to the stop element.

In FIG. 73A is a sectional view of an alternative embodiment of a cartridge with brackets of FIG. 73.

In FIG. 74 is a cross-sectional view of a cartridge with brackets of FIG. 73.

In FIG. 75 is a vertical projection of a slide designed to move a cartridge with brackets from FIG. 73 and moving the brackets in the direction of the stop element.

In FIG. 76 is a schematic diagram of a bracket ejector that is raised by a slide from FIG. 75 in the direction of the thrust member.

In FIG. 77 is an illustration of individual cartridge parts with brackets in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment, where bracket ejectors are used to position the brackets.

In FIG. 78 is a cross-sectional view of a cartridge with brackets of FIG. 77 located in the channel for the cartridge with brackets.

In FIG. 79 is a cross-sectional view of a cartridge with brackets of FIG. 77, which shows a stop element in the closed position, and brackets inside the cartridge with brackets deformed due to contact with the stop element.

In FIG. 80 is a cross-sectional view of a cartridge with brackets of FIG. 77, which shows how the brackets move upward in the direction of the stop element.

In FIG. 81 is a perspective view of an alternative embodiment of a cartridge with brackets in which the flexible sides of the cartridge with brackets are connected by strips.

In FIG. 82 is a perspective view of a slide and a cutting member in an assembly.

In FIG. 83 is a diagram showing how the slide and the cutting member of FIG. 82 are used to raise the brackets from the cartridge with brackets shown in FIG. 77.

In FIG. 84 is a diagram showing a slide adapted to engage and raise the brackets, thereby moving them toward the stop member, and a locking system that allows the slide to be selectively moved in the distal direction.

In FIG. 85A-85C depict gradual entry of a bracket into a bracket crown.

In FIG. 86 is a cross-sectional view of a bracket cartridge equipped with a support tray or stopper.

In FIG. 87 is a partial cross-sectional view of a compressible cartridge with brackets in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment.

In FIG. 88 is a diagram showing a cartridge with brackets of FIG. 87 in the implanted state.

In FIG. 89 is a partial sectional view of a compressible cartridge with brackets in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment.

In FIG. 90 is a partial cross-sectional view of a cartridge with brackets of FIG. 89.

In FIG. 91 is a diagram showing a cartridge with brackets of FIG. 89 in the implanted state.

In FIG. 92 is a partial cross-sectional view of a squeezable cartridge with brackets in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment.

In FIG. 93 is a partial sectional view of a crease cartridge with brackets in accordance with at least one embodiment with a plurality of crease elements.

In FIG. 94 is a perspective view of a crease member of FIG. 93 uncompressed.

In FIG. 95 is a perspective view of a crease member with FIG. 94 in a compressed state.

In FIG. 96A is a partial cross-sectional view of an end clamp of a surgical stapler containing a jaw, a channel for the cartridge with brackets opposite the jaw, and a cartridge with brackets located in the channel for the cartridge with brackets, the jaw containing a holding matrix attached thereto;

In FIG. 96B is a partial cross-sectional view of the end clamp shown in FIG. 96A depicting a jaw transported to the cartridge channel with brackets, the cartridge with brackets being compressed by a stop element and a holding matrix, and the bracket passing at least partially through the fabric located between the holding matrix and the cartridge with brackets;

In FIG. 96C is a partial cross-sectional view of the end clamp shown in FIG. 96A depicting the jaw in the final position and holding the matrix in mesh with the bracket shown in FIG. 96B;

In FIG. 96D is a partial cross-sectional view of the end clamp shown in FIG. 96A depicting a jaw and channel for a cartridge with brackets moving from an implanted cartridge with brackets and a holding matrix;

In FIG. 97, in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment, is a perspective view of a holding hole of a holding matrix that comprises a plurality of holding elements configured to fix a leg of a stapling element therein;

In FIG. 98, in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment, is a perspective view of a holding hole of a holding matrix that comprises six holding elements;

In FIG. 99, in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment, is a perspective view of a holding hole of a holding matrix that comprises eight holding elements;

In FIG. 100, in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment, is a perspective view of a holding hole of a holding matrix that comprises a plurality of holding elements configured to fix a leg of a stapling element therein;

In FIG. 101, in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment, is a perspective view of a holding hole of a holding matrix that comprises six holding elements;

In FIG. 102, in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment, is a perspective view of a holding hole of a holding matrix that comprises eight holding elements;

In FIG. 103, in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment, is a perspective view of a holding hole of a holding matrix comprising a plurality of holding elements made by stamping from a metal sheet;

In FIG. 104, in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment, is a perspective view of a holding hole of a holding matrix that comprises a plurality of holes along the perimeter of the holding hole;

In FIG. 105 is a plan view of a holding hole of a holding matrix in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment;

In FIG. 106 is a plan view of a holding hole of a holding matrix in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment;

In FIG. 107 is a plan view of a holding hole of a holding matrix in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment;

In FIG. 108 is a plan view of a holding hole of a holding matrix in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment;

In FIG. 109 is a plan view of a holding hole of a holding matrix in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment;

In FIG. 110, in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment, is a plan view of a holding hole of a holding matrix comprising a holding tab extending into a holding hole;

In FIG. 111, in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment, is a plan view of a holding hole of a holding matrix comprising a holding tab extending into a holding hole;

In FIG. 112 is a perspective view of a crosslinking system consisting of a plurality of brackets, a holding matrix engaged with the brackets, and an alignment matrix for aligning the brackets;

In FIG. 113 is a perspective view of a holding matrix shown in FIG. 112;

In FIG. 114 is a perspective view of the alignment matrix shown in FIG. 112;

In FIG. 115 is a partial top view of a retaining matrix shown in FIG. 112, engaged with the brackets shown in FIG. 112;

In FIG. 116 is a partial bottom view of a holding matrix shown in FIG. 112, engaged with the brackets shown in FIG. 112;

In FIG. 117 is a partial elevational view of the crosslinking system shown in FIG. 112;

In FIG. 118 is a partial perspective view of the crosslinking system shown in FIG. 112;

In FIG. 119 is a partial cross-sectional view of a retaining matrix of FIG. 112 engaged with brackets shown in FIG. 112;

In FIG. 120 is a partial cross-sectional view of a crosslinking system of FIG. 112;

In FIG. 121 is a perspective view of a crosslinking system shown in FIG. 112, further comprising protective caps mounted on the legs of the brackets;

In FIG. 122 is a perspective view from below of the structure of the crosslinking system shown in FIG. 121;

In FIG. 123 is a partial perspective view of the structure of the crosslinking system shown in FIG. 121;

In FIG. 124 is a partial cross-sectional view of the structure of the crosslinking system of FIG. 121;

In FIG. 125, in accordance with at least one embodiment, is a side view of an end clip comprising a jaw in an open position holding a die, a plurality of protective caps located in a jaw, and a cartridge with brackets located in the channel for the cartridge with brackets;

In FIG. 126 is a perspective view of the end clip shown in FIG. 125, in the closed position.

In FIG. 127 is a perspective view of the end clip shown in FIG. 125, in the activated position.

In FIG. 128 is a perspective view of a holding matrix and protective caps shown in FIG. 125 mounted on the cartridge with brackets of FIG. 125;

In FIG. 129 is a detailed view of the structure of FIG. 128;

In FIG. 130 is a perspective view of an end clip of FIG. 125, depicting a jaw in an open position with a thinner fabric located between the holding matrix and the cartridge with brackets;

In FIG. 131 is a perspective view of the end clip shown in FIG. 125, depicting the jaw in the closed position close to the thinner fabric shown in FIG. 130;

In FIG. 132 is a perspective view of the end clip shown in FIG. 125, depicting a jaw in the activated position for gripping the thinner tissue shown in FIG. 130, between the holding matrix and the cartridge with brackets;

In FIG. 133 is a perspective view of the holding matrix and the protective caps shown in FIG. 125 mounted on the cartridge with brackets shown in FIG. 125, with the thin fabric interposed between them, shown in FIG. 130;

In FIG. 134 is a detailed view of the structure of FIG. 133;

In FIG. 135 is a cross-sectional view of a protective cap located on the tip of a bracket leg in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment;

In FIG. 136 is a perspective view of a plurality of protective caps immersed in a sheet of material;

In FIG. 137 is a perspective view of a jaw containing a plurality of recesses configured to hold a plurality of protective caps;

In FIG. 138 is a detailed view of a portion of a jaw including a sheet covering protective caps placed inside the jaw shown in FIG. 137;

In FIG. 139 is a cross-sectional view of a protective cap located on the tip of a bracket leg in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment in which the protective cap comprises an inner forming surface;

In FIG. 140 is another cross-sectional view of the protective cap shown in FIG. 139 depicting a bracket leg that deforms against a forming surface.

In FIG. 141 is a plan view of an alternative embodiment of a holding matrix comprising a plurality of related matrix elements;

In FIG. 142 is a plan view of an alternative embodiment of a holding matrix comprising a plurality of related matrix elements;

In FIG. 143 is a top view of an alternative embodiment of a holding matrix comprising a plurality of related matrix elements;

In FIG. 144 is a top view of an alternative embodiment of a plurality of retaining matrices comprising a plurality of related matrix elements;

In FIG. 145 is a top view of an alternative embodiment of a holding matrix comprising a plurality of related matrix elements;

In FIG. 146 is a partial exploded view of the components of a jaw containing a holding matrix, including a compressible coating;

In FIG. 147 is a detailed view of a holding matrix of FIG. 146;

In FIG. 148 is a partial cross-sectional view of a crosslinking system comprising a fixative matrix with a compressible layer and a series of cells containing one or more medications;

In FIG. 149 is a diagram showing the brace legs that pierced the cells shown in FIG. 148, as it engages with the holding matrix;

In FIG. 150 is a partial sectional view of a crosslinking system comprising a fixative matrix with a compressible layer;

In FIG. 151 is a perspective view of a cartridge insertion unit with crosslinking elements, comprising a holder, a first cartridge with crosslinking elements and a second cartridge with crosslinking elements;

In FIG. 152 is a perspective view of an end clamp of a surgical stapler comprising a first jaw and a second jaw, wherein the second jaw is shown in an open configuration;

In FIG. 153 is a perspective view of the end clip shown in FIG. 152 depicting a second jaw in a closed configuration and a cartridge insertion assembly with stapling elements shown in FIG. 151 used to load the first cartridge into the first jaw and the second cartridge into the second jaw;

In FIG. 154 is a perspective view of the charged end clip shown in FIG. 153 depicting a cartridge insertion assembly removed from an end clip, a second jaw in an open configuration, and tissue placed between the first jaw and the second jaw;

In FIG. 155 is a perspective view of a charged end clip shown in FIG. 154, in an actuated configuration;

In FIG. 156 is a perspective view of the first cartridge and the second cartridge in an implanted state;

In FIG. 157 is a perspective view of an end clip shown in FIG. 152 showing a portion of a first cartridge still engaged with a first jaw in accordance with at least one embodiment;

In FIG. 158 is a vertical view of a cartridge insertion unit with crosslinking elements, which comprises a holder, a first cartridge with crosslinking elements, and a second cartridge with crosslinking elements;

In FIG. 159 is a perspective view of a cartridge insertion unit with cross-linking elements shown in FIG. 158 and used to load the first cartridge into the first jaw of the end clamp and the second cartridge into the second jaw;

In FIG. 160 is a cross-sectional view of a charged end clip of FIG. 159;

In FIG. 161 is a perspective view of a surgical stapler comprising a lower jaw and an upper jaw in accordance with at least one embodiment of the invention, some portions of the stapler being removed;

In FIG. 162 is a perspective view of a surgical stapler shown in FIG. 161, with the upper jaw removed;

In FIG. 163 is a perspective view of a sliding stop member system of the upper jaw of a surgical stapler shown in FIG. 161 comprising a first sliding stop element and a second sliding stop element;

In FIG. 164 is an end view of a sliding stop element system of FIG. 163;

In FIG. 165 is a plan view of a sliding stop member system of FIG. 163;

In FIG. 166 is a diagram illustrating a sliding stop element system shown in FIG. 163, in an inactive state;

In FIG. 167 is a diagram showing a first sliding stop element of the sliding stop element system of FIG. 163, in the idle position, as well as brackets located in the lower jaw in the un-actuated position;

In FIG. 168 is a diagram showing the brackets in the lower jaw in the deployed configuration and the first sliding stop element shown in FIG. 167, advanced proximally to deform the first group of brace legs;

In FIG. 169 is a diagram showing a first group of brackets shown in FIG. 168 deformed to a fully deformed state;

In FIG. 170 is a diagram showing a second sliding stop element of the sliding stop element system shown in FIG. 163 pushed distally to deform the second group of legs of brackets;

In FIG. 171 is a partial perspective view of a thrust member, which in at least one embodiment comprises a plurality of molding recesses;

In FIG. 172 is an end view in cross section of a thrust member with FIG. 171;

In FIG. 173 is a diagram depicting a first step in the production of forming depressions shown in FIG. 171;

In FIG. 174 is a diagram depicting a second stage of production of forming depressions shown in FIG. 171;

In FIG. 175 is a plan view of an arrangement of forming recesses of a thrust member with FIG. 171;

In FIG. 176 is a diagram depicting a first step in the production of a thrust member;

In FIG. 177 is a diagram depicting a second production step with FIG. 176;

In FIG. 178 is a diagram depicting a third production step with FIG. 176;

In FIG. 179 is a perspective view of the left and front surgical stapling and dissecting apparatus with a handle including a lever automatic retraction mechanism and a ratchet manual retraction mechanism;
In FIG. 180 is a perspective view of the right and rear surgical dissecting and stapling apparatus shown in FIG. 179, in which a portion of the elongated shaft is cut off and the right half of the shell of the handle housing is removed to show an automatic post-launch retraction mechanism and a manual trigger retraction mechanism;
In FIG. 181 is a perspective view of the right and rear with a spatial separation of the components of the handle and the elongated shaft of the surgical stapling and dissecting apparatus shown in FIG. 179;

In FIG. 182 is a perspective view of the right and rear surgical stapling and dissecting apparatus of FIG. 31, in which the right half of the shell and the outer parts of the working part are removed to show the closing mechanism and the trigger mechanism in the initial state;
In FIG. 183 is a right side elevational view of a partially disassembled surgical stapler and dissecting apparatus shown in FIG. 182;

In FIG. 184 is a perspective view of the partially and partially disassembled surgical stapling and dissecting apparatus shown in FIG. 182, with a closing mechanism in a closed and pinched state, and a trigger mechanism with a side fuse that performs the first cycle, and with a retracted manual retraction mechanism to show the distal link of the connecting rail that triggers the automatic retraction of the trigger;

In FIG. 185 is a perspective view of the partially and partially disassembled surgical stapling and dissecting apparatus shown in FIG. 183, from which the trigger with the side fuse is disconnected, and in which the distal link approaches the automatic retraction;
In FIG. 186 is a left side elevational view of a partially disassembled surgical stapler and dissecting apparatus shown in FIG. 183, in the initial state, with an open end clamp and an activated reverse lock mechanism;

In FIG. 187 is a detailed left side view of the right half shell and the lever for releasing the reverse lock of the handle shown in FIG. 186;

In FIG. 188 is a detailed left side elevational view of the disassembled surgical stapler and dissecting apparatus shown in FIG. 179, on which the closing trigger is pinched, the trigger executes the final beat, and the distal link is in the gripping position for automatic retraction;

In FIG. 189 is a detailed left side elevational view of the disassembled surgical stapler and dissecting apparatus shown in FIG. 188, immediately after the distal link has activated and locked in the forward position the release lever of the reverse lock, making it possible to retract the connecting rail;
In FIG. 190 is a perspective view on the right with a spatial separation of the components of the intermediate and rear gears, the manual retraction lever, and the ratchet safety lock of the manual retraction of the surgical stapling and dissecting apparatus shown in FIG. 179;

In FIG. 191 is a perspective view on the right of the manual retraction mechanism shown in FIG. 190, with a partially retracted manual retraction lever, to show a smaller diameter ratchet gear located on the rear gear and engaging the ratchet mechanism fuse;

In FIG. 192 is a left side elevational view of a partially disassembled surgical stapler and dissecting apparatus shown in FIG. 179, with a backstop lock mechanism coupled to a fully actuated connecting rail that is disconnected from the combined tension / compression spring before actuating the manual retraction lever shown in FIG. 190;

In FIG. 193 is a left side elevational view of a partially disassembled surgical stapler and dissecting apparatus shown in FIG. 192, with hidden portions of the reverse lock release lever, rear gear and manual start lever shown in half section;

In FIG. 194 is a left side elevational view of a partially disassembled surgical stapler and dissecting apparatus shown in FIG. 193, after the actuation of the manual start lever caused a manual retraction of the connecting rail;

In FIG. 195 is a left side elevational view of a partially disassembled surgical stapler and dissecting apparatus shown in FIG. 194, with a missing connecting rail, showing a manual start lever detachable from a backstop;

In FIG. 196 is a detailed left side view of an alternative backstop release lever and handle body for a surgical stapler and dissecting apparatus of FIG. 179;

In FIG. 197 shows a perspective view from the left with a spatial separation of the components of the alternative lever release the reverse lock, the shaft of the rear gear and the cam circle of the automatic backward mechanism shown in FIG. 196;

In FIG. 198 is a right side elevational view of an alternative backstop release mechanism shown in FIG. 196, wherein the connecting rail is in a retracted position and the backstop release lever is located proximal to the backstop lock plate meshed with the starter rod;

In FIG. 198A is a detailed right side elevational view of the rear gear, the cam circle of the automatic retraction mechanism, and the most distal link shown in FIG. 198;

In FIG. 199 is a right side elevational view of the backstop release mechanism shown in FIG. 198, after the first start cycle;

In FIG. 199A is a detailed right side elevational view of the rear gear, the cam circle of the automatic retraction mechanism, and the second link shown in FIG. 199;

In FIG. 200 is a right side elevational view of the backstop release mechanism shown in FIG. 199, after the second start cycle;

In FIG. 200A is a detailed right side elevational view of the rear gear, the cam circle of the automatic retraction mechanism, and the third link shown in FIG. 200;

In FIG. 201 is a detailed right-side view in vertical projection of the backstop release mechanism shown in Figure 200 after the third and final start cycle;

In FIG. 201A is a detailed right side elevational view of the rear gear, the cam circle of the automatic retraction mechanism and the proximal fourth link shown in FIG. 201;

In FIG. 202 is a right side elevational view of the automatic release mechanism shown in FIG. 201, after the final start-up cycle caused the cam circle of the automatic retraction mechanism to slide back into the distal position and lock the release lever of the backstop by disconnecting the backstop;

In FIG. 203 is a perspective view of the left and front open brace overlay assembly with the right half of the replaceable cartridge with brackets included in the bracket groove;

In FIG. 204 is a perspective view with a spatial separation of the components of the overlay bracket shown in FIG. 203, with a fully assembled replacement cartridge with brackets and a non-articulated rod configuration;

In FIG. 205 is a perspective view of a two-component cutting element and a trigger rod (three-horned element) of the brace overlay assembly shown in FIG. 203;

In FIG. 206 is a perspective view of a wedge-shaped cartridge slide with brackets of the bracketing unit.

In FIG. 207 is a left side elevational view taken in longitudinal section along the center line 207-207 of the brace overlay assembly shown in FIG. 203.

In FIG. 208 is a perspective view of an open bracket overlay assembly shown in FIG. 203, without an interchangeable cartridge with brackets, with a portion of the gutter for the brackets located next to the middle pin of the two-component cutting element and the starting rod, and without a distal part of the gutter for the brackets.

In FIG. 209 is a front elevational view taken along section line 209-209 of the parenthesis overlay assembly shown in FIG. 203 showing internal ejectors of the brackets of the cartridge with brackets and parts of a two-component cutting element and a trigger rod;

In FIG. 210 is a left side elevational view made substantially along the longitudinal center line 207-207 of the closed brace overlay assembly shown in FIG. 203, to include central points of contact between the two-component cutting element and the wedge-shaped slides, but also with lateral displacement, to show the brackets and the pushers of brackets inside the cartridge with brackets;

In FIG. 211 is a detailed left side elevational view of the brace overlay assembly shown in FIG. 210, wherein the two-component cutting element is retracted slightly further than usual when replacing the cartridge with brackets;

In FIG. 212 is a detailed left side elevational view of the parenthesis overlay assembly shown in FIG. 211, where a two-component scalpel begins to be actuated, in accordance with the configuration shown in FIG. 210;

In FIG. 213 is a left side elevational cross-sectional view of the closed brace overlay assembly shown in FIG. 210, after the actuation of the two-component cutting element and the launch rod in the distal direction;
In FIG. 214 is a left side elevational cross-sectional view of the closed brace overlay assembly shown in FIG. 213, after activating the cartridge with brackets and retracting the two-component cutting element;

In FIG. 215 is a detailed left side elevational sectional view of the parenthesis overlay assembly shown in FIG. 214, where the two-component cutting element is given the opportunity to move to the locked position;

In FIG. 216 is a perspective view of a cartridge with brackets comprising a rigid support portion and a compressible tissue thickness compensator for use with a surgical stapler in accordance with at least one embodiment of the present invention;

In FIG. 217 is a partially exploded view of the components of the cartridge with brackets shown in FIG. 216;

In FIG. 218 is a view with a complete spatial separation of the components of the cartridge with brackets shown in FIG. 216;

In FIG. 219 is another view of the spatially separated components of the cartridge with brackets shown in FIG. 216, without a sheath covering a tissue thickness compensator;

In FIG. 220 is a perspective view of a housing, or support portion, of a cartridge with brackets shown in FIG. 216;

In FIG. 221 is a top perspective view of a slide arranged to move within the cartridge with brackets shown in FIG. 216, for placing brackets from a cartridge with brackets;

In FIG. 222 is a perspective view from below of the slide shown in FIG. 221;

In FIG. 223 is a perspective view of the slide shown in FIG. 221;

In FIG. 224 is a perspective view from above of an ejector configured to hold one or more brackets and to be lifted up using the slide shown in FIG. 221, for pushing the brackets out of the cartridge with brackets;

In FIG. 225 is a perspective view from below of the ejector shown in FIG. 224;

In FIG. 226 illustrates a shell configured to at least partially surround a compressible tissue thickness compensator of a cartridge fabric with brackets;

In FIG. 227 is a partial partial cross-sectional view of a cartridge with brackets comprising a rigid support portion and a compressible tissue thickness compensator, showing brackets moving during the first sequence of actions from an inactive position to an activated position;

In FIG. 228 is a vertical projection of a cartridge with brackets of FIG. 227.

In FIG. 229 is a detailed perspective view of a bracketed cartridge shown in FIG. 227;

In FIG. 230 is an end view in cross section of a cartridge with brackets shown in FIG. 227;

In FIG. 231 is a bottom view of a cartridge with brackets shown in FIG. 227;

In FIG. 232 is a detailed bottom view of the cartridge with brackets shown in FIG. 227;

In FIG. 233 is a longitudinal sectional view of a thrust member in a closed position and a cartridge with brackets containing a rigid support portion and a compressible tissue thickness compensator, showing brackets moving during the first sequence of actions from an inactive position to an activated position;

In FIG. 234 is another cross-sectional view of a thrust member and a cartridge with brackets shown in FIG. 233, with the image of the thrust element in the open position after the completion of the starting sequence;

In FIG. 235 is a partial detailed view of the cartridge with brackets shown in FIG. 233, depicting brackets in an inactive position;

In FIG. 236 is a vertical sectional view of a cartridge with brackets comprising a rigid support portion and a compressible tissue thickness compensator, showing brackets in an inactive position;

In FIG. 237 is a detailed view of a cartridge with brackets from FIG. 236;

In FIG. 238 is a perspective view of a thrust member in an open position and a cartridge with brackets comprising a rigid support portion and a compressible tissue thickness compensator, showing brackets in an inactive position;

In FIG. 239 is a perspective view of a stop member in a closed position and a cartridge with brackets containing a rigid support portion and a compressible tissue thickness compensator, showing brackets in an inactive position and a tissue sandwiched between the stop member and the tissue thickness compensator;

In FIG. 240 is a detailed view of the stop member and the cartridge with brackets of FIG. 239;

In FIG. 241 is a vertical projection view of a stop member in a closed position and a cartridge with brackets containing a rigid support portion and a compressible tissue thickness compensator, showing brackets in an inactive position and a thicker cloth located between the stop member and the cartridge with brackets;

In FIG. 242 is a detailed view of the thrust member and cartridge with brackets of FIG. 241;

In FIG. 243 is a perspective view of a thrust member and cartridge with brackets shown in FIG. 241, depicting a fabric of different thicknesses, located between the stop element and the cartridge with brackets;

In FIG. 244 presents a detailed thrust member and cartridge with brackets shown in FIG. 241, as presented in FIG. 243;

In FIG. 245 is a diagram showing a tissue thickness compensator that compensates for different tissue thicknesses clamped by different brackets;

In FIG. 246 is a diagram showing a tissue thickness compensator applying a compressive force to one or more vessels dissected by a series of brackets;

In FIG. 247 is a diagram showing a situation in which one or more brackets are not formed correctly;

In FIG. 248 is a diagram showing a tissue thickness compensator capable of compensating for malformed brackets;

In FIG. 249 is a diagram showing a tissue thickness compensator located in a tissue site in which a plurality of rows of brackets intersect;

In FIG. 250 is a diagram depicting tissue captured by a bracket;

In FIG. 251 is a diagram showing a fabric and a tissue thickness compensator captured by a bracket;

In FIG. 252 is a diagram depicting tissue captured by a bracket;

In FIG. 253 is a diagram showing thick tissue and a tissue thickness compensator captured by a bracket;

In FIG. 254 is a diagram depicting thin tissue and a tissue thickness compensator captured by a bracket;

In FIG. 255 is a diagram showing an intermediate thickness fabric and a tissue thickness compensator captured by a bracket;

In FIG. 256 is a diagram showing a fabric of a different intermediate thickness and a tissue thickness compensator captured by a bracket;

In FIG. 257 is a diagram showing thick tissue and a tissue thickness compensator captured by a bracket;

In FIG. 258 is a partial cross-sectional view of an end clamp of a surgical stapler depicting a launch rod and a slide for actuating the brackets in a retracted, inactive position;

In FIG. 259 shows another partial cross-sectional view of the end clamp shown in FIG. 258 depicting a launch rod and a slide for activating brackets in a partially extended position;

In FIG. 260 is a cross-sectional view of the end clamp shown in FIG. 258 depicting a launch rod in a fully extended, or activated, position;

In FIG. 261 is a cross-sectional view of the end clamp shown in FIG. 258, depicting the launch rod in the position retracted after activation and the slide for activating the brackets remaining in the fully activated position;

In FIG. 262 is a detailed view of the launch rod in the retracted position shown in FIG. 261;

In FIG. 263 is a partial cross-sectional view of an end clamp of a surgical stapler including a cartridge with brackets comprising a tissue thickness compensator and brackets at least partially located within it;

In FIG. 264 is another partial cross-sectional view of the end clamp shown in FIG. 263 depicting brackets at least partially displaced and / or rotated relative to a stop member located opposite the cartridge with brackets;

In FIG. 265 is a partial cross-sectional view of an end clamp of a surgical stapler in accordance with at least one embodiment;

In FIG. 266 is a partial cross-sectional view of an end clamp in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment;

In FIG. 267 is a partial cross-sectional view of an end clamp in accordance with another alternative embodiment;

In FIG. 268 is a perspective view of an end clamp of a surgical stapler in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment;

In FIG. 269 is a partial cross-sectional view of the end clamp shown in FIG. 268, in a bent state;

In FIG. 270 is a partial sectional view of the end clamp shown in FIG. 269, in an exempted state;

In FIG. 271 is a perspective view of an end clip containing a nose piece of tissue thickness compensator;

In FIG. 272 is a perspective view from the rear of the nose element of the tissue thickness compensator shown in FIG. 271;

In FIG. 273 is a perspective view of an end clamp comprising a plurality of rail ejectors extending from a support portion, and a tissue thickness compensator comprising a longitudinal cavity;

In FIG. 274 is a perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator with FIG. 273;

In FIG. 275 is a perspective view of an end clamp comprising a plurality of teeth extending from a support portion and a tissue thickness compensator engaged with them;

In FIG. 276 is a perspective view of a thrust member comprising a plurality of recesses in accordance with at least one embodiment;

In FIG. 277 is a partial detailed view of a thrust member shown in FIG. 276;

In FIG. 278 is a partial longitudinal sectional view of the thrust member shown in FIG. 276;

In FIG. 279 is a cross-sectional view of a thrust member shown in FIG. 276;

In FIG. 280 is a perspective view of an actuated bracket having a substantially B-shaped configuration;

In FIG. 281 is a perspective view of a powered bracket, one leg of which is deformed inward and one leg is deformed outward;

In FIG. 282 is a perspective view of a powered bracket, both legs of which are bent outward;

In FIG. 283 is a partial perspective view of a support portion of a cartridge with brackets comprising detachable and / or replaceable ejector legs of brackets;

In FIG. 284 is a partial cross-sectional view of the cartridge with brackets shown in FIG. 283, after placing brackets from the cartridge with brackets;

In FIG. 285 is a detailed sectional view shown in FIG. 284, after activating the cartridge with brackets;

In FIG. 286 is an exploded view of the components of a cartridge with brackets including a tissue thickness compensator comprising voids formed therein;

In FIG. 287 is a diagram showing a tissue thickness compensator shown in FIG. 286 implanted close to the tissue;

In FIG. 288 is another diagram illustrating a tissue thickness compensator shown in FIG. 286 implanted close to the tissue;

In FIG. 289 is a perspective view in cross section of a cartridge with brackets containing lateral retaining elements extending from its supporting part, configured to hold the tissue thickness compensator in a desired position;

In FIG. 290 is a cross-sectional view of a cartridge with brackets shown in FIG. 289, which is used for stitching tissue;

In FIG. 291 is another cross-sectional view of the cartridge with brackets shown in FIG. 289 depicting a support portion separated from an implanted tissue thickness compensator;

In FIG. 292 is a perspective cross-sectional view of a cartridge with brackets containing lateral retaining elements configured to hold a tissue thickness compensator on a support portion;

In FIG. 293 is a cross-sectional view of a cartridge with brackets shown in FIG. 292, which is used for stitching tissue;

In FIG. 294 is another cross-sectional view of the cartridge with brackets shown in FIG. 292 depicting a support portion separated from an implanted tissue thickness compensator;

In FIG. 295 is a detailed sectional view of a holding member that holds a tissue thickness compensator on a support portion of a cartridge with brackets in accordance with at least one embodiment;

In FIG. 296 is a partial cross-sectional view of a cartridge with brackets containing ejector brackets having different heights in accordance with at least one embodiment;

In FIG. 296A is a diagram showing the ejector brackets shown in FIG. 296, and brackets held thereon having different heights in an inactive state;

In FIG. 297 is a diagram showing a tissue thickness compensator having different thicknesses, ejector brackets having different heights, and brackets having different heights in an unformed state;

In FIG. 298 is a diagram showing brackets and a tissue thickness compensator implanted in a tissue, shown in FIG. 297;

In FIG. 299 is a partial cross-sectional view of a bracketed cartridge containing a tissue thickness compensator having different thicknesses in accordance with at least one embodiment;

In FIG. 300 is a cross-sectional view of an end clamp of a surgical stapler in an open configuration;

In FIG. 301 is a sectional view of the end clamp shown in FIG. 300, in a partially activated configuration;

In FIG. 302 is a cross-sectional view of the end clamp shown in FIG. 300, in a reopened configuration;

In FIG. 303 is a cross-sectional view of an end clamp of a surgical stapler comprising ejector brackets having different heights and a contoured panel surface in accordance with at least one embodiment.

In FIG. 304 is a cross-sectional view of an end clamp of a surgical stapler comprising ejector brackets having different heights and a stepped panel surface in accordance with at least one embodiment;

In FIG. 305 is a perspective view of a cartridge with brackets placed in an end clamp of a surgical stapling instrument that uses a cartridge applicator with brackets;

In FIG. 306 is a perspective view from below of the applicator of the cartridge with brackets shown in FIG. 305;

In FIG. 307 is a side view of the cartridge applicator with brackets shown in FIG. 305, complete with cartridge with brackets;

In FIG. 308 is a sectional view of the assembly of FIG. 307;

In FIG. 309 is a perspective view of a cartridge applicator assembly with brackets, further including an upper tissue thickness compensator located on an upper surface of the cartridge applicator with brackets in accordance with at least one embodiment;

In FIG. 310 is an exploded view of the components of the upper tissue thickness compensator and the cartridge applicator with brackets shown in FIG. 309;

In FIG. 310A is an exploded view of the components of a cartridge applicator assembly with brackets comprising a push member configured to detach an upper tissue thickness compensator adherently attached to the cartridge applicator with brackets;

In FIG. 311 is a partial exploded view of components of a cartridge applicator assembly with brackets in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment;

In FIG. 312 is a perspective view of an applicator assembly of a cartridge with brackets containing an upper tissue thickness compensator including a plurality of retaining elements extending from it, and a cartridge with brackets containing a lower tissue thickness compensator;

In FIG. 313 is a perspective view of the cartridge applicator assembly with brackets shown in FIG. 312, located inside the channel for the cartridge with brackets, and a stop element that is closed on the node of the applicator of the cartridge with brackets;

In FIG. 314 is a perspective view of the thrust member shown in FIG. 313, in the re-opened position, and the bracket applicator of the cartridge shown in FIG. 312 removed from the end clamp;

In FIG. 314A is a cross-sectional view of a fabric located between the upper fabric thickness compensator and the lower fabric thickness compensator shown in FIG. 312;

In FIG. 314B is a sectional view showing an upper tissue thickness compensator and a lower tissue thickness compensator sewn to the fabric and dissected by a cutting member;

In FIG. 315 is a diagram showing a tissue thickness compensator inserted in a thrust member in accordance with at least one embodiment;

In FIG. 316 is a cross-sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator shown in FIG. 315;

In FIG. 317 is an exploded view of components of a tissue thickness compensator and a thrust member a in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment;

In FIG. 318 is a perspective view of a cartridge applicator assembly with brackets comprising an upper tissue thickness compensator configured to attach to a thrust member in accordance with at least one embodiment;

In FIG. 319 is a perspective view of the cartridge applicator assembly with brackets shown in FIG. 318, located inside the channel for the cartridge with brackets, and a thrust element moving to the upper compensator for the thickness of the fabric;

In FIG. 320 shows the cartridge applicator with brackets shown in FIG. 318, removed from the end clamp after engaging the upper tissue thickness compensator with the stop member;

In FIG. 321 is an end view in cross section of a thrust member movable to the upper tissue thickness compensator shown in FIG. 318;

In FIG. 322 is an end view in section of a thrust member meshed with an upper tissue thickness compensator;

In FIG. 323 is a cross-sectional view of an end clamp of a surgical stapler comprising a cartridge with brackets including a segmentable tissue thickness compensator attached to a supporting portion of the cartridge with brackets using a plurality of fasteners;

In FIG. 324 is a cross-sectional view of the end clamp shown in FIG. 323 depicting a trigger element in a partially activated position;

In FIG. 325 is a sectional view of the end clamp shown in FIG. 323 depicting a support portion movable from a partially implanted tissue thickness compensator;

In FIG. 326 is a partial perspective view of the support portion shown in FIG. 323;

In FIG. 327 is a perspective view of a slide for mounting brackets in accordance with at least one embodiment;

In FIG. 328 is a perspective view of the slide shown in FIG. 327;

In FIG. 329 is a perspective view of an end clamp of a surgical stapler comprising a cartridge with brackets including a tissue thickness compensator and a plurality of bracket ejectors located on the tissue thickness compensator.

In FIG. 330 is a partial sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator and ejector brackets shown in FIG. 329, in an inactive configuration;

In FIG. 331 is a partial sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator and ejector brackets shown in FIG. 329, in the activated configuration;

In FIG. 332 is a sectional view of a cartridge with brackets comprising a tissue thickness compensator and a support portion in accordance with at least one embodiment;

In FIG. 333 is a partial sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator, a bracket ejector layer, and a bracket in an inactive position in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment;

In FIG. 334 is a partial cross-sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator, a bracket ejector layer, and a bracket in an inactive position in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment;

In FIG. 335 is a partial sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator, a bracket ejector layer, and a bracket in an inactive position in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment;

In FIG. 336 is a partial cross-sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator, a layer of ejector brackets, and a bracket in an inactive position in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment;

In FIG. 337 is a partial cross-sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator, a bracket ejector layer, and a bracket in an inactive position in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment;

In FIG. 338 is a partial cross-sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator, a bracket ejector layer, and a bracket in an inactive position in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment;

In FIG. 339 is a partial cross-sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator, a bracket ejector layer, and a bracket in an inactive position in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment;

In FIG. 340 is a detailed view of the portion surrounding the tip of the bracket shown in FIG. 339;

In FIG. 341 is a partial sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator, a bracket ejector layer, and a bracket in an inactive position in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment;

In FIG. 342 is a detailed view of the portion surrounding the tip of the bracket shown in FIG. 341;

In FIG. 343 is a partial cross-sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator, a bracket ejector layer, and a bracket in an inactive position in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment

In FIG. 344 is a perspective view of a bracket ejector layer and a plurality of brackets in an inactive position in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment;

In FIG. 345 is an end view of a tissue thickness compensator configured to be used with a circular surgical stapler in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment;

In FIG. 346 is a perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator and a circular surgical stapler shown in FIG. 345;

In FIG. 347 is an end view of a tissue thickness compensator configured to be used with a circular surgical stapler in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment;

In FIG. 348 is a perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator and a circular surgical stapler shown in FIG. 347;

In FIG. 349 is an end view of a tissue thickness compensator configured to be used with a circular surgical stapler;

In FIG. 350 is an end view of the tissue thickness compensator shown in FIG. 349, in a partially disassembled configuration;

In FIG. 351 is a perspective view of a surgical stapler comprising a cartridge with brackets in accordance with at least one embodiment;

In FIG. 352 is an end view of a surgical stapler shown in FIG. 351 located relative to the fabric;

In FIG. 353 is an end view of the surgical stapler shown in FIG. 351, further comprising a tissue thickness compensator located between the staple cartridge and the fabric;

In FIG. 354 is a partial perspective view of brackets mounted in tissue using the surgical stapler shown in FIG. 351, without compensator for tissue thickness;

In FIG. 355 is a partial perspective view of brackets mounted in tissue using the surgical stapler shown in FIG. 351, with compensator for tissue thickness;

In FIG. 356 is a partial cross-sectional view of an end clamp of a surgical stapler shown in FIG. 351 comprising a thrust member in a first position;

In FIG. 357 is a partial cross-sectional view of an end clamp of a surgical stapler shown in FIG. 351 comprising a thrust member in a second position;

In FIG. 358 is a cross-sectional view of an end clamp of a surgical stapler comprising a cartridge with brackets comprising an element for forming a gap;

In FIG. 359 is a perspective view showing a starting element dissecting a gap forming element shown in FIG. 358, at the end of the start cycle of the starting element;

In FIG. 360 is a cross-sectional view of an end clamp of a surgical stapler comprising a cartridge with brackets comprising a flexible nose;

In FIG. 361 is a cross-sectional view of the end clamp shown in FIG. 360 depicting a bow in a bent configuration;

In FIG. 362 is a cross-sectional view of an end clamp of a surgical stapler comprising a cartridge with brackets comprising a sliding portion;

In FIG. 363 is a cross-sectional view of the end clamp shown in FIG. 362 depicting a sliding portion in distal sliding;

In FIG. 364 is a cross-sectional view of an end clamp of a surgical stapler comprising a support portion comprising an inclined surface of a panel and a tissue thickness compensator having a different thickness;

In FIG. 365 is a cross-sectional view of an end clamp of a surgical stapler comprising a support portion comprising an inclined surface of a panel and a tissue thickness compensator having a uniform thickness;

In FIG. 366 is a perspective view of a cartridge with brackets comprising a tissue thickness compensator having a different thickness;

In FIG. 367 is an end view in section of a cartridge with brackets shown in FIG. 366;

In FIG. 368 is a perspective view in cross section of a tissue thickness compensator comprising longitudinal layers;

In FIG. 369 is a perspective sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator comprising a plurality of layers in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment;

In FIG. 370 is a perspective view of a disposable loading device comprising holding elements configured to detachably hold a tissue thickness compensator;

In FIG. 371 is a perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator comprising retaining elements configured to detachably hold a tissue thickness compensator on a disposable loading device;

In FIG. 372 is a perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator shown in FIG. 371 attached to a disposable boot device;

In FIG. 373 is an end view of a disposable loading device shown in FIG. 372;

In FIG. 374 is a perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator comprising retaining elements configured to detachably hold a tissue thickness compensator on a disposable loading device;

In FIG. 375 is a perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator shown in FIG. 374 attached to a disposable boot device;

In FIG. 376 is an end view of a disposable loading device shown in FIG. 375;

In FIG. 377 is a perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator comprising retaining elements configured to detachably hold a tissue thickness compensator on a disposable loading device;

In FIG. 378 is a perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator shown in FIG. 377 attached to a disposable boot device;

In FIG. 379 is a perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator applicator located inside a clip of a disposable loading device;

In FIG. 380 is a perspective view from above of a tissue thickness compensator applicator shown in FIG. 379;

In FIG. 381 is a perspective view from below of the tissue thickness compensator applicator shown in FIG. 379;

In FIG. 382 is a perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator applicator located inside a clamp of a disposable loading device in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment;

In FIG. 383 is a top perspective view of the tissue thickness compensator applicator shown in FIG. 382;

In FIG. 384 is a perspective view from below of the tissue thickness compensator applicator shown in FIG. 382;

In FIG. 385 is a perspective view of a disposable loading device comprising a jaw configured to rotate and hold a cartridge with brackets;

In FIG. 386 is a cross-sectional view of a cartridge with brackets comprising a tissue thickness compensator attached to a support portion of the cartridge with brackets in accordance with at least one embodiment;

In FIG. 387 is a cross-sectional view of a cartridge with brackets comprising a tissue thickness compensator attached to a support portion of the cartridge with brackets in accordance with at least one embodiment;

In FIG. 388 is a cross-sectional view of a cartridge with brackets comprising a tissue thickness compensator attached to a support portion of the cartridge with brackets in accordance with at least one embodiment;

In FIG. 389 is a perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator shown in FIG. 387;

In FIG. 390 is a perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator in an end clamp of a surgical apparatus in accordance with at least one embodiment;

In FIG. 391 is a detailed view of the nonwoven fabric thickness compensator shown in FIG. 390;

In FIG. 392 is a perspective view showing a tissue thickness compensator shown in FIG. 390 implanted close to the tissue and released from the end clamp;

In FIG. 393 is a detailed view of a nonwoven fabric thickness compensator in accordance with at least one embodiment;

In FIG. 394 is a schematic illustration of clusters of crimped fibers arranged randomly in accordance with at least one embodiment;

In FIG. 395 is a schematic illustration of a cluster of crimped fibers arranged randomly in accordance with at least one embodiment;

In FIG. 396 is a schematic illustration of an arrangement of crimped fibers in accordance with at least one embodiment;

In FIG. 397 is a schematic illustration of an arrangement of crimped fibers in accordance with at least one embodiment;

In FIG. 398 is a schematic illustration of an arrangement of crimped fibers in accordance with at least one embodiment;

In FIG. 399 is a horizontal sectional view of spiral fibers in a tissue thickness compensator in accordance with at least one embodiment;

In FIG. 399A is a horizontal sectional view of the spiral fibers shown in FIG. 399;

In FIG. 399B is a detailed sectional view of the tissue thickness compensator shown in FIG. 399;

In FIG. 400 is a perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator in an end clamp of a surgical apparatus in accordance with at least one embodiment;

In FIG. 401 is a diagram depicting the deformation of a tissue thickness compensator with FIG. 400;

In FIG. 402 is a schematic representation of a braided thread for a fabric thickness compensator showing a braided thread in a loaded state in accordance with at least one embodiment;

In FIG. 403 is a schematic representation of a braided yarn shown in FIG. 402 showing a braided thread in a released state;

In FIG. 404 is a perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator comprising a braided yarn of FIG. 402, in the end clamp of the surgical apparatus;

In FIG. 405 is a perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator in an end clamp of a surgical apparatus in accordance with at least one embodiment;

In FIG. 406 is a partial horizontal view of the tissue thickness compensator shown in FIG. 405;

In FIG. 407 is an exploded view of a cartridge with stitching elements in an end clamp assembly and a tissue thickness compensator shown in FIG. 390;

In FIG. 408 is a partial cross-sectional view of a cartridge with cross-linking elements in the assembly of FIG. 407 depicting inactive, partially activated and activated crosslinking elements;

In FIG. 409 is a perspective view of a cartridge with cross-linking elements in the assembly of FIG. 407 depicting an ejector actuating crosslinking elements from cavities for cartridge brackets with crosslinking elements in an assembly in the direction of the tissue thickness compensator;

In FIG. 410 is a detailed view of a cartridge with cross-linking elements in the assembly of FIG. 409;

In FIG. 411 is a perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator shown in FIG. 390, and tissue captured by activated cross-linking elements;

In FIG. 412 is a perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator shown in FIG. 390, and tissue captured by activated cross-linking elements;

In FIG. 413 is a perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator in an end clamp of a surgical apparatus in accordance with at least one embodiment;

In FIG. 414 is a diagram depicting the deformation of a deformable tube of a tissue thickness compensator shown in FIG. 413;

In FIG. 415 is a detailed view of a deformable tube of a tissue thickness compensator shown in FIG. 413;

In FIG. 416 is a diagram showing the deformation of a deformable tube of a tissue thickness compensator in accordance with at least one embodiment;

In FIG. 417 is a perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator comprising a tubular member implantable close to the tissue in accordance with at least one embodiment;

In FIG. 418 is a perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator comprising tubular elements implantable close to the tissue in accordance with at least one embodiment;

In FIG. 419 is a partial perspective view of a deformable tube comprising a tube sheet in accordance with at least one embodiment;

In FIG. 420 is a perspective view of a tubular conductor of a deformable tube shown in FIG. 419.

In FIG. 421 is a perspective view of a deformable tube shown in FIG. 419;

In FIG. 422 is a perspective view of a plurality of tubular conductors for a deformable tube shown in FIG. 419, in accordance with various embodiments;

In FIG. 423 is a perspective view of the tubular lattice shown in FIG. 419 and implanted close to the tissue;

In FIG. 424 is a partial perspective view of a deformable tube in accordance with at least one embodiment;

In FIG. 425 is a partial perspective view of a deformable tube in accordance with at least one embodiment;

In FIG. 426 is a partial perspective view of a deformable tube in accordance with at least one embodiment;

In FIG. 427 is a perspective view of a deformable tube shown in FIG. 426;

In FIG. 428 is a partial perspective view of a deformable tube in accordance with at least one embodiment;

In FIG. 429 is a partial perspective view of a deformable tube in accordance with at least one embodiment;

In FIG. 430 is a partial perspective view of a deformable tube in accordance with at least one embodiment;

In FIG. 431 is a perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator installed in an end clamp of a surgical apparatus in accordance with at least one embodiment;

In FIG. 432 is a perspective view of a tubular member of a tissue thickness compensator shown in FIG. 431;

In FIG. 433 is a perspective view of a sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator and end clamp shown in FIG. 431 depicting an end clip in an expanded configuration;

In FIG. 434 is a perspective view of a sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator and end clip shown in FIG. 431 depicting an end clamp in a closed and activated configuration;

In FIG. 435 is a vertical cross-sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator installed in an end clamp of a surgical apparatus in accordance with at least one embodiment;

In FIG. 436 is a perspective view of a sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator and end clamp shown in FIG. 435 depicting an end clamp in a closed and activated configuration;

In FIG. 437 is a vertical sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator in an end clamp of a surgical apparatus in accordance with at least one embodiment;

In FIG. 438 is a vertical cross-sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator installed in an end clamp of a surgical apparatus in accordance with at least one embodiment;

In FIG. 439 is a perspective view of a sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator and end clip shown in FIG. 438 depicting an end clamp in a closed and activated configuration;

In FIG. 440 is a perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator installed in an end clamp of a surgical apparatus in accordance with at least one embodiment;

In FIG. 441 is a vertical cross-sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator installed in an end clamp of a surgical apparatus in accordance with at least one embodiment;

In FIG. 442 is a vertical sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator installed in an end clamp of a surgical apparatus in accordance with at least one embodiment;

In FIG. 443 is a vertical cross-sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator installed in an end clamp of a surgical apparatus in accordance with at least one embodiment;

In FIG. 444 is a vertical sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator installed in an end clamp of a surgical apparatus in accordance with at least one embodiment;

In FIG. 445 is a partial horizontal view of a tissue thickness compensator installed in an end clamp of a surgical apparatus in accordance with at least one embodiment;

In FIG. 446 is a partial horizontal view of a tissue thickness compensator installed in an end clamp of a surgical apparatus in accordance with at least one embodiment;

In FIG. 447 is a partial elevational view of a sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator and end clamp shown in FIG. 445 depicting an end clip in an expanded configuration;

In FIG. 448 is a partial vertical sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator and end clamp shown in FIG. 445 depicting an end clamp in a closed configuration;

In FIG. 449 is a perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator and end clamp of a surgical apparatus in accordance with at least one embodiment;

In FIG. 450 is a perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator and end clamp shown in FIG. 449;

In FIG. 451 is a perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator and end clamp shown in FIG. 449, depicting the stop element of the end clamp when it is moved to the closed configuration;

In FIG. 452 is a perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator and end clamp shown in FIG. 449 depicting an end clamp in a closed configuration;

In FIG. 453 is a vertical sectional view of the tubular elements of the tissue thickness compensator shown in FIG. 449, in an undeformed configuration;

In FIG. 454 is a perspective view of a sectional view of the tubular elements of the tissue thickness compensator shown in FIG. 449, in a deformed configuration;

In FIG. 455 is a perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator in an end clamp of a surgical apparatus in accordance with at least one embodiment;

In FIG. 456 is a perspective view of a sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator and end clamp shown in FIG. 455 depicting an end clamp in a closed configuration;

In FIG. 457 is a perspective view of a sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator and end clamp shown in FIG. 455 depicting an end clamp in an activated and partially uncompressed configuration;

In FIG. 458 is a perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator installed in an end clamp of a surgical apparatus in accordance with at least one embodiment;

In FIG. 459 is a vertical sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator attached to a thrust member of an end clamp of a surgical apparatus in accordance with at least one embodiment;

In FIG. 460 is a perspective view of a sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator and end clamp shown in FIG. 459 depicting an end clamp in a closed configuration;

In FIG. 461 is a perspective view of a sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator and end clip shown in FIG. 459 depicting an end clip in an activated and partially uncompressed configuration;

In FIG. 462 is a detailed view of the tissue thickness compensator and end clamp shown in FIG. 461;

In FIG. 463 is a vertical sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator sandwiched in an end clamp of a surgical apparatus, depicting placement of brackets with a slide to activate brackets in accordance with at least one embodiment;

In FIG. 464 is a perspective view of a sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator and end clip shown in FIG. 463 depicting an end clamp in a closed configuration;

In FIG. 465 is a perspective view of a sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator and end clamp shown in FIG. 463 showing an end clip in an activated configuration;

In FIG. 466 is a perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator and end clamp of a surgical apparatus in accordance with at least one embodiment;

In FIG. 467 is a perspective view of a tubular member of a tissue thickness compensator shown in FIG. 466;

In FIG. 468 is a perspective view of the tubular member shown in FIG. 467 and dissected between the first and second end;

In FIG. 469 is a perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator shown in FIG. 466 depicting a cutting element dissecting a tissue thickness compensator, and brackets engaged with a tissue thickness compensator;

In FIG. 470 is a perspective view of a carcass configured to create a tissue thickness compensator shown in FIG. 466, in accordance with at least one embodiment;

In FIG. 471 is a perspective view of a sectional view of the carcass shown in FIG. 470, depicting curing on the frame of the fabric thickness compensator shown in FIG. 466;

In FIG. 472 is a perspective view of a sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator removed from the framework shown in FIG. 471, and prepared for processing with at least one cutting tool;

In FIG. 473 is a perspective view of a sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator shown in FIG. 472, after processing the tissue thickness compensator with at least one cutting tool;

In FIG. 474 is a perspective view of a sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator formed on a frame shown in FIG. 471 depicting dissected tubes with various cross-sectional shapes;

In FIG. 475 is a perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator in an end clamp of a surgical apparatus in accordance with at least one embodiment;

In FIG. 476 is a detailed view of the tissue thickness compensator shown in FIG. 475, in accordance with at least one embodiment;

In FIG. 477 is a partial perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator in accordance with at least one embodiment;

In FIG. 478 is a partial perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator in accordance with at least one embodiment;

In FIG. 479A is a perspective view of a sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator and end clip shown in FIG. 475 depicting an end clip in an expanded configuration;

In FIG. 479B is a perspective view of a sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator and end clip shown in FIG. 475 depicting an end clamp in a closed configuration;

In FIG. 479C is a perspective view of a sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator and end clip shown in FIG. 475 depicting an end clamp in a closed and activated configuration;

In FIG. 479D is a perspective view of a sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator shown in FIG. 475 and captured by activated brackets;

In FIG. 479E is a perspective view of a sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator shown in FIG. 475 and captured by activated brackets depicting a further expansion of the tissue thickness compensator;

In FIG. 480 is a perspective view of a sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator in an end clamp of a surgical apparatus in accordance with at least one embodiment;

In FIG. 481 is a partial elevational view of the tissue thickness compensator shown in FIG. 480 and captured by an activated bracket;

In FIG. 482 is a perspective view of a deformable tube of a tissue thickness compensator shown in FIG. 480;

In FIG. 483 is a perspective view of a deformable tube in accordance with at least one embodiment;

In FIG. 484 is a perspective view of a sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator shown in FIG. 480;

In FIG. 485 is a perspective view of a sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator in an end clamp of a surgical apparatus in accordance with at least one embodiment;

In FIG. 486 is a perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator in accordance with at least one embodiment;

In FIG. 487 is a partial vertical sectional view of the tissue thickness compensator shown in FIG. 486, depicting a stapling element adhered to the fabric and fabric thickness compensator;

In FIG. 488 is a perspective view of a sectional view of a tissue thickness compensator in accordance with at least one embodiment;

In FIG. 489 is a perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator in accordance with at least one embodiment;

In FIG. 490 is a perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator in accordance with at least one embodiment;

In FIG. 491 is a perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator installed in a circular end clamp of a surgical apparatus in accordance with at least one embodiment;

In FIG. 492 is a perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator in accordance with at least one embodiment;

In FIG. 493 is a perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator in accordance with at least one embodiment;

In FIG. 494 is a perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator in accordance with at least one embodiment;

In FIG. 495 is a perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator in accordance with at least one embodiment;

In FIG. 496 is a perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator in accordance with at least one embodiment;

In FIG. 497 is a partial perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator in accordance with at least one embodiment;

In FIG. 498 is a partial perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator installed in an end clamp of a surgical apparatus in accordance with at least one embodiment;

In FIG. 499 is a partial perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator with suturing elements installed in its openings in accordance with at least one embodiment;

In FIG. 500 is a partial perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator shown in FIG. 498 depicting a tissue thickness compensator in an undeformed configuration;

In FIG. 501 is a partial perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator shown in FIG. 498 depicting a tissue thickness compensator in a partially deformed configuration;

In FIG. 502 is a partial perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator shown in FIG. 498 depicting a tissue thickness compensator in a deformed configuration;

In FIG. 503 is a perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator in accordance with at least one embodiment;

In FIG. 504 is a perspective view of an end clamp of a stapler comprising a thrust member and a cartridge with brackets in accordance with at least one embodiment;

In FIG. 505 is a cross-sectional view of the end clamp shown in FIG. 504, depicting brackets located in a cartridge with brackets in an inactive state, and a tissue thickness compensator comprising a sealed vessel in a non-punctured state, some parts of the vessel being removed for illustrative purposes;

In FIG. 506 is a cross-sectional view of the end clamp shown in FIG. 504, depicting the brackets shown in FIG. 505 at least in a partially activated state, and at least partially punctured vessel;

In FIG. 507 is a perspective view of an end clamp of a stapler comprising a thrust member and a cartridge with brackets in accordance with at least one embodiment;

In FIG. 508 is a cross-sectional view of the end clamp shown in FIG. 507 depicting brackets located in a cartridge with brackets in an inactive state, and sealed vessels located in the tissue thickness compensator of the cartridge with brackets in an unbreakable state, some parts of the vessels being removed for illustrative purposes;

In FIG. 509 is a cross-sectional view of the end clamp shown in FIG. 507, depicting the brackets shown in FIG. 508 in at least partially activated state, and at least partially punctured vessels in the cartridge with brackets;

In FIG. 510 is a perspective view of an end clamp of a stapler comprising a thrust member and a sealed vessel connected to the thrust member in accordance with at least one alternative embodiment, with some portions of the vessel removed for illustration purposes;

In FIG. 511 is a sectional view of the end clamp shown in FIG. 510, depicting brackets at least partially activated in a cartridge with brackets, and vessels connected to the stop element in at least partially punctured state;

In FIG. 512 is a cross-sectional view of a vessel connected to a thrust member shown in FIG. 510, depicted in an unexpanded position;

In FIG. 513 is a detailed view of a vessel connected to a thrust member shown in FIG. 512 depicted in the expanded position;

In FIG. 514 shows a vessel extending in a direction perpendicular to a row of suture brackets;

In FIG. 515 depicts a plurality of vessels extending in directions perpendicular to a series of suture brackets;

In FIG. 516 is a cross-sectional view of a cartridge with brackets in accordance with various embodiments;

In FIG. 517 is a partial sectional view shown in FIG. 516 in the implanted state;

In FIG. 518A is a partial perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator prior to expansion;

In FIG. 518B is a partial perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator shown in FIG. 518, during expansion;

In FIG. 519 is a partial perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator comprising a composition that swells in a liquid, in accordance with various embodiments;

In FIG. 520 is a cross-sectional view of a fabric located near a tissue thickness compensator, in accordance with various embodiments;

In FIG. 521 is a partial sectional view shown in FIG. 520, after activating the cartridge with brackets;

In FIG. 522 is a diagram illustrating a tissue thickness compensator shown in FIG. 520 and implanted near tissue;

In FIG. 523 is a partial perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator in accordance with various embodiments;

In FIG. 524 is a perspective view of a jaw configured to hold a tissue thickness compensator shown in FIG. 523;

In FIG. 525 is a partial cross-sectional view of a cartridge with brackets showing brackets after they are placed from the cartridge with brackets;

In FIG. 526 is a perspective view of an upper tissue thickness compensator and a lower tissue thickness compensator installed in a clip of a disposable loading device;

In FIG. 527A is a sectional view of the lower tissue thickness compensator shown in FIG. 526 and made in a mold for molding in accordance with various options for implementation;

In FIG. 527B is a cross-sectional view of a three-layer fabric thickness compensator made in a casting mold in accordance with various embodiments;

In FIG. 528 is a cross-sectional view of a thrust member comprising a tissue thickness compensator comprising a reinforcing material in accordance with various embodiments;

In FIG. 529 is a cross-sectional view of a fabric disposed between an upper tissue thickness compensator and a lower tissue thickness compensator in accordance with various embodiments;

In FIG. 530 is a sectional view shown in FIG. 529, after placing brackets from the cartridge with brackets;

In FIG. 531 is a cross-sectional view shown in FIG. 529, after activating the cartridge with brackets;

In FIG. 532A shows a needle configured to deliver fluid to a tissue thickness compensator connected to a cartridge with brackets in accordance with various embodiments;

In FIG. 532B is a cross-sectional view of a cartridge with brackets comprising a tissue thickness compensator configured to hold the needle of FIG. 532A;

In FIG. 533 depicts a method for manufacturing a tissue thickness compensator in accordance with various embodiments;

In FIG. 534 shows a diagram and a method of forming an expanding tissue thickness compensator in accordance with various embodiments;

In FIG. 535 depicts a micelle containing a hydrogel precursor; and

in FIG. 536 is a schematic diagram of a surgical apparatus comprising a tissue and fluid thickness compensator that can be delivered to a tissue thickness compensator in accordance with various embodiments.

In FIG. 537 is a partial perspective view of a tissue thickness compensator attached to a stop member of an end clamp of a surgical apparatus in accordance with at least one embodiment.

In FIG. 538 is a perspective view of a tubular member of a tissue thickness compensator shown in FIG. 537.

In FIG. 539 is a perspective view of the tubular member shown in FIG. 538 depicting a tubular element dissected into two halves and a liquid reacting with a hydrophilic substance from each half.

In FIG. 540 is a perspective view of half of the dissected tubular member shown in FIG. 539, depicting the expansion of a dissected tubular element.

To indicate similar elements in different images, similar numeric notations are used. The illustrative examples presented herein are in one form intended to depict certain embodiments of the present invention, and such illustrative examples should not be construed as in any way limiting the scope of the present invention.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION

The applicant for this application also owns the US patent applications listed below, which applications are considered to be included in the text of this document in its entirety by mentioning them:

US Patent Application Ser. No. 12/894311 entitled “Surgical Instruments Containing Reconfigurable Shaft Segments”, Patent Attorney File No. END6734USNP / 100058;

US Patent Application Ser. No. 12/894340 entitled “Cartridge with surgical non-linear staples and surgical stapling instruments with common pockets for forming staples”, file of patent attorney No. END6735USNP / 100059;

US Patent Application Ser. No. 12/894327 entitled "Devices for closing the jaws of surgical instruments", file of patent attorney No. END6736USNP / 100060;

US Patent Application Ser. No. 12/894351 entitled “Surgical Dissecting and Stapling Instruments with Separate and Separate Systems for Locating Stapling Elements and Tissue Dissection,” dossier of the Patent Attorney No. END6839USNP / 100524;

US Patent Application Ser. No. 12/894338 entitled “Implantable staple cartridge having a non-standard layout”, file of patent attorney No. END6840USNP / 100525;

US Patent Application Ser. No. 12/894369 entitled “Implantable cartridge with stapling elements containing a support stopper”, file of patent attorney No. END6841USNP / 100526;

US Patent Application Ser. No. 12/894312 entitled “Implantable cartridge with cross-linking elements containing several layers”, file of patent attorney No. END6842USNP / 100527;

US Patent Application Ser. No. 12/894377 entitled “Selectively Oriented Cartridge with Staples”, Patent Attorney File No. END6843USNP / 100528;

US Patent Application Ser. No. 12/894339 entitled “Surgical stapler with a compact closing control device”, file of patent attorney No. END6847USNP / 100532;

US Patent Application Ser. No. 12/894360 entitled “Surgical stapler with an adjustable system for forming brackets”, file of patent attorney No. END6848USNP / 100533;

US Patent Application Ser. No. 12/894322 entitled “Surgical stapler with interchangeable cartridge configurations with brackets”, file of patent attorney No. END6849USNP / 100534;

US Patent Application Ser. No. 12/894350 entitled “Surgical cartridges with brackets with detachable supporting structures and surgical staplers with systems to prevent starting movements in the absence of a cartridge”, dossier of patent attorney No. END6855USNP / 100540;

US Patent Application Ser. No. 12/894383 entitled “Implantable cartridges with cross-linking elements containing biodegradable layers”, file of patent attorney No. END6856USNP / 100541;

US Patent Application Ser. No. 12/894389 entitled “Compressible cartridge with stapling elements”, file of patent attorney No. END6857USNP / 100542;

US Patent Application Ser. No. 12/894345 entitled “Staple elements held by the support of the cartridge with staple elements”, file of patent attorney No. END6858USNP / 100543;

US Patent Application Ser. No. 12/894306 entitled “Crumpled cartridge with stapling elements”, file of patent attorney No. END6859USNP / 100544;

US Patent Application Ser. No. 12/894318, entitled “A crosslinking system containing a plurality of related elements of the retaining matrix”, file of patent attorney No. END6860USNP / 100546;

US Patent Application Ser. No. 12/894330 entitled “Crosslinking system comprising a holding matrix and a leveling matrix”, file of patent attorney No. END6861USNP / 100547;

US Patent Application Ser. No. 12/894361 entitled “Crosslinking system containing a retaining matrix”, file of patent attorney No. END6862USNP / 100548;

US Patent Application Ser. No. 12/894367 entitled “Stapling tool for actuating a suture system containing a retaining matrix”, file of patent attorney No. END6863USNP / 100549;

US Patent Application Ser. No. 12/894388 entitled “Crosslinking System Containing a Retention Matrix and a Coating”, Patent Attorney File No. END6864USNP / 100550;

US Patent Application Ser. No. 12/894376 entitled “Staple system containing a plurality of cartridges with staple elements”, file of patent attorney No. END6865USNP / 100551;

US Patent Application Ser. No. 13/097865 entitled “A thrust element for a surgical stapler containing a plurality of forming recesses”, dossier of the patent attorney No. END6735USCIP1 / 100059CIP1;

US Patent Application Ser. No. 13/097936 entitled “Compensator of tissue thickness for a surgical stapler”, file of patent attorney No. END6736USCIP1 / 100060CIP1;

US Patent Application Ser. No. 13/097954 entitled “Cartridge with brackets containing a compressible part of variable thickness”, file of patent attorney No. END6840USCIP1 / 100525CIP1;

US Patent Application Ser. No. 13/097856 entitled “Cartridge with brackets containing brackets located inside its crumpled part”, file of patent attorney No. END6841USCIP1 / 100526CIP1;

US Patent Application Ser. No. 13/097928 entitled “Compensator of tissue thickness containing detachable parts”, file of patent attorney No. END6842USCIP1 / 100527CIP1;

US Patent Application Ser. No. 13/097891 entitled “Tissue thickness compensator for a surgical stapler containing an adjustable stop member”, dossier of patent attorney No. END6843USCIP1 / 100528CIP1;

US Patent Application Ser. No. 13/097948 entitled “Cartridge with brackets containing an adjustable distal part”, file of patent attorney No. END6847USCIP1 / 100532CIP1;

US Patent Application Ser. No. 13/097907 entitled “Compressible cartridge with brackets in an assembly”, file of patent attorney No. END6848USCIP1 / 100533CIP1;

US Patent Application Ser. No. 13/097861 entitled “Compensator of tissue thickness containing parts having different properties”, file of patent attorney No. END6849USCIP1 / 100534CIP1;

US Patent Application Ser. No. 13/097869 entitled “Cartridge loading unit with brackets”, file of patent attorney No. END6855USCIP1 / 100540CIP1;

US Patent Application Ser. No. 13/097917 entitled “Compressible cartridge with brackets containing leveling elements”, file of patent attorney No. END6856USCIP1 / 100541CIP1;

US Patent Application Ser. No. 13/097873 entitled "Cartridge with brackets containing a part made with the possibility of release", file of patent attorney No. END6857USCIP1 / 100542CIP1;

US Patent Application Ser. No. 13/097938 entitled “Cartridge with brackets containing compressible components that are resistant to skew”, file of patent attorney No. END6858USCIP1 / 100543CIP1;

US Patent Application Ser. No. 13/097924 entitled “Cartridge with brackets containing tissue thickness compensator”, file of patent attorney No. END6859USCIP1 / 100544CIP1;

US Patent Application Ser. No. 13/242029 entitled “Surgical stapler with a floating stop element”, file of patent attorney No. END6841USCIP2 / 100526CIP2;

US Patent Application Ser. No. 13/242066 entitled “Curved End Clamp for a Surgical Instrument”, Patent Attorney File No. END6841USCIP3 / 100526CIP3;

US Patent Application Ser. No. 13/242086 entitled “Cartridge with brackets containing a creaseable cover”, file of patent attorney No. END7020USNP / 110374;

US Patent Application Ser. No. 13/241912 entitled “Cartridge with brackets containing a mechanism for the creaseable cover”, file of patent attorney No. END7019USNP / 110375;

US Patent Application Ser. No. 13/241922 entitled “Surgical stapler with stationary ejector brackets”, dossier of the patent attorney No. END7013USNP / 110377;

US Patent Application Ser. No. 13/241637 entitled “Surgical instrument with a trigger for generating multiple driving moments”, dossier of the patent attorney No. END6888USNP3 / 110378; and

US Patent Application Ser. No. 13/241629 entitled “Surgical Instrument with Selectively Bent Hinged End Clamp”, Patent Attorney File No. END6888USNP2 / 110379.

The author of this application also owns the following US patent applications, filed on the same day as this application, and fully incorporated into this application by reference:

US Patent Application Ser. No. _______________ entitled “Fabric Thickness Compensator Containing Many Capsules”, Patent Attorney Dossier No. END6864USCIP1 / 100550CIP1;

US Patent Application Ser. No. _______________ entitled “Compensator of tissue thickness containing multiple layers”, file of patent attorney No. END6864USCIP2 / 100550CIP2;

US Patent Application Ser. No. _______________ under the name “Compensator of tissue thickness containing capacity”, dossier of the patent attorney No. END6843USCIP3 / 100528CIP3;

US Patent Application Ser. No. _______________, entitled “Stopper in an assembly containing a fabric thickness compensator”, dossier of the patent attorney No. END6843USCIP4 / 100528CIP4;

US Patent Application Ser. No. _______________ entitled “Compensator of tissue thickness containing at least one drug”, file of patent attorney No. END6843USCIP5 / 100528CIP5;

US Patent Application Ser. No. _______________ under the title “Tissue compensator with controlled release and expansion”, dossier of patent attorney No. END6843USCIP6 / 100528CIP6;

US Patent Application Ser. No. _______________ under the name “Compensator of tissue thickness containing fibers for applying elastic force”, file of patent attorney No. END6843USCIP7 / 100528CIP7;

US Patent Application Ser. No. _______________ under the name “Fabric thickness compensator containing a structure for applying elastic force”, dossier of patent attorney No. END6843USCIP8 / 100528CIP8;

US Patent Application Ser. No. _______________ entitled “Compensator of tissue thickness containing elastic elements”, file of patent attorney No. END6843USCIP9 / 100528CIP9;

US Patent Application Ser. No. _______________ entitled “Methods of forming devices for compensating tissue thickness for surgical staplers”, dossier of the patent attorney No. END6843USCIP10 / 100528CP10;

US Patent Application Ser. No. _______________ under the name “Fabric Thickness Compensators”, dossier of the patent attorney No. END6843USCIP11 / 100528CP11;

US Patent Application Ser. No. _______________ under the name “Sheet compensator for tissue thickness”, dossier of the patent attorney No. END6843USCIP12 / 100528CP12;

US Patent Application Ser. No. _______________ entitled “Tissue Thickness Compensators for Circular Surgical Staplers,” Patent Attorney File No. END6843USCIP13 / 100528CP13;

US Patent Application Ser. No. _______________ under the name “Compensator of tissue thickness containing capsules defining the low-pressure region”, file of patent attorney No. END7100USNP / 110601;

US Patent Application Ser. No. _______________ entitled “Compensator of tissue thickness consisting of many materials”, dossier of the patent attorney No. END7101USNP / 110602;

US Patent Application Ser. No. _______________ under the name “Movable element for use with a tissue thickness compensator”, dossier of the patent attorney No. END7107USNP / 110603;

US Patent Application Ser. No. _______________ entitled “Compensator of tissue thickness containing many drugs”, dossier of the patent attorney No. END7102USNP / 110604;

US Patent Application Ser. No. _______________ under the name “Compensator of tissue thickness and the method of its manufacture”, dossier of the patent attorney No. END7103USNP / 110605;

US Patent Application Ser. No. _______________, entitled “Tissue Thickness Compensator Containing Channels”, Patent Attorney File No. END7104USNP / 110606;

US Patent Application Ser. No. _______________, entitled “Compensator of tissue thickness, with the ability to integrate into tissue”, dossier of patent attorney No. END7105USNP / 110607; and

US Patent Application Ser. No. _______________, entitled “Devices and Methods of Attaching Materials Compensating the Thickness of Tissue to Surgical Staplers,” Patent Attorney File No. END7106USNP / 110608.

For a general understanding of the design, principles of operation, production and use of the devices and methods described herein, the following is a description of individual embodiments of the present invention. One or more examples of such embodiments are presented in the accompanying drawings. Specialists in this field it is clear that the devices and methods described in detail in this document and presented in the accompanying drawings are examples of embodiments that are not restrictive. Features illustrated or described with reference to one embodiment may be combined with features of other embodiments. The scope of the present invention covers all modifications and variations.

Any of the methods described or claimed for the manufacture, formation or manufacture of an otherwise product or product may be used to manufacture, form or otherwise manufacture parts or all of the product or product discussed, a similar method may be used to manufacture, form or manufacture otherwise parts of the product or product in question, since the rest of the product or product can be manufactured in any way, including using any other methods that rye have been described or claimed herein for the manufacture of forming or otherwise manufacturing the article or product, as well as various parts that can be combined in any way after manufacture. Similarly, any product or product described or claimed in this document may exist separately or in combination, as well as an integral part of any other described product or product with which it is compatible. Thus, specific features, structures, or characteristics depicted or described in connection with a single product, product, or method can be unboundedly, in whole or in part, combined with the features, structures, or characteristics of one or more compatible products, products, or methods. The scope of the present invention covers all modifications and variations.

If a description or reference is made to a specific figure or others in this document, where some embodiment of the present invention or some product, product or method may contain some structure, characteristics or features, the reader should understand what this means is that these structures , characteristics or features may be embodied in the product, product or method in question in any possible combinations. In particular, from such a description of a multitude of optional structures, characteristics or features, it should be understood that all of these structures, characteristics or features can be described in combinations with each other, with the exception of cases of structures, characteristics or features that are described as alternatives to each other. If similar structures, characteristics or features are described as alternatives to each other, it should be understood from the description of such alternatives that they can serve as a substitute for each other.

The terms "proximal" and "distal" in this document are defined with respect to the physician managing the handle of the surgical instrument. The term "proximal" refers to the part closer to the doctor, and the term "distal" refers to the part removed from the doctor. It is also proposed for convenience and clarity in relation to the figures to use in this document such spatial terms as “vertical”, “horizontal”, “top” and “bottom”. However, surgical instruments can be used in many orientations and positions, therefore, these terms are not absolute and / or do not limit the present invention.

Various examples of devices and methods for performing laparoscopic and minimally invasive surgical procedures are provided herein. However, it will be very valuable for readers that the various methods and devices described in this document can be used for a wide variety of surgical procedures and activities related to open surgical operations. In the course of this detailed description, the reader will be able to further appreciate that the various tools described in this document can be inserted into the body in any way - either through natural openings, or through an incision or a puncture hole made in the tissues, etc. n. The working part or nozzles of the end clamps of such instruments can be inserted directly into the patient's body or through an access device having a working channel through which the end clamp and the elongated surgical instrument can be held ments.

Turning to the drawings, similar numerical values are used to denote similar elements in different images, in FIG. 1 shows a surgical apparatus 10 in which a number of unique advantages are realized. Surgical stapling instrument 10 is configured to adjust and / or activate functionally fixed working instruments 12 of various shapes and sizes. For example, in FIG. 1-1E, the end clamp 12 comprises an elongated channel 14 forming the lower jaw 13 of the end clamp 12. The elongated channel 14 is configured to support the implantable cassette with brackets 30, and also to support the stop element 20, which acts as the upper jaw 15 of the working tool 12.

The elongated channel 14 can be made, for example, of steel of a series 300 & 400, 17-4 & 17-7, titanium, etc., and also can be formed by laterally spaced walls 16. The stop element 20 can be made, for example , stainless steel 300 & 400, 17-4 & 17-7, titanium, etc. and have an inner surface forming the brackets, which is usually denoted 22 and, in turn, has many forming brackets recesses 23. See FIG. 1B-1E. In addition, the thrust element 20 has a node forked inclined surface 24, protruding from it proximally. On each side of the assembly of the inclined surface 24, a stop pin 26 protrudes into the corresponding groove or hole 18 in the side walls 16 of the elongated channel 14 to facilitate its fastening on the channel with the possibility of movement or articulation.

Various forms of implantable staple cartridges can be used with the various surgical devices described herein. The specific configurations and designs of the cartridges with brackets are described in detail below. However, in FIG. 1A, an implantable cartridge with brackets 30 is shown. The cartridge with brackets 30 has a part of the housing 31 consisting of a compressible hemostatic material, for example, oxidized regenerated cellulose (ORC) or bioabsorbable foam, in which rows of uniform metal brackets 32 are enclosed. To prevent exposure to the brackets and activating the hemostatic material during insertion and placement of the cartridge, the entire cartridge may be coated or wrapped in a film of bioabsorbable material 38, such as a polydioxanone film a, commercially available under the PDS® trademark, or polyglycerin sebacinate (PGS) film or other absorbable films made from PGA (polyglycolic acid, commercially available under the trademark Vicryl), PCL (polycaprolactone), PLA or PLLA (polylactic acid) ), PHA (polyhydroxyalkanoate), PGCL (polyglexaprone 25, commercially available under the brand name Monocryl) or mixtures of PGA, PCL, PLA, PDS impervious to tearing. The cartridge housing 31 with brackets 30 has dimensions that can be maintained removably in the elongated channel 14, as shown in the figures, so that each bracket 32 located in it is aligned with the corresponding recesses to form the brackets 23 in the stop, when the stop element 20 is brought into forming contact with the cartridge with brackets 30.

When used after placing the working tool 12 next to the target tissue, the working tool 12 is manipulated to grab or lock the target tissue between the upper side 36 of the cartridge with the brackets 30 and the surface for forming the brackets 22 of the stop 20. The brackets 32 are formed by moving the stop 20 along a path along essentially parallel to the elongated channel 14, to bring the surface to form the brackets 22 and, more specifically, the recesses on it to form the brackets 23 essentially in contact with the upper side 36 of the cartridge with brackets 30. As the stop member 20 continues to move toward the bracket unit 30, the legs 34 of the brackets 32 come into contact with the corresponding recesses 23 to form the brackets on the stop 20, which serves to bend the legs of the brace 34 to give the bracket 32 B- shaped. Further movement of the stop 20 along the elongated groove 14 leads to further compression and molding of the brackets 32 until the final desired formed height “FF” is obtained.

The above process of forming the staples is essentially depicted in FIG. 1B-1E. For example, in FIG. 1B shows a working tool 12 with a target tissue T between the abutment element 20 and the upper side 36 of the implantable cartridge with brackets 30. FIG. 1C shows the initial locking position of the stop 20, in which the stop member 20 is closed on the target fabric T to lock the target fabric T between the stop member 20 and the upper side 36 of the cartridge with brackets 30. FIG. 1D, the first staple forming stage is presented, in which the stop member 20 begins to compress the cassette with the brackets 30 so that the formation of the legs 34 of the brackets 32 with the recesses begins to form the brackets 23 of the stop 20. FIG. 1E, a bracket 32 is shown in a final formed state passing through the target fabric T, with the stop member 20 removed for clarity. After the brackets 32 are formed and attached to the target tissue T, the surgeon moves the abutment element 20 to the open position to allow the cartridge body 31 and the brackets 32 to remain in the target tissue T when the working tool 12 is removed from the patient’s body. The working tool 12 forms all the brackets simultaneously when two jaws 13 and 15 are compressed together. The remaining materials of the “crumpled” case 31 simultaneously serve as a hemostatic agent (ORC) and strengthen a number of superimposed brackets (PGA, PDS or a film of any other composition from the above 38) . In addition, since the brackets 32 do not need to leave the cartridge case 31 during formation, the likelihood of the brackets 32 being improperly formed during the formation is minimized. As used herein, the term “implantable” means that in addition to the brackets, the materials of the block body in which the brackets are held also remain in the patient’s body and, ultimately, can be absorbed by the patient’s body. Such implantable brace blocks differ from prior art block designs that remain entirely inside the end clamp after being actuated.

In various embodiments, the working tool 12 is configured to connect to an elongated barrel assembly 40 that protrudes from the handle assembly 100. The working tool 12 (in the closed state) and the elongated barrel assembly 40 may have similar cross-sectional shapes and sizes that allow functional passage through the tube trocar or working channel of another form of access instrument. As used herein, the term “pass through functionally” means that a working tool and at least a portion of an elongated stem assembly can be inserted through a channel or opening of a tube and can be manipulated within them in a manner that is necessary to conduct a surgical tissue stitching procedure. When the jaws 13 and 15 of the end clamp 12 are closed, its cross section is approximately round, which facilitates its passage through openings and round cross-sections. However, the end clamps of the present invention, as well as embodiments of an elongated barrel in an assembly, can presumably have other cross-sectional shapes, which in other cases can pass through access channels and openings that have a non-circular cross-sectional shape. Thus, the total cross-sectional dimension of the working tool in the closed position is related to the size of the channel or hole through which it is intended to be introduced. Thus, for example, a work tool can be designated as a work tool “5 mm in size”, which means that it can be functionally passed through an opening that has a diameter of at least about 5 mm.

The elongated barrel in assembly 40 may have substantially the same outer diameter as the outer diameter of the end clamp 12 in the closed position. For example, a 5 mm working tool can be connected to an elongated barrel assembly 40 with a cross-sectional diameter of 5 mm. However, as the present detailed description is presented, it will become clear that, within the framework of the present invention, end clamps of different sizes can be effectively used. For example, a 10 mm working tool can be attached to an elongated barrel with a cross-sectional diameter of 5 mm. Conversely, for applications in which there is a channel or access hole of 10 mm or more in size, the elongated barrel assembly 40 may have a cross-sectional diameter of 10 mm (or more), but can also activate a working tool of 5 mm or 10 mm in size. Accordingly, the outer barrel 40 may have an outer diameter equal to or different from the outer diameter of the working tool 12 mounted thereon in the closed position.

According to the description, the elongated shaft in the assembly 40 extends in the distal direction from the handle in the assembly 100 as a whole in a straight line, defining the horizontal axis AA. For example, the elongated shaft in assembly 40 may have a length of about 229-406 mm (9-16 inches). However, the elongated shaft in the assembly 40 may also be of a different length and, alternatively, may be hinged or have any other configuration that facilitates changing the position of the end clamp 12 relative to other parts of the shaft or handle in the assembly, as will be discussed in detail below. The elongated rod in the assembly 40 has a trunnion element 50, which extends from the handle in the assembly 100 to the end clamp 12. The proximal end of the elongated groove 14 of the end clamp 12 has a pair of locking supports protruding from it, made to fit into the corresponding support holes, or sockets , 52 located at the distal end of the trunnion element 50, which allows the end clamp 12 to be removed to be attached to the elongated barrel assembly 40. The trunnion element 50 can be made, for example, of aluminum alloy 6061 or 7075, stainless steel, titanium, etc.

The handle in assembly 100 comprises a pistol grip type housing that can be made of two or more parts to facilitate assembly. For example, as shown, the handle assembly 100 comprises a right housing element 102 and a left housing element (not shown) cast or otherwise made of a polymer or plastic material and configured to be mated. Such housing elements can be connected to each other by means of snap elements, pins and recesses obtained by molding or by other methods, and / or by means of adhesives, screws, etc. The trunnion element 50 has a proximal end 54, which has a flange, the Flange 56 formed on it is configured to rotate in a groove 106 formed by mating ribs 108 that protrude inward with each of the elements of the housing 102 and 104. This design facilitates the fastening of the trunnion element 50 on the handle assembly 100, by volyaya trunnion member 50 to rotate relative to the handle assembly 100 about the longitudinal axis A-A through 360 °.

As further presented in FIG. 1, an axle member 50 extends through a mounting sleeve 60 that is rotatably mounted on and supported by a handle assembly 100. The mounting sleeve 60 has a proximal flange 62 and a distal flange 64, which form a groove for rotation 65, configured to receive the nose 101 of the handle assembly 100 for rotation. This design allows the mounting sleeve 60 to rotate around the longitudinal axis AA relative to the handle assembly 100. The trunnion element 50 is fixedly mounted on the mounting sleeve 60 using a pin 66. In addition, the rotary handle 70 is also mounted on the mounting sleeve 60. For example, the rotary coupling 70 has the recessed portion of the mounting flange 72, which is of such a size that allows it to be connected to a part of the holding sleeve 60. The rotary coupling 70 may be made, for example, of glass-filled or carbon-filled nylon, poly carbonate, Ultem®, etc., and is further attached to the holding sleeve 60 by a protruding pin 66. In addition, an inwardly protruding holding flange 74 is formed on the portion of the mounting flange 72 so as to extend into the radial groove 68, formed on the mounting sleeve 60. Thus, the surgeon can rotate the trunnion element 50 (and the working tool 12 mounted thereon) around the longitudinal axis AA by 360 ° by gripping the rotary handle 70 and rotating it relative to the handle assembly 100.

The thrust member 20 is held open by the spring of the thrust member 21 and / or other biasing structure. The stop element 20 is arranged to selectively move from an open position to various closed or locking and starting positions by a trigger system, essentially referred to as element 109. The trigger system 109 includes a “trigger element” 110, which is a hollow trigger tube 110. Hollow the launch tube 110 is capable of axial movement along the axle member 50 and thus forms the outer part of the elongated barrel assembly 40. The launch tube 110 may be made of polymer or other suitable material, and may have a proximal end attached to the trigger beam 114 of the trigger system 109. For example, the trigger beam 114 may be fabricated using multi-component molding at the proximal end of the trigger tube 110. However, other fastener structures may be used.

As represented in FIG. 1, the launch traverse 114 may be rotatably supported in a support sleeve 120 configured to axially move in a handle assembly 100. Support sleeve 120 has a pair of transversely extending ribs, the size of which allows them to slide into the grooves under the ribs formed on the right and left housing elements. Thus, the support sleeve 120 can slide axially in the handle housing 100, allowing the launch traverse 114 and the launch tube 110 to rotate along the longitudinal axis A-A, respectively. A longitudinal slot 111 is provided on the start tube 110 so that the pin of the pin 66 passes through it into the element of the pin 50, making it possible to move along the axis of the start tube 110 along the element of the pin 50.

The starter system 109 further comprises a trigger 130, which controls the axial movement of the starter tube 110 along the spigot element 50. See FIG. 1. Such an axial movement of the working tube 110 in the distal direction into the trigger interaction with the thrust member 20 is referred to herein as the “trigger motion” or “actuation”. As seen in FIG. 1, the trigger 130 is movably or pivotally connected to the handle assembly 100 by means of a pivot pin 132. A torsion spring 135 is used to move the trigger hook 130 away from the pistol grip part 107 of the handle assembly 100 to an inactive “open” or initial position. represented in FIG. 1, the trigger 130 has an upper portion 134 that is movably connected (via pins) to the trigger rods 136, which are movably connected (via pins) to the support sleeve 120. Thus, the movement of the starter 130 from its initial position (FIG. 1) in the direction of the end position next to the pistol grip part 107 of the handle assembly 100, causes the trigger clamp 114 and the trigger tube 110 to move “DD” in the distal direction. The movement of the trigger 130 from the pistol grip part 107 of the handle assembly 100 (due to the bias of the torsion spring 135) causes the trigger clamp 114 and the trigger tube 110 to move in the proximal direction “PD” on the pin 50.

The present invention can be used with implantable cartridges with brackets of various sizes and configurations. For example, the surgical instrument 10, when used in combination with the first trigger adapter 140, can be used with a working tool 12 of size 5 mm and a length of approximately 20 mm (or another length) that supports an implantable cassette with brackets 30. This size of the working tool may be particularly suitable , for example, to perform relatively thin dissecting and vascular operations. However, as described in more detail below, the surgical device 10 can also be used, for example, in combination with end clamps and cartridges with brackets of other sizes when replacing the first trigger adapter 140 with a second trigger adapter. In further alternative embodiments, the elongated shaft in the assembly 40 may be configured to attach only one shape or size to the end clip.

The method of removable connection of the working tool 12 with the trunnion element 50 will be described below. The joining process begins by inserting the holding supports 17 on the elongated groove 14 into the receiving cavities 52 in the trunnion element 50. Then, the surgeon moves the trigger 130 to the handle 107 of the pistol-type handle assembly 100 for advancing the launch tube 110 and the first launch adapter 140 distally along the proximal end portion 47 of the elongated groove 14 so as to fix the supports 17 in the respective sockets 52. A similar position of the first pu the skew adapter 140 above the supports 17 is denoted by the term “connected position”. Various embodiments of the present invention may also include an end clamp locking system designed to lock the trigger 130 in a specific position after attaching the end clamp 12 to the pin member 50.

More specifically, one embodiment of the end clamp blocking assembly 160 includes a holding pin 162 supported to move in the upper portion 134 of the trigger 130. As described above, the trigger tube 110 must first be distally advanced to a connected position in which the first trigger adapter 140 holds the retaining supports 17 of the end clamp 12 in the receiving cavities 52 in the trunnion member 50. The surgeon pushes the trigger adapter 140 distally to the connected position by pulling the trigger hook and 130 from the initial position in the direction of the pistol grip 107. After the initial actuation of the trigger 130, the holding pin 162 moves distally until the trigger tube 110 pushes the first trigger adapter 140 into a connected position in which the holding pin 162 is shifted to a locking cavity 164 formed in the housing element. In various embodiments, when the holding pin 162 enters the blocking cavity 164, the pin 162 makes an audible “click” or other sound, in addition, the surgeon feels, by touch, that the end clip 12 is “latched” on the pin member 50. In addition, the surgeon cannot inadvertently continue activating the trigger 130 to start forming the brackets 32 in the working tool 12 without deliberately displacing the locking pin 162 from the locking cavity 164. Similarly, if the surgeon releases the trigger 130 in sec In a single position, it is held in this position by a fixing pin 162, not allowing the trigger 130 to return to its original state and thereby disconnect the working tool 12 from the pin member 50.

The present invention may further comprise a lock button for the cutting and stapling system 137, which is pivotally connected to the handle in the assembly 100. In one form, the lock button of the trigger system 137 has a latch 138 formed at the distal end and oriented to engage the trigger beam 114 when the trigger release button is in the first lock position. As represented in FIG. 1, a locking spring 139 is used to bias the trigger lock button 137 to a first locking position. In various situations, the latch 138 is used to engage the launch yoke 114 at a point at which the position of the launch yoke 114 on the trunnion element 50 corresponds to the point at which the first launch adapter 140 is ready to start moving distally upward along the inclined surface of the latch 28 on the abutment 20. It should be understood that when the first starting adapter 140 moves axially up the inclined surface of the fixation 28, the thrust element 20 moves along such a path that its part of the surface for forming the brackets 22 remains essentially stvu parallel to the upper side 36 of the staple cartridge 30.

After connecting the working tool 12 with the element of the trunnion 50, the process of forming brackets begins, the first stage of which is pressing the lock button of the launch system 137 to ensure further movement of the launch beam 114 distally along the element of the trunnion 50 and ultimately pressing the stop 20 into the cartridge with brackets 30. After pressing the lock button on the trigger system 137, the surgeon continues to activate the trigger 130 in the direction of the pistol grip 107, thereby feeding the first trigger adapter 140 upward according to vuyuschey inclined surface for forming the staples 29 for driving the anvil 20 into forming contact with the staples 32 in the staple cartridge 30. The trigger lock button 137 protects the system from inadvertent formation of staples 32 until the surgeon is ready to begin the process. In this example, the surgeon must press the lock button of the trigger system 137 to be able to further activate the trigger 130 to start the process of forming the brackets.

If desired, the surgical instrument 10 can be used exclusively as a device for stitching tissue. However, the present invention may also include a tissue dissection system, usually indicated by 170. In at least one form, the tissue dissection system 170 includes a cutting element 172 that can be selectively pulled out of the inoperative position near the proximal end of the end clamp 12 to the working position by bringing the trigger mechanism of the cutting element 200. The scalpel element 172 is supported with the ability to move in the element of the journal 50 and is mounted on the shaft of the scalpel 180 or otherwise protrudes t out of it. The cutting element 172 can be made, for example, of stainless steel grade 420 or 440 with a hardness of more than 38 HRC (Rockwell hardness, scale C) and can have an edge for cutting tissue 176 formed at its distal end 174, and can also be made with the possibility of sliding passage through the groove in the support 20 and the centrally located groove 33 in the cartridge with brackets 30 for dissecting the tissue, clamped in the end of the working body 12. The rod of the cutting element 180 passes through the element of the journal 50 and has a proximal end part made with force transmission to the gear drive of the cutting element, functionally attached to the trigger mechanism of the cutting element 200. The trigger of the cutting element 200 is connected to the hinge pin 132 so that it can rotate or otherwise be activated without actuating the trigger 130. On the hinge the pin 132 is also fixed to the first gear of the cutting element 192 so that the activation of the trigger mechanism of the cutting element 200 also leads to the rotation of the first gear of the cutting element 192. Int a first gear housing 192 and the scalpel handle 100 is attached the trigger return spring 202 biasing the trigger advancing the scalpel 200 in the initial or non-activated, position.

The gear drive of the cutting element also contains a second gear of the cutting element 194, which is rotatably held on the spindle of the second gear and is meshed with the first gear of the cutting element 192. The second gear of the drive of the cutting element 194 is meshed with the third gear of the cutting element 196, which is supported on the spindle of the third gear. Also on the spindle of the third gear 195, the fourth gear of the scalpel 198 is mounted. The fourth gear drive of the cutting element drive gear 198 is adapted to engage with the transmission of a driving force to a series of ring teeth or gear rings at the proximal end of the cutting element shaft 180. Thus, this design allows the fourth gear of the scalpel 198 to axially push the shaft of the scalpel 180 in the distal direction DD or the proximal direction PD, allowing the trigger shaft 180 to rotate around the longitudinal axis AA relative to the fourth gear of the scalpel 198. Accordingly, the surgeon can axially advance the trigger shaft 180 and in the final as a result, the scalpel element 172 distally by pulling the trigger mechanism for advancing the scalpel 200 in the direction of the pistol grip 107 of the handle assembly 100.

The present invention further comprises a locking system for the cutting element 210, preventing the cutting element 172 from advancing until the trigger 130 is moved to the fully activated position. Thus, this design feature prevents the scalpel advancement system 170 from triggering until the braces are first applied or formed in the tissue. As shown in FIG. 1, various embodiments of a scalpel 210 lock system comprise a scalpel retainer 211 that is pivotally mounted in a portion of the pistol grip 107 of the handle assembly 100. The scalpel retainer 211 has an activating end 212 that is engageable with a trigger 130 when the trigger 130 is in the fully activated position. In addition, at the other end, the scalpel retainer 211 has a holding hook 214 adapted to engage the retainer rod 216 on the first gear of the scalpel 192. The scalpel lock spring 218 is designed to bias the scalpel 211 into a locked position in which the holding hook 214 is engaged with the retainer rod 216 and prevents the activation of the trigger mechanism for advancing the scalpel 200 until the trigger hook 130 is placed in a fully activated position.

After stapling (forming) staples in the target tissue, the surgeon can press the release button of the trigger 167 to allow the trigger 130 to return to its original position under the biasing action of the torsion spring 135, which allows the stop 20 to move to the open position under the action of the spring 21. When the tool is in the open position, the surgeon can remove the working tool 12 from the patient’s body, leaving an implantable cartridge with brackets 30 and brackets 32 in it. In those applications in which the working tool was inserted into ate patient through the hole, and so the working channel, the surgeon needs to stop element 20 back into closed position by pressing the trigger 130, to allow removal of the tool through hole 12 or the working channel. However, if the surgeon wants to dissect the target tissue after braces are applied, he actuates the trigger 200 of the cutting element in the manner described above to push the holder 172 of the cutting element through the target tissue to the end of the end clamp. Then the surgeon can release the trigger mechanism 200 of the cutting element, which will allow the trigger return spring 202 to return the holder 172 of the cutting element to its original (inoperative) position through the trigger gear. After returning the holder 172 of the cutting element to its original position, the surgeon can open the jaws 13 and 15 of the end working body to release the implantable cartridge 30 in the patient’s body and then remove the end working body 12 from the patient. Thus, such surgical devices facilitate the use of small implantable cartridges with brackets that can be inserted through the working channels and openings of a relatively small size, while allowing the surgeon to place braces without dissecting the tissue or, if necessary, also dissecting the tissue after applying the brackets.

In various unique and innovative embodiments of the present invention, a compressible cartridge with brackets is used in which the brackets are supported in a substantially stationary position to form contact with the stop member. The thrust element is pushed into undeformed brackets, where, for example, the degree of formation of the brackets achieved depends on how far the thrust element has been extended into the brackets. This design allows the surgeon to adjust the forming or starting force applied to the brackets and thereby change the final height of the brackets in the formed state. In other embodiments of the present invention, staple ejector elements that can raise the staples to the abutment element can be used in surgical structures for stitching. Such embodiments are described in more detail below.

Considering the embodiments described in detail above, the magnitude of the trigger movement applied to the thrust element configured to move depends on the degree of activation of the trigger. For example, if the surgeon wants to get only partially formed staples, then the trigger is only partially fed inward towards the pistol grip 107. To achieve the formation of staples, the surgeon simply additionally presses the trigger, which leads to a stronger advancement of the stop into forming contact with the brackets . As used herein, the term “forming contact” means that the surface for forming the staples or the recess for forming the staples is in contact with the ends of the legs of the staples and the legs are started to form or bend to bring them into the formed position. The term "degree of formation of brackets" means the extent to which the legs of the brackets are bent, and ultimately refers to the height of the formation of the staples, as described above. It will also be clear to those skilled in the art that since the Thrust member 20 moves substantially parallel to the cartridge with brackets when starting movements are applied to it, the brackets are formed substantially simultaneously with a substantially uniform height in the formed state.

In FIG. 2 and 3, an alternative embodiment of the end clamp 12 ″ is shown, similar to the above-described variant of the end clamp 12 ′, with the exception of the differences described below regarding the arrangement of the holder of the cutting element 172 ′. The scalpel holder 172 ′ is connected to or protrudes from the stem of the scalpel 180 and otherwise functions in the manner described above with respect to the scalpel holder 172. However, in this embodiment, the knife holder 172 ′ is long enough to extend the entire length of the end clamp 12 ″, and therefore, in the end clamp 12 ″ there is no separate distal knife member. The knife holder 172 'has an upper transverse element 173' and a lower transverse element 175 'formed on it. The upper transverse element 173 'is oriented so that it slides freely in the corresponding elongated groove 250 at the stop 20' ', and the lower transverse element 175' is oriented so that it slides in the elongated groove 252 of the elongated groove 14 '' of the distal end clamp 12 ''. The stop 20 ″ also has a release groove (not shown), which is designed so that when the knife holder 172 ′ extends to its final position with a thin end clamp, the upper transverse member 173 ′ slides out of the corresponding groove, allowing the stop 20 ″ to move in the open position for disengagement with stitched brackets and excised tissue. Otherwise, the stop element 20 ″ may be identical to the abutment 20 described above, and the elongated channel 14 ″ may otherwise be identical to the elongated channel 14 described above.

In this embodiment, the stop member 20 ″ is moved to the fully open position (FIG. 2) by the action of a spring or other opening mechanism (not shown). The stop member 20 ″ is moved between the open position and the fully locked position by axially moving the trigger adapter 150 in the manner described above. After the working adapter 150 extends to the fully clamped position (FIG. 3), the surgeon can extend the cutting element 172 ″ distally, as described above. If the surgeon needs to use the end effector as a gripping device for working with tissue, he can move the trigger adapter proximally to ensure that the stop 20 '' moves from the elongated channel 14 '', as shown by the dotted line in FIG. 4. In this example, as the holder of the cutting element 172 ″ moves distally, the upper transverse element 173 ’and the lower transverse element 175 ′ bring together the stop element 20 ″ and the elongated channel 14 ″, providing the desired degree of formation of the brackets as the holder of the cutting element 172 ″ is advanced distally through the end clamp 12 ″. See FIG. 5. Thus, in this embodiment, the formation of the staples is carried out simultaneously with the dissection of the tissue, but the staples themselves can be formed sequentially as the scalpel holder 172 ″ is pushed distally.

The unique and new features of various surgical cartridges with brackets and surgical instruments of the present invention make it possible to arrange brackets in these cartridges in the form of one or more linear or non-linear rows. Many of these staple lines can be made on each side of the elongated groove that extends in the center of the cartridge with staples to allow the fabric-cutting member to fit into it. In one embodiment, for example, the brackets in one line can be substantially parallel to the brackets in the adjacent brackets (s), but offset from them. In a further alternative embodiment, one or more staple lines may be non-linear. This means that the base of at least one bracket in a line of brackets can extend along an axis that essentially intersects the bases of other brackets located in the same line of brackets. For example, as described in more detail below, in alternative embodiments, the staple lines on each side of the elongated groove may be zigzag. Such a non-linear arrangement of staples can lead to better stapling results when using fewer staples compared to the various linear arrangements of staples used in prior art cartridges with staples.

In FIG. 6 illustrates the use of an embodiment of a surgical cartridge with brackets 900 in an embodiment of end clamp 612 '. As represented in FIG. 6 and 7, an embodiment of a surgical cartridge with brackets 900 has a cartridge case 902 that has a centrally located elongated groove 904 extending through the proximal end 903 to an area adjacent to the distal end 905. The elongated groove 904 is configured to allow axial movement of the cutting through it element during surgical dissection of tissue as described above. Cartridge body 902 consists of a compressible hemostatic material, for example, oxidized regenerated cellulose (ORC) or bioabsorbable foam made, for example, of PGA (polyglycolic acid sold under the trade name Vicryl), PCL (polycaprolactone), PLA or PLLA (polylactic acid) , PDS (polydioxanone), PHA (polyhydroxyalkanoate), PGCL (polyglexaprone 25 sold under the brand name Monocryl) or a mixture of PGA, PCL, PLA and PDS, which holds rows 920, 930 of unformed brackets 922. However, the cartridge case 902 can be made of other ma erialov ensuring maintenance of unformed staples 922 in the desired position so that they can be compressed under the influence of the stop 910 'in contact with him. As with the other embodiments described above, the cartridge with brackets 900 is implantable and remains attached to the stitched tissue after the stapling procedure is completed. To prevent exposure to the brackets 922 and activation of the hemostatic material during insertion and placement of the cartridge, the entire cartridge 900 may be coated or wrapped in a film of bioabsorbable material 906, such as a polydioxanone film sold under the brand PDS®, or a film of polyglycerol sebacinate (PGS) or other absorbable films made from PGA (polyglycolic acid available on the market under the trademark Vicryl), PCL (polycaprolactone), PLA or PLLA (polylactic acid), PHA (polyhydroxyalkanoa ta), PGCL (polyglecaprone 25, commercially available under the brand name Monocryl) or mixtures of PGA, PCL, PLA, PDS impervious to tearing. The cartridge housing 902 with brackets 900 has a size that allows it to be removably supported in the elongated groove of the end clamp 612 '.

In FIG. 6, 10 and 11, a surgical cartridge with brackets 900 functionally holds the first row 920 of brackets 922 on one side 907 of the elongated groove 904 and the second row 930 of brackets 922 on the other side of the 909 elongated groove 904. Brackets 922 may be made of metals such as, for example, titanium, titanium alloys (for example, titanium 6AI-4V, titanium 3al-2.5V), stainless steel, etc., and have a bracket base 924 and two upward-looking legs protruding from it 926. Each bracket leg 926 may have the tip formed thereon for piercing the fabric 928. In the first line 920, the brackets 922 the base 924 of at least one bracket 922 overlaps the base of the other bracket 922. In a preferred embodiment, the base 924 of each bracket 922 overlaps the base 924 of two adjacent brackets 922, with the exception of the base 924 of the extreme bracket 922 at each end of the first line of brackets 920. See FIG. 10. Thus, the first line of brackets 920 has a substantially non-linear shape. In particular, in a plan view, the first line of brackets 920 has a substantially zigzag appearance.

As represented in FIG. 9, the stop member 90 has two successive longitudinal recesses 912 for forming brackets, each of which has a substantially zigzag shape corresponding to the shape of the first row 920 of brackets 922, so that when the stop 910 is brought into forming contact with the brackets 922, formation legs 926, as shown in FIG. 11. Thus, the distal leg of one bracket falls into the same recess as the proximal leg of the bracket following it in the longitudinal direction. This design allows you to provide a more dense arrangement of the recesses, up to the position in which the brackets act on each other (for example, nested one into the other). In previous embodiments of the location of the recesses, there was typically 0.13 to 0.38 mm (0.005 to 0.015 in) of metal / free space from one set of recesses to another. However, in this embodiment of the present invention, the overlap / overlap is from 0 to 0.5 mm (0 to 0.02 inches) (essentially -0.5 mm (-0.020``)), since, for example , one bracket joins the next. Such location options allow you to place 15-30% more staples in the same space. Moreover, when the brackets engage each other, the need for a plurality of transverse rows of brackets is reduced. Previous layouts typically included three rows of staples on each side of the tissue incision line to prevent the possibility of open areas that could leak blood. When using lines of interconnected staples, the preservation of open areas that can let blood through is less likely. Another notable advantage when using various arrangements of interconnected brackets that are the subject of the present invention relates to an increase in “tensile strength”, which refers to the amount of force required to break the seam formed by the line of brackets.

Another arrangement of the recesses for forming the brackets may comprise a common recess for forming the brackets. As used herein, the term “general recess for forming brackets” means that a single forming recess can arrange all brackets on the same line of brackets, in contrast to prior art emphasis designs that provide a separate forming recess for each leg of each bracket.

In FIG. 12 shows yet another embodiment of the brackets 922 ', in which the base 924' has a protruding portion 929, which provides a more dense overlap of the bases 924 '. As indicated above, the cartridge with brackets 900 has a second line 930 of brackets 922 located on the second side 909 of the elongated groove 904. The second line 930 of brackets 922 is substantially identical to the first line 920 of brackets 922. Thus, the stop member 910 has a second common recess for forming brackets 912, which corresponds to the second line of brackets 930 and is intended to form brackets in contact with them. However, as an alternative, the second row 930 of brackets 922 may differ from the first row 920 of brackets in shape and possibly the number of brackets.

In FIG. Figure 8 shows a surgical cartridge with brackets 900 ', which is almost identical to the above cartridge with brackets 900, with the exception of the rows of brackets 922' located therein 920 'and 930'. For example, in this embodiment, the line 920 'of the brackets 922 is positioned relative to another in such a way so that the axis of the base SS of at least one base of the bracket 924 substantially intersects the axis SS of the base 924 of at least one other adjacent bracket 922. This predetermined arrangement of the brackets in a plan view is substantially zigzag view. In FIG. 13 shows corresponding bases 924 of brackets 922, which may further have a base support element 927 formed over the bracket in accordance with the figure. For example, the support portion 927 may be made of non-biodegradable materials such as polyetherketone (PEEK), or plastics, such as PGA (polyglycolic acid, Vicryl brand), PLA or PLLA (polylactic acid), PDS (polydioxanone), PCL (polycaprolactone), PHA (polyhydroxyalkanoates), polyglyceryl sebacate (PGS), PGCL (polyglecaprone 25, Monocryl trademark), or from composite materials containing PGS, PDS, PLA, PGA and PCL. The support elements of the base 927 provide engagement between the brackets without overlapping brackets. Thus, such layouts can contribute to the formation of brackets in the form of the letter B or the inverted letter W without overlapping the legs of the brackets. However, the heads are connected by supporting elements of the base, thus, they function as overlapping brackets. Such layouts allow the use of combined recesses to obtain two separate paths for each leg.

The implementation option presented in FIG. 14, comprises a row of brackets 920 ″ in which the legs 926 of adjacent brackets 922 are connected to each other by a connecting part 929 attached to them by molding molding or in another way. Each connecting part 929 can be made, for example, of non-absorbable plastic, such as polyetheretherketone (PEEK), or absorbable plastic, such as, for example, polyglycolic acid (PG), polylactic acid (PLA or PLLA), polydioxanone (PDS), PCL ( polycaprolactone), PHA (polyhydroxyalkanoate), PGCL (polyglecaprone 25, commercially available under the brand name Monocryl) or various composite mixtures of PGS, PDS, PLA, PGA and PCL. Such a line of brackets 920 ″ in a plan view has a substantially zigzag appearance. Although various embodiments of a surgical cartridge with brackets 900, 900 'have been described in combination with an end clamp 612', it is contemplated that cartridges with brackets 900, 900 'can be effectively used with the various other end clamps and surgical devices described above in this document if in the stops of these devices there will be appropriately located recesses for forming the brackets for forming the necessary number of brackets when moving the stops in the forming contact with parentheses.

In FIG. 15 and 16, an embodiment of another surgical cartridge with brackets 940 held in an elongated channel 14 of a surgical apparatus 10 is shown. A surgical cartridge with brackets 940 comprises a cartridge case 942 in which there is a centrally located elongated groove 944 passing through it at least partially. The elongated groove 944 is configured to allow axial movement of the scalpel body of the surgical instrument 10 during the dissection of the tissue as described above. The cartridge case 942 consists of a compressible hemostatic material, such as, for example, oxidized regenerated cellulose (ORC) or bioabsorbable foam of the above or below types, in which rows 946, 948, 950, 952 of unformed brackets 922 are located. To prevent deformation of the brackets 922 and activation of hemostatic material during insertion and installation of the cartridge, the entire cartridge with brackets 940 can be coated or wrapped with a biodegradable film 954, for example, of polydioxanone sold under the brand name PDS®, or polyglycs Rylsebacate (PGS), or another biodegradable film made from PGA (polyglycolic acid sold under the trade name Vikril), PCL (polycaprolactone), PLA or PLLA (polylactic acid), PHA (polyhydroxyalkanoate), PGCL (polyglexaprone 25 sold under the trade brand name Monocryl) or a mixture of PGA, PCL, PLA and PDS, impermeable until it is torn.

In FIG. 15 shows a cartridge 940, which further includes a cartridge support member 960 connected to the cartridge case 942. The cartridge support member 960 may be made from solid materials such as, for example, titanium, stainless steel, aluminum or alloys thereof, etc. ., and can be partially immersed in the cartridge case 942. The support element of the cartridge 960 can be held in place by, for example, film 954. In alternative embodiments, in which the use of limited bond is preferred, cyanoacrylate can be used to gluing "the two components together. In further embodiments, the cartridge housing 942 may be heated and “welded” or “welded” to the cartridge support member 960. The cartridge support member 960 forms at least a portion of the lower surface of the cartridge housing with brackets 942 to interface with the elongated channel 14. Cartridge support member 960 has one or more latching elements 962 protruding from it and intended for detachable connection of the supporting element of the cartridge 960 with an elongated channel 14. For removable connection of the supporting element of the cartridge 960 and long channel 14, you can use other forms of clamping elements / stitching structures.

The cartridge support member 960 has a series of support ribs 964, 966, 968, 970, 972, 974, 976 formed on it to provide some lateral support for the bases 924 of the brackets 922 in the rows of brackets 946, 948, 950, 952, as shown in FIG. 15. Thus, as an example, the support ribs can have the same length with rows of brackets. In FIG. 17 shows an alternative embodiment of a cartridge with brackets 940 ', which is essentially identical to block 940, except for the inclusion of the vertical parts of the ribs 978, 979, 980, 981, 982, 983, which protrude from the supporting ribs 964, 966, 968, 970, 972 , 976, respectively, to provide additional lateral support for the brackets 922. Parts of the ribs may be integral with the support element of the cartridge 960, and their height may be approximately ½ or less of the height of the cartridge. Thus, for example, the height of any vertical elements supporting the foam cannot be greater than the maximum height of the compressed foam. Thus, if the cartridge is intended, for example, to compress 1/3 of the original height, the height of the ribs can be from 66% of the height to compression to 10% of the height before compression.

When used after forming the brackets 922 in contact with the stop element 20 as described above, the stop element 20 goes into the open position, and the working tool 12 is pulled from the stitched fabric. When the working tool 12 is pulled from the stitched fabric, the cartridge case 942 remains attached to the stitched fabric and then disconnected from the support element of the cartridge 960, which remains connected to the elongated channel 14. The support element of the cartridge 960 is indicated by a color that differs from the color of the material filling the cartridge case 942, as well as the color of the elongated channel 14. This design allows the surgeon to clearly see that there is no cartridge with brackets inside the working tool. Thus, this frees the surgeon from accidental attempts to re-introduce / use the working tool until the cartridge with brackets is previously inserted into it. For this, the surgeon simply detaches the clamping elements of the support element of the cartridge 960 from the elongated channel 14 to allow the insertion of a new cartridge with brackets 940 into the support element of the cartridge 960. Although the use of cartridges with brackets 940, 940 'in combination with the surgical instrument 10 is described in this document It is contemplated that cartridge data can be effectively used with many other surgical instrument embodiments described herein without departing from the spirit and scope. and the present invention.

A cartridge with brackets may comprise a cartridge body and a plurality of brackets stored inside the cartridge body. When using the cartridge with brackets can be placed in the surgical field and placed on one side of the treated tissue. In addition, on the opposite side of the fabric can be placed forming a bracket stop. The thrust element can be located in the first jaw, and the cartridge with brackets in the other jaw, while the first and / or second jaws move towards each other. After locating the cartridge with brackets and focusing on the fabric, the brackets can be removed from the cartridge housing with brackets so that the brackets can pierce the fabric and interact with the stop element forming the brackets. After placing the brackets from the cartridge case with brackets, it can be removed from the surgical field. As described herein, a cartridge with brackets or at least a portion of the cartridge with brackets may be implanted with brackets. For example, as described in more detail below, the cartridge with brackets may comprise a cartridge body that can be compressed, squeezed, and / or deformed by the stop member when the stop member moves from the open position to the closed position. When compressing, breaking and / or creasing the cartridge body, the thrust element may deform the brackets located in the cartridge body. In an alternative embodiment, the jaw carrying the cassette with brackets can be moved in the direction of the stop to the closed position. Alternatively, the brackets may be deformed while they are at least partially located inside the cartridge case. The brackets can not be removed from the cartridge with brackets, since the brackets can be removed from the cartridge with brackets along with part of the cartridge body.

As represented in FIG. 18A-18D, a crushable cartridge with brackets, such as, for example, a cartridge with brackets 1000, may comprise a casing of the crushable implantable cartridge 1010 and, in addition, a plurality of brackets 1020 located in the casing of the crushable cartridge 1010, although in FIG. 18A-18D, only one bracket 1020 is represented. In FIG. 18A shows a cartridge with brackets 1000 supported by a cartridge support element with brackets or a groove for the cartridge with brackets 1030, the cartridge with brackets 1000 being shown in an uncompressed state. In such an uncompressed position, the abutment element 1040 may be in contact with the fabric “T” or not in contact with it. In use, the abutment member 1040 can be moved from the open position into contact with the T fabric, as shown in FIG. 18B, thereby bringing the fabric “T” to a specific position relative to the cartridge body 1010. Although the abutment element 1040 can ensure that the fabric T is adjacent to the tissue-contacting surface 1019 of the cartridge housing with brackets 1010, as shown in FIG. 18B, the cartridge case with brackets 1010 in this position may experience a slight compressive effect or pressure (if applicable), and the brackets 1020 may remain in an unformed, or inoperative, state. As represented in FIG. 18A and 18B, the cartridge housing with brackets 1010 may comprise one or more layers, and the legs 1021 of the brackets 1020 may extend upward through these layers. The housing of the cartridge 1010 may include a first layer 1011, a second layer 1012, a third layer 1013, the second layer 1012 may be located between the first layer 1011, the third layer 1013 and the fourth layer 1014, and the third layer 1013 may be located between the second layer 1012 and the fourth layer 1014 The bases 1022 of the brackets 1020 may be located in the cavities 1015 in the fourth layer 1014, and the legs of the brackets 1021 may vertically extend from the bases 1022 and pass, for example, through the fourth layer 1014, the third layer 1013 and the second layer 1012. Each deformable leg 1021 may have a tip , such as, for example, a sharp tip 1023, which may be in the second layer 1012, for example, when the cartridge with brackets 1000 is in an uncompressed state. The tips 1023 may not protrude and / or penetrate the first layer 1011, while the ends 1023 may not protrude through the contact surface with fabric 1019 until the cartridge with brackets 1000 is in an uncompressed state. Alternatively, the sharp tips 1023 may be located in the third layer 1013 and / or in another suitable layer when the cartridge with brackets is in an uncompressed state. Alternatively, the cartridge housing with brackets may have any suitable number of layers, such as, for example, less than four layers or more than four layers.

As described in more detail below, the first layer 1011 may consist of a support material and / or plastic material, such as, for example, polydioxanone (PDS) and / or polyglycolic acid (PGA), and the second layer 1012 may consist of bioabsorbable foam and / or compressible hemostatic material, such as, for example, oxidized regenerated cellulose (ORC). One or more of the following layers, such as the first layer 1011, the second layer 1012, the third layer 1013 and the fourth layer 1014, can hold the brackets 1020 in the cartridge housing with brackets 1010 and, in addition, keep the brackets 1020 in the necessary orientation relative to each other. The third layer 1013 may consist of a supporting material or a completely crumple-resistant or inelastic material, which can be arranged to hold the legs 1021 of the brackets 1020 in a certain position relative to each other. Moreover, the second layer 1012 and the fourth layer 1014, which are located on opposite sides of the third layer 1013, can stabilize or reduce the movement of the brackets 1020, even if the second layer 1012 and the fourth layer 1014 can consist of compressible foam or elastic material. The ends of the brackets 1023 of the legs of the brackets 1021 can be at least partially immersed in the first layer 1011. For example, the first layer 1011 and the third layer 1013 can be made to jointly and firmly hold the legs of the brackets 1021 in a certain position. The first layer 1011 and the third layer 1013 may be bioabsorbable plastic sheets such as, for example, polyglycolic acid (PGA), commercially available under the trade name Vicryl, polylactic acid (PLA or PLLA), polydioxanone (PDS), polyhydroxyalkanoate (PHA) ), polyglecaprone 25 (PGCL), commercially available under the trade name Monocryl, polycaprolactone (PCL) and / or a mixture of PGA, PLA, PDS, PHA, PGCL and / or PCL, and each of the second layer 1012 and fourth layer 1014 may consist of at least one hemostatic material or agent.

Although the first layer 1011 may be compressible, the second layer 1012 may be substantially more compressible than the first layer 1011. For example, the second layer 1012 may be, for example, approximately two times more compressible, approximately three times more compressible, approximately four times more compressible, about five times more compressible and / or about ten times more compressible than the first layer 1011. In other words, with this force, the second layer 1012 can be compressed about two times, about three times, about four e times, about five times and / or about ten times stronger than the first layer 1011. The second layer 1012 can be, for example, about two to ten times more compressible than the first layer 1011. The second layer 1012 can contain many formed there are air voids, and the number and / or size of air voids in the second layer 1012 can be controlled to provide the necessary compressibility of the second layer 1012. Similar to the above, although the third layer 1013 can be compressible, the fourth layer 1014 can be substantially more compressible than the third layer 1013. For example, the fourth layer 1014 can be, for example, about two times more compressible, about three times more compressible, about four times more compressible, about five times more compressible and / or about ten times more compressible than the third layer 1013. In other words, with this force, the fourth layer 1014 can be compressed about two times, about three times, about four times, about five times and / or about ten times stronger than three this layer 1013. The fourth layer 1014 may be between layers whose compressibility is about two to ten times greater than, for example, the compressibility of the third layer 1013. The fourth layer 1014 may include many air-filled voids, the number and / or size of which in the fourth layer 1014 can be adjusted to obtain the desired compressibility of the fourth layer 1014. In various situations, the compressibility of the cartridge body or the layer of the cartridge body can be described as a compression ratio, i.e. the distance that the layer compresses when a certain force is applied. For example, a layer with a higher compression ratio will compress over a greater distance when a certain compressive force is applied to it, compared to a layer with a lower compression ratio. This means that the second layer 1012 can have a higher compression ratio than the first layer 1011, and the fourth layer 1014 can likewise have a higher compression ratio than the third layer 1013. The second layer 1012 and the fourth layer 1014 can consist of the same the same material and have the same compression ratio. The second layer 1012 and the fourth layer 1014 may be made of materials having different compression ratios. The first layer 1011 and the third layer 1013 can similarly consist of the same material and can have the same compression ratio. The first layer 1011 and the third layer 1013 may be made of materials having different compression ratios.

When the abutment element 1040 moves to its closed position, it can come in contact with fabric T and apply a compressive force to fabric T and the cassette with brackets 1000, as shown in FIG. 18C. In such situations, the abutment element 1040 may push the upper surface, or tissue-contacting surface 1019, of the cartridge housing 1010 down towards the support element of the cartridge with brackets 1030. The support element of the cartridge 1030 may comprise a support surface of the cartridge 1031, which may be configured to hold the cartridge with brackets 1000 so that the cartridge with brackets 1000 is compressed between the bearing surface of the cartridge 1031 and the surface for contact with the fabric 1041 of the stop element 1040. Due to pressure provided with the stop element 1040, the cartridge case 1010 can be compressed, and the stop element 1040 can interact with the brackets 1020. More specifically, squeezing the cartridge case 1010 and moving the surface to contact the fabric 1019 down can cause the ends of the legs 1023 of the brackets 1021 to pierce the first layer 1011 of the case cartridge 1010, pierce the fabric T and enter into the forming pockets 1042 in the abutment element 1040. Upon further compression of the block body 1010 under the influence of the abutment 1040, the tips 1023 can come into contact with the walls forming the forming recess 1042, and thereby the legs 1021 may, for example, deformed or bent inwardly as shown in FIG. 18C. After deformation of the legs 1021 brackets, as shown in FIG. 18C, the bases 1022 of the brackets 1020 may contact or be supported by the cartridge support member with brackets 1030. As described in more detail below, the support element of the cartridge 1030 can have many supporting devices, such as, for example, recesses, grooves or recesses 1032 that hold the brackets 1020 or at least the base 1022 of the brackets 1020 during the molding of the brackets 1020. As shown in FIG. . 18C, the cavities 1015 in the fourth layer 1014 may collapse upon applying compressive force to the cartridge body with brackets 1010. In addition to the cavities 1015, the cartridge body with brackets 1010 may further comprise one or more voids, such as, for example, voids 1016, which may contain or not contain part of the brackets located in them and which can be configured to crush the cartridge case 1010. Cavities 1015 and / or voids 1016 can be crushed so that the walls forming the cavities deflect down and in contact with the bearing surface of the cartridge 1031 and / or in contact with the layer of the housing of the cartridge 1010 located under the cavities and / or voids.

From a comparison of FIG. 18B and FIG. 18C, it is evident that the second layer 1012 and the fourth layer 1014 were substantially compressed by applying a compressive force by the abutment member 1040. It can also be noted that the first layer 1011 and the third layer 1013 were also compressed. When the stop element 1040 is moved to the closed position, it can continue to compress the cartridge body 1010 by pushing the fabric contacting surface 1019 down towards the cartridge support element with brackets 1030. When the block body 1010 is further compressed, the stop element 1040 can deform the brackets 1020, giving them a final form as shown in FIG. 18D. As represented in FIG. 18D, the legs 1021 of each bracket 1020 may be deformed downward to the base 1022 of each bracket 1020 to grip at least a portion of the fabric T, the first layer 1011, the second layer 1012, the third layer 1013 and the fourth layer 1014 between the deformable legs 1021 and the base 1022. Of comparison FIG. 18C and 18D, it is also apparent that the second layer 1012 and the fourth layer 1014 were substantially further compressed by applying a compressive force by the thrust member 1040. When comparing FIG. 18D and 18C, it can also be noted that the first layer 1011 and the third layer 1013 were also further compressed. After the brackets 1020 are completely or at least sufficiently formed, the stop element 1040 can be lifted from the fabric T, and the cartridge support element with brackets 1030 can be removed and / or detached from the cartridge with brackets 1000. As shown in FIG. 18D, as a result of the above, the block body 1010 can be implanted together with brackets 1020. In various situations, the implanted cartridge case 1010 can support tissue along the line of brackets. Under various circumstances, a hemostatic substance and / or other suitable drug that is contained in the implantable cartridge case 1010 may affect the tissue for some time. A hemostatic substance, as mentioned above, can reduce bleeding from stitched and / or dissected tissue, while a tissue bonding or gluing substance can give the fabric strength for some time. The implantable cartridge case 1010 may consist of materials such as ORC (oxidized regenerated cellulose), extracellular proteins such as collagen, polyglycolic acid (PGA), sold under the trade name Vicryl, polylactic acid (PLA or PLLA), polydioxanone ( PDS), polyhydroxyalkanoate (PHA), polyglexaprone 25 (PGCL) sold under the trade name Monocryl, polycaprolactone (PCL) and / or various mixtures of PGA, PLA, PDS, PHA, PGCL and / or PCL. In certain situations, the cartridge case 1010 may contain an antibiotic and / or antimicrobial material, such as, for example, colloidal silver and / or triclosan, which can reduce the risk of infection in the surgical field.

The layers of the cartridge body 1010 may be connected to each other. The second layer 1012 can be attached to the first layer 1011, the third layer 1013 can be attached to the second layer 1012, and the fourth layer 1014 can be attached to the third layer 1013 using at least one adhesive, such as, for example, fibrin and / or protein hydrogel . The layers of the cartridge body 1010 can be connected to each other by interlocking mechanical elements. For example, the first layer 1011 and the second layer 1012 may contain corresponding interlocking elements, such as, for example, a groove mount and / or a dovetail joint. Each of the second layer 1012 and the third layer 1013 may similarly contain corresponding interconnected elements, while each of the third layer 1013 and the fourth layer 1014 may contain corresponding interconnected elements. Although not shown, the cartridge with brackets 1000 may contain one or more rivets that can pass, for example, through one or more layers of the cartridge body 1010. For example, each rivet may contain a first end, or a head, located near the first layer 1011, and a second head located near the fourth layer 1014, which can either be connected or formed at the second end of the rivet. Due to the compressibility of the cartridge case 1010, rivets can compress the cartridge case 1010 in such a way that, for example, the rivet heads are lowered relative to the surface to come in contact with fabric 1019 and / or the bottom surface 1018 of the cartridge case 1010. For example, the rivets can be made of bioabsorbable material such such as polyglycolic acid sold under the trade name Vicryl (PGA), polylactic acid (PLA or PLLA), polydiaxanone (PDS), polyhydroxyalkanoate (PHA), polyglexaprone 25 (PGCL) sold under the trademark brand Monocryl, polycaprolactone (PCL), and / or composite material, consisting, for example, PGA, PLA, PDS, PHA, PGCL and / or PCL. The layers of the cartridge case 1010 can only be connected to each other by means of the brackets 1020 contained therein. For example, friction contact between the legs of the brackets 1021 and the cartridge case 1010, for example, can hold the layers of the cartridge case 1010 together and, after the brackets are formed, the layers are inside the brackets 1020. At least part of the legs of the brackets 1021 may have a rough surface or a rough coating, which increases the friction force between the brackets 1020 and the cartridge body 1010.

As described above, the surgical instrument may comprise a first jaw including a cartridge support member with brackets 1030, and a second jaw including a cartridge retainer 1040. As will be described in more detail below, a cartridge with brackets 1000 may contain one or more holding elements, which can be adapted to engage the cartridge support element with brackets 1030, thereby releasably holding the cartridge with brackets 1000 in the cartridge support element with brackets 1030. A cartridge with brackets 1000 can be connected to the support member the staple cartridge 1030 via at least one bonding agent, such as, e.g., fibrin and / or protein hydrogel. When used in at least one situation, especially in laparoscopic and / or endoscopic surgery, the second jaw can be moved to the closed position opposite the first jaw, for example, so that the first and second jaws can be inserted through the trocar into the surgical field. For example, a trocar may have an internal opening or cannula with a diameter of 5 mm, through which the first and second branches can be inserted. The second jaw can be moved to a partially closed position, which is intermediate between the open position and the closed position, which allows the first and second jaws to be inserted through the trocar without deforming the brackets 1020 contained in the cartridge case with brackets 1010. For example, the stop element 1040 may not exert a compressive force to the cartridge housing with brackets 1010 when the second jaw is in an intermediate partially closed position, while alternatively, the stop member 1040 can compress the cartridge housing on brackets 1010, when the second jaws are in a partially closed intermediate position. Even if the stop element 1040 can compress the cartridge case with brackets 1010 when it is in such an intermediate position, the stop element 1040 may not compress the cartridge case with brackets 1010 in such a way that the stop element 1040 can contact the brackets 1020, and / or thus so that the brackets 1020 deform under the influence of the stop 1040. After the first and second branches are inserted through the trocar into the surgical field, the second branch can be opened again, and the stop element 1040 and the cassette with brackets 1000 can be placed in necessity position relative to the tissue as described above.

As represented in FIG. 19A-19D, the end clamp of the surgical stapler may include an implantable cartridge with brackets 1100 located between the abutment element 1140 and the abutment element of the cartridge with brackets 1130. Similar to the above, the abutment element 1140 may comprise a tissue contacting surface 1141, the cartridge with brackets 1100 may comprise the fabric contacting surface 1119, and the cartridge support element with brackets 1130 may comprise a support surface 1131 that can be configured to support the cartridge at a kami 1100. As shown in FIG. 19A, the abutment element 1140 can be used to position the fabric T adjacent to the tissue contact surface 1119 of the cartridge with brackets 1100 without deformation of the cartridge with brackets 1100, and when the abutment element 1140 is in this position in contact with the fabric surface 1141 may be located at a distance of 1101a from the supporting surface 1131 of the cartridge with brackets, and the surface in contact with the fabric 1119 may be located at a distance of 1102a from the supporting surface of the cartridge 1131 with brackets. Thereafter, when the stop member 1140 is moved to the cartridge support member 1130 with brackets, as shown in FIG. 19B, the abutment member 1140 may push the top surface, or tissue-contacting surface 1119, of the bracket bracket 1100 down and squeeze the first layer 1111 and the second layer 1112 of the block body 1110. When the first 1111 and second 1112 layers are compressed, see FIG. 84B, the second layer 1112 can be destroyed, and the legs 1121 of the brackets 1120 can pierce the first layer 1111 and enter tissue T. For example, the brackets 1120 can be at least partially inside the cavities or voids 1115 in the second layer 1112 and when the second layer 1112 compressed, the cavities 1115 are compressed and, as a result, allow the second layer 1112 to wrinkle around the brackets 1120. The second layer 1112 can contain cover parts 1116 that can protrude above the cavities for the brackets 1115 and surround or at least partially surround the cavities for the brackets 1115. FIG. 19B illustrates cover portions 1116 that, when broken, fall down into the bracket cavity 115. The second layer 1112 may contain one or more weakened areas, which can facilitate the crushing of the second layer 1112. Such weakened parts may contain, for example, notches, perforations and / or thin in cross section parts that can provide controlled crushing of the cartridge body 1110. The first layer 1111 may contain one or more weakened parts that facilitate the passage of the legs of the brackets 1121 through the first layer 1111. Such weakened parts may contain, for example, notches, perforations and / or thin section sections, which rye can be combined or at least substantially align with legs of brackets 1121.

When the abutment member 1140 is in a partially closed, inoperative position, as shown in FIG. 19A, it may be located at a distance of 1101a from the supporting surface of the cartridge with brackets 1131 so that a gap is formed between them. This gap can be filled with a cartridge with brackets 1100 high 1102a and body tissues T. As the stop element 1140 moves down to compress the cassette 1100, referring again to FIG. 19B), the distance between the contact surface 1141 and the abutment surface 1131 can be defined as a distance 1101b that is shorter than the distance 1101a. In various situations, the space between the fabric contacting surface 1141 of the abutment 1140 and the supporting surface for the cartridge 1131, indicated by the distance 1101b, may be greater than the original height of the undeformed cartridge with brackets 1102a. When the abutment member 1140 is moved closer to the abutment surface 1131 of the block, as shown in FIG. 19C, the second layer 1112 may continue to wrinkle, and the distance between the bracket legs 1121 and the forming recesses 1142 may decrease. Similarly, the distance between the contact surface of the fabric 1141 and the bearing surface of the cartridge 1131 can be reduced to a distance 1101c that can be greater than, less than, or equal to the original height of the undeformed cartridge 1102a. As represented in FIG. 19D, the thrust member 1140 can be moved to the final, actuated position in which the brackets 1120 are fully formed or at least formed to the desired height. In this position, the fabric contacting surface 1141 of the abutment 1140 may be at a distance 1101d from the abutment surface for the cartridge 1131, the distance 1101d being less than the original height of the undeformed cartridge 1102a. As represented in FIG. 19D, the bracket cavities 1115 may be completely or at least substantially wrinkled, and the brackets 1120 may be completely or at least substantially surrounded by a crushed second layer 1112. In various situations, thereafter, the stop member 1140 may be moved away from the cartridge with brackets 1100. After disengaging the stop 1140 from the cartridge with brackets 1100, the cartridge housing 1110 may at least partially experience backward expansion in various regions, that is, for example, in regions between adjacent brackets 1120. The compressed cartridge housing 1110 may not recover to form its own due to elasticity. The formed brackets 1120, as well as the cartridge case 1110 located between adjacent brackets 1120, can exert pressure or exert a compressive force on tissue T, which can provide various therapeutic effects.

As described above with reference to FIG. 84A, each bracket 1120 may comprise protruding legs of the bracket 1121. Although the brackets 1120 shown in the figures contain two brace legs 1121, various brackets may be used that may contain one brace leg or, in an alternative embodiment, more than two brace legs such as three brace legs or four brace legs. As represented in FIG. 19A, each bracket leg 1121 can be placed in the second layer 1112 of the block body 1110 so as to secure the brackets 1120 in the second layer 1112. The brackets 1120 can be inserted into the brackets 1115 in the cartridge case 1110 so that the ends 1123 of the legs of the brackets 1121 enter the cavities 1115 before the bases 1122. After inserting the tips 1123 into the cavities 1115, the tips 1123 can be pressed into the covering parts 1116 and the second layer 1112 can be cut. The brackets 1120 can be placed to a significant depth in the second layer 1112 so that the brackets 1120 do not move or along at least with the material did not move relative to the second layer 1112. The brackets 1120 can be immersed in the second layer 1112 to a sufficient depth so that the bases 1122 are located in the cavities for the brackets 1115 or are immersed inside these cavities. Alternatively, the bases 1122 may not be located in the second layer 1112 or may not be immersed in it. In accordance with FIG. 19A, the bases 1122 may extend below the lower surface 1118 of the cartridge body 1110. The bases 1122 may lie on the bearing surface of the cartridge 1130 or may be located directly opposite it. The bearing surface of the cartridge 1130 may have supporting elements protruding from it and / or devices arranged inside it, for example, the bases 1122 of the brackets 1120 can be located inside it and supported by one or more supporting grooves, grooves or grooves 1132, for example, on the bearing surface of the cartridge 1130, as described in more detail below.

In addition to the above, as shown in FIG. 20, the bases 1122 of the brackets 1120 can be positioned directly opposite the supporting surface 1131 of the supporting element 1130 of the cartridge with brackets. Moreover, the bases of the brackets 1122 have rounded or curved lower surfaces 1124, for example, the bases of the brackets 1122 can move or slide along the bearing surface of the cartridge with brackets 1131. Such sliding can occur when the stop element 1140 puts pressure on the ends 1123 of the legs of the brackets 1121 during the formation of the brackets . As described above and in accordance with FIG. 21, the cartridge support member with brackets 1130 may comprise one or more retaining grooves 1132, which may be configured to eliminate or at least reduce the relative mobility of the bases of the brackets 1122 relative to the bearing surface of the cartridge with brackets 1131. For example, the surface of each retaining groove 1132 may be denoted by a contour that matches or at least substantially matches the contour of the bottom surface of the bracket located therein. For example, the lower surface 1124 of the base 1122 shown in FIG. 21 may comprise a circular or at least substantially circular surface, and the support groove 1132 may also comprise a circular or at least substantially circular surface. For example, the surface bounding the groove 1132 may be limited by a curve with a radius that is greater than or equal to the radius of the curve that borders the bottom surface 1124. Although the grooves 1132 can help prevent or reduce relative sliding movement between the brackets 1120 and the cartridge support element with brackets 1130, the grooves 1132 can also be configured to prevent or reduce relative rotational movement between the brackets 1120 and the supporting element of the cartridge with brackets 1130. More concret Clearly, the grooves 1132 can be configured to hold the bases 1122 tightly in place to prevent or reduce the rotation of the brackets 1120 along the axis 1129, for example, so that the brackets 1120 do not rotate and do not rotate during their deformation.

In addition to the above, each bracket 1120 can be formed from a round or at least substantially circular cross-section of the wire. The legs and base of each bracket can be made of wire with a non-circular section, such as, for example, a rectangular section. For example, the cartridge support element with brackets 1130 contains corresponding non-circular grooves, such as, for example, rectangular grooves that are configured to connect to the bases of such brackets. As represented in FIG. 22, each bracket 1120 may include a crown, such as, for example, a crown 1125 formed on the base 1122, each crown 1125 can be positioned inside the support groove in the cartridge support element with brackets 1130. For example, each crown 1125 may have a square cross section and / or rectangular, which can be configured to hold square and / or rectangular in the grooves 1134, for example, in the support element 1130 of the cartridge with brackets 1130. The crowns 1125 can be made of bioabsorbable plastic, such as polyglycolic acid (PGA), marketed under the brand name Vicryl, polylactic acid (PLA or PLLA), polydioxanone (PDS), polyhydroxyalkanoate (PHA), polyglexaprone 25 (PGCL), marketed under the brand name Monocryl, polycaprolactone (PCL), and / or composite materials consisting, for example, of PGA, PLA, PDS, PHA, PGCL and / or PCL, with crowns being formed around the bases 1122 of the brackets 1120, for example, by injection molding. Various crowns and methods for forming various crowns are described in US Patent Application Ser. No. 11/541123 entitled “Surgical brackets with compressible or crumpled elements for holding tissue into them and staplers for their placement,” filed September 29, 2006, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. As represented in FIG. 22, the grooves 1134 may further comprise guides, or chamfers, 1135, which may be configured to facilitate insertion of the heads 1125 into the grooves 1134. The bases and / or crowns of the brackets 1120 may be located within the grooves 1134 when the cartridge with brackets 1100 is connected to the support element cartridge with brackets 1130. The crowns 1125 of the brackets 1120 can be flush with the grooves 1134 when the cartridge with brackets 1100 is connected to the supporting element of the cartridge with brackets 1130. For example, the crowns 1125 may not enter the grooves 1134 until the brackets 1121 will be a compressive force is applied, and the bases and / or crowns of the brackets 1120 will not be forced down into the grooves 1134.

As represented in FIG. 23 and 24, a bracket cartridge, such as, for example, a bracket cartridge 1200, may comprise a compressible implantable cartridge housing 1210 comprising an outer layer 1211 and an inner layer 1212. Similar to the above, the bracket cartridge 1200 may include a plurality of brackets 1220 located inside cartridge housings 1210. Each bracket 1220 may have a base 1222 and one or more protruding legs 1221 from it. For example, the legs of the brackets 1221 can be inserted into the inner layer 1212 and immersed in it to such a depth that the bases 1222 of the brackets 1220 are for example, they are bordered and / or located near the lower surface 1218 of the inner layer 1212. As shown in FIG. 23 and 24, the inner layer 1212 does not contain cavities for the brackets configured to hold part of the brackets 1220, while, alternatively, the inner layer 1212 may contain such cavities for the brackets. In addition to the above, the inner layer 1212 may consist of a compressible material, such as a bioabsorbable film and / or oxidized regenerated cellulose (ORC), which may be configured to crush the cartridge housing 1210 when subjected to a compressive load. The inner layer 1212 may consist of lyophilized foam containing, for example, polylactic acid (PLA) and / or polyglycolic acid (PGA). ORC is commercially available under the Surgicel trademark and may be in the form of sparse weave (like surgical swabs), single fibers (like cotton balls) and / or foam. The inner layer 1212 may be formed from a material including drugs, such as, for example, lyophilized thrombin and / or fibrin, which are inside the layer and / or applied thereto as a coating and can, for example, be activated by exposure to water and / or body fluids. For example, dry frozen thrombin and / or fibrin can be applied, for example, to a matrix of Vicryl (PGA) material. Under certain circumstances, however, activated drugs may be inadvertently activated, for example, by inserting a cartridge with brackets 1200 into the surgical field. As represented in FIG. 23 and 24, the outer layer 1211 may be formed of a waterproof or at least substantially waterproof material such that liquids cannot come into contact or at least substantially cannot come into contact with the inner layer 1212 until the cartridge body is compressed 1210 and penetration of the legs of the brackets through the outer layer 1211 and / or until the dissection of the outer layer 1211 in one way or another. The outer layer 1211 may consist of a support material and / or plastic material, such as, for example, polydioxanone (PDS) and / or polyglycolic acid (PGA). The outer layer 1211 may include a film surrounding the inner layer 1212 and the brackets 1220. In particular, the brackets 1220 can be inserted into the inner layer 1212, and the outer layer 1211 can be wrapped around a subassembly containing the inner layer 1212 and brackets 1220, and then sealed.

As represented in FIG. 25 and 26, a cartridge with brackets, such as, for example, a cartridge with brackets 1300, may comprise a compressible implantable cartridge case 1310 comprising an outer layer 1311 and an inner layer 1312. Similar to the above, the cartridge with brackets 1300 may further comprise brackets 1320 located inside cartridge housings 1310, each bracket 1320 may include a base 1322 and one or more legs 1321 extending from them. Similarly to a cartridge with brackets 1200 of the base 1322, the brackets 1320 can extend beneath the lower surface 1318 of the inner layer 1312, and outside the back layer 1311 may surround the bases 1322. For example, the outer layer 1311 can be substantially so flexible that it covers each base of the bracket 1322 so that the outer layer 1311 corresponds to the outline of the bases 1322. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 89, the outer layer 1211 can be stiff enough to extend around the bases 1222 without matching the contour of each base 1222. In any case, the outer layer 1311 can be located between the bases 1322 of the brackets 1320 and the bearing surface of the cartridge with brackets, such as, for example, bearing surfaces 1031 or 1131, holding the cartridge with brackets 1300. For example, the outer layer 1311 may be located between the bases 1322 and holding grooves, such as, for example, grooves 1032 or 1132 formed in the bearing surface of the cartridge with brackets. For example, in addition to the above, the outer layer 1311 can be configured to limit the movement of the bases 1322 and / or increase the coefficient of friction between the bases 1322 and the bearing surface of the cartridge with brackets and / or support grooves to reduce their movement relative to each other. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 92 and 93, the outer layer of the cartridge with brackets, such as, for example, the cartridge with brackets 1400, may not completely surround the brackets located therein. For example, the outer layer 1411 of the compressible implantable cartridge case 1410 can be attached to the inner layer 1412 before the legs 1421 of the brackets 1420 are inserted into the cartridge case 1410. As a result of the base 1422 described above, the brackets 1420 can extend outward from the outer layer 1411, and, for example, the bases 1422 can be located directly in the supporting grooves 1032 or 1132, for example, the bearing surfaces of the cartridge with brackets 1031 or 1131a. The legs of the brackets 1421 can cut through the outer layer 1411 when they are inserted. In various situations, the holes created by the legs of the brackets 1421 can tightly surround the legs of the brackets 1421 so that the fluid leak between the legs of the brackets 1421 and the outer layer 1411 is very small or absent, which can reduce or eliminate the risk of premature activation and / or leakage of the drug means contained within the cartridge body with brackets 1410.

As described above and presented in FIG. 23 and 24, the legs 1221 of the brackets 1220 may be housed in the block body 1210, and the bases 1222 of the brackets 1220 may extend outward from the bottom surface 1218 of the inner layer 1212. In addition to the above, the inner layer 1212 may not contain cavities configured to hold brackets 1220. Alternatively, as presented in FIG. 29 and 30, a cartridge with brackets, for example, such as a cartridge 1500, may comprise a crushable implantable cartridge case 1510 containing cavities for brackets 1515 that can be configured to hold at least part of the brackets 1520. For example, the upper part of the legs 1521 of the brackets 1520 can be embedded in the inner layer 1512, while the bottom of the legs of the brackets 1521 and their bases 1522 can be located in the cavities for the brackets 1515. The bases 1522 can be entirely in the cavities for the brackets 1515, while the bases 1522 can lesser partially protrude below the lower surface 1518 of the inner layer 1512. Similarly to the above, the outer layer 1511 may include an inner layer 1512 and brackets 1520 located therein. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 31, the cartridge with brackets 1600 may include brackets 1620 located in the cavity for brackets 1615 in a compressible implantable housing of the cartridge 1610, with at least a portion of the brackets 1620 not surrounded by an outer layer 1611. For example, each bracket 1620 may contain brace legs 1621, which at least partially immersed in the inner layer 1612, as well as the base 1622, which protrude outward around the outer layer 1611.

As represented in FIG. 32 and 33, a cartridge with brackets, such as, for example, a cartridge with brackets 1700, may comprise a compressible implantable cartridge case 1710 and a plurality of brackets 1720 at least partially located inside the cartridge case 1710. The cartridge case 1710 may include an outer layer 1711, an inner a layer 1712, as well as a leveling matrix 1740, which can be arranged to align and / or hold the brackets 1720 in the required position inside the housing of the cartridge 1710. The inner layer 1712 may include a recess 1741, which can be performed to hold the alignment matrix. The leveling matrix 1140 may be pressed by pressing to the recess 1741 and / or by another method that can securely attach it to the inner layer 1712 using at least one adhesive, such as, for example, fibrin and / or protein hydrogel. The recess 1741 may be configured so that the lower surface 1742 of the alignment matrix 1740 is aligned or at least substantially aligned with the lower surface 1718 of the inner layer 1712. The lower surface 1742 of the alignment matrix may be recessed relative to the lower surface 1718 of the second layer 1712 and / or may pass from her. Each bracket 1720 may have a base 1722 and one or more legs 1721 protruding from the base 1722, and at least a portion of the legs of the brackets 1721 may protrude through the alignment matrix 1740. The alignment matrix 1740 may further comprise a plurality of holes and / or grooves passing through it, which can be configured to receive the legs of the brackets 1721. For example, each hole can be configured to tightly insert the legs of the brackets 1721 so that the relative movement between the legs of the brackets 1721 and the side walls of the hole were insignificant or absent. The holes of the alignment matrix may not completely extend beyond the boundaries of the alignment matrix 1740, and for cutting through the alignment matrix 1740, the legs of the brackets 1721 may require dissection of this matrix.

The alignment matrix 1740 may consist of a molded plastic housing, which may be more rigid or less compressible than the inner layer 1712 and / or the outer layer 1711. For example, the alignment matrix 1740 may be made of plastic material and / or other suitable material, such as, for example, polydioxanone (PDS) and / or polyglycolic acid (PGA). The alignment matrix 1740 can be attached to the inner layer 1712, and then the legs of the brackets 1721 can be inserted through the alignment matrix 1740 and placed in the inner layer 712. The lower surface 1742 of the alignment matrix 1740 may contain, for example, one or more rotational grooves, grooves or slots which can be configured to retain at least partially the bases 1722 of the brackets 1720. Similarly to the above, the outer layer 1711 can then be arranged around a subassembly containing an inner layer 1712 aligning m Atrica 1740 and brackets 1720. In an alternative embodiment, the outer layer 1711 can be positioned around the subassembly containing the inner layer 1712 and the alignment matrix 1740, after which the brackets 1720 can be inserted through the outer layer 1711, the alignment matrix 1740 and the inner layer 1712. In any case as a result of the above, the inner layer 1712, the alignment matrix 1740 and / or the outer layer 1711 can be configured to hold the brackets 1720 in the required position until and / or after their deformation under the influence of the stop, as op Sano above. For example, the alignment matrix 1740 can serve to hold the brackets 1720 in the required position until the cartridge with brackets 1700 is implanted into the patient’s body, as well as to attach tissue along a series of brackets after implantation of the cartridge with brackets 1700. The brackets 1720 can be fixed to the alignment matrix 1740 without conclusion for example, into the inner layer 1712 and / or the outer layer 1711.

As represented in FIG. 34-40, a cartridge with brackets, such as, for example, a cartridge with brackets 1800, can be installed by compressing the inner layer 1812, inserting brackets, such as, for example, brackets 1820, into the inner layer 1812, and also wrapping the inner layer 1812 with the outer layer 1811. As mainly represented in FIG. 34, the compressible inner layer 1812 contains a plurality of parenthesis cavities 1815 formed therein, although other embodiments are possible in which the inner layer 1812 does not contain a cavity for the brackets, as described above. As represented in FIG. 35, a compressible inner layer 1812 may be located between the transfer plate 1850 and the support plate 1860 and compressed between the compression surfaces of the plates 1852 and 1862, respectively. As represented in FIG. 35, the upper and lower surfaces of the inner layer 1812 can be pressed against each other, and thus, the inner layer 1812 can protrude outward in the lateral directions. The inner layer 1812 can be compressed, for example, to a height of about one third of its original height, and its height or thickness can be, for example, from about 1.5 mm (0.06 inches) to about 2.0 mm (0.08 inches) in a compressed state. As represented in FIG. 35, the transfer plate 1850 may further comprise a plurality of brackets, such as, for example, brackets 1820 arranged in a plurality of recesses for the brackets 1853. In addition, the transfer plate 1850 may further comprise a plurality of ejectors 1851, which may be configured to push the brackets 1820 up and out of the recesses for the brackets 1853. As shown in FIG. 36, the pushers 1851 can be used to push the legs 1821 of the brackets 1820 inward and through the compressed inner layer 1812. The pushers 1851 can be configured so that their upper surface is flush or at least flush with the pressing surface 1852 of the transfer plate 1850 when the brackets 1820 are fully left the holes 1853 of the transfer plate 1850. As shown in FIG. 36, the support plate 1860 may comprise a plurality of receiving holes 1861 that can be configured to hold the legs of the brackets 1821 or at least the ends of the legs of the brackets 1821 after being pushed through the inner layer 1812. The receiving holes 1861 or the like. may be necessary if the inner layer 1812 is compressed to a height that is less than the height of the brackets 1820, and thus, when the brackets 1820 are completely removed from the bracket holes 1853, the legs of the brackets 1821 may protrude from the upper surface of the compressed inner layer 1812. Alternatively, the inner the layer 1812 can be compressed to a height that is greater than the height of the brackets 1820, and thus, the presence of the receiving holes 1861 in the support plate 1860 may not be necessary.

After inserting the brackets 1820 into the inner layer 1812, as shown in FIG. 37, the support plate 1860 can be moved away from the transfer plate 1850 to decompress the inner layer 1812. In such situations, the inner layer 1812 may experience elastic back expansion to its original or at least close to its original height before compression. When the inner layer 1812 undergoes back expansion, the height of the inner layer 1812 can increase so that it becomes greater than the height of the brackets 1820 and that the legs 1821 of the brackets 1820 will no longer protrude from the upper surface of the inner layer 1812. In various situations, the receiving holes 1861 can be made with the possibility of holding the legs of the brackets 1821 in the required position at least until the moment when the support plate 1860 will be moved a sufficient distance so that the legs 1821 are no longer located in holes 1861. In such situations, the receiving holes 1861 can help maintain the mutual alignment of the brackets 1820 in the inner layer 1812 after it is back expanded. In various situations, the inner layer 1812 and the brackets 1820 located therein may contain a subassembly 1801, which, as shown in FIG. 38, it is possible to insert, for example, into the outer layer 1811. For example, the outer layer 1811 may comprise a cavity 1802 configured to hold the sub-assembly 1801 therein. In various situations, tools such as, for example, forceps 1855 can be used to pull the outer layer 1811 to subnode 1801. After the subnode 1801 is sufficiently positioned inside the outer layer 1811, as shown in FIG. 39, the outer layer 1811 can be sealed. The outer layer 1811 can be sealed by applying thermal energy to its part. More specifically, the outer layer 1811 can be made of plastic material, while the open end of the outer layer 1811 can be sealed with one or more heating elements, or a thermo-adhesive apparatus, 1856 for bonding and / or sealing the perimeter of the open end of the outer layer 1811. For example, as shown in FIG. 40, the excess portion 1857 of the outer layer 1811 can be removed, and then the cartridge with brackets 1800 can be used as described herein.

As described above, the cassette with brackets can be placed inside the part for attaching the cartridge with brackets and / or mounted on it. As represented in FIG. 41 and 42, the cartridge nozzle with brackets may have a channel for the cartridge with brackets, such as channel 1930, which may be adapted to accommodate portions of the cartridge with brackets, such as the cartridge with brackets 1900. The channel for the cartridge with brackets 1930 may comprise a lower bearing surface 1931, a first transverse bearing wall 1940 and a second transverse bearing wall 1941. When using a cassette with brackets 1900, it is possible to position the cartridge channel with brackets 1930 so that the cartridge with brackets 1900 has I on the lower support surface 1931 and / or adjacent to and between the first transverse support wall 1940 and a second lateral support wall 1941. The first lateral support wall 1940 and a second lateral supporting wall 1941 may form between them a lateral gap. For example, a cartridge with brackets 1900 may have a lateral width 1903, which is the same and / or wider than the side gap defined by the bearing walls 1940 and 1941 so that the compressible implantable housing of the cartridge cartridge 1910 with brackets 1900 is tightly held between the walls 1940 and 1941. As Alternatively, the lateral width 1903 of the cartridge with brackets 1900 may be narrower than the gap bounded by the first and second side walls 1940 and 1941. At least a portion of the walls 1940 and 1941 and the lower bearing surface 1931 may be formed by a stamped metal channel, while at least a portion of the transverse bearing wall 1940 and / or the transverse bearing wall 1941 may consist of a flexible material, such as, for example, elastomeric material. As mainly represented in FIG. 41, each of the first side wall 1940 and the second side wall 1941 of the cartridge channel with brackets 1930 may be formed from a rigid portion 1933 extending upward from a lower abutment surface 1931 and a flexible portion 1934 extending upwardly from the rigid portions 1933.

In addition to the above, the cartridge case 1910 of the cartridge with brackets 1900 may consist of one or more compressible layers, such as, for example, the first layer 1911 and the second layer 1912. When the cartridge case 1910 is compressed to the lower abutment surface 1931 under the influence of a stop, as described above, the side portions of the cartridge housing 1910 may expand laterally. If the cartridge with brackets 1930 contains rigid side walls, lateral expansion of the cartridge body 1910 can be prevented or at least limited by rigid side walls, resulting in significant internal pressure or stress developing inside the cartridge body 1910. If at least a portion of the cartridge with brackets 1930 contains flexible side walls, the flexible side walls can be configured to bend sideways and allow the side parts of the cartridge case to expand laterally with brackets 1910, thereby reducing the internal pressure or stress generated inside the cartridge case with brackets 1910. If the channel for the cartridge does not contain side walls or contains side walls that are significantly shorter than the cartridge itself with brackets, the side walls of the cartridge housing with brackets can governmental or almost freely protrude sideways. In any case, as presented in FIG. 42, the cartridge channel with brackets 2030 may include side walls 2040 and 2041, which can be completely formed from a flexible material, such as, for example, an elastomeric material. The cartridge channel with brackets 2030 may further comprise transverse grooves 2033 extending along the sides of the lower supporting surface 2031 of the cartridge channel with brackets 2030, which can be configured to receive and secure at least a portion of the transverse side walls 2040 and 2041. Transverse the side walls 2040 and 2041 can be fixed in the grooves 2033 using a latch and / or tight fit, while the transverse side walls 2040 and 2041 can be fixed in the grooves 2033 using one or more adhesives. The side walls 2040 and 2041 may separate from the lower bearing surface 2031 during operation. In any case, the housing of the compressible implantable cartridge 2010 can be disengaged and / or disconnected from the transverse side walls 2040 and 2041 after implantation of the cartridge housing 2010 with brackets 2020.

As represented in FIG. 43, the surgical device may include a barrel 2150 and an end clip protruding from the distal end of the barrel 2150. Similarly to the above-described working tool, it may include a channel for the cartridge with brackets 2130, a stop element 2140 adapted to move between the open position and the closed position, and a cassette with brackets 2100 located between the channel for the cartridge with brackets 2130 and the stop element 2140. Also similar to the above cartridge with brackets 2100 may include a housing of a compressible implantable cartridge 2 110 and many brackets 2120 located in the housing of the cartridge 2110. The channel for the cartridge with brackets 2130 may contain, firstly, a lower bearing surface 2131, opposite which is a cartridge with brackets 2100, secondly, the distal end 2135, and, - thirdly, the proximal end 2136. As shown in FIG. 43, the cartridge with brackets 2100 may comprise a first end 2105, which may be located at the distal end 2135 of the channel for the cartridge with brackets 2130, and a second end 2106, which may be located at the proximal end 2136 of the channel for the cartridge with brackets 2130. The distal end 2135 the channel for the cartridge with brackets 2130 may contain at least one distal retaining element, for example, a retaining wall 2137; likewise, the proximal end 2136 may comprise at least one proximal retaining element, such as, for example, a retaining wall 2138. A gap may be formed between the distal retaining wall 2137 and the proximal retaining wall 2138, which may be equal to or shorter than the length of the cartridge with brackets 2100 so that the cartridge with brackets 2100 can be held tightly inside the channel for the cartridge with brackets 2130 after inserting the cartridge with brackets 2100 into it.

As represented in FIG. 23 and 24, the cartridge with brackets, such as, for example, the cartridge with brackets 1200, may comprise a flat or at least substantially flat surface for contacting the fabric 1219. For example, the housing 1210 of the cartridge with brackets 1200 may include a first end 1205, which may be formed by a first height, or thickness, 1207, and a second end 1206, which may be formed by a second height, or thickness, 1208, the first height 1207 may be equal to or at least substantially equal to the second height 1208. The cartridge housing 1210 may have a permanent or at least a substantially constant height, or thickness, between the first end 1205 and the second end 1206. For example, the contact surface with the fabric 1219 may be parallel or at least substantially parallel to the lower surface 1218 of the cartridge housing 1210. As also shown in FIG. . 43, the first end 2105 of the cartridge housing 2110 of the cartridge with brackets 2100 may be defined by a first height 2107 that is different from the second height 2108 of the second end 2106. In the illustrated embodiment, the first height 2107 is greater than the second height 2108, although in alternative embodiments, the second height 2108 may be larger than the first height 2107. The height of the cartridge housing 2110 may decrease linearly and / or geometrically between the first end 2105 and the second end 2106. For example, a contact surface with tissue 2119 extending between the first end 2105 and second end 2106 may be oriented along an angle formed between them. For example, the contact surface with the fabric 2119 may not be parallel to the bottom surface 2118 of the cartridge housing 2110 and / or parallel to the carrier surface 2131 of the cartridge channel with brackets 2130.

As also shown in FIG. 43 and 44, the abutment member 2140 may comprise a contact surface with tissue 2141, which may be parallel to or at least substantially parallel to the carrier surface 2131 of the cartridge channel with brackets 2130 when the abutment member 2140 is in the closed position, as shown in FIG. . 44. When the stop element 2140 is in the closed position, it can be configured to compress the first end 2105 of the cartridge with brackets 2100 to a greater extent than the second end 2106 due to the greater height of the first end 2105 and the lower height of the second end 2106. In some situations, including situations where tissue T located between tissue contacting surfaces 2119 and 2141 has a constant or at least substantially constant thickness, the pressure generated inside tissue T and cartridge 2100 may be greater at the distal end of the working of the tool than at the proximal end of the instrument. More specifically, when the fabric T located between the abutment member 2140 and the cartridge with brackets 2100 has a substantially constant thickness, the fabric T located between the distal end 2145 of the stop 2140 and the first end 2105 of the cartridge with brackets 2100 can be compressed more. than tissue T located between the proximal end 2146 of the stop 2140 and the second end 2106 of the cartridge with brackets 2100. A pressure gradient may occur between the proximal and distal ends of the end clamp within the tissue T. More specifically, if the tissue T between the abutment member 2140 and the cartridge with brackets 2100 has substantially the same thickness, and the height of the cartridge with brackets 2100 decreases linearly from the distal end to the proximal, the pressure inside the tissue T can increase linearly from the distal end of the end clamp to the proximal end of the end clamping. Similarly, if the tissue T located between the abutment member 2140 and the cartridge with brackets 2100 has a substantially constant thickness, and the height of the cartridge with brackets 2100 decreases exponentially from the distal end to the proximal end of the end clamp, the pressure inside the tissue T can decrease by geometric progression from the distal end of the end clamp to the proximal end of the end clamp.

As also shown in FIG. 43, the fabric T located between the cartridge with brackets 2100 and the abutment element 2140 may not have a constant thickness over its entire length. In at least one such situation, the tissue T located between the proximal end 2146 of the stop 2140 and the second end 2106 of the cartridge with brackets 2100 may be thicker than the tissue T located between the distal end 2145 of the stop 2140 and the first end 2105 of the cartridge with brackets 2100. Thus , in such situations, a thicker tissue T can essentially be located above the shorter proximal end 2106 of the cartridge with brackets 2100, and a thinner tissue T can essentially be located above the higher distal end 2105. In use, the trigger the new clutch 2152 of the rod 2150 can be distally advanced along the trunnion of the rod 2151 so that the starter clutch 2152 engages with the cam portion 2143 of the stop 2140 and rotates the stop element 2140 to the bracket block 2100, as shown in FIG. 44. After the stop 2140 is turned to the fully closed position, the fabric T can be compressed between the surfaces 2119 and 2141 in contact with the fabric, and the pressure or compressive force applied to the fabric T can be constant or at least substantially constant over the entire thickness even with taking into account that the height of the cartridge with brackets 2100 between the proximal and distal ends of the working tool may be unstable. More specifically, since a thicker fabric T may be associated with a higher cartridge with brackets 2100, and a thinner fabric T may be associated with a lower cartridge with brackets 2100, the total or total height of fabric T and the cartridge with brackets 2100 may be constant or at least substantially constant between the proximal and distal ends of the working tool, and thus the compression of a given total height by the abutment member 2140 may be constant or at least substantially constant over the entire thickness.

As also shown in FIG. 43 and 44, the cartridge with brackets 2100 may have an asymmetric configuration. For example, the height of the cartridge with brackets 2100 at its first end 2105 may exceed the height of the cartridge with brackets 2100 at its second end 2106. The cartridge with brackets 2100 and / or the channel for the cartridge with brackets 2130 may contain one or more alignment and / or retaining elements, which can be configured to ensure that the cartridge with brackets 2100 can be located inside the channel for the cartridge with brackets 2130 in only one orientation, i.e. in an orientation in which the first end 2105 is located on the distal end 2135 of the cartridge channel with brackets 2130, and the second end 2106 is located on the proximal end of 2136. Alternatively, the cartridge with brackets 2100 and / or the channel for the cartridge with brackets 2130 may contain one or more alignment and / or holding elements, which can be arranged to arrange the cartridge with brackets 2100 in the channel for the cartridge with brackets 2130 in more than one orientation. For example, as shown in FIG. 45, the cartridge with brackets 2100 may be located inside the bracket groove 2130 with the brackets so that the first end 2105 of the cartridge with brackets 2100 could be located at the proximal end 2136 of the cartridge groove 2130 with the brackets, and the second end 2106 could be located at the distal end 2135. Thus, a smaller height of the cartridge with brackets 2100 can be located in close proximity to the distal retaining wall 2137, and a larger height of the cartridge with brackets 2100 can be located in close proximity to the proximal retaining wall 2138. N for example, a cartridge with brackets 2100 can be appropriately positioned to apply a constant or at least substantially constant fixative pressure to tissue T so that the thicker part is located inside the distal end of the end clamp and the thinner part is inside the proximal end of the end clamp . The cartridge with brackets 2100, for example, can be selectively oriented inside the channel for the cartridge with brackets 2130. For example, the alignment and / or holding elements of the cartridge with brackets 2100 can be symmetrical, and the surgeon can selectively position the cartridge with brackets 2100 inside the channel for the cartridge with brackets 2130 in the orientations represented, for example, in FIG. 43 and FIG. 45.

In addition to the above, the body of the implantable cartridge 2110 may include a longitudinal axis 2109 that can extend between the proximal and distal ends of the working tool when the cartridge with brackets 2100 is located in the channel for the cartridge with brackets 2130. The thickness of the cartridge body 2110 can generally decrease and / or generally increase between the first end 2105 and the second end 2106 along the longitudinal axis 2109. For example, the distance, or height, between the lower surface 2118 and the surface for contacting the fabric 2119 may generally decrease and / or generally increase between the first end 2105 and the second end 2106. The thickness of the cartridge body 2110 can either increase or decrease along the longitudinal axis 2109. For example, the housing of the cartridge 2110 may contain one or more parts that have a greater or lesser thickness. The cartridge with brackets 2100 may comprise a plurality of brackets 2120 located therein. During use, as described above, the brackets 2120 may become deformed when the stop 2140 is moved to the closed position. Each bracket 2120 may have the same or at least substantially the same height. For example, the height of the bracket can be measured, for example, from the bottom of the base of the bracket to the top, or the tip, of the longest leg of the bracket.

Brackets in a cartridge with brackets can have different heights. For example, a cartridge with brackets may contain a first group of brackets having a first bracket height that is located in the first part of the compressible cartridge body, and a second group of brackets having a second bracket height that is located in the second part of the compressible cartridge body. The first bracket height may be greater than the second bracket height, and the first bracket group may be located at the first end 2105 of the cartridge with brackets 2100, and the second bracket group may be located at the second end 2106. In an alternative embodiment, the higher first bracket group may be located at the second end 2106 of the cartridge with brackets 2100, and a lower second group of brackets may be located at the first end 2105. Many groups of brackets may be used, each of which has a different bracket height. For example, a third group having an intermediate height of brackets may be located in the cartridge housing 2110 between the first group of brackets and the second group of brackets. Each bracket in a row of brackets in a cartridge with brackets can have a different bracket height. The highest bracket in the row of brackets can be set near the first end of the row of brackets, and the shortest bracket can be set at the opposite end of the row of brackets. For example, brackets located between the highest bracket and the shortest bracket can, for example, be positioned so that the height of the brackets decreases between the highest bracket and the shortest bracket.

As represented in FIG. 46, the end clamp of the surgical stapler may include a stop member 2240, a channel for the cartridge with brackets 2230, and a cartridge with brackets 2200 held in the channel for the cartridge with brackets 2230. The cartridge with brackets 2200 may include a housing for a compressible implantable cartridge 2210 and a plurality of brackets in it, such as, for example, brackets 2220a and 2220b. The channel of the cartridge with brackets 2230 may comprise a bearing surface of the cartridge 2231 and a plurality of retaining grooves formed therein for the brackets, such as, for example, retaining grooves 2232a and 2232b. For example, a cartridge with brackets 2200 may comprise two outer rows of brackets 2220a and two inner rows of brackets 2220b, while the retaining grooves 2232a may be configured to hold brackets 2220b. As represented in FIG. 46 and 47, the stop member 2240 may comprise a plurality of recesses 2242 formed therein to form brackets that can be adapted to accept and deform the brackets 2220a and 2220b when the stop member 2240 moves to the bracket block 2200. For example, the lower surfaces of the retaining grooves 2232a can be removed a first distance 2201a from the upper surfaces of the recesses to form the brackets 2242, while the lower surfaces of the retaining grooves 2232b can be removed a second distance 2201b from the upper surfaces of the ubleny for forming staples 2242. For example, the holding grooves 2232b are closer to the abutment member 2240 due to the elevated level in the bearing surface 2231 in which they are formed. Due to the different distances 2201a and 2201b, the outer rows of brackets 2220a and the inner rows of brackets 2220b may acquire different heights during deformation. In various situations, the brackets, which, during deformation, have acquired different heights in the formed state, may apply different fixing pressure or force to the stitched fabric T. In addition to the above, the brackets may have different heights of the unformed bracket. For example, as also shown in FIG. 46, the outer brackets 2220a may have an initial height in the unformed state that is greater than the height of the inner brackets 2220b in the initial unformed state 2220b. As represented in FIG. 46 and 47, the inner brackets 2220b having a lower height in an unformed state than the outer brackets 2220a can also have a lower height in the formed state than the outer brackets 2220a. Alternatively, the inner brackets 2220b may have a greater height before forming than the outer brackets 2220a, while still having a lower height after forming than the outer brackets 2220a.

In addition to the above, the abutment member 2240 can be moved to the closed position as shown in FIG. 47, for compressing the cartridge housing 2210 and deforming the brackets 2220a and 2220b. A surgical stapler comprising an end clamp shown in FIG. 46 and 47, may, for example, further comprise a cutting element that can be adapted to dissect the tissue T located between the stop element 2240 and the cartridge with brackets 2200. For example, the stop element 2240, the channel for the cartridge with brackets 2230 and / or cartridge with brackets 2200 can form a groove configured to hold the cutting element in a sliding manner. More specifically, the stop member 2240 may comprise a portion of a groove 2249, the channel for the cartridge with brackets 2230 may comprise a portion of the groove 2239, and the cartridge with brackets 2200 may comprise a portion of the groove 2203 that may be aligned or at least substantially aligned with each other, when the thrust member 2240 is in a closed or at least substantially closed position. The cutting element can be moved from the proximal end of the end clamp to the distal end of the end clamp after closing the stop element 2240 and deformation of the brackets 2220a, 2220b. The cutting element can be moved independently of the deformation of the brackets. The cutting element can be extended simultaneously with the deformation of the brackets. In any case, the cutting element may be configured to dissect tissue along a path extending between the inner rows of brackets 2220b.

As represented in FIG. 47, the inner brackets 2220b may have a lower height after forming than the outer brackets 2220a, the inner brackets 2220b may exert a higher fixing pressure or force on the fabric near the cut line created by the cutting element. For example, the increased fixing pressure or force exerted by the inner brackets 2220b can provide various therapeutic benefits, for example, reducing bleeding from dissected tissue T, while the reduced fixing force exerted by the external brackets 2220a can improve the elasticity of the stitched fabric. As also presented in FIG. 46 and 47, the stop member 2240 may also comprise at least one piece of support material attached thereto, such as support material 2260. For example, the legs of the brackets 2220a and 2220b may cut support material 2260 and / or pass through holes in support material 2260 when the cartridge with brackets 2200 is compressed by the stop element 2240 and comes into contact with the recesses to form the brackets 2242 in the stop element 2240. When the legs of the brackets 2220a, 2220b are deformed, the legs can again contact the supporting mother Scrap 2260 and / or cut it. Supporting material 2260 can improve hemostasis and / or provide proper stitching strength of the tissue with brackets.

As also presented in FIG. 46 and 47, the lower surface of the cartridge housing 2210 may comprise a stepped contour that matches or at least substantially matches the stepped contour of the bearing surface of the cartridge 2231. The lower surface of the cartridge housing 2210 can be deformed to match or at least substantially match the contour of the cartridge bearing surface 2231. As represented in FIG. 48, for example, an end clamp, similar to the end clamp shown in FIG. 46 may comprise a cartridge with brackets 2300 located therein. The cartridge with brackets 2300 may comprise a compressible implantable housing 2310 comprising an inner layer 2312 and an outer layer 2311, wherein, in addition to the above, the outer layer 2311 may be made of a waterproof material. The outer layer 2311 may extend around the brackets 2220a, 2220b and be located between the brackets 2220a, 2220b and the holding grooves 2232a, 2232b, respectively. As represented in FIG. 49, for example, an end clip similar to the end clip shown in FIG. 46 may comprise a cartridge with brackets 2400 located therein. Like a bracket block 2300, a crushable, implantable body 2410 of a block 2400 may include an inner layer 2412 and an outer layer 2411. However, the cartridge case 2410 may not contain a groove for the cutting element. For example, a cutting element may be necessary, for example, to dissect the inner layer 2412 and / or the outer layer 2411 when advancing through the cartridge with brackets.

As represented in FIG. 50, the end clamp of the surgical device may include a stop element 2540, a channel for the cartridge with brackets 2530 and a cartridge with brackets 2500 located in the channel for the cartridge with brackets 2530. Similar to the above cartridge with brackets 2500 may include a housing of a compressible implantable cartridge 2510, outer rows brackets 2220a and inner rows of brackets 2220b. The channel for the cartridge with brackets 2530 may include a flat or at least substantially flat supporting surface for the cartridge 2531 and the supporting grooves for brackets 2532 formed therein. The stop element 2540 may include a stepped surface 2541 and many recesses for forming brackets, such as, for example the forming recesses 2542a and 2542b formed therein. Similar to the above, the distance formed between the forming recesses 2542a and the support grooves 2532 may be greater than the distance between the forming recesses 2452b and the support grooves 2532. The stop element 2540 may further comprise a supporting material 2560 that is attached to the stepped surface 2541 of the stop element 2540. For example, the supporting material 2560 may abut, or at least substantially abutting, the stepped surface 2541. The supporting material 2560 may be releasably attached to the surface 2541 When aid of at least one bonding agent, such as, e.g., fibrin and / or protein hydrogel. The cartridge housing 2510 may also have a stepped profile that is parallel or at least substantially parallel to the stepped surface 2541 of the thrust member. More specifically, the thrust member 2540 may comprise steps 2548 protruding toward the cartridge with brackets 2500, said steps 2548 may have a height equal to or at least substantially equal to the height of steps 2508 protruding from the cartridge body 2510. For example, as a result of the described above, the magnitude of the compressible cartridge housing 2510, which may be gripped by the first brackets 2220a, may, for example, be different from the magnitude of the compressible cartridge housing 2510, which may be gripped by the second brackets.

As represented in FIG. 51, the end clip may comprise a stop member 2640, a cartridge channel with brackets 2530, and a bracket cartridge located between them. The cartridge with brackets 2600 may comprise a housing of a compressible implantable cartridge 2610 including an inner layer 2612, an outer layer 2611 and a plurality of brackets located inside, such as, for example, brackets 2220a and 2200b. The abutment member 2640 may comprise a plurality of recesses for forming the brackets 2642 in the surface 2641, and the channel for the cartridge with brackets 2530 may comprise a plurality of grooves for forming the brackets 2532 formed in the bearing surface 2531. As shown in FIG. 51, the surface of the abutment 2641 may be parallel or at least substantially parallel to the block support surface 2531, in which each forming recess 2642 may be located at an equal or at least substantially equal distance from the opposite and corresponding bracket support groove 2532. The cartridge with brackets 2600 may include brackets having the same or at least substantially the same initial height in the unformed state, as well as the same or at least substantially the same height of the brackets after they are formed. Alternatively, the outer rows of brackets may comprise brackets 2220a, and the inner rows of brackets may comprise brackets 2220b, wherein, as discussed above, the brackets 2220a and 2220b have different brace heights in an unformed state. When the stop member 2640 is moved toward the cartridge with the brackets 2600 in the closed position, the brackets 2220a and 2220b can be formed so that they have the same or at least substantially the same height of the formed bracket. For example, as a result of the above, the formed outer brackets 2220a and inner brackets 2220b can capture the same or at least substantially the same amount of compressible implantable cartridge case 2610; however, due to the fact that the outer brackets 2220a have a greater height in the undeformed state than the inner brackets 2220b, and can have the same height in the deformed state, the outer brackets 2220a can create a greater clamping force than the inner brackets 2220b.

As represented in FIG. 52, the end clamp of the surgical stapler may include a stop member 2740, a channel for the cartridge with brackets 2530 and a cartridge with brackets 2700 located inside the channel for the cartridge with brackets 2530. Similar to the above, the cartridge with brackets 2700 may include a compressible implantable cartridge 2710 housing containing the inner layer 2712, the outer layer 2711 and a plurality of brackets located therein, such as, for example, brackets 2220a and 2220b. The thickness of the cartridge housing 2710 may vary in width. For example, the cartridge housing 2710 may include a central portion 2708 and side portions 2709, the central portion 2708 may have a thickness that is greater than the thickness of the side portions 2709. The thickest portion of the cartridge housing 2710 may be located in the central portion 2708, and the thinnest portion of the cartridge housing 2710 may be placed in the side portions 2709. For example, the thickness of the cartridge housing 2710 may gradually decrease between the central portion 2708 and the side portions 2709. The thickness of the cartridge housing 2710 may decrease linearly and / or geometrically progressions between the central part 2708 and the side parts 2709. For example, the contact surface with the tissue 2719 of the cartridge housing 2710 may include two inclined or angled surfaces that are chamfered downward from the central part 2708 to the side parts 2709. The stop member 2740 may comprise two inclined or angled surfaces that are parallel or at least substantially parallel to the inclined surfaces for contacting the fabric 2719. The abutment element 2740 may further comprise l at least one fragment of the supporting material 2760, which is attached to the inclined surfaces of the thrust element 2740.

In addition to the above, the inner rows of brackets in the cartridge with brackets 2700 may contain longer brackets 2220a, and the outer rows of brackets may contain shorter brackets 2220b. The longer brackets 2220a may be located inside and / or adjacent to the central portion 2708 having a greater thickness, while the brackets 2220b may be located inside and / or adjacent to the side portions 2709. For example, as a result of the above, the longer brackets 2220a may engage more material for the implantable cartridge case 2710 than shorter brackets 2220b. Such situations can lead to the fact that the brackets 2220a will exert a greater fixing pressure on the fabric T than the brackets 2220b. Although longer brackets 2220a can capture more cartridge body material 2710 than shorter brackets 2220b, longer brackets 2220a can have a higher height in the formed state than shorter brackets 2220b due to the inclined arrangement of the recesses to form brackets 2742a and 2742b. Such considerations can be used to achieve the necessary fixing pressure inside the fabric captured by the brackets 2220a and 2220b, and thus, the fixing pressure in the brackets 2220a can be, for example, higher, lower, or equal to the fixing pressure applied to the fabric by the brackets 2220b. In various alternative embodiments of the end clamp shown in FIG. 52, shorter brackets 2220b may be located inside and / or adjacent to the thicker central part 2708 of the block body 2710, and higher brackets 2220a may be located inside and / or adjacent to the thinner side parts 2709. Moreover, although the cartridge has brackets 2700 contains the inner and outer rows of brackets, the cartridge with brackets 2700 may contain additional rows of brackets, such as, for example, rows of brackets located between the inner and outer rows of brackets. For example, the intermediate rows of brackets may include brackets having, for example, a height after formation that is intermediate between the heights of the brackets 2220a and 2220b before formation, and a height after formation that is intermediate between the heights of the brackets 2220a and 2220b after formation.

As represented in FIG. 53, the end clamp of the surgical stapler may include a stop member 2840, a channel for the cartridge with brackets 2530, and a cartridge with brackets 2800 located inside the channel for the cartridge with brackets 2530. Similar to the above, the cartridge with brackets 2800 may include a compressible implantable cartridge 2810 housing comprising the inner layer 2812, the outer layer 2811 and a plurality of brackets located therein, such as, for example, brackets 2220a and 2220b. The thickness of the cartridge housing 2810 can vary across its entire width. For example, the cartridge housing 2810 may comprise a central portion 2808 and side portions 2809, the central portion 2808 having a thickness that is less than the thickness of the side portions 2809. The thinnest portion of the cartridge housing 2810 may be located in the central portion 2808, while the thickest a portion 2810 may be located in the side portions 2809. For example, the thickness of the portion with the largest thickness of the cartridge body 2810 may gradually increase between the central portion 2808 and the side portions 2809. The thickness of the cartridge body 2810 may increase linearly and / or geometric progression between the central part 2808 and the side parts 2809. For example, the contact surface with the tissue 2819 of the cartridge housing 2810 may include two inclined, or angled, surfaces that peel upward in the direction from the central part 2808 to the side parts 2809. The abutment element 2840 may comprise two inclined, or angled, surfaces that are parallel or at least substantially parallel to the inclined surfaces for contact with the fabric 2819. The stop member 2840 may further comprise at least one piece of support material 2860 that is attached to the inclined surfaces of the stop member 2840. In addition to the above, the outer rows of brackets in the cartridge with brackets 2800 may include longer brackets 2220a, and inner rows of brackets may contain shorter brackets 2220b. Longer brackets 2220a can be located inside and / or near the thickest side portions 2809, and brackets 2220b can be located inside and / or near the central part 2808. For example, as a result of the above, longer brackets 2220a can capture more material from the implantable cartridge body 2810 than shorter brackets 2220b.

As described above in relation to the embodiment presented in FIG. 46, for example, the cartridge groove 2230 with brackets may include a stepped bearing surface 2231, which can be configured to support the brackets 2220a and 2220b at different heights relative to the stop 2240. The channel for the cartridge with brackets 2230 may consist of metal, and the steps in the bearing surface 2231 can be formed in the bearing surface 2231, for example, during sharpening. As represented in FIG. 54, the end clamp of the surgical device may comprise a cartridge channel with brackets 2930, within which a support insert is located. More specifically, the channel for the cartridge with brackets 2930 can be formed so that it has a flat or at least essentially flat bearing surface 2931, which, for example, can be made to hold the insert 2935 having a stepped surface for holding the brackets 2220a and 2220b from a cartridge with brackets 2200 at various heights. For example, insert 2935 may comprise a flat or at least substantially flat bottom surface that may be located opposite the bearing surface 2931. Insert 2935 may further comprise support grooves, grooves, or grooves 2932a and 2932b that may be configured to support brackets 2220a and 2220b, respectively, at different heights. Similarly to the above, insert 2935 may comprise a groove for scalpel 2939 configured to pass a cutting member through it. The channel for the cartridge with brackets 2930 may consist of the same material as the support insert 2935, or of another material. As the channel for the cartridge with brackets 2930, and the support insert 2935 can, for example, consist of metal, while alternatively the channel for the cartridge with brackets 2930 can, for example, consist of metal, and the support insert 2935 can, for example, consist of plastic. The support tab 2935 can be attached and / or welded to the cartridge channel with brackets 2930. The support insert 2935 can be installed in the cartridge channel with brackets 2930 using a latch and / or tight fit. The support tab 2935 can be fixed in the channel for the cartridge with brackets 2930 using adhesive.

As represented in FIG. 55, the end clamp of the surgical stapler may include a stop member 3040, a cartridge channel with brackets 3030, and a compressible implantable cartridge with brackets 3000 located in the cartridge channel with brackets 3030. Like the above, the stop member 3040 may contain a plurality of recesses formed therein for the formation of the brackets 3042 and the groove for the scalpel 3049, which can be made with the possibility of sliding insertion of a cutting element into it. Also, similarly to the above-described channel for the cartridge with brackets 3030 may contain many formed in it support grooves for brackets 3032 and a groove for the scalpel 3039, which can also be made with the possibility of sliding insertion of a cutting element into it. The cartridge with brackets 3000 may comprise a first layer 3011, a second layer 3012 and a plurality of brackets located inside, such as, for example, brackets 3020a and 3020b. The height of the unformed brackets 3020a may be greater than the height of the unformed brackets 3020b. The first layer 3011 may be made of a first compressible material, and the second layer 3012 may be made of a second compressible material. The first compressible material may be compressed with greater force than the second compressible material, whereas, alternatively, the first compressible material may be compressed with less force than the second compressible material. The first compressible material may consist of an elastic material that has a first coefficient of elasticity, and the second compressible material may consist of an elastic material that has a second coefficient of elasticity that is different from the first coefficient of elasticity. The first compressible material may have a higher coefficient of elasticity than the second compressible material. Alternatively, the first compressible material may have a lower coefficient of elasticity compared to the coefficient of elasticity of the second compressible material. The first compressible layer may have a first stiffness and the second compressible layer may have a second stiffness, wherein the first stiffness is different from the second stiffness. The first compressible layer may have greater rigidity than the second compressible layer. Alternatively, the first compressible layer may have less rigidity than the second compressible layer.

As represented in FIG. 55, the second layer 3012 of the cartridge with brackets 3000 may have the same or substantially the same thickness across the entire width. The first layer 3011 may have a thickness that varies across its width. For example, the first layer 3011 may have one or more steps 3008 increasing the thickness of the cartridge case 3010 in certain parts of the cartridge case 3010, for example, in its central part. As represented in FIG. 55, shorter brackets 3020b may be placed on or aligned with steps 3008, i.e. the thicker parts of the block body 3010 and the higher brackets 3020a may be located within the thinner parts of the block body 3010 or aligned with them. Due to the presence of thicker and thinner portions of the cartridge case 3010, the stiffness of the cartridge case 3010 may be greater along the inner rows of brackets 3020b than along the outer rows of brackets 3020a. The first layer 3011 may be connected to the second layer 3012. For example, the first layer 3011 and the second layer 3012 may contain interlocking elements that can hold layers 3011 and 3012 together. The first layer 3011 may include a first sheet, and the second layer 3012 may include a second sheet, where the first sheet is adhered by one or more adhesives to the second sheet. The cartridge with brackets 3000 may include a groove for the cutting element 3003, which can be arranged to slidely hold the cutting element therein.

As represented in FIG. 56, the cartridge with brackets 3100 may comprise a compressible implantable cartridge case 3110 containing one layer of compressible material, as well as a plurality of brackets located therein, such as, for example, brackets 3020b. The thickness of the cartridge housing 3110 can vary across its entire width. For example, the cartridge housing 3110 may include steps 3108 extending along its side portions. As represented in FIG. 57, the cartridge with brackets 3200 may comprise a compressible implantable cartridge case 3210 containing one layer of compressible material, as well as a plurality of brackets located therein, such as, for example, brackets 3020b. The thickness of the cartridge case 3210 can vary across its entire width. For example, cartridge housing 3210 may include steps 3208 protruding along its central portion. As represented in FIG. 58, the cartridge with brackets 3300 may include a compressible implantable cartridge case 3310, and the thickness of the cartridge case 3310, as described above, can vary across its entire width. The thickness of the cartridge case 3310 may increase exponentially between the side portions and the central part of the cartridge case 3310. For example, the thickness of the cartridge case 3310 may be limited by an arcuate or curved profile and comprise a surface for contacting the fabric 3319 with an arcuate or curved shape 3319. The thickness of the cartridge case 3310 and the contour of the surface for contact with the fabric 3319 may be determined by one radius of curvature or, alternatively, for example, several radii of curvature. As represented in FIG. 59, the cartridge with brackets 3400 may comprise a compressible implantable cartridge case 3410, wherein the thickness of the cartridge case 3410 may increase linearly or at least substantially linearly between the side portions and the central portion of the cartridge case 410.

As represented in FIG. 60, the cartridge with brackets 3500 may comprise a compressible implantable cartridge case 3510 and a plurality of brackets 3520 located therein. The body of the implantable cartridge 3510 may comprise a first inner layer 3512, a second inner layer 3513 and an outer layer 3511. The first inner layer 3512 may have a first thickness, and the second inner layer 3513 may have a second thickness, the second inner layer 3513 may be thicker than the first inner layer 3512. Alternatively, the first inner layer 3512 may be thicker than the second inner layer 3513. In other Alternatively, the first inner layer 3512 may have the same or at least substantially the same thickness as the second inner layer 3513. Each bracket 3520 may include a base 3522 and one or more deformable legs 3521 extending from the base 3522. Each leg 3521 may have a tip 3523 enclosed in a first inner layer 3511 and, in addition, each base 3522 of the brackets 3520 may be enclosed in a second inner layer 3512. The first inner layer 3512 and / or the second inner layer 3513 may contain at least one storage the medicine therein, and the outer layer 3511 can encapsulate and seal the first inner layer 3512 and the second inner layer 3513 so that the drug does not flow out of the cartridge case with brackets 3510 until the brackets 3520 pierce the outer layer 3511. More specifically, in addition to the above, the abutment element can be pressed downward on the fabric opposite the tissue contacting surface 3519 of the cartridge with brackets 3500 so that the body of the cartridge 3510 is compressed and the surface 3519 moves down and at least partially below the ends of the brackets 3523 so that the ends of the brackets 3523 break or pierce the outer layer 3511. After piercing the outer layer 3511 with the legs of the brackets 3521, at least one drug M can leak from the cartridge case 3510 around the legs brackets 3521. In various situations, additional compression of the block body 3510 may result in extrusion of an additional amount of drug M from the block body 3510, as shown in FIG. 61.

As represented in FIG. 60, the outer layer 3511 may comprise a waterproof or at least substantially waterproof shell, which may be configured to, firstly, prevent accidental leakage of the drug from the cartridge with brackets 3500, and secondly, to prevent accidental liquids entering from the surgical field, for example, into a cartridge with brackets 3500. The first inner layer 3512 may contain the first drug stored or absorbable in this layer, and the second inner layer 3513 may ames to keep the second medicament is stored or absorbable in a given layer, the second drug may be different from the first drug. Initial compression of the cartridge case 3510, leading to rupture of the outer layer 3511, can essentially lead to the release of the first drug from the first inner layer 3512, and subsequent compression of the cartridge case 3510 can essentially lead to the release of the second drug from the second inner layer 3513. however, in such cases, portions of the first drug and the second drug can be released simultaneously, although most drugs that are released may be the first drug, and most drugs that are subsequently released may be the second drug. In addition to the above, the first inner layer 3512 may consist of a more compressible material than the second inner layer 3513 so that the initial compression forces or pressures, which may be weaker than subsequent compression forces or pressures, can cause a larger initial displacement the first inner layer 3512 compared to the second inner layer 3513. A stronger initial deformation inside the first inner layer 3512 can lead to the release of most of the first drug from of the inner layer 3512 than the second drug from the second inner layer 3513. The first inner layer 3512 may be more porous and / or more flexible than the second inner layer 3513. For example, the first inner layer 3512 may contain many pores, or air cavities, 3508, and the second inner layer 3513 may contain many pores, or air cavities, 3509, and in various embodiments, the pores 3508 can be configured to store the first drug in the first inner layer 3512, and pores 3509 Oguta be configured to store a second medicament in the second inner layer 3513. It is possible to choose the pore size and density of 3508 in the first inner layer 3512 and then 3509 in the second inner layer 3513 to achieve the desired result, as described herein.

As represented in FIG. 60 and 61, the outer layer 3511, the first inner layer 3512 and / or the second inner layer 3513 may contain bioabsorbable material. The first inner layer 3512 may be formed from the first bioabsorbable material, the second inner layer 3513 may be formed from the second bioabsorbable material, and the outer layer 3511 may be formed from the third bioabsorbable material, the first bioabsorbable material, the second bioabsorbable material and / or the third bioabsorbable material can be formed from different materials. The first bioabsorbable material can be biologically absorbed at a first speed, the second bioabsorbable material can be biologically absorbed at a second speed, and the third bioabsorbable material can be biologically absorbed at a third speed, with the first speed, second speed and third speed being different. For example, if a material is biologically absorbed at a certain rate, that rate can be defined as the mass of the material absorbed by the patient’s body per unit time. As you know, the organisms of different patients can absorb different materials at different speeds, and thus, to take into account such variability, such speeds can be described as average speeds. In any case, there may be a higher speed at which a larger mass of material is biologically absorbed per unit time than at a lower speed. As represented in FIG. 60 and 61, the first inner layer 3512 and / or the second inner layer 3513 may consist of a material that is biologically absorbed faster than the material that the outer layer 3511 consists of. For example, the first inner layer 3512 and / or the second inner layer 3513 may consist of bioabsorbable foam, tissue sealant and / or hemostatic material, such as, for example, oxidized regenerated cellulose (ORC), the outer layer 3511 may consist of a supporting material and / or plastic material, such as, for example, oliglycolic acid (PGA), commercially available under the trade name Vicryl, polylactic acid (PLA or PLLA), polydioxanone (PDS), polyhydroxyalkanoate (PHA), polyglexaprone 25 (PGCL), commercially available under the trade name Monocryl, polycaprolactone (PCL) and / or a mixture of PGA, PLA, PDS, PHA, PGCL and / or PCL. In such cases, the first inner layer 3512 and / or the second inner layer 3513 can immediately have a therapeutic effect on the tissue and reduce its bleeding, for example, while the outer layer 3514 maintains a longer structural integrity and is biologically absorbed at a lower rate.

Due to the lower bioabsorption rate of the outer layer 3511, in addition to the above, the outer layer 3511 can support or strengthen the structure of the tissue inside the line of brackets during the healing process. One of the first inner layer 3512 or the second inner layer 3513 may consist of a material that is bioabsorbed faster than the other inner layer, as a result of which one of the layers can provide the initial release of the therapeutic substance, and the other layer can provide a long-term release of the same and / or other therapeutic substance. For example, the rate at which a therapeutic substance can be released from layer 3512, 3513 can be represented by the function of the biological absorption of the substrate in which the drug is absorbed or dispersed. For example, a substrate containing a first inner layer 3512 can be biologically absorbed faster than a substrate containing a second inner layer 3513, whereby a drug can, for example, be released from the first inner layer 3512 faster than from the second inner layer 3513. As described in herein, one or more layers 3511, 3512, and 3513 of the cartridge case 3510 may be adhesively adhered to each other using at least one adhesive, such as, for example, fibrin and / or protein hydrogel. The adhesive may be water soluble and capable of breaking the connection between the layers as the cartridge with brackets 3500 is implanted and / or some time later. For example, an adhesive may be biologically absorbed faster than the outer layer 3511, the first inner layer 3512 and / or the second inner layer 3513.

As represented in FIG. 62 and 63, a cartridge with brackets, such as, for example, a cartridge with brackets 3600, may comprise a cartridge housing 3610 comprising a compressible first layer 3611, a second layer 3612 attached to the first layer 3611, and a compressible layer 3613 configured to be removed and attached to the second layer 3612. For example, the first layer 3611 may consist of compressible foam, the second layer 3612 may consist of a multilayer material adhesively attached to the first layer 3611 with one or more adhesives, and the third layer 3613 may consist of a compress direct foam adhesively attached removably to the second layer 3612, e.g., using one or more adhesives. The cartridge with brackets 3600 may further comprise a plurality of brackets, such as, for example, brackets 3620 located inside the cartridge housing 3610. For example, each bracket 3620 may include a base 3622 located in the third layer 3613, and one or more deformable legs 3621, which, for example, protrudes upward from the base 3622 through the second layer 3612 into the first layer 3611. During use, in addition to the above, the upper surface 3619 of the cartridge housing with brackets 3610 can be pressed down by the stop element until the legs brackets 3621 will not pass through the upper surface 3619 and the target fabric until contact with the stop element. After sufficient deformation of the legs of the brackets 3621, the stop element can be moved away from the cartridge with brackets 3600 so that its compressible layers can at least partially experience reverse expansion. In various situations, inserting brackets through the tissue can cause bleeding in the tissue. The third layer 3613 may consist of an absorbent material, such as, for example, a protein hydrogel, which is able to absorb blood from stitched tissue. In addition to, or in place of, the third layer 3613 may consist of a hemostatic material and / or tissue sealant, such as, for example, lyophilized thrombin and / or fibrin, which can reduce bleeding from the tissue. The third layer 3613 may provide structural support for the first layer 3611 and the second layer 3612, while the third layer 3613 may consist of bioabsorbable and / or non-bioabsorbable materials. In any case, the third layer 3613 can be detached from the second layer 3612 after implantation of the cartridge with brackets. If the third layer 3613 contains implantable quality material, the surgeon can choose whether to remove the third layer 3613 from the cartridge body 3610. The third layer 3613 may be configured to separate completely from the second layer 3612.

The first layer 3611 may consist of a first foam, and the third layer 3613 may consist of a second foam, which may be different from the first foam. The first foam may have a first density, and the second foam may have a second density, while the first density may differ from the second density. For example, the second density may exceed the first density, whereby the third layer 3613 may have a lower compressibility or lower compression ratio than the first layer 3611. Alternatively, the first density may be higher than the second, resulting in the first layer 3611 be less compressible or have a lower degree of compressibility than the third layer 3613. As shown in FIG. 64 and 65, a cartridge with brackets 3700, similar to a cartridge with brackets 3600, may comprise a cartridge body 3710 comprising a first layer of compressible foam 3711, a second layer 3712 attached to the first layer 3711, and a third layer of compressible foam 3713 configured to separation and removably attached to the second layer 3712. For example, the third layer 3713 may contain many grooves to hold the brackets, or recesses, 3709, each of which can be configured to hold at least part of the bracket 3620, such as, for example, base bracket. The brackets 3620 can be slidably inserted into the slots to hold the brackets 3709 or, in other words, the third layer 3713 can be slidable relative to the brackets 3620 when, for example, the cartridge with brackets 3700 is located opposite the target fabric and is compressed by the stop element . The slots for holding the brackets 3709 can be configured to create a gap between the brackets 3620 and the side walls of the grooves for holding the brackets 3709. For example, as a result of the above, the brackets 3620 may not capture part of the third layer 3713 when the brackets 3620 are deformed, as shown in FIG. 64 and 65. Alternatively, the ends of the slots for holding the brackets 3709 next to the second layer 3712 can be covered by part of the third layer 3713, whereby at least a part of the third layer 3713 can be caught by the brackets 3620 when they are deformed. In any case, the third layer 3713 may contain, for example, one or more perforations and / or notches 3708, which can be configured to separate the third layer 3713 from the second layer 3712 in two or more parts, as shown in FIG. 64. In FIG. 64 illustrates the separation of one of the parts of the third layer 3713 using a tool 3755. Perforations 3708 may be located along a line running between the first row of brackets and the second row of brackets.

As represented in FIG. 64 and 65, the bases 3622 of the brackets 3620 can be located inside the grooves to hold the brackets 3709, and the side walls of the grooves to hold the brackets 3709 can be made to come into contact and hold with the possibility of releasing the legs of the brackets 3621 in a certain position. Although not shown, the third layer 3713 may contain an elongated groove surrounding all the brackets in the line of brackets. For example, a cartridge with brackets containing four rows of brackets, for example, may contain an elongated groove aligned with each row of brackets in the bottom layer of the cartridge with brackets. In addition to the above, at least a portion of the cartridge with brackets 3600 and / or a cartridge with brackets 3700 may be implanted into the patient’s body, and at least a portion of the cartridge with brackets may be removable from the patient’s body. As represented in FIG. 64 and 65, the first layer 3711 and the second layer 3712 can be gripped by brackets 3620 and implanted with brackets 3620, while the third layer 3713 can optionally be removed or separated from the cartridge with brackets 3700. In various situations, removing a portion of the implanted cartridge with brackets can reduce the amount of material that the patient must absorb, which can provide various therapeutic effects. In the case of separating or removing a portion of the cartridge with brackets using a tool such as, for example, a laparoscopic instrument 3755, the separated portion of the cartridge with brackets can be removed from the surgical field through a trocar, such as, for example, a trocar with a 5 mm hole. The cartridge housing may contain one or more removable layers. For example, the cartridge housing 3710 may comprise a fourth layer, wherein the third layer 3713 of the cartridge housing 3710 may be made of hemostatic material, and the fourth layer may be made of a support layer. For example, the surgeon may remove the support layer and then, for example, decide whether to remove the hemostatic layer from the cartridge body.

As represented in FIG. 66, a bracket cartridge, such as a bracket cartridge 3800, for example, may include a cartridge case 3810 consisting of an outer layer 3811 and an inner layer 3812. The inner layer 3812 may consist of compressible foam, and the outer layer 3811 may at least partially wrap around the inner layer 3812. The outer layer 3811 may comprise a first portion 3811a configured to be located on the first side of the inner layer 3812, and a second portion 3811b configured to be located on the second side of the inner layer 3812, m the first part 3811a and the second part 3811b can be connected using a flexible hinge, such as, for example, hinge 3809. For example, at least one adhesive, such as, for example, fibrin and / or protein hydrogel, can be applied to the first side and / or the second side of the inner layer 3812 for gluing parts of the outer layer. The outer layer 3811 may contain one or more cross-linking elements extending from it. For example, the outer layer 3811 may comprise a plurality of deformable legs 3821 protruding from one side of the outer layer 3811 that may be immersed in a compressible inner layer 3812. For example, the legs 3821 may not protrude from the second side of the inner layer 3812 or, alternatively, the legs 3821 may at least partially protrude from the inner layer 3812. The legs 3821 may be configured to pierce the inner layer 3812 and the second portion 3811b of the outer layer 3811 if, during use, the housing of the compressible cartridge 3810 is squeezed tsya. The second portion 3811b of the outer layer 3811 may comprise openings, such as, for example, openings 3808 formed therein, which may be configured to hold the legs of brackets 3821. At least portions of the cartridge with brackets 3800 may include a groove for the cutting element 3803, which may be made with the possibility of holding the cutting element with the possibility of sliding. For example, the groove for the cutting element 3803 may not extend through the entire thickness of the cartridge case 3810, as a result of which the cutting element may cut through the cartridge case 3810 while moving relative to the case.

As represented in FIG. 67, the cartridge with brackets 3900 may comprise, by analogy with the cartridge with brackets 3800, a cartridge case 3910 comprising an inner layer 3812 and an outer layer 3811, wherein the outer layer 3811 may comprise a first portion 3811a adjacent to the first side of the inner layer 3812, and a second portion 3811b located adjacent to the second side of the inner layer 3812. Similar to the above, the outer layer 3811 may contain one or more outgoing cross-linking elements. For example, the outer layer 3811 may comprise a plurality of deformable legs 3921 protruding from one side of the outer layer 3811 that may be immersed in a compressible inner layer 3812. Each deformable leg 3921 may contain at least one hook coming out of it, or a notch, 3923, designed to mesh with the second part 3811b of the outer layer 3811, as a result of which the outer layer 3811 engages with the inner layer 3812. For example, the notches 3923 may be configured to protrude from the second side of the inner 3812 and pass through the holes 3808 in the second part 3811b of the outer layer 3811 so that the notches 3923 can catch on the outer surface of the outer layer 3811 and fasten the outer layer 3811 with the inner layer 3812. For the manufacture of the cartridge with brackets 3900, the inner layer 3812 can be at least partially compressed so that the notches can protrude from it and enter the openings 3808. For example, the cartridge with brackets 3900 can be at least partially pre-compressed when inserted into the channel for the cartridge with brackets. In addition to the above, at least a portion of the legs 3921 may be immersed in the first portion 3811a of the outer layer 3811, while the outer layer 3811 may consist of a plastic material, such as, for example, polydioxanone (PDS) and / or polyglycolic acid (PGC), and the plastic material can be applied by injection molding around at least a portion of legs 3921.

As represented in FIG. 68-72, a cartridge with brackets, such as, for example, a cartridge with brackets 4000, may comprise a cartridge case 4010 including a compressible first layer 4011 and a second layer 4012, as well as a plurality of brackets 4020 located inside the cartridge case 4010. As shown in FIG. 70, each bracket 4020 may include a base 4022 and at least one deformable leg 4023 extending from the base 4022. As shown in FIG. 68, the cartridge with brackets 4000 may be located between the channel for the cartridge with brackets 4030 and the stop member 4040 of the end clamp of the surgical stapler, in which the second layer 4012 of the cartridge case 4010 and / or the base 4022 of the brackets 4020 can be opposite the channel for the cartridge with brackets 4030 As presented in FIG. 69, the second layer 4012 may comprise a layer of gaskets 4060 connected to each other by means of a support frame of a layer of gaskets 4061. For example, gaskets 4060 and a support frame of a layer of gaskets 4061 can be formed from molded plastic material, such as, for example, polyglycolic acid (PGA) . Each gasket 4060 may comprise one or more holes or slots 4062, which may be configured to receive a bracket leg 4021 passing through them, as shown in FIG. 70 and 71. Each tampon 4060 may further comprise a receiving groove 4063 formed therein, which may be configured to receive a base 4022 of the bracket 4020. As shown in FIG. 69, gaskets 4060 and a support frame for a layer of gaskets 4061 may comprise a plurality of notches, perforations, or the like, which may be configured to separate the gaskets 4060 from the support frame of a layer of gaskets 4061 in a desired location. Similarly, as shown in FIG. 71, one or more shims 4060 may be connected to each other along a line containing, for example, perforations and / or notches 4064. In use, the compressible foam layer 4011 may be located opposite the target fabric T, and the cartridge body 4010 may be compressed by a stop member 4040 so that the stop member 4040 can deform the brackets 4020. When the brackets 4020 are deformed, the legs 4021 of each bracket 4020 can grab the fabric T, part of the first layer 4011, and a tampon 4060 inside the deformed bracket. When the cartridge channel with brackets 4030 is moved, for example, from an implanted cartridge with brackets 4060, the support frame for tampons 4061 can be separated from tampons 4060, and / or tampons 4060 can be separated from each other. In certain situations, the swabs 4060 may be separated from the frame 4061 and / or from each other during the deformation of the brackets 4020 by the stop element 4040, as described above.

The brackets from the cartridge with brackets are completely formed by the stop element when it is moved to the closed position. Alternatively, as presented in FIG. 73-76, the brackets of the cartridge with brackets, such as, for example, the cartridge with brackets 4100, can be deformed by the stop element when the stop element moves to the closed position, and, in addition, the bracket ejector system that moves the brackets to the closed stop element . The cartridge with brackets 4100 may comprise a housing of a compressible cartridge 4110, which may consist of, for example, foam, and a plurality of brackets 4120 at least partially located inside the housing of a compressible cartridge 4110. The bracket ejector system may include a holder of ejectors 4160, a plurality of bracket ejectors 4162 located inside the holder of the ejector 4160, and the tray for the cartridge with brackets 4180, which can be made with the possibility of holding the ejector brackets 4162 in the holder of the ejector 4160. N For example, the ejector brackets 4162 may be located inside one or more grooves 4163 in the holder of the ejector 4160, and the side walls of the grooves 4163 can help guide the ejectors of the brackets 4162 upward to the stop element. The brackets 4120 can be held in the grooves 4163 by means of the ejector brackets 4162, the brackets 4120 can be completely inside the grooves 4163 when the brackets 4120 and the ejector brackets 4162 are in non-activated positions. Alternatively, at least a portion of the brackets 4120 may protrude upwardly through the open ends 4161 of the grooves 4163 when the brackets 4120 and the ejectors of the brackets 4162 are in non-activated positions. For example, as mainly presented in FIG. 74, the bases of the brackets 4120 can be located inside the holder of the ejectors 4160, and the ends of the brackets 4120 can be placed inside the compressible housing of the cartridge 4110. About one third of the length of the brackets 4120 can be inside the holder of the ejectors 4160, and about two-thirds of the length of the brackets 4120 can be inside the cartridge case 4110. As represented in FIG. 73A, the cartridge with brackets 4100 may further comprise a waterproof winding or membrane 4111 that surrounds, for example, the cartridge case 4110 and the ejector holder 4160.

In use, the cartridge with brackets 4100 can be located, for example, inside the channel for the cartridge with brackets, and the stop element can be moved towards the cartridge with brackets 4100 in the closed position. The stop element may touch and compress the compressible cartridge body 4110 when the stop element is moved to the closed position. The stop element may not touch the brackets 4120 when the stop element is in the closed position. Alternatively, the stop member may be in contact with the legs of the brackets 4120 and at least partially warp the brackets 4120 when the stop member is in the closed position. In any case, the cartridge with brackets 4100 may further comprise one or more slides 4170, which can be advanced longitudinally inside the cartridge with brackets 4100 so that the slide 4170 can sequentially engage the ejectors of the brackets 4162 and move the ejectors of the brackets 4162 and the brackets 4120 to the stop. The slide 4170 can slide between the cartridge tray with brackets 4180 and the ejector brackets 4162. If closing the stop element starts the process of forming brackets 4120, moving the brackets 4120 up to the stop element can complete the formation process and deform the brackets 4120 to their fully formed state or at least to the required height. If the closure of the stop member does not deform the brackets 4120, the upward movement of the brackets 4120 towards the stop member can begin and complete the forming process and deform the brackets 4120 to a fully formed state or at least to the desired height. The slide 4170 can move from the proximal end of the cartridge with brackets 4100 to the distal end of the cartridge with brackets 4100 so that the brackets 4120 located at the proximal end of the cartridge with brackets 4100 are fully formed until the brackets 4120 located at the distal end of the cartridge with brackets are completely formed. As represented in FIG. 75, the slide 4170 may have at least one angular or inclined surface 4711 that can slide under the ejectors of the brackets 4162 and raise the ejectors of the brackets 4162, as shown in FIG. 76.

In addition to the above, the brackets 4120 can be formed to grab at least a portion of the tissue T and at least a portion of the compressible body of the cartridge cartridge 4110 with the brackets 4100. After the brackets 4120 are formed, the abutment element and the channel for the cartridge with brackets 4130 of the surgical stapler can be moved from the implanted cartridge with brackets 4100. In various situations, the cartridge tray 4180 can be fixedly engaged with the cartridge channel with brackets 4130, and thus, the cartridge tray 4180 ozhet separated from the body of compressible cartridge channel 4110 when pulling the staple cartridge 4130 from the implanted cartridge body 4110. As also shown in FIG. 73, the cartridge tray 4180 may comprise opposing side walls 4181 between which the cartridge case 4110 is movably located. For example, a compressible cartridge case 4110 can be compressed between the side walls 4181 so that the cartridge case 4110 can be movably held between them and movably disconnected from cartridge tray 4180, if the cartridge tray 4180 begins to move. For example, the ejector holder 4160 can be connected to the cartridge tray 4180 so that the ejector holder 4160, the ejectors 4162 and / or the slide 4170 can remain in the cartridge tray 4180 when the cartridge tray 4180 is removed from the surgical field. Alternatively, the ejectors 4162 can be removed from the ejector holder 4160 and left in the surgical field. For example, 4162 pushers can be made from bioabsorbable material such as polyglycolic acid (PGA) sold under the trademark Vicryl, polylactic acid (PLA or PLLA), polydiaxanone (PDS), polyhydroxyalkanoate (PHA), polyglexaprone 25 (PGCL) sold under Monocryl trademark, polycaprolactone (PCL) and / or composite material consisting, for example, of PGA, PLA, PDS, PHA, PGCL and / or PCL. The pushers of the brackets 4162 can be attached to the brackets 4120 so that the pushers 4162 are placed with brackets 4120. For example, each pusher 4162 may include a groove configured to hold, for example, the bases of the brackets 4120, and the grooves can be made to hold the bases of the brackets when the help of a press fitting or snapping.

In addition to the above, the ejector holder 4160 and / or the slide 4170 can be removed from the cartridge tray 4180. For example, the slide 4170 can slide between the cartridge tray 4180 and the ejector holder 4160 so that the slide 4170 can move the ejector holder 4160 up from cartridge tray 4180 when the slide 4170 is advanced to push the ejectors of the brackets 4162 and the brackets 4120 up. For example, the ejector holder 4160 and / or the slide 4170 may consist of a bioabsorbable material, such as, for example, polyglycolic acid (PGA) sold under the trademark Vicryl, polylactic acid (PLA or PLLA), polydioxanone (PDS), polyhydroxyalkanate (PHA) polyglycapron 25 (PGCL) sold under the brand name Monocryl, polycaprolactone (PCL) and / or a mixture consisting, for example, of PGA, PLA, PDS, PHA, PGCL and / or PCL. The slide 4170 may be integral and / or attached to a push rod or cutting element that pushes the slide 4170 through the cartridge with brackets 4100. In such cases, the slide 4170 may not be removed from the cartridge tray 4180 and may be left in the surgical a stapler, while in other embodiments in which the slide 4170 is not attached to the push rod, the slide 4170 can be left in the surgical field. In any case, in addition to the above, the compressibility of the cartridge case 4110 allows the use of wider cartridges with brackets inside the surgical stapling instrument, since the cartridge case 4110 can be compressed when the stop element of the stapling instrument is closed. As a result of the at least partial deformation of the brackets, when closing the stop element, higher brackets can be used, such as, for example, brackets with a height of approximately 4.6 mm (0.18 in) and approximately 3.0 mm (0.12 in) from the heights of the brackets may be located inside the compressible layer 4110, and wherein the compressible layer 4110 in the uncompressed state may have a height of, for example, approximately 3.6 mm (0.14 inches).

As also presented in FIG. 77-80, a cartridge with brackets, such as, for example, a cartridge with brackets 4200, may comprise a compressible cartridge housing 4210, a plurality of brackets 4220 located therein and a plurality of flexible transverse support elements 4234. As also shown in FIG. 78, a cartridge with brackets 4200 can be located between the stop element 4240 and the channel for the cartridge with brackets 4230, and transverse support elements 4230 can be attached to the channel for the cartridge with brackets 4230. When moving down, the stop element 4240 compresses the cartridge body 4210 and at least partially deforms the brackets 4220, as shown in FIG. 79, the side portions of the block housing 4210 can be pulled out on the sides and push the side support members 4234 out. For example, the transverse support elements 4234 can be attached to the housing of the cartridge 4210, and the transverse support elements 4234 can be separated from the housing of the cartridge 4210, as shown in FIG. 79, when the cartridge case 4210 is distributed on the sides, as described above. The transverse support elements 4234 can be glued to the housing of the cartridge 4210 using at least one adhesive, such as, for example, fibrin and / or protein hydrogel. Similar to the above, closing the stop 4240 can only partially deform the brackets 4220, and the formation of the brackets 4220 can end with the movement of one or more slides 4270 through the cartridge with brackets 4200, as shown in FIG. 80. As also presented in FIG. 82 and 83, the slide 4270 can be extended from the proximal end of the cartridge with brackets 4200 to the distal end of the cartridge with brackets 4200 using a cutting element 4280. For example, the cutting element 4280 can be a cutting element, or a knife, 4283, which can move through the fabric T and / or a compressible cartridge housing 4210. The cutting element 4280 may include cam elements 4282 that extend along the outer surfaces of the branches 4230 and 4240, moving or holding the branches in a certain position. As a result of the above, the final shape can be given to the brackets 4220 at the same time or at least essentially simultaneously with the dissection of the tissue T. For example, the slide 4270 can be distally relative to the knife 4283 so that the tissue T is pierced only when, for example, the previous part of the fabric was completely stapled with brackets.

As also presented in FIG. 82 and 83, the slide 4270 may include separate slide elements that extend with the cutting element 4280. For example, the slide 4270 may be inside the cartridge with brackets 4200, and the cutting element 4280 may be advanced into the cartridge with brackets 4200 using the trigger rod 4281 thus so that the cutting element 4280 engages the slide 4270 and promotes them distally. The slide 4270 can be connected to each other. In any case, each slide 4270 may comprise an inclined surface, or cam, 4271, which may be configured to lift brackets 4220 aligned within a row of brackets. The inclined surfaces 4271 may be integral with the cutting element 4280. As shown in FIG. 82 and 83, each bracket 4200 may include a base, at least one deformable element extending from the base, and a crown 4229 formed on and / or located around at least a portion of the base and / or deformable elements of the bracket 4200. Such crowns 4229 may can be made with the possibility of direct movement, for example, the slide 4270. More specifically, the crowns 4229 of the brackets 4220 can be made so that the angular surfaces 4271 of the slide 4270 could slide under the crowns 4229 or directly in contact with this crowns between them in the absence of the pusher brackets. In such cases, each crown 4229 may comprise at least one interacting corner (inclined) surface that can come into contact with the corner surface 4271 of the slide 4270 so that the interacting corner surfaces can move the brackets 4220 upward when the slide 4270 slides under the brackets 4220 .

As represented in FIG. 81, the cartridge with brackets, such as, for example, the cartridge with brackets 4300, may comprise a compressible housing 4310 and a plurality of brackets 4320 located in the compressible housing 4310. As described above, the cartridge with brackets 4300 may include flexible transverse support elements 4334, which may be attached to the cartridge channel with brackets and / or glued to a compressible housing 4310. In addition to the above, the flexible transverse support elements 4334 can be connected to each other using one or more beams, or connecting elements a, 4335 which can be configured to hold the transverse support elements 4334 together. In use, the connecting elements 4335 may be configured to prevent or at least prevent the transverse support elements 4334 from being prematurely separated from the cartridge body 4310. The connecting elements 4335 may be configured to hold the transverse support elements 4334 together after the cartridge is compressed with the stop element brackets 4300 . In such cases, the transverse support elements 4334 can withstand the swelling, or lateral displacement, of the side parts of the cartridge case 4310. A cutting element, such as, for example, a cutting element 4280, can be configured to dissect the connecting elements 4335 as it moves in the distal direction inside cartridge housing 4310. For example, the cutting element 4280 may be configured to push one or more slides, such as, for example, the slide 4270, in the distal direction to form brackets 4320 pr and help of a persistent element. The slide 4270 can guide the cutting edge 4283 so that the cutting element 4280 does not cut the connecting element 4335 until the brackets 4320 adjacent to this connecting element 4335 are fully formed or at least formed to the required height. In various situations, the connecting elements 4335 together with the transverse support elements 4334 can prevent or at least reduce the lateral movement of the housing of the compressible cartridge 4310 and at the same time prevent or at least reduce the lateral movement of the brackets 4320 located inside the cartridge case 4310. In such situations, the connecting elements 4335 can hold the brackets 4320 in the required position until they are deformed, after which the connecting elements 4335 can be dissected for releasing the transverse parts of the cartridge case 4310. As indicated above, the transverse support elements 4334 can be connected to the cartridge channel with brackets and, thus, can be removed from the surgical field with the cartridge channel with brackets after implantation of the cartridge with brackets 4300. Cross support elements 4334 may be formed from implantable material and remain in the surgical field. The connecting elements 4335 may be located between the cartridge body 4310 and the tissue T, and after separating the connecting elements 4335 from the transverse support elements 4334, the connecting elements 4335 may remain implanted in the patient. For example, the connecting elements 4335 may consist of a compressible material, and the connecting elements 4335 may consist of the same material as, for example, the transverse supporting elements 4334. The connecting elements 4335 and / or the transverse supporting elements 4334 may be made of a flexible bioabsorbable material, such such as polyglycolic acid (PGA) sold under the Vicryl trademark, polylactic acid (PLA or PLLA), polydioxanone (PDS), polyhydroxyalkanoate (PHA), polyglexaprone 25 (PGCL) sold under the Monocryl trademark, polycaprolac tone (PCL) and / or composite material consisting, for example, of PGA, PLA, PDS, PHA, PGCL and / or PCL. The connecting element may comprise a sheet of material connected to the transverse support elements 4334. The cartridge with brackets may include connecting elements passing through the upper surface of the cartridge case 4310, as well as connecting elements passing around the lower surface of the cartridge case 4310.

As represented in FIG. 84, the cartridge with brackets may include brackets, such as, for example, brackets 4420, which may include a wire portion inserted in the crown portion. The wire portion may consist of a metal, such as, for example, titanium and / or stainless steel, and / or plastics, such as, for example, polydioxanone (PDS) and / or polyglycolic acid (PGA). The crown part may consist of a metal, such as, for example, titanium and / or stainless steel, and / or plastic, such as, for example, polydioxanone (PDS) and / or polyglycolic acid (PGA). The wire portion of each bracket 4420 may comprise a base 4422 and deformable legs 4421 protruding from the base 4422, the crown portion of each bracket 4420 may comprise a crown 4429, into which at least a portion of the base is inserted. To assemble together the parts of each bracket 4420, as shown in FIG. 85A-85C, the legs 4421 of the wire portion can be inserted into the hole 4426 in the head 4429, and the hole 4426 can be configured to guide the legs 4421 into the chamber for the base 4427. The wire portion can be further inserted into the head 4429 so that the legs 4421 left the chamber for the base 4427, and the base 4422 of the wire part entered the chamber for the base 4427. For example, the chamber for the base 4427 can be configured to rotate the wire part inside the ring 4429 when the base 4422 is inserted into the chamber for the base 4427 so that the legs of the bracket 4421 are directed upward or at least substantially upward. As also presented in FIG. 84, crown 4429 may include outlet openings 4425, which may be configured to hold the legs of brackets 4421.

In addition to the above, the surgical stapler may include a slide 4470 configured to laterally pass through the cartridge with brackets 4400 and the channel for the cartridge with brackets 4430 and move the brackets 4420 located inside the cartridge body 4410 in the direction of the stop member. In various situations, the slide 4470 can move from the proximal end of the cartridge channel with brackets 4430 to the distal end of the channel for the cartridge 4430 to implant the cartridge body 4410 and brackets 4420. In certain situations, the slide 4470 can be retracted or returned to the proximal end of the channel for the cartridge 4430, and another cartridge with brackets 4400 can be inserted into the channel for cartridge 4430. After placing a new cartridge with brackets 4400 inside the channel for cartridge 4430, the slide 4470 can be distally advanced again. The surgical stapler may comprise one or more interlock systems that can prevent the slide 4470 from re-extending in the distal direction without a new cartridge with brackets 4400 located in the channel for the cartridge 4430. For example, as shown in FIG. 84, the cartridge channel with brackets 4430 may include a locking arm 4439 that can be configured to prevent or at least restrict the distal movement of the slide 4470. More specifically, the slide 4470 can be abutted against the shoulder 4439 if the slide 4470 is not will be at least partially raised up above shoulder 4439 with, for example, a lifting member 4428 extending between the most proximal brackets 4420 inside the cartridge with brackets 4400. In other words, the slide 4470 cannot be advanced forward in the absence of the most proximal brackets 4420 in the new cartridge with brackets 4400. Thus, if the used cartridge with brackets 4400 is in the channel for the cartridge 4430, or if the cartridge with brackets 4400 is completely missing in the channel for the 4430 cartridge, the slide 4470 with brackets is not possible push into the channel for the 4430 cartridge.

In addition to the above, as shown in FIG. 86, the cartridge with brackets, such as, for example, the cartridge with brackets 4500, may be located inside the groove 4530 of the cartridge with brackets 4530 and may include a casing of the crease cartridge, a plurality of brackets 4520 located in the cartridge case 4510, and a tray or holder, 4580 cartridge. The compressible housing of the cartridge 4510 may include an outer layer 4511 and an inner layer 4512, the outer layer 4511 can hermetically enclose the inner layer 4512. For example, the outer layer 4511 can be located between the inner layer 4512 and the tray for the cartridge with brackets 4580. Alternatively, the outer layer 4511 can only partially surround the inner layer 4512, and, for example, the outer layer 4511 and the tray for the cartridge 4580 can together comprise or at least substantially enclose the inner layer 4512. In addition to the above , the brackets 4520 can be held by a tray for cartridge 4580, and the tray for cartridge 4580 may contain one or more channels for holding brackets configured to hold brackets 4520. The tray for cartridge 4580 can be attached to the housing of cartridge 4510, for example, in one in such an embodiment, the cartridge case 4510 may be traversed between opposite side walls of the cartridge tray 4580. The side walls of the cartridge tray 4580 may support the cartridge case transverse direction, and, for example, the cartridge tray 4580 may contain one or more walls, or ribs, 4582, extending upward from the lower support element 4583 into the cartridge body 4510. For example, the cartridge body 4510 may contain one or more grooves, or channels, which may be configured to hold and / or engage with walls 4582. Walls 4582 may extend partially or almost completely through the housing of cartridge 4510. For example, walls 4582 may extend through cartridge 4500 longitudinally between the first row of brackets 4520 and the second near brackets 4520.

Cartridge body 4510 and / or cartridge tray 4580 may include interacting retaining elements that can provide a snap connection between the cartridge tray 4580 and cartridge case 4510. The cartridge with brackets 4500 may be located inside the channel for cartridge 4530 so that the cartridge tray 4580 is located adjacent to the channel for the cartridge 4530 and / or attached to it 4530. The pallet for the cartridge 4580 can be detachably connected to the channel for the cartridge 4530 so that after compression of the cartridge with brackets 4500 resistant element 4540 and the deformation of the brackets 4520, the cartridge tray 4580 could be separated from the channel for the cartridge 4530 and implanted in the cartridge case 4510. For example, the cartridge tray 4580 may consist of bioabsorbable material, such as, for example, polyglycolic acid (PGA), available in sold under the trade name Vicryl, polylactic acid (PLA or PLLA), polydioxanone (PDS), polyhydroxyalkanoate (PHA), polyglexaprone 25 (PGCL), commercially available under the trade name Monocryl, polycaprolactone (PCL) and / or a mixture of PGA, PLA , PDS, PHA, PGCL and / or PCL. The surgical stapler may further comprise a trigger and / or an ejector that can slide between the cartridge channel with brackets 4530 and the lower ejection surface on the cartridge tray 4580, which may be configured to lift or remove the cartridge tray 4580 from the cartridge channel 4530. The housing of the cartridge 4510 can be removably attached to the pallet for the cartridge 4580 so that after the cartridge with brackets 4500 is compressed by the stop element 4540 and the brackets 4520 are deformed, the housing Cartridge is 4510 may detach from the cartridge tray 4580. For example, the cartridge tray 4580 can remain fixedly connected to the cartridge channel 4530 such that the tray for the cartridge 4580 is removed from the surgical field with a conduit for the cartridge. The surgical stapler may further comprise a trigger and / or an ejector that can slide between the cartridge tray with brackets 4580 and the lower ejection surface of the cartridge body 4510, which may be configured to lift or remove the cartridge body 4510 from the cartridge tray 4580. For example , the cartridge with brackets 4500 may also contain brackets pushers located between the cartridge tray 4580 and brackets 4520 so that as the trigger moves distally the brackets ejectors and brackets 4520 can be displaced upward in the direction of the stop element. For example, the ejector brackets can be at least partially inserted into the compressible housing of the cartridge 4510.

By analogy with the above, the cartridge with brackets 4500 may include a locking system that can be configured to prevent or at least limit the distal movement of the cutting element until an inactive cartridge with brackets 4500 is located inside the channel for the cartridge with brackets 45. Pallet for a cartridge with brackets 4580 may contain a surface that lifts the cutting element up and above the blocking surface inside, for example, the channel for the cartridge with brackets. If there is no cartridge with brackets 4500 in the channel for cartridge 4530 containing a tray for cartridge 4580, advancement of the cutting element is not possible. Most proximal brackets and / or other suitable brackets in the cartridge with brackets 4500 may contain a lifting surface, which essentially raises the cutting element above the locking surface. In addition to or instead of the above, the various parts of the cartridge with brackets 4500 may consist of materials having different colors. In such cases, the surgeon has the opportunity to visually determine when the cartridge with inactive brackets and / or the cartridge with activated brackets is in the channel for the cartridge with brackets 4530. For example, the outer layer 4511 of the cartridge case 4510 may have a first color, the tray for cartridge 4580 may have the second color, and the channel for the cartridge with brackets 4530 may have a third color. When the surgeon sees the first color, he can determine that the inactive cartridge 4500 is in the channel for the cartridge with brackets 4530. When the surgeon sees the second color, he can determine that the activated cartridge 4500 is in the channel for the cartridge with brackets 4530 and that the remaining cartridge must be removed cartridge tray 4580. When the surgeon sees the third color, he can determine that there are no parts of the cartridge with brackets 4500 in the channel for the cartridge with brackets 4530.

As represented in FIG. 87, a cartridge with brackets, for example, such as a cartridge with brackets 4600, may comprise a collapsible implantable case 4610 and a plurality of brackets 4620 located therein. The cartridge case 4610 may include an outer layer 4611 and an inner layer 4612. The inner layer 4612 may include a plurality of recesses, for example, recesses, or pockets, 4615, which facilitate the creasing of the cartridge case 4610. For example, the inner layer 4612 may include a corrugated or honeycomb grill that withstands compressive force, or pressure, to a certain threshold value. If the threshold value is not exceeded, the inner layer 4612 may be deformed with a linear or at least substantially linear relationship with respect to the applied compressive force or pressure. If the compressive force, or pressure, exceeds a threshold value, the inner layer 4612 can abruptly give in to the compressive load and become very bent or wrinkled. The grating of the inner layer 4612 may be formed of a plurality of sublayers 4612a that can be connected to each other. Each sublayer 4612a may comprise a plurality of alternating grooves and grooves, or waves, which coincide with the alternating grooves and grooves of the adjacent sublayer 4612a. For example, the grooves of the first sublayer 4612a may abut against the grooves of the second sublayer 4612a, similarly, the grooves of the first sublayer 4612a may abut against the grooves of the second sublayer 4612a. Adjacent sublayers 4612a may be bonded to each other and / or to the outer layer 4611 via at least one adhesive, such as, for example, fibrin and / or protein hydrogel. In FIG. 88, a cartridge with brackets 4600 is shown after creasing the block body 4610 and deforming the brackets 4620 to grip and hold the fabric T against the block body 4610.

As represented in FIG. 89-91, a cartridge with brackets, such as a cartridge with brackets 4700, for example, may comprise a compressible implantable cartridge case 4710 and a plurality of brackets 4720 located in the cartridge case 4710. Like the above, the cartridge case 4710 may include an outer layer 4711 and an inner layer 4712 moreover, the inner layer 4712 may contain many sublayers 4712a. Also, similarly to the above, each sublayer 4712a may comprise intermittent grooves 4717 and ribs 4718, which can be aligned with each other to form recesses, or cavities, 4715 between them. For example, grooves 4717 and / or grooves 4718 can extend along axes that are parallel to each other and / or parallel to the longitudinal axis 4709. The brackets 4720 can be arranged in the form of a plurality of rows of brackets that can extend along axes that are parallel to each other and / or parallel to the longitudinal axis 4709. Alternatively, as shown Leno in FIG. 87 and 88, the brackets 4620 contained in the cartridge case 4600 can extend along axes that are transverse or perpendicular to the axes formed by the grooves and grooves of the sublayer 4612a. As represented in FIG. 89-91, brackets 4720 may extend through grooves 4717 and ribs 4718, and the friction force between brackets 4720 and sublayers 4712a can hold brackets 4720 inside block body 4710. The plurality of sublayers 4712a may be formed from a support material and / or plastic material, such as, for example, polydioxanone (PDS) and / or polyglycolic acid (PGA), which may be configured to hold the brackets 4720, for example, in a standing position and / or keeping the brackets 4720 aligned with each other, as shown in FIG. 89 and 90. In FIG. 91 shows a cartridge with brackets 4700 after folding the cartridge body 4710 and deforming the brackets 4720 to grip and hold the fabric T against the block body 4710.

As also presented in FIG. 89-91, the cartridge housing 4710 may flexibly wrinkle under compression. For example, waves generated in each sublayer 4712a by grooves 4717 and grooves 4718 can become flattened or at least substantially flattened as the cartridge body 4710 contracts, resulting in creasing or at least substantially creasing of the cavities 4715 between the sublayers. In various situations, the housing of the cartridge 4710 or at least a portion of the housing of the cartridge 4710 may experience elastic or elastic back expansion after releasing compressive force or pressure from the housing of the cartridge 4710. For example, the connections between the grooves 4717 and the grooves 4718 of the adjacent sub-layers 4712a may remain intact or at least substantially intact when the cartridge body 4710 is compressed so that after the force compressing the cartridge body 4710 is removed, the sub-layers 4712a can bias each other, whereby at least partial restoration of the shape of the housing of the cartridge 4710 takes place. The housing of the cartridge 4710 may undergo plastic deformation or crushing under compression, and thus, the housing of the cartridge 4710 may not be tested s despreading after removing from it a compressive force, or pressure, 4710. As also shown in FIG. 92, a cartridge with brackets, for example, a cartridge with brackets 4800, may comprise a compressible cartridge case 4810 with an outer layer 4811 and an inner layer 4812, while the inner layer 4812 may have a corrugated honeycomb grid in which a plurality of recesses, or pockets, 4815 are formed. The walls indicating the lattice structure of the inner layer 4812 may contain one or more softened, or thin, transverse sections 4819, which can be performed in order to ensure the destruction of the walls forming the lattice structure when compressed and the cartridge body 4810. In such situations, the cartridge housing 4810 may be crushed when the staple cartridge 4800 of implantation.

As also presented in FIG. 93-95, a cartridge with brackets, such as, for example, a cartridge with brackets 4900, may comprise a cartridge case 4910 comprising an outer layer 4911 and a plurality of crease elements 4912 located, for example, between the upper and lower parts of the outer layer. As mainly presented in FIG. 93 and 94, the cartridge with brackets 4900 may further comprise a plurality of brackets 4920, each bracket 4920 may be located inside the crease member 4912. More specifically, each crease member 4912 may include a first part 4912a, a second part 4012b and a third part 4012c, which together form a cavity 4915 configured to receive the bracket 4920. In addition to the above, in use, the cartridge with brackets 4900 can be located inside the channel for the cartridge with brackets, and to the surface in contact with the fabric and 4919 may be applied compressive force for compressing the cartridge body 4910. When moving tissue contacting surface 4919 downwards collapsible elements 4912 may wrinkle. In such situations, the second part 4912b of each crease element 4912 can be wrinkled into the corresponding first part 4912a, and similarly, the third part 4912c of each crease element 4912 can be wrinkled into the corresponding second part 4912b. By compressing the block body 4910 and creasing the crease elements 4912, the brackets 4920 located inside the crease elements 4912 can deform, as shown in FIG. 95. The second part 4912b of each crease member 4912 can be latched / pressed into the corresponding first part 4912a so that when a compressive force is applied to the folding element 4912 in excess of the resistance of the first part 4912a and the second part 4912b (FIG. 94), the first part 4912a and second part 4912b may begin to slide relative to each other. Similarly, the third part 4912c of each crease member 4912 can be pressed by friction against the corresponding second part 4912b. After the compressive force applied to the crease member 4912 exceeds the holding force of the second part 4912b and the third part 4912c in the deployed position (FIG. 94), the second part 4912b and the third part 4912c can begin to slide relative to each other.

In many of the embodiments described herein, a bracket cartridge may include multiple brackets. Such brackets may consist of a metal wire deformed into a substantially U-shape configuration with two brace legs. Other embodiments are possible in which the brackets may have different configurations, such as two or more wires connected together containing three or more bracket legs. The wire, or wires used to form the brackets, may have a circular or at least substantially circular cross-section. The wire for the brackets may have any other cross section, such as, for example, square and / or rectangular cross sections. Brackets can be made of plastic wire. The brackets can be made of plastic coated metal wire. The cartridge may contain a stapling element of any appropriate type in addition to or instead of brackets. For example, such a crosslinking element may comprise pivoting links that can be folded upon engagement with the thrust element. Two-part crosslinking elements can be used. For example, a cartridge with brackets may comprise a plurality of first parts of a stapling element, and a stop element may comprise a plurality of second parts of a stapling element that connects to the first parts of the stapling element when the stop element is pressed against the cartridge with brackets. As described above, the slide or ejector can advance inside the cartridge with brackets to complete the brace formation process. The slide or ejector can be moved within the stop element to move one or more forming elements down to engage with the opposite cartridge with brackets or stapling elements located therein.

A cartridge with brackets can contain four rows of brackets located in it. Four rows of brackets can be ordered to form two inner rows of brackets and two outer rows of brackets. For example, the inner row of brackets and the outer row of brackets can be placed on one side of the groove for the cutting element, or the knife, inside the cartridge with brackets and, similarly, the inner row of brackets and the outer row of brackets can be placed on the other side of the groove for the cutting element, or knife . Alternatively, the cartridge with brackets may not contain a groove for the cutting element; however, instead of the groove for the cartridge with brackets, such a cartridge with brackets may contain a special part adapted to be cut by the cutting element. The inner row of brackets may be located in the cartridge with brackets so that it is equidistant or at least substantially equidistant from the groove for the cutting element. Similarly, the outer rows of brackets can be positioned inside the cartridge with brackets so that they are at an equal or at least substantially equal distance from the groove for the cutting element. A cartridge with brackets may contain more or less than four rows of brackets in the cartridge with brackets. A cartridge with brackets can contain six rows of brackets. For example, a cartridge with brackets may contain three rows of brackets on the first side of the groove for the cutting element and three rows of brackets on the second side of the groove for the cutting element. A cartridge with brackets may contain an odd number of rows of brackets. For example, a cartridge with brackets may contain two rows of brackets on the first side of the groove for the cutting element and three rows of brackets on the second side of the groove for the cutting element. Rows of brackets may contain brackets of the same or at least substantially the same height in an unformed state. Alternatively, one or more rows of brackets may comprise brackets with a height in an unformed state other than the height of the other brackets. For example, the brackets on one side of the groove for the cutting element may have a first height in the unformed state, and the brackets on the other side of the groove for the cutting element may have a second height in the unformed state, which, for example, differs from the first.

As represented in FIG. 96A-96D, the end clamp of the surgical stapler may include a bracket for connecting the cartridge with brackets, such as, for example, a channel for a cartridge with brackets 5030, a cartridge with staples that can be detached in a channel for a cartridge with brackets 5030, such as, for example , a cartridge with brackets 5000, and jaws 5040 located opposite the cartridge with brackets 5000 and the channel for the cartridge with brackets 5030. The cartridge with brackets 5000 may include a compressible cartridge body 5010 and a plurality of brackets 5020 and / or any other x fasteners at least partially located in the housing of the compressible cartridge 5010. For example, each bracket 5020 may include a base 5022, as well as legs 5021 extending upward from the base 5022, and at least part of the legs 5021 can be placed in the housing of the cartridge 5010 The compressible housing 5010 may include an upper or fabric-facing surface 5019, as well as a lower surface 5018, while the lower surface 5018 may be located adjacent to the supporting surface 5031 of the cartridge channel with brackets 5030 and be held by this surface. Similar to the above, the supporting surface 5031 may include a plurality of supporting grooves 5032 made therein (FIG. 96D), for example, which may be configured to receive and support the bases 5022 of the brackets 5020. The end clamp of the surgical stapler may further comprise a holding matrix, such as, for example, a holding matrix 5050, which can be adapted to engage the brackets 5020 and trap tissue between the matrix and the brackets. For example, the holding matrix 5050 can be detachably attached to the jaw 5040. During use, after placing the cartridge with brackets 5000 in the channel for the cartridge with brackets 5030, the jaw 5040 and the attached holding matrix 5050 can move towards the cartridge with brackets 5000 and the channel for the cartridge with brackets 5030. The jaw 5040 can move down along the axis 5099 so that the jaw 5040 and the cartridge channel with brackets 5030 remain parallel or at least substantially parallel to each other when closing the jaw 5040. More specifically, for example, the jaws 5040 can be closed so that the contact surface with the fabric 5051 of the holding matrix 5050 is parallel or at least substantially parallel to the contact surface with the fabric 5019 of the cartridge with brackets 5000 when the branches 5040 are moved to the cartridge with brackets 5000.

As represented in FIG. 96A, the holding matrix 5050 can be detachably fixed to the jaw 5040 so that the relative movement between the holding matrix 5050 and the jaw 5040 when the matrix 5050 is attached to the jaw 5040 is small or absent. The jaw 5040 may contain one or more holding elements that hold the holding matrix 5050 in a specific position. For example, the holding matrix 5050 can be attached to the jaw 5040 using a latch and / or tight fit. The holding matrix 5050 may be attached to the jaw 5040 using at least one adhesive. In any case, the jaw 5040 can be moved to a position where the holding matrix 5050 is in contact with the fabric T and the fabric T is adjacent to the tissue surface 5019 of the cartridge with brackets 5000. When the fabric T is placed close to the cartridge with brackets 5000 using a jaw 5040, the housing of the compressible cartridge 5010 of the cartridge with brackets 5000 may or may not be compressed by the jaw 5040. In any situation, the legs 5021 of the brackets 5200 may not protrude through the surface to come into contact with the fabric 5019 of the cartridge with brackets 5000, as shown but in FIG. 96A. Moreover, as presented in FIG. 96A, the jaw 5040 can hold the tissue T against the compressible body 5010 without engaging the holding matrix 5050 with brackets 5020. Such embodiments may allow the surgeon to open and close the jaw 5040 several times to achieve the desired position of the distal workpiece in the surgical field without damaging the tissue T ". There are other embodiments in which the ends of the brackets 5023 may protrude through the fabric facing surface 5019 even before the block body 5010 is compressed by the abutment plate 5040. After positioning the end clip in a suitable manner as shown in FIG. 96B, the jaw 5040 can be moved downward to the bracket groove 5030 so that the compressible body 5010 is compressed by the stop member 5040 and so that the tissue contact surface 5019 is moved downward relative to the brackets 5020. As the surface 5019 moves downward, the tips 5023 the bracket legs 5021 may puncture the surface 5019 facing the fabric and at least partially pierce the “T” fabric. Under such circumstances, the holding matrix 5050 may be positioned above the brackets 5020 so that the holding holes 5052 of the holding matrix 5050 align (or substantially align) with the tips 5023 of the bracket legs 5021.

By pushing down the holding matrix 5050 along the axis 5099, as shown in FIG. 96C, the legs 5021 of the brackets 5020 may fit into the holding holes 5052. The legs of the brackets 5021 may engage with the side walls of the holding holes 5052. As described in more detail below, the holding matrix 5050 may comprise one or more holding elements protruding inwardly and / or around holding holes 5052, which can engage the legs of the brackets 5021. In any case, the legs of the brackets 5021 can be held in the holding holes 5052. In various situations, the ends 5023 of the legs of the brackets 5021 can fit into the holding holes 5052 and COROLLARY engage the frictional force retaining members and / or side wall apertures 5052. By pushing the retaining matrix 5050 grounds the side brackets 5022 5020 5021 parentheses legs can slide relative to the side walls and / or retaining elements. As a result of the above, a sliding friction force can be created between the legs of the brackets 5021 and the holding matrix 5050, and such a sliding friction force can create resistance when the holding matrix 5050 is mounted on the brackets 5020. The sliding friction forces between the holding matrix 5050 and the brackets 5020 can be constant or at least substantially constant when the holding matrix 5050 slides down along the legs 5021 of the brackets 5020. The sliding friction forces can increase and / or decrease if the holding mat The CA 5050 slides down along the legs of the brackets 5021 due to changes in the geometric shape of the legs of the brackets 5021, the holding holes 5052 and / or the holding elements protruding, for example, inward and / or around the holding holes 5052. The compressible cartridge case 5010 with brackets 5000 may also render resistance when inserting the holding matrix 5050 into the brackets 5000. More specifically, the housing of the compressible cartridge 5010 may consist, for example, of an elastic material that can exert a counteracting force on the holding matrix 5050, which increases as the distance over which the compressible cartridge housing 5010 compresses increases. For example, an increase in the drag force generated by the cartridge housing 5010 may be linearly proportional or at least substantially linearly proportional to the distance the cartridge housing is compressed. The amplification of the resistance force generated by the cartridge case 5010 may be geometrically proportional to the distance over which the cartridge case is compressed.

In addition to the above, a trigger force sufficient to overcome the opposing and frictional forces described above can be applied to the jaw 5040 and the holding matrix 5050. In use, the holding matrix 5050 can be set to any appropriate depth relative to the brackets 5020. The holding matrix 5050 can be immersed to a depth relative to the bases 5022 of the brackets 5020, which will allow two or more layers of fabric to be fixed together and create a compressive force in the fabric, or pressure. In various situations, a system comprising a holding matrix 5050 and brackets 5020 may allow the surgeon to select the amount of compressive force or pressure applied to the tissue, choosing the depth at which the holding matrix 5050 is set. For example, the holding matrix 5050 can be moved down to the bases 5022 brackets 5020 until the retaining matrix 5050 plunges to a certain depth 5011 from the bottom of the retaining grooves 5032, and a smaller depth 5011 can lead to the emergence of large compressive forces, or pressure, which are attached to fabric T than a greater depth of 5011, which can lead to lower compressive forces, or pressures, which are applied to fabric T. The compressive forces or pressures, which are applied to fabric T, can be linearly proportional or at least substantially linear are proportional to the depth 5011, on which the holding matrix 5050 is immersed. In various situations, the compressive forces or pressures applied to the fabric T may depend on the thickness of the fabric T located between the holding matrix 5050 and the cartridge with brackets 5020. B Lee specifically, at a predetermined distance 5011 compressive force, or pressure, with a thicker layer of tissue T can be greater than with a thin layer of tissue T.

In various situations, in addition to the one described above, the surgeon can adjust the depth at which the retaining matrix 5050 is installed to take into account the thicker and / or thinner tissue located in the working tool, as well as to apply a specific or predetermined pressure to the tissue T regardless of its thickness. For example, the surgeon may set the holding matrix 5050 to a shallower depth 5011 when stitching a thinner tissue T or to a greater depth 5011 when stitching a thicker tissue T to obtain the same or at least substantially the same compressive pressure within the tissue. In addition to the above, the surgeon can select the pressure force on the tissue T located between the holding matrix 5050 and the cartridge with brackets 5010. In various situations, the surgeon can engage the holding matrix 5050 with brackets 5020 and position it at a first distance from the bases 5022 of the brackets 5020 so that apply the first compressive pressure to the tissue. In an alternative embodiment, the surgeon may position the holding matrix 5050 at a second distance from the bases 5022, which is less than the first distance, to apply a second compressive pressure to the tissue that is greater than the first pressure. In an alternative embodiment, the surgeon may position the holding matrix 5050 at a third distance from the bases 5022, which is less than the second distance, to apply a third compressive pressure to the tissue that is greater than the second pressure. A crosslinking system comprising a holding matrix 5050 and brackets 5020 can be designed so that the surgeon can apply a wide range of compressive pressures to the target tissue.

As represented in FIG. 96D, the legs of the brackets 5021 can be inserted through the holding matrix 5050 so that the ends of the legs of the brackets 5023 extend above the upper surface of the holding matrix 5050. As shown in FIG. 96C, the jaw 5040 may also have recesses 5042 that hold the ends of the legs of the brackets 5023 as they pass through the holding holes 5052 in the holding matrix 5050. For example, the recesses 5042 can be aligned with the holding holes 5052 so that the legs 5021 do not come into contact with the jaws 5040. The recesses 5042 can be of sufficient depth, so that the legs of the brackets 5021 do not touch the jaw 5040, regardless of the distance at which the holding matrix 5050 is located. After the holding matrix 5050 has come into contact with obkami 5020 and located in the desired position, referring to FIG. 96D, cartridge groove 5030 with brackets 5030 and jaw 5040 can be removed from the “T” fabric. More specifically, the cartridge groove 5030 with brackets can be disconnected from the implanted cartridge with brackets 5000, and the stop member 5040 can be disconnected from the implanted holding matrix 5050. When moving the jaw 5040 from the holding matrix 5050 and moving the supporting elements of the brackets 5032 from the bases of the brackets 5022, the distance 5011 between the holding matrix 5050 and the bottom of the bases 5022 can be maintained even if the jaw 5040 and the cartridge channel with brackets 5030 no longer support them. The resting friction force between the bracket legs 5021 and the holding matrix 5050 may be sufficient to hold the matrix 5050 in place, despite the biasing force exerted on the holding matrix 5050 by the compressed cartridge body 5010 and / or the compressed fabric T. For example, the cartridge case 5010 may consist of an elastic material that, when compressed, is capable of exerting an elastic biasing force on the holding matrix 5050 and the brackets 5020, which can separate the holding matrix 5050 and the brackets 5020. Friction forces counteract this biasing force between the legs 5021 of the brackets and the holding matrix 5050.

As described above, the holding matrix may comprise a plurality of holding holes, each holding hole being able to hold the legs of the crosslinking member. As shown in FIG. 97, a portion of the holding matrix 5150 may comprise a holding hole 5152, which is defined by the perimeter 5156. The perimeter 5156 of the opening 5152 may have a circular or at least substantially circular profile and / or any other suitable profile. The holding matrix 5150 may contain one or more holding elements, such as, for example, the holding elements 5153, which protrude into the hole 5152 and can be configured to engage with the leg of the stapling element when the leg of the stapling element is up S THE him. For example, each holding member 5153 may comprise a cross member that projects inward to the central axis 5159, i.e. to the center of the hole 5152. Each cross member may include a first end attached to the housing of the holding matrix 5158 and a second end forming the perimeter 5156 of the holding hole 5152. The perimeter 5256 of the holding hole 5252 may be determined by a first diameter or width, and the leg of the stapling element is determined by a second diameter or width where the second diameter is larger than the first diameter. For example, the leg of the stapling element may come into contact and bend one or more of the retaining element 5153 to increase the diameter of the retaining hole 5152 while introducing the leg into this hole. In addition to the above, the leg of the stapling element can be defined by a perimeter that is larger than the perimeter 5156 of the holding hole 5152 so that the leg of the fastener can expand the perimeter 5156 when it is inserted into the holding hole.

As also presented in FIG. 97, the hole 5152 can be formed by deformable elements 5153, with each deformable element 5153 can bend relative to other deformable elements 5153 or independently. For example, adjacent deformable elements 5153 can be separated by grooves 5154, which allow each deformable element 5153 to bend relative to the others. Each groove 5154 may include a first end 5155 in the housing of the holding matrix 5158, a second end opening into the hole 5152, and a constant or at least substantially constant width between the first end 5155 and the second end. Alternatively, the width of each groove 5154 may be unstable, and the width of each groove 5154 may increase and / or decrease between the first and second ends. The first ends 5155 of the grooves 5154 may include an expanded part, such as an annular part, which can provide, firstly, a reduction in the voltage of the bases of the deformable elements 5153 attached to the housing of the holding matrix 5158, and secondly, a method of increasing the flexibility of the deformable elements 5153. The geometric shape of the deformable elements 5153 and / or the grooves 5154 can be selected so that it provides the desired flexibility of the deformable elements 5153. For example, the grooves 5154 can be extended to form deformable elements cops 5153 of increased length, which are more flexible than deformable elements 5153 of shorter length. The width of each deformable member 5153 can be selected so as to provide the desired flexibility. More specifically, deformable elements with a smaller width may be more flexible than deformable elements with a larger width. As also presented in FIG. 97, the first ends of the cross members of deformable elements 5153 attached to the housing of the holding matrix 5158 may be wider than the second ends of the cross members. For example, the cross members may taper linearly or at least substantially linearly between the first and second ends.

As also presented in FIG. 97, the housing of the retaining matrix 5158 comprise a flat or at least substantially flat sheet of material that has a surface 5151 facing the fabric and an upper surface 5157. For example, the contact surface with the fabric 5151 and the upper surface 5157 may be parallel or at least essentially parallel to each other. Each deformable element 5153 may comprise a first part 5153a and a second part 5153b, wherein the first part 5153a may protrude in a first direction and the second part 5153b may protrude in a second direction other than the first. For example, the housing of the holding matrix 5158 may form a plane, and the first parts 5153a of the deformable elements 5153 may lie within such a plane. The second parts 5153b of the deformable elements 5153 may extend at an angle to the first parts 5153a. For example, the second parts 5153b may protrude in directions that extend from the upper surface 5157 of the holding matrix housing 5158, and the second parts 5153b can converge on the central axis 5159 of the holding hole 5152. In any case, the second parts 5153b can be deflected from the central axis 5159 when inserting the staple foot through the hole. If the leg 5021 of the bracket 5020 is inserted into the holding hole 5152, the deformable elements 5153 can be deformed in a direction substantially from the bases 5122 of the brackets 5120. As a result, the deformable elements 5153 can usually deviate in a direction that coincides or at least substantially coincides with the direction in which the brackets are inserted.

As also presented in FIG. BD, each of the second parts 5153b of the deformable elements 5153 may comprise a sharp tip, which, for example, can be slidable relative to the bracket foot 5021 when the bracket foot is inserted. The sharp ends of the second parts 5153b can also be adapted to abut against the leg of the bracket 5021 if the leg of the bracket 5021 is to be pulled in the opposite direction, i.e. in the direction of removing the leg of the bracket 5021 from the holding hole 5052. In certain situations, the second parts 5153b may be deflected relative to the side surface of the legs of the bracket 5021 at an angle exceeding 90 degrees, and thus the second parts 5153b may deepen, or penetrate, into the side surface the brace legs 5021, when a force is applied to the brace leg 5021, which tends to pull the brace leg 5021 out of the holding hole 5052. The surfaces of the brace legs 5021 may contain cutouts and / or recesses, such as, for example, microcuts, cat Other, for example, can be configured to hold the ends of the deformable elements 5053. For example, the ends of the deformable elements 5053 can be caught and embedded in the cutouts in the legs of the bracket 5021 when a pulling force is applied to the legs of the bracket 5021. As a result of the introduction of the second parts 5153b into the legs of the bracket 5021, forces striving to remove the legs of the bracket 5021 from the holding holes 5022 can only deeper place the second parts 5153b into the legs of the bracket 5021 and increase the force required to remove the legs of the bracket 5021. Moreover, due to upward deviations of the second parts 5153b, the second parts 5153b may be more pliable when the brace leg 5021 is inserted into the holding hole 5152 and have greater resistance to pulling the brace leg 5021. Thus, the force required to introduce the brace leg 5021 in oud the living hole 5022 may be less than the force required to remove the leg of the bracket 5021 from the holding hole 5022. The force required to remove the leg of the bracket 5021 from the holding hole 5022 may be approximately 50 percent more than, for example, the force required to insert the brace legs 5021 into the holding hole 5022. Alternatively, the force required to remove the brace legs 5021 can be about 10% -100% more than, for example, the force required to insert the brace legs 5021. The force required to remove Nia leg braces 5021 may be, e.g., about 100 percent, about 150 percent, about 200 percent, and / or greater than about 200 percent greater than the force required to insert the bracket legs.

As represented in FIG. 97, the second parts 5153b may be arranged in a circle around the hole 5152, and a recess may be formed between them. More specifically, the second parts 5153b may form a recess 5160, which may be adapted to receive the end of the leg of the fastener when it is inserted into the holding hole 5152. The second parts 5153b of the deformable elements 5153 may comprise, for example, circular or at least substantially circular a contour that can together outline a circular or at least substantially circular profile of a recess 1560. For example, the second portions 5153b may define a cone or truncated cone-shaped recess. The recess may be limited by a suitable number of deformable elements, such as, for example, four deformable elements 5153 (FIG. 97), 6 deformable elements 5153 (see FIG. 98) or 8 deformable elements 5153 (see FIG. 99), for example. As represented in FIG. 100, deformable elements of a holding matrix, such as, for example, a holding matrix 5250, may have, for example, a pyramidal shape or at least a substantially pyramidal shape. The holding matrix 5250 may comprise a plurality of holding holes, such as, for example, a holding hole 5252, which may be formed by a perimeter 5256. The perimeter 5256 may have a polygonal or at least substantially polygonal shape, and / or any other suitable shape. The holding matrix 5250 may contain one or more holding elements, such as, for example, holding elements 5253, which extend into the opening 5252 and can be adapted to engage the legs of the stapling element when it is inserted through the hole. For example, each holding member 5253 may comprise a cross member protruding inwardly in the direction of the central axis 5259, i.e. toward the center of the hole 5252. Each cross member may include a first end that is attached to the housing of the holding matrix 5258, and a second end that forms the perimeter 5256 of the holding hole 5252. The perimeter 5256 of the holding hole 5252 can be determined by the first diameter or width, and the leg of the stapling element is determined a second diameter or width, where the second diameter is larger than the first diameter. For example, the leg of the stapling element can be configured to come into contact and deflect one or more holding elements 5253 to increase the diameter of the holding hole 5252 as the leg of the stapling element is inserted into it. In addition to the above, the leg of the stapling element can be defined by a perimeter that is larger than the perimeter 5256 of the holding hole 5252 so that the leg of the stapling element can expand the perimeter 5256 when it is inserted into the holding hole.

As represented in FIG. 100, the opening 5252 can be defined by deformable elements 5253, wherein each deformable element 5253 can be deflectable relative to or independently of other deformable elements 5253. For example, adjacent deformable elements 5253 can be separated by grooves 5254, which can be made in this way, to allow each deformable element 5253 to bend relative to other elements. The housing of the holding matrix 5258 may be a flat or at least substantially flat sheet of material with a surface 5251 that faces the fabric and an upper surface 5257. For example, the contact surface with the fabric 5251 and the upper surface 5257 may be parallel or at least essentially parallel to each other. Each deformable element 5253 may comprise a first part 5253a and a second part 5153b, with the first part 5253a protruding in the first direction and the second part 5253b protruding in a different or second direction. For example, the housing of the holding matrix 5258 can be determined using a plane, and the first parts 5253a of the deformable elements 5253 can lie in this plane. The second parts 5253b of the deformable elements 5253 may be angled with respect to the first parts 5253a. For example, the second parts 5253b may protrude in directions that may diverge from the upper surface 5257 of the housing of the holding matrix 5258, and the second parts 5253b may converge to the central axis 5259 of the holding hole 5252. In any case, the second parts 5253b can be deviated from the central axis 5259, when the leg of the crosslinking element passes through them. As represented in FIG. 100, the second parts 5253b may be circumferentially around the hole 5252, and a recess may be formed between them. More specifically, the second parts 5253b can form a recess that can be adapted to receive the end of the leg of the fastener when it is inserted into the holding hole 5252. The second parts 5253b of the deformable elements 5253 can form, for example, a polygonal or at least essentially polygonal pocket . The pocket may be limited by a suitable number of deformable elements, such as, for example, four deformable elements 5253 (FIG. 100), which form a square, 6 deformable elements 5253 (FIG. 101), which form a hexagon, or 8 deformable elements 5253 (FIG. 102), which form an octagon.

As represented in FIG. 103, a holding matrix, such as, for example, a holding matrix 5350, may be formed from a flat or at least substantially flat sheet of material, such as, for example, titanium and / or stainless steel. For example, a plurality of holes 5352 may be formed in the housing 5358 of the holding matrix 5350 using one or more stamping processes. The sheet of material can be placed in a stamping die, which, when activated, can punch certain parts of the material to form, for example, grooves 5354, holes 5355 of grooves 5354 and / or perimeter 5356 of the holding hole 5352. The stamping can also be configured to bend deformable elements 5353 into the appropriate configuration. For example, a stamp can deform the second parts 5353b by bending them upward relative to the first parts 5353a along the crease line 5353c. As represented in FIG. 104, a holding substrate, such as, for example, a holding substrate 5450, may comprise a plurality of holding holes 5452. As described above, the perimeter 5456 of each holding hole 5452 may be formed by a plurality of deformable elements 5453 separated by grooves or slots, 5454. For example, each the deformable element 5453 can be completely bent up, and the free ends of the cross members of the deformable elements 5453 can limit the perimeter 5456. The holding substrate 5450 may contain holes 5455 that surround t or at least substantially surround the holding hole 5452. For example, the holes 5455 can be arranged in a circle surrounding or enclosing a perimeter defined by the fixed ends of the cross members of the deformable elements 5453. Each hole 5455 may have a circular or at least substantially circular perimeter, and / or any other suitable perimeter. In the process of using the holes 5455 can, firstly, reduce the stress of the bases of the deformable elements 5453 attached to the housing of the holding matrix 5458, and secondly, a method of increasing the flexibility of the deformable elements 5453. Holes of a larger size 5455 can contribute to greater flexibility of the deformable elements 5453 compared with smaller holes 5455. Moreover, holes 5455, located closer to deformable elements 5453, can provide greater flexibility than holes 5455, located further from the defect shaped elements.

As represented in FIG. 105, the holding matrix 5550, for example, may comprise a plurality of holding holes 5552. Each holding hole 5552 may comprise an elongated groove 5554 with enlarged circular or at least substantially circular ends 5555. For example, the ends 5555 may be defined by a diameter that is wider than the groove 5554. The elongated groove 5554 and the ends 5555 may be located along and / or aligned centrally along the longitudinal axis 5559. The groove 5554 and the ends 5555 may form two opposed edges 5553, which may come into contact with the foot sewing element and bend as you insert the legs of the stapling element. The ends 5555 having a larger perimeter or diameter can form longer petals 5553, more flexible than the petals 5553 formed by the ends 5555, with a smaller perimeter or diameter. The ends 5555 may have the same perimeter and diameter, and, for example, each lobe 5553 may be symmetrical about an axis that is perpendicular or at least substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal axis 5559. Alternatively, ends 5555 may have different perimeters and / or diameters, each lobe 5553 may not be symmetrical about this axis. For example, the tabs 5553 can rotate about their axis when inserting the legs of the stapling element through the retaining hole 5552. As shown in FIG. 106, the holding matrix 5650, for example, may comprise a plurality of holding holes 5652. Each holding hole 5652 may comprise an elongated groove 5654 with circular or at least substantially circular ends 5655. For example, the elongated groove 5654 and the ends 5655 may be located along and / or be centered relative to the longitudinal axis 5659. Each end 5655 may be defined by a diameter matching or at least substantially matching the width of the groove 5654.

As represented in FIG. 107, the holding matrix, for example, the holding matrix 5750, may comprise a plurality of holding holes 5752. Each holding hole 5752 may comprise a plurality of grooves, such as, for example, grooves 5754, with widened ends 5755. For example, grooves 5754 and ends 5755 may extend along and / or may be located in the center relative to the longitudinal axes 5759. The axes 5759 may extend in directions that are perpendicular or transverse to each other. The grooves 5754 and the ends 5755 can form, for example, four petals 5753, which can be adapted to engage the legs of the stapling element and deflect when inserted through the holding hole 5752. Each petal 5753 can have a triangular or at least essentially triangular shape, forming , for example, an equilateral triangle. Alternatively, as presented in FIG. 108, a holding matrix, such as, for example, a holding matrix 5850, may comprise a plurality of holding holes 5852. Each holding hole 5852 may comprise a plurality of grooves, such as, for example, grooves 5854 having ends 5855, wherein grooves 5854 and ends 5855 may be located and / or centered along the longitudinal axes 5859. The axes 5859 can extend in perpendicular or intersecting directions. The grooves 5854 and the ends 5855 can form petals 5853 into which the leg of the stapling element passes and which are deflected when the leg of the stapling element is inserted through the holding hole 5852. Each petal 5853 can have an arcuate profile. More specifically, each tongue 5853 may comprise a curved end compared to the pointed end shown in FIG. 105, which may be configured to contact a leg of a fastener.

As represented in FIG. 109, a holding matrix, such as, for example, a holding matrix 5950, comprises a plurality of holding holes 5952. Each holding hole 5952 may comprise a plurality of grooves, such as, for example, grooves 5954, each groove 5954 may extend and / or be centered along an axis 5959. The axles 5959 can be arranged transversely to each other, and, for example, the axles 5959 can be arranged such that all axes 5959 pass through the center of the retaining hole 5952 and are located at the same distance from each other or at least at substantially the same size oyanii apart. Each groove 5954 may include an open end directed towards the center of the retaining hole 5952, as well as a second closed end 5955 opposite the first end of the groove 5954. As described above, the grooves 5954 and the ends 5955 can form, for example, three tongues 5953, which can be made with the possibility of engagement of the legs of the fastener and deviation when it is inserted through the holding hole 5952. Each lobe 5953 may have an arcuate configuration and protrude between adjacent ends 5955 of grooves 5954. As shown in FIG. 110, a holding matrix, such as, for example, a holding matrix 6050, may comprise a plurality of holding holes 6052. Each holding hole 6052 may include a tongue 6053, which may be adapted to engage the legs of the fastener and deflect when inserted through the holding hole 6052. For example, the petal 6053 may include a base attached to the housing of the holding matrix 6058, and a free end having an arcuate or curved profile 6056, which can be made with the possibility of contact Ram crosslinking with a leg member. The leg of the stapling element may be a bracket leg consisting of a round wire, wherein the curved profile 6056 can be configured to match or at least substantially match the curved outer surface of the round wire.

As represented in FIG. 110, the holding matrix housing 6058 may comprise a plurality of grooves 6054 and holes 6055, which may be configured to restrict the lobe 6053 and various parts of the holding holes 6052. The petal 6053 may have a rectangular configuration containing parallel or at least substantially parallel sides. As represented in FIG. 111, a holding matrix, such as, for example, a holding matrix 6150, may comprise a plurality of holding holes 6152. Each holding hole 6152 may include a tongue 6153, which may be adapted to engage the legs of the fastener and deflect when inserted through the holding hole 6152. For example, the petal 6153 may include a base attached to the housing of the holding matrix 6158, and a free end having an arcuate or curved profile 6156, which can be made with the possibility of contact Ram crosslinking with a leg member. The housing of the retaining matrix 6158 may contain many grooves 6154 and holes 6155, which can be configured to limit the lobe 6153 and various parts of the retaining hole 6152. The petal 6153 may have a conical configuration containing arched sides. For example, the petal 6153 may taper, for example, exponentially, with its base wider than the free end.

As described above, the crosslinking system may comprise a plurality of brackets containing legs that are inserted through the plurality of holding holes in the holding matrix. As described in more detail below, the brackets can be in the first jaw, and the holding matrix can be in the second jaw, with at least one of the first jaw or the second jaw moving in the direction of the other. In various situations, the brackets located inside the first jaw can be fixed in it so that the legs of the brackets are aligned with the holding holes when the holding matrix is engaged by the legs of the brackets. As represented in FIG. 112 and 113, the stapling system may comprise, for example, a cartridge with brackets 6200 located in the first branch of the surgical stapler, and, for example, a holding matrix 6250 located in the second branch of the surgical stapler. As represented in FIG. 119 and 120, in addition to the above, the holding matrix 6250 may include a plurality of holding holes 6252, each holding hole 6252 may have a perimeter 6256 formed by one or more bendable elements 6253. For example, in addition to the above, the deflectable elements 6253, bounding each hole 6252, may limit the recess 6201. Each recess 6201 may have, for example, a curved and / or concave surface that can be configured to guide the tip of the bracket leg to the opening s 6252 in the event that leg braces will be displaced relative to the retaining holes 6252 and will initially come into contact, for example, the biasing member 6253 and / or a surface for contact with the tissue 6251.

In addition to the foregoing, the crosslinking system may also comprise a plurality of brackets 6220 that include legs 6221 inserted through the holding holes 6252 in the holding matrix 6250. For example, each bracket 6220 may have, for example, a substantially U-shape and comprise a base 6222, from which the legs of the bracket 6221 extend upward. As shown in FIG. 115 and 116, the holding holes 6252 in the holding matrix 6250 may be arranged, for example, in two parallel or at least substantially parallel longitudinal rows that extend along or parallel to the longitudinal axis of the holding matrix. The retaining holes 6252 in the first row may be offset or spaced relative to the retaining holes 6252 in the second row. For example, each bracket 6220 may comprise a first bracket leg 6221 located in the holding hole 6252 in the first row and a second bracket leg 6221 located in the holding hole 6252 in the second row, whereby the base 6222 may extend in a direction intersecting the longitudinal axis of the holding matrices 6250. For example, brackets 6220 may be parallel or at least substantially parallel to each other. More specifically, the base 6222a of the bracket 6220a, for example, may be parallel or at least substantially parallel to the base 6222b of the bracket 6220b, which may be parallel or at least substantially parallel to the base 6222c of the bracket 6220c. The legs 6221a of the bracket 6220a may form a plane that is parallel or at least substantially parallel to the plane formed by the legs 6221b of the bracket 6220b, which may be parallel or at least substantially parallel to the plane formed, for example, of the legs 6221 of the bracket 6220c.

As represented in FIG. 112 and 114, the cartridge with brackets 6200 may comprise a plurality of brackets 6220, as well as an alignment matrix 6260 containing a plurality of alignment guides, such as, for example, grooves, grooves and / or holes that can be made to align the brackets 6220. B In various situations, the alignment matrix 6260 may be configured such that the legs 6221 of the brackets 6220 align with the retaining holes 6252 in the retaining matrix 6250 until the retaining matrix 6250 is engaged with the legs of the brackets 6221. As shown in FIG. 117 and 118, the alignment matrix 6260 may comprise a plurality of alignment holes 6262, which may be able to tightly hold the legs 6221 of the brackets 6220. For example, each bracket 6220 may include a base 6222 and two legs 6221 protruding from the base 6222, with the base 6222 the brackets 6220 may protrude around the bottom surface 6264 of the holding matrix 6260, and the legs of the brackets 6221 may protrude upward through the alignment holes 6262. Each alignment hole 6262 may have a round or at least substantially round shape mu, and also determined by the diameter, which can be equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the bracket leg passing through it. The alignment matrix 6260 may further comprise a plurality of convex elements 6263 that may protrude upward from the upper surface 6261 of the alignment matrix 6260 and surround or at least partially surround the alignment holes 6262. The convex elements 6263 provide longer alignment holes 6262, with longer openings 6262 allow better control of the location of the legs of the brackets 6221 than the shorter holes 6262.

In use, the first jaw holding the cartridge with brackets 6200 may be located on one side of the stitched fabric, and the second jaw holding the holding matrix 6250 may be located on the other side of the fabric. When the jaws are appropriately positioned relative to the fabric, the second jaw and the holding matrix 6250 can move toward the cartridge with brackets 6200. During insertion of the legs of the brackets 6221 through the holding holes 6252 in the holding matrix 6250, the fabric is facing toward the bottom, or the lower surface 6251 of the holding matrix 6250 can touch with the fabric and press it close to the fabric facing up, or the upper surface 6261 of the alignment matrix 6260. Alternatively, as described in more detail below, the cartridge with brackets 6200 may also contain compressible cartridge body with brackets disposed on the upper surface of the alignment matrix 6261 6260, which may for example be in contact with tissue. As represented in FIG. 114 and 118, the alignment matrix 6260 may further comprise one or more holes 6203, which may be configured to hold a portion of the tissue within itself when the alignment matrix 6260 is located opposite the tissue. If the compressible cartridge housing is located above and / or opposite the alignment matrix 6260, a portion of the compressible housing may enter holes 6203 when compressing the cartridge housing. The holding matrix 6250 may likewise comprise a plurality of holes 6202, which may be configured to receive at least a portion of the fabric when the holding matrix 6250 is placed adjacent to the fabric.

In addition to the above, when inserting the legs 6221 of the brackets 6220 through the holding holes 6252 of the holding matrix 6250, the ends of the legs of the brackets 6221 may protrude upward from the upper surface 6257 of the holding matrix 6250. In various situations, as described above, the ends of the legs of the brackets 6221 may remain unbent after inserts through the retaining holes 6252. As shown in FIG. 121-124, a crosslinking system comprising a cartridge with brackets 6200 and a holding matrix 6250 may further comprise a plurality of protective caps or covers, such as, for example, caps 6270 that can be worn on legs of brackets 6221 protruding above the holding matrix 6250. Each the cap 6270 can completely or at least partially cover the sharp ends of the legs of the brackets 6221 so that the sharp ends do not come in contact with the fabric adjacent to them. As represented in FIG. 124, each cap 6270 may include an opening 6271 that can be configured to hold the tip of the bracket leg 6221 tightly. The caps 6270 may be made of an elastomeric material such as, for example, silicone, polyisoprene, sanoprene, and / or natural rubber. Hole 6271 may have a perimeter or diameter, which may be less than the perimeter or diameter of the bracket leg inserted therein. For example, the opening 6271 in the protective cap 6270 may expand to hold the legs of the bracket 6221. Alternatively, the caps 6270 may not contain holes and the tips of the legs 6221 may pierce the caps 6270 when inserting the legs 6221. In any case, each cap 6270 can be mounted on the leg brackets 6221 until the base 6272 of the cap 6270 abuts or is located next to the upper surface 6257 of the holding matrix 6250. In various situations, the caps 6270 can be made so that they can be tightly installed pour on the tips of the legs of staples 6221 and could not be easily removed from them. Each cap 6270 may have, for example, a conical or at least substantially conical outer surface. Caps 6270 may have any suitable external surface shape, for example, parabolic or at least substantially parabolic.

For example, the cross-linking system described above can be installed in the body, for example, using the surgical cross-linking apparatus shown in FIG. 125-127. The end clamp may comprise a first jaw, or channel for the cartridge with brackets, 6230, which may be configured to hold the cartridge with brackets 6200, and a second jaw 6240, which may be configured to hold the holding matrix 6250 and a plurality of protective caps 6270. How mainly shown in FIG. 125, which shows the second jaw 6240 in an open configuration, the jaws 6230 and 6240 can be positioned relative to the fabric T so that the fabric T is located between the holding matrix 6250 and the brace unit 6200. As discussed above, the cartridge with brackets 6200 may further comprise a compressible cartridge case, such as, for example, cartridge case 6210, in which brackets 6220 and alignment matrix 6260 are located. For example, tissue T may be located opposite the upper surface of cartridge case 6210. Second jaw 6240 may hold a plurality of recesses, or holes, 6245, configured to hold a plurality of protective caps 6270, as well as one or more retaining elements, or latches, which may be configured to hold a holding matrix 6250 in a certain position above the caps 6270. For example, a holding matrix 6250 may be configured to retain caps 6270 in holes 6245. As shown in FIG. 137, each hole 6245 may be configured to fully or partially hold the cap 6270. The holes 6245 may be substantially sized and configured to hold the caps 6270 in themselves using, for example, a lock and / or tight fit. At least one adhesive may be used to hold the caps 6270 in the openings 6245. For example, such an adhesive can be selected so that the caps 6270 can separate from the second jaw 6240 after the caps 6270 are hooked by the legs of the brackets 6221 and the second jaw 6240 is withdrawn from the implanted stapler in the assembly. As represented in FIG. 138, the second jaw 6240 may further comprise at least one cover sheet 6246 that can be attached to the second jaw 6240 and extend over the caps 6270 while holding them in the openings 6245. For example, at least a portion of the cover sheet 6246 can be attached to the jaw 6240 for example with at least one adhesive. In use, the cover sheet 6246 may be at least partially detached from the jaw 6240 before the end clamp is inserted into the operative field. The cover sheet 6246 may be made of an implantable material, such as, for example, PDS and / or PGA, which may be pierced by the legs of the brackets 6221 when the legs of the brackets 6221 protrude from the retaining matrix 6250. For example, the cover sheet 6246 can be fixed in the stitching system between the coatings 6270 and holding matrix 6250.

In addition to the above, as shown in FIG. 126, the jaw 6240 can be moved from the open position to the closed position, in which the tissue T is located close to the holding matrix 6250 and the block body 6210. In this position, the holding matrix 6250 may not yet engage with the brackets 6220. The jaw 6240 can be moved between the open and closed positions by means of the actuator 6235. For example, the jaw 6240 may include a distal pin 6243 and a proximal pin 6244 protruding from it, while the distal the pin 6243 can slide vertically or at least substantially vertically along the distal groove 6233 formed in the channel for the cartridge 6230, while the proximal pin 6244 can slide vertically or at least substantially y vertically proximal groove 6234 formed in the channel to the staple cartridge 6230. In use, the actuator 6235 can be retracted proximally ejection pins 6243 and 6244 in the upper ends of the respective slots 6233 and 6234, as shown in FIG. 126. For example, the actuator 6235 may include a distal groove of the actuator 6236 and a proximal groove of the actuator 6237, while the side walls of the grooves of the actuator 6236 and 6237 can be configured to come into contact with the distal pin 6243 and the proximal pin 6244, respectively, and advance the pins 6243 and 6244 up as the 6235 moves proximally. More specifically, when moving the actuator 6235, the proximal distal pin 6243 can slide upward along the inclined first portion 6236a of the distal drive groove 6236 into the intermediate, or second, part 6236b, and the proximal pin 6244 can similarly slide upward along the inclined first part 6237a of the distal drive groove 6237 in the intermediate, or second, part 6237b. When both pins 6243 and 6244 move up, the jaw 6240 can rotate down toward the tissue T to the closed position.

In addition to the above, as shown in FIG. 127, the actuator 6235 can be further extended proximally to push the second jaw 6240 down to the first jaw 6230, compress the block housing 6210 and engage the holding matrix 6250 and the plurality of protective caps 6270 with the legs of the brackets 6220. For example, additional proximal movement of the actuator 6235 may cause lateral contact the walls of the grooves of the drive 6236 and 6237 with the pins 6243 and 6244, respectively, and pushing the pins 6243 and 6244 down to the lower ends of the grooves 6233 and 6234, respectively. In such situations, the drive 6235 can be extended proximally so that, firstly, the distal pin 6243 exits the second part 6236b of the drive groove 6236 and enters the inclined third part 6236c, and the proximal pin 6244 likewise exits the second part 6237b of the drive groove 6237 and entered the inclined third part 6237c. By moving both pins 6243 and 6244 down, the second jaw 6240 can move down toward the first jaw 6230 to the activated position. For example, the second jaw 6240 can be moved downward so that the retaining matrix 6250 remains parallel or at least substantially parallel to the upper surface of the cartridge housing 6210 and / or parallel or at least substantially parallel to the alignment matrix 6260. In any case, after the retaining matrix is inserted matrix 6250 and protective caps 6270 in engagement with the legs 6221 of the brackets 6220, as shown in FIG. 129, the second jaw 6240 can be returned to the open or at least substantially open position. For example, the actuator 6235 can be distally pushed to move the pins 6243 and 6244 to the upper ends of the grooves 6233 and 6234, respectively, and then down to the lower ends of the grooves 6233 and 6234 as soon as the pins pass through the intermediate parts 6236b and 6237b of the corresponding grooves of the drive 6236 and 6237. After opening the second jaw 6240, the first jaw 6230 can be disconnected from the implanted cartridge with brackets 6200, and the first and second jaws 6230, 6240 can be removed from the implanted node with stapling elements, as shown in FIG. 128.

In accordance with FIG. 127, the reader may notice that the pins 6243 and 6244 are not shown mounted on the very bottom of the corresponding slots 6233 and 6234, although the retaining matrix 6250 and the caps 6270 are engaged with the legs of the brackets 6221. This situation may occur when between the holding matrix 6250 and the cartridge body 6210, the thick tissue T is located. As shown in FIG. 130, in situations where a thinner fabric T is located between the holding matrix 6250 and the block body 6210, the pins 6243 and 6244 can be pushed down into the corresponding grooves 6233 and 6234, as shown in FIG. 132. In general, for example, the drive 6235 can be pulled proximally to push the pins 6243 and 6244 up and down as described above and shown in FIG. 130-132 in series of movements, and due to the smaller thickness of the fabric T, the holding matrix 6250 and the protective caps 6270 can move further to the legs 6221 of the brackets 6220, as shown in FIG. 133 and 134. Due to the adjustability provided for the holding matrix 6250, the same or at least substantially the same pressure can be obtained in the stitched fabric, regardless of the thickness of the stitched fabric that was gripped by the end clamp. The adjustability provided for the holding matrix 6250 may allow the surgeon to determine whether a greater compressive force or lower compressive force is applied to the tissue by selecting the immersion depth of the holding matrix 6250. For example, the immersion range of the legs of the brackets 6221 in the holding matrix 6250 can be determined, for example, by the length or a range of slots 6233 and 6234.

As described above, the protective caps 6270 may consist of a soft or flexible material, which, for example, may be capable of gripping the ends of the legs of the brackets 6221. The protective caps 6270 may be made of a bioabsorbable polymer, polyglycolic acid (PGA), commercially available under the trademark Vicryl, polylactic acid (PLA or PLLA), polydioxanone (PDS), polyhydroxyalkanoate (PHA), polyglecaprone 25 (PGCL), commercially available under the trademark Monocryl, polycaprolactone (PCL) and / or, for example, a mixture of PGA, PLA, PDS, PHA, PGCL and / or PCL, and / or a biocompatible metal, such as, for example, titanium and / or stainless steel. As represented in FIG. 124, each cap 6270 may not be connected to other caps 6270. Alternatively, one or more caps 6270 may be mounted on the holding matrix 6250. For example, caps 6270 may be attached to the holding matrix 6250, for example, using at least one adhesive substances, the holes 6271 in the caps 6270 can be aligned or at least substantially aligned with the holding holes 6252 in the holding matrix 6270. As shown in FIG. 135, a protective cap, such as, for example, cap 6370, may form an internal cavity, or dome, 6374, which can be configured to hold, for example, the tip of the legs of the bracket 6221. For example, cap 6370 may contain a bottom 6372 and aperture 6371, passing through the bottom 6372. The hole 6371 can be formed by one or more deflectable elements 6373, which can be deflected when the legs of the bracket 6221 pass through them. Two or more caps 6370 can be joined together to form a scoop Nost caps 6370. For example, as shown in FIG. 136, a plurality of caps 6370 may be connected to each other using sheet material 6375. Sheet 6375 may be substantially rigid to maintain the desired location and / or alignment of caps 6370. The caps 6370 may be made of a biocompatible metal such as, for example, titanium and / or stainless steel, and sheet 6375 can be made from bioabsorbable plastic, polyglycolic acid (PGA), commercially available under the trademark Vicryl, polylactic acid (PLA or PLLA), polydioxanone (PDS), polyhydroxyalkanoate (PHA), polygl nylon 25 (PGCL), commercially available under the tradename Monocryl, polycaprolactone (PCL) and / or, for example, PGA mixture, PLA, PDS, PHA, PGCL and / or PCL. Sheet 6375 may be made of a bioabsorbable material containing an antimicrobial substance, such as, for example, colloidal silver and / or triclosan, stored and / or dispersed, for example, in sheet 6375 and released upon its biological absorption.

In addition to the above, the sheet 6375 can be formed around the caps 6370, for example, by injection molding, so that the caps 6370 are immersed in the material of the sheet 6375. Alternatively, the sheet 6375 can be molded, for example, using the injection molding process and holes 6376 may be formed in sheet 6375 during the injection molding process and / or after the injection molding process, for example, during the stamping process. In any case, the caps 6370 can be inserted into the holes 6376 and secured to them using pressing and / or snapping, and / or at least one adhesive. Each cap 6370 may include an annular groove surrounding or at least substantially surrounding the perimeter of the cap 6370, which may be configured to hold the perimeter of the hole 6376. The sheet 6375 may be formed of a flexible and / or pliable material allowing relative movement between caps 6370. For example, flexible sheet 6375 may consist of, for example, rubber, plastic and / or silicone material, and caps 6370 may consist of rigid material, such as, for example, metal. For example, by analogy with the above, the flexible material can be injection molded around the caps 6370. The caps 6370 can be pressed into, for example, a pre-molded sheet 6375. The hardness of the flexible material can be selected to provide the desired rigidity of the sheet 6375. Sheet 6375 can be made so that it contains flexible stripes. In any case, the sheet 6375 can facilitate the installation of the caps 6370 in the working tool, since in this case, many caps 6370 can be located and / or combined in the working tool at the same time. In addition, after implantation, the sheet 6375 connecting the caps 6370 can, for example, act as a reinforcing or supporting element for tissue along the line of brackets. In addition to or instead of using a sheet to connect the caps 6370, the caps 6370 can be connected together by many links. For example, such connecting elements may be flexible and allow relative movement between caps 6370.

As represented in FIG. 139 and 140, a protective cap, such as, for example, cap 6470, may comprise a forming surface that can be configured to deform the tip of the bracket leg. For example, cap 6470 may include a base 6472, which may include a hole 6471 passing through it. Hole 6471 may be configured to hold the bracket leg tightly, such as, for example, bracket leg 6221. Hole 6471 may have a diameter or perimeter, which may be equal to or greater than the diameter or perimeter of the bracket leg 6221. The cap 6470 may also comprise a cavity, or dome, 6474, into which the tip of the leg of the bracket 6221 enters when it is inserted into the cap 6470. As is mainly shown in FIG. 140, cap 6470 may further comprise a thrust member, or forming surface 6473, which may be configured to deflect and deform the brace leg 6221. In various circumstances, the forming surface 6473 can be, for example, curved and / or concave, and can be configured to bend the legs of the bracket 6221 while inserting it into the cap 6470. The leg of the bracket 6221 can be deformed so that it cannot be pulled back through the hole 6471, whereby the cap 6470 can be locked on the leg of the bracket 6221. For example, the base 6472 of the cap 6470 can form a rim around the hole 6471, which can prevent the deformed leg of the bracket 6221 from being pulled out of the cavity 6474. In personal circumstances, as a result of the above, one or more caps 6470 may or may not allow the retention matrix to retract, such as, for example, the retention matrix 6250, or its disengagement from the brackets 6220. Although not shown, cap 6470 may be symmetrical or at least substantially symmetrical, and the aperture 6471 may be located on a central axis 6479 extending through the cap 6470. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 139, the hole 6471 can be shifted relative to the central axis 6479. For example, the offset hole 6471 can allow the bracket leg 6221 to touch the side of the forming surface 6473 and bend toward the other side of the forming surface 6473 instead of contacting the center of the forming surface 6473, which may occur in embodiments with the aforementioned centered hole 6471.

As discussed above, a retention matrix, such as, for example, a retention matrix 6250, may be formed from a sheet of material and a plurality of retention holes 625 passing through it. The sheet of material containing the retention matrix 6250 may be rigid or substantially inflexible. Alternatively, the holding matrix may be formed from a plurality of elements of the holding matrix and a plurality of flexible connectors, or connecting elements connecting the elements of the holding matrix. As represented in FIG. 141, the holding matrix, or part of the holding matrix, 6550 may comprise a plurality of element bodies 6505 that can be joined together by one or more connecting elements 6507. Each element 6505 body may contain a plurality of deformable elements 6553 that form a holding hole 6552 therein The bodies of elements 6505 and the connecting elements 6507 of the holding matrix 6550 can be formed together and constitute a single piece of material. The holding matrix 6550 may be stamped or cast from a metal material, such as titanium and / or stainless steel. The 6550 retention matrix can be made of plastic, such as polyetheretherketone (PEEK), polypropylene, commercially available under the Prolene trademark, polyester, commercially available polyethylene terephthalate, Ethibond and Mersilene, polyvinylidene fluoride, polyvinylidene fluoride fluoride / copolymer a copolymer of poly (fluorovinylidene / hexafluoropropylene), commercially available under the brand name Pronova, and / or long chain aliphatic polymers nylon 6 and nylon 6.6, which are commercially available under trademarks arches Ethilon, & Nurolon), and can be formed by injection molding. Enclosures of elements 6505 may not be formed together with connecting elements 6507. A plurality of individual cases of elements 6505 may be manufactured which are connected in series with each other and are integrated into the holding matrix. For example, the element bodies 6505 can be stamped from a metal material, such as, for example, titanium and / or stainless steel, and placed in an injection mold of plastic products, the plastic material can be introduced into the injection mold to create first, a rim 6506 of material surrounding or at least partially surrounding the housing of elements 6505, and secondly, connecting elements 6507 extending from the rims 6506. Alternatively, one or more connecting bristles containing holes inside rims 6506, with part 6505 entering each hole. Each case of element 6505 may have a round or at least substantially circular outer perimeter, and, similarly, each rim 6506 may define a round or at least substantially a circular hole, the diameter of the hole being equal to or less than the diameter of the case of the element 6505. For example, the case of the elements 6505 can be pressed into or inserted into the holes of the rims 6505. The cases of the elements 6505 can be fixed in the holes Using at least one adhesive.

In addition to the above, the holding matrix may comprise a plurality of element bodies 6505 and a plurality of connecting elements 6507 that can connect the element bodies 6505 in any suitable order, for example, as shown in FIG. 142-145. Regardless of the layout of this combination, the connecting elements 6507 can be configured to provide movement of the bodies of the elements 6505 and the holding holes 6552 relative to each other. For example, a lattice consisting of the bodies of elements 6505 and the connecting elements 6507 forming the holding matrix 6550, after interacting with the fabric, can stretch, bend, contract and (or) deform in another suitable way, which provides some movement of the matrix in the fabric, but does not allow it significant displacement. Each connecting element 6507 may include a flexible element configured to stretch, twist and / or compress to allow folding of the holding matrix 6550, for example, between the holding elements of the matrix. As represented in FIG. 141, each link 6507 extending from the rim 6506 may have a width that is less than the width of the element 6505 and / or rim 6506. As shown in FIG. 142-145, one or more of the connecting elements 6507 may comprise straight parts running along a line laid between adjacent bodies of the elements 6506. For example, each connecting element 6507 may include a first end attached to a first rim 6506 and a second end attached to a second a bezel 6506. As also shown in FIG. 141, two or more connecting elements 6507 may be connected to each other. For example, two or more connecting elements 6507 may be connected, for example, in an intermediate hinge 6509. The hinge 6509 may contain a narrowing in the cross section in one or more directions compared to the thickness in the cross section of the connecting elements 6507, which may provide, for example, the movement of the connecting elements 6507 relative to each other. The holding matrix 6550 may further comprise hinges 6508 that can connect the connecting elements 6507 to the rims 6506 and allow relative movement of the connecting elements 6507 and the rims 6506. Similar to the hinges 6509, the hinges 6508 can contain, for example, a narrowing in cross section in one or more directions in comparison with the thickness of the connecting elements 6507 in cross section.

In addition to the above, the connecting elements 6507 can protrude in various directions. For example, the first connecting element 6507 may protrude in one direction and the second connecting element 6507 in the other, where the first direction is different from the second direction. The first connecting element 6507 may protrude along the first line, and the second connecting element 6507 may protrude along the second line, the first line may intersect the second line at an angle of, for example, approximately 30 degrees, approximately 45 degrees, approximately 60 degrees and / or approximately 90 degrees. The hinges 6508 and / or the hinges 6509 may be flexible hinges that allow the connecting elements 6507 to move relative to each other a number of times without breaking. The hinges 6508 and / or the hinges 6509 may contain brittle or easily tearing parts that can tear if excessively bent and / or bent too often. For example, such brittle portions may contribute to tearing one or more parts of the retaining matrix 6550 from another part of the holding matrix 6550. Hinges 6508 and / or hinges 6509 may contain parts of the holding matrix 6550 that are better cut than other parts of the holding matrix 6550. More specifically , often the implanted holding matrix and tissue fixed by the implanted holding matrix can be cut with a cutting element for various purposes, and to facilitate such a transverse dissection into a ball pegs 6508 and / or hinges 6509 may include, for example, tracks or thin sections through which the cutting element will be easier to pass through the holding matrix 6550. In addition to the above, the connecting elements 6507 may contain, for example, one or more stamped parts or a softened material that can facilitate bending, tearing and / or dissection of the connecting elements 6507.

The retention matrix may comprise a plurality of retention matrix elements, such as, for example, matrix element housings 6505, which can be embedded in a flexible sheet or strip of material. A flexible sheet of material can be formed from a bioabsorbable elastomeric material, such as, for example, silicone, while flexible the sheet can be made with many holes made in it. For example, a continuous flexible sheet may be cast first, and then a plurality of holes may be punched in the flexible sheet. Alternatively, the flexible sheet may be made by casting, with holes formed therein during the casting process. In any case, for example, the elements of the holding matrix 6505 can be inserted and fixed in a flexible sheet. Alternatively, by analogy with the above, a flexible sheet may be formed around the elements of the matrix 6505. A flexible sheet may be formed, for example, from a woven mesh and / or any other suitable material. In addition to the above, such a woven mesh can be easily cut.

As represented in FIG. 146 and 147, a crosslinking system comprising a retaining matrix, such as, for example, a holding matrix 6250, may further comprise a coating, such as, for example, a coating 6670, which may cover the ends of the legs of the brackets 6221 as they pass over the upper surface 6257 of the holding matrix 6250. Coating 6670 may be attached to a holding matrix 6250. Coating 6670 and / or holding matrix 6250 may include holding elements that may be configured to hold coating 6670 on holding matrix 6250. For securing attaching the coating 6670 to the holding matrix 6250 can use at least one adhesive 6250. The coating 6670 may consist of one layer, although the coating 6670 shown in the figure contains two layers, as described in more detail below. As mainly represented in FIG. 147, the ends of the legs of the brackets 6221 may extend through the lower surface 6673 of the coating 6670; however, the cover 6670 may be of sufficient thickness so that the ends of the legs of the brackets do not extend through the upper surface 6675 of the cover 6670. For example, as a result of this, the ends of the legs of the brackets 6221 may not protrude from the cover 6670. The cover 6670 may contain many layers. For example, the coating 6670 may comprise a first layer 6671 and a second layer 6672. The first layer 6671 and the second layer 6672 may be attached to each other, the second layer 6672 may have a lower surface 6676 that is glued to the first layer 6671. The first layer 6671 and the second layer 6672 may have different thicknesses or they may be the same thickness. The first layer 6671 and the second layer 6672 may have substantially the same width and / or length. Alternatively, layers 6671 and 6672 may have different thicknesses and / or lengths.

In addition to the above, the first layer 6671 may consist, for example, of compressible foam, mesh material and / or hydrogel, which can be dissected by the legs of the suture brackets 6211. The second layer 6672 may consist of a rigid material, or shell, such as, for example, PGA and / or PDS, and / or any suitable supporting material. For example, the legs of the brackets 6221 may be configured to pierce the first layer 6671; although the legs of the brackets 6221 are incapable of piercing the second layer 6672. The second layer 6672 can be formed of a material having sufficient elasticity and / or strength to touch and displace the second layer 6672 of the legs of the bracket 6221, but without dissection or with minimal dissection by the tip of the leg of the bracket 6221. Although not shown in the figures, the coating may consist of more than two layers, while one or more of these layers may be puncture resistant. During use, for example, the holding matrix 6250 can be positioned close to the fabric to be sewn and pushed down so that the legs 6221 of the brackets 6220 are pushed through the fabric T and the holding holes 6252 of the holding matrix 6250 and enter the first layer 6271 of the cover 6270. The ends of the legs of the brackets 6221 can enter, or at least substantially enter, the second layer 6272 of the cover 6270. After the holding matrix 6250 is positioned appropriately, the jaw 6240 can be opened so that the cover 6670 and the holding matrix 6250 can separate tsya by jaws 6240, as shown in FIG. 146. As represented in FIG. 146, the jaw 6640 may be configured to hold more than one holding matrix 6250 and a cover 6670. For example, the jaw 6640 may have two channels 6679, each of which is configured to hold the cover 6670, and a holding matrix 6250, which is located higher in this way that the contact surface with fabric 6251 of each holding matrix 6250 is directed downward from the bottom of the jaw 6240. For example, the holding matrix 6250 and the coating 6270 can be placed in the jaw 6640 on each side of the groove for the cutting element 6678. In In the process of use, the holding matrices 6250 and coatings 6670 can be placed simultaneously and / or at the same depth with respect to the cartridges with brackets opposite them, such as cartridges 6200, for example, located throughout the depth. Then, the stitched fabric can be dissected along the cut line by a cutting element moved along the groove for the cutting element 6678, while the jaw 6640 can be opened again. Coatings 6670 may not be attached to the holding matrix 6250. For example, coatings 6670 may be located in channels 6679 and may be held in channels 6679 by holding matrices 6250, which may be secured in a jaw 6640. Each holding matrix 6250 may be wider and / or longer than the corresponding coating 6670, so that the holding matrices 6250 can hold their coatings 6670 in integrity in a certain position. Each holding matrix 6250 may have the same width and / or length, as, for example, the corresponding coating 6670.

As described above, the crosslinking system may comprise a layer of material that can be attached to a holding matrix, such as, for example, a holding matrix 6250. As shown in FIG. 150, a layer of material 6870 may be attached to the bottom surface 6251 of the holding matrix 6250. The layer 6870 and / or the holding matrix 6250 may include holding elements that may be able to hold the layer 6870 on the holding matrix 6250. To attach the layer 6870 to the holding matrix 6250 at least one adhesive may be used. In any case, the layer 6870 may comprise a lower or fabric-facing surface 6873 that can be made to contact the fabric T by moving the holding matrix 6250 down in the direction of the brackets 6220 to engage the holding holes 6252 with the legs of the brackets 6221. For example, layer 6870 may consist of a compressible material, such as, for example, bioabsorbable foam, which can be sandwiched between the bottom surface 6251 of the retaining matrix 6250 and tissue T. Layer 6870 may also contain at least one drug medium GUSTs stored and / or distributed in the layer. This drug may be released from layer 6870 as it is compressed. The medicament may be at least one tissue sealing material, a hemostatic substance and / or antimicrobial material, such as, for example, ionized silver and / or triclosan. Compression of the layer 6870 can lead to the extrusion of the drug from the layer 6870 so that the surface of the tissue T completely or at least a substantial part of it will be covered with the drug. In addition, as the layer 6870 is compressed and the tissue T and layer 6870 are punctured by the legs of the staples 6221, the drug can flow along the legs of the staples 6221 and, for example, process the fabric just cut by the legs of the staples 6221. The housing of the holding matrix 6250 may contain a first layer, which consists of a biocompatible material, such as, for example, titanium and / or stainless steel, and the lower layer 6870 may comprise a second layer consisting of a bioabsorbable material, such as oxidized regenerated cellulose (ORC), biologically active substances, x like fibrin and / or thrombin (which are in a liquid or lyophilized state), glycerin, pork gelatin in an atomized or foamed state, and / or antimicrobial agents, such as, for example, ionized silver and / or triclosan. Additional bioabsorbable materials may contain, for example, Surgicel Nu-Knit, Surgicel Fibrillar, collagen / ORC, which is a hybrid material with an integrated collagen matrix and is commercially available under the trademark Promogran, polyglycolic acid (PGA), commercially available under the trade Vicryl brand, polylactic acid (PLA or PLLA), polydioxanone (PDS), polyhydroxyalkanoate (PHA), polyglecaprone 25 (PGCL), commercially available under the trademark Monocryl, polycaprolactone (PCL) and / or a mixture of PGA, PLA, PDS, PHA, PGCL and / or PCL. Although in FIG. 150, only one layer 6870 is represented; any suitable number of layers may be used. The first layer containing the first drug can be attached to the holding matrix 6250, and the second layer containing the second or other drug can be attached to the first layer. For example, you can use many layers, with each layer may contain different drugs and / or a different combination of drugs.

As represented in FIG. 148, the crosslinking system may comprise a layer of material 6770 attached to the bottom surface 6251 of the holding matrix 6250. The layer 6770 and / or holding matrix 6250 may include holding elements that can be configured to hold the layer 6770 on the holding matrix 6250. To attach the layer 6770 at least one adhesive may be used to the holding matrix 6250. In any case, the layer 6770 may contain a lower or fabric-facing surface 6773 that can be made to contact the fabric T by moving the holding matrix 6250 down in the direction of the brackets 6220 to engage the holding holes 6252 with the legs of the brackets 6221. For example, layer 6774 may consist of a compressible material, for example, bioabsorbable foam, which, for example, can be clamped between the surface 6251 of the holding matrix 6250 and the fabric T. Layer 6770 may additionally contain one or more capsules, or cells, 6774, configured to store within at least one drug. As represented in FIG. 149, the capsules 6774 can be aligned or at least substantially aligned with the holding holes 6252 such that when the legs of the brackets 6221 are pushed through the fabric T and the layer 6770 of the legs of the brackets 6221 can pierce and / or otherwise violate the integrity of the capsules 6774. After capsule rupture 6774 at least one drug M stored in capsules 6774 may spill onto tissue T. For example, drug M may be a liquid that can lubricate or drain the legs of brackets 6221 for therapeutic effect on tissue T, which was dissected by the legs of the brackets. As a result, the drug in capsules 6774 can provide local treatment of tissue. Capsules 6774 in sheet 6770 may contain various drugs. For example, the first group of capsules 6774 may contain a first drug or a first combination of drugs, and the second group of capsules may contain another drug or a different combination of drugs. Layer 6770 may consist of a flexible silicone sheet, and capsules 6774 may be voids in the silicone sheet. For example, a silicone sheet may contain two layers that can be attached to each other, and capsules 6774 can be formed between two layers. Layer 6770 may contain one or more smaller components or weakened parts, such as, for example, partial perforations, which can facilitate the dissection of layer 6770 and rupture of capsules 6774 by legs 6221. At least a portion of capsules 6774 can be located under domes 6777, with domes 6777 may protrude upward above sheet 6770. For example, domes 6777 and / or at least a portion of capsules 6774 may be housed within recesses 6201 in retaining matrix 6250. Capsules 6774 may contain separate cells that are not connected to each other. Alternatively, one or more capsules 6774 may be in fluid communication with each other, for example, through one or more channels, passages and / or ducts passing through layer 6770. Description of US patent No. 7,780,685 under the heading "ADHESIVE AND MECHANICAL FASTENING ELEMENT" issued August 24, 2010, is fully incorporated into this application by reference.

In addition to the above, a bracket cartridge containing a cartridge housing, brackets and / or an alignment matrix can be installed in the first end clamp jaw and, similarly, a holding matrix and / or one or more coatings can be located in the second end clamp jaw. As represented in FIG. 151, a tool, such as, for example, a cartridge loader 6990, can be used to simultaneously insert two or more cartridges with stapling elements into the end clamp. The cartridge loader 6990 may include a handle 6991 and a cartridge holder 6992, while the cartridge holder 6992 may include a first holding portion configured to hold the cartridge body 6210 with brackets 6200, and an additional second holding portion configured to hold the cartridge body 6980, which holds, for example, firstly, a plurality of protective caps 6270 and, secondly, a holding matrix 6250 along its lower surface. The first and second holding parts may comprise one or more holding elements adapted to engage and detach from the housings of the cartridges 6210 and 6980. During use, as shown in FIG. 152 and 153, the end working body may comprise a first or lower jaw 6230 and a second or upper jaw 6940, the cartridge with brackets 6200 can be loaded into the first jaw 6230, and the cartridge body 6980 is loaded into the second jaw 6940. For various circumstances, the upper jaw 6940 can be moved from the open position (FIG. 152) to the closed position (FIG. 153) using the feeding device 6235. The use of the feeding device 6235 is described above and is not repeated for brevity. After moving the upper jaw 6940 to the closed position, as shown in FIG. 153, the distal end 6993 of the cartridge holder 6992 can be inserted into the end member so that the cartridge with brackets 6200 slides through the distal end 6938 of the first jaw 6930 into the first securing part, or trough, 6939, of the first jaw 6230. Similarly, the distal end 6993 of the cartridge holder 6992 can be inserted into the working tool so that the body of the cartridge 6980 slides through the distal end 6948 of the second jaw 6940 into the second securing part, or channel, 6949, of the second jaw 6940. The surgeon or another medical worker, holding the knob 6991 the cartridge loader 6990 may push the staple cartridge 6200 and the cartridge body 6980 through channels 6939 and 6949, respectively, as long as the staple cartridge 6200 and the cartridge body 6980 will not be fully established in the channels.

When installing a cartridge with brackets 6200 and cartridge body 6980, each of the cartridge with brackets 6200 and cartridge body 6980 may engage with one or more holding parts of respective branches 6230 and 6940, as described in more detail below. In any case, after installing the cartridge with brackets 6200 and the block body 6980, as shown in FIG. 154, the cartridge loader 6990 may be disconnected from the cartridge with brackets 6200 and cartridge body 6980 and removed from the end clip. For example, the holding force between the cartridge with brackets 6200 and the first jaw 6230 may be greater than the holding force between the cartridge with brackets 6200 and the cartridge holder 6992. Thus, when the cartridge holder 6992 is removed distally from the end clip, the cartridge with brackets 6200 may stay behind in the first jaw 6230. Similarly, the holding force fixing the cartridge case 6980 in the second jaw 6940 may exceed the holding force fixing the cartridge case 6940 on the cartridge holder 6992, so that when pulling the cartridge holder 6992 distally of the tool cartridge body 6940 may remain in the second jaw of 6940. Following removal of the cartridge 6990 of the tool loader is loaded first and second jaws 6230 loaded jaws 6940 may be positioned relative to tissue T. Referring crosslinkable FIG. 155, the second jaw 6940 can be shifted from the open position (FIG. 154) to the actuated position (FIG. 155) to provide contact between the holding matrix 6250 and the plurality of protective caps 6270 on the cartridge case 6980 and the brackets 6220 located in the cartridge 6200 .

As represented in FIG. 156 and 157, the second jaw 6940 can be reopened, and the plurality of protective caps 6270 and the holding matrix 6250 can be disconnected from the block body 6980 so that the caps 6270 and holding matrix 6250 can mesh with the T fabric and the cartridge with brackets 6200 The cartridge case 6980 may comprise a plurality of recesses in which a plurality of caps 6270 can be disposed for removal, as well as one or more retaining grooves configured to retain the retention matrix 6250. The retaining elements of the second jaw 6940, engaged with the housing of the cartridge 6980, can hold the body of the cartridge 6980 in the second jaw 6940 after moving the second jaw 6940 to the open position. The cartridge case 6980 can be torn apart when the second jaw 6940 is opened, so that part of the cartridge case 6980 is implanted with caps 6270 and holding matrix 6250, and part of the case 6980 remains in the second jaw 6940. In the same way, as shown in FIG. 156 and 157, the retaining elements of the first jaw 6230, engaged with the cartridge housing 6210, can hold the cartridge housing 6210 in the first jaw 6230 after moving the second jaw 6940 to the open position. The housing of the cartridge 6210 can be torn at the time of removal of the first jaw 6230 from the implanted cartridge 6200, so that part of the housing of the cartridge 6210 is implanted with brackets 6220 and alignment matrix 6260, and part of the housing of the cartridge 6210 remains in the first jaw 6230. As shown in FIG. 158-160, a cartridge with brackets, such as, for example, a cartridge with brackets 6900, may contain one or more longitudinal retaining grooves 6913 located along the length of the cartridge body 6910, which, for example, after inserting the cartridge with brackets 6900 into the jaw 6930 may be made with the possibility of holding one or more longitudinal holding rails 6916 that protrude from the jaw 6930. In use, before slipping the cartridge with brackets 6900 through the distal end 6938 of the holding channel 6939, the end of the holding grooves 6913 can t be combined, e.g., with the distal ends of the holding rail 6916.

As represented in FIG. 160, the jaw 6940 may comprise two holding channels 6949, each holding channel 6949 may be configured to hold the cartridge body 6980 comprising a plurality of caps 6270 and a holding die 6250. Each cartridge case 6980 may contain one or more longitudinal holding flanges 6917, which can be slidable along one or more longitudinal retaining rails 6918 of the second jaw 6940 when cartridge bodies 6980 are inserted into the respective holding channels 6949 of the jaw 69 40. The retaining rails 6918 and the retaining flanges 6917 can jointly hold the cartridge case 6980 in the second jaw 6940 as the cartridge bodies 6980 are separated from the caps 6270 and the holding matrix 6250. As shown in FIG. 159, the second jaw 6940 may further comprise one or more distal protrusions or retaining elements 6915 extending therein, which may be configured to lock and remove the cartridge body 6980 from the respective retaining channels. For example, the second jaw 6940 may include a distal protrusion 6915, made and located relative to each holding channel 6949 so that each cartridge case 6980 can bend from the protrusions 6915 when inserting the cartridge cases 6980 into the channels 6949, and when the cartridge cases 6915 are fully installed in channels 6949, the distal ends of the housings of the cartridges 6980 can come off the tabs 6915 and click on them. To remove the cartridge housings 6980 after use, as described above, the cartridge housings 6980 can be pulled back over the protrusions 6915 and removed from the retaining channels 6949. Like the above, the first jaw 6930 may include one (or more) distal retaining bulge 6914, which protrudes from the jaw and can receive one (or more) retaining groove (groove) 6912 (FIG. 158) of the cartridge body 6910 when the cartridge with brackets 6900 is fully installed.

In addition to the above, a first cartridge with a plurality of first stapling elements may be located in a first branch of a surgical stapler, and a second cartridge with a plurality of second stapling elements may be located in a second branch of a surgical stapler. In use, the first jaw and / or second jaw can be moved toward each other to engage the first fasteners with the second fasteners and fix the fabric between them. The first cartridge with brackets and the second cartridge with brackets may mesh with each other when the first brackets are engaged with the second brackets. The housing of the first cartridge with the stapling elements can be formed of the first compressible material, and the housing of the second cartridge with the stapling elements can be formed of the second compressible material, the first housing and / or the second housing can be pressed against the stitched fabric. After tissue is attached, the first jaw can be moved away from the implanted first cartridge with fasteners, and the second jaw can be moved away from the implanted second cartridge with fasteners. Then, the first jaw can be recharged with another first cartridge with fasteners and the like, the second jaw can be recharged with another second cartridge with fasteners and the like, and the surgical stapler can be used again. Although brackets may be used in some embodiments, other embodiments are provided using other types of fasteners, such as, for example, two-piece fasteners that lock together when engaged. For example, the first cartridge with brackets may comprise a first storage part for accommodating the first parts of the crosslinking elements, and the cartridge with brackets may comprise a second storage part for accommodating the second parts of the crosslinking elements. In the crosslinking systems described herein, crosslinking elements may be used containing any suitable type of material and / or having any suitable shape. Staple elements may contain piercing elements. Such piercing elements can be made, for example, of a polymer or composite material and / or of a multilayer carrier. An example of a multilayer carrier is a wire or sheet carrier with an elastomeric or polymer coating. It can be a thin sheet formed so that the piercing elements are oriented perpendicularly or at least substantially perpendicularly to the connecting element. The piercing elements may have a rectangular profile, a semicircular profile and / or the profile of any beam. The crosslinking elements described herein can be made by any suitable method, such as, for example, extruding wire. Another possibility is to use microprocessing to create hollow piercing elements. Such piercing elements may be made in a manner different from the method of extruding the wire, and may include a combination of materials.

As indicated above, the ends of the legs of the brackets passing through the holding matrix can be closed with one or more caps and / or caps. The ends of the brace legs can be deformed after they have been inserted into the holding matrix. The jaw holding the retaining matrix within itself may also comprise recesses in the thrust member located above and / or associated with the holding holes; such recesses may be configured to deform the legs of the brackets when they protrude above the holding matrix. The legs of each bracket may be folded inward, for example, toward each other and / or toward the center of the bracket. Alternatively, one or more legs of the bracket can be twisted outward relative to other brackets and / or from the center of the bracket. Regardless of the direction in which the brace legs are twisted, the ends of the brace legs can come in contact with the housing of the holding matrix and cannot reenter the fabric that was sewn with brackets. Deformation of the legs of the brackets after they pass through the holding matrix can fix the holding matrix in place.

As represented in FIG. 161 and 162, a surgical stapler, such as, for example, a surgical stapler 7000, may include a first jaw 7030 and a second jaw 7040, while the second jaw 7040 can move toward and from the first jaw 7030 by moving the drive 6235. Operation drive 6235 described above and is not repeated for brevity. The first jaw 7030 may include a distal end 7031 and a proximal end 7032, wherein the first jaw 7030 may have a channel extending from the distal end 7031 to the proximal end 7032, which is configured to hold the cartridge with brackets. To illustrate the case of such a cartridge with brackets is not shown in FIG. 161, however, such a cartridge with brackets may include a cartridge case, brackets 6220 and brackets pushers 7012 placed under brackets 6220 and placed in brackets 6220. Although not shown in FIG. 161, for clarity, the second jaw 7040 may be configured to place a holding matrix, such as, for example, a holding matrix 6250, over the brackets 6220 and / or moving the holding matrix before engaging with the legs of the brackets 6220, as described above. The surgical stapler 7000 may further comprise a slide 7010 located in the first jaw 7030, which can slide, for example, from the distal end 7031 of the first jaw 7030 to the proximal end 7032 and lift the ejectors of the brackets 7012 and the brackets 6220 held thereon in the direction of the holding matrix and the second jaw 7040. Alternatively, the slide 7010, for example, can be moved from the proximal end 7032 to the distal end 7031 to accommodate the brackets 6020. The slide 7010 may contain one or more angled contact pads foreheads or protrusions, 7011, which can be made with the possibility of sliding under the ejectors brackets 7012 and lifting the ejectors brackets 7012 up. The surgical stapler 7000 may also include a tension or push rod that is attached to the slide 7010 and is driven proximally and / or distally by a drive located, for example, on the handle and / or trunk of the surgical stapler 7000.

As represented in FIG. 161, the second jaw 7040 of the surgical stapler 7000 may comprise a frame 7041, a distal end 7048, and a proximal end 7049 opposite the distal end 7048. The second jaw 7040 may further comprise a guide system consisting of one or more rail guides, for example, rail guides 7045 and 7046 extending along the longitudinal axis of the chassis 7041, which, as will be described in more detail below, can be configured to guide one or more thrust elements, or protrusions, which may be included in grip and deform the legs of the brackets 6220 after the legs 6221 of the brackets 6220 have passed through the holding matrix. For example, rail guides 7045 and 7046 may include a guide wire, or a cable that runs along the upper surface of the chassis 7041, bends around the distal pin 7047, and then again runs along the upper surface of the chassis. As indicated above and presented mainly in FIG. 163 and 165, the second jaw 7040 may further comprise one or more stop elements or protrusions, such as, for example, the first stop element 7050 and the second stop element 7060, which can be moved longitudinally along the second jaw 7040 to deform the legs of the brackets 6220 after they pass through the holding matrix. Surgical stapler 7000 may also include an ejector or actuator of the first abutment member 7051 connected and / or connected in operative position to the first abutment member 7050, which may be designed to extend the first abutment member 7050 proximally and / or to extrude the first abutment member 7050 distally. Similarly, the surgical stapler 7000 may also include a second ejector or drive of the abutment element, coupled and / or acting in conjunction with the second abutment element 7060 and configured to push the second abutment element 7060 in the distal direction and / or extend the second abutment element in the proximal direction . The first stop element 7050 may include guide grooves 7052, and the second stop element 7060 may contain guide grooves 7062, each of which can be slideably held by rail rail 7045 or rail rail 7046. For example, rail rails 7045 and 7046 can tightly held in the guide grooves 7052 and 7062 so as to prevent or at least limit lateral movement between them.

In addition to the above, the first abutment member 7050 can be extended proximally, and the second abutment member 7060 can be extended distally. As represented in FIG. 161, rail rails 7045 and 7046, as well as a distal pin 7047, may constitute a block system that is configured to pull the second stop member 7060 in the distal and / or proximal directions. For example, rail rail 7045 and rail rail 7046 may comprise a continuous wire or cable that runs around the distal pin 7047, wherein a portion of the continuous wire can be pulled to wind the wire around the distal pin 7047. Rail rail 7046, for example, can be secured to a second stop element 7060 so that when pulling a continuous cable in the first direction, the second stop element 7060 can be pulled distally to the distal end 7048 of the jaw 7040, and when pulled and a continuous cable in a second, or opposite, direction of the second abutment member 7060 can be pulled proximally to the proximal end 7049. As shown in FIG. 163, the rail 7046 may be secured in the guide groove 7062 so that a pulling force can be transmitted between them. For example, the rail guide 7045 may be slidable in another guide groove 7062. The first stop element 7050 may operate independently of the second stop element 7060 and the block system, and the guide grooves 7052 provided in the first stop element 7050 may be configured to hold the rail guides 7045 and 7046 and sliding in such a way as to ensure the possibility of their relative movement. Rail guides 7045 and 7046 containing a continuous cable can be flexible enough to accommodate the opening and closing upper jaw 7040. The continuous traction can also be flexible enough to vertically move the second stop member 7060 toward and from the lower jaw 7030 as described in more detail below.

As represented in FIG. 163 and 165, the first stop member 7050 may include tracking members 7055, which may be movable in one or more beveled grooves, or a guide groove, such as, for example, beveled groove 7070 (FIG. 166), made in frame 7041 the second jaw 7040. More specifically, the frame 7041 may include a first cam groove 7070 extending longitudinally along the first side of the frame 7041, and a second cam groove 7070 extending longitudinally along the second or opposite side of the frame 7041, while the cam followers 7055 passing extending from the first side of the first stop element 7050 can move along the first cam groove 7070, and cam followers 7055 extending from the second side of the first stop element 7050 can move along the second cam groove 7070. For example, the contours of each beveled groove 7070 may be the same or at least substantially the same, and can be mounted coaxially or at least substantially coaxially with each other. Similarly, the second stop member 7060 may include follower members 7065 that can fit into the cam grooves 7070 (FIG. 166) formed in the frame 7041 of the second jaw 7040. More specifically, the follower members 7065 protruding from the first side of the second stop member 7060, can move in the first beveled groove 7070, and servo elements 7065 protruding from the second side of the second stop element 7060 can move in the second beveled groove 7070. In use, the servo elements 7055 of the first stop element 7050 and servo the bumps 7065 of the second stop member 7060 can slide in the cam grooves 7070 in such a way that when the first stop member 7050 and the second stop member 7060 are proximally and / or extruded, the first stop member 7050 and the second stop member 7060 will follow the contours of the cam grooves 7070. Each the cam groove 7070 may have a plurality of locking or upper parts 7071 and a plurality of leading or lower parts 7072 that may be configured to move the supporting elements 7050 and 7060 vertically, i.e. in the direction of the lower jaw 7030 and from it, simultaneously with the longitudinal movement of the thrust elements 7050 and 7060, i.e. between the distal end 7048 and the proximal end 7049 of the frame 7041, as described in detail below.

As represented in FIG. 166, when the surgical stapler 7000 is inoperative, the first stop member 7050 can be located at the distal end 7048 of the frame 7041, and the second stop member 7060 can be located at the proximal end 7049 of the frame 7041. In addition, as shown in FIG. 167, when the surgical stapler 7000 is inoperative, the brackets 6220 located in the first jaw 7030 may not yet be inserted into the tissue T and / or the retention matrix located above it. In use, as presented in FIG. 168, the brackets 6220 can be pushed upward in the brackets of the cartridge brackets 7033 with the brackets ejectors 7012. In addition, the first stop member 7050 can move proximally from the distal end 7048 of the frame 7041 to the proximal end 7049 to engage with the legs 6221 of the brackets 6220. The brackets 6220 can move upward before the first stop member 7050 engages with the legs of the brackets 6221. All brackets 6220 can be stacked upward with the slide 7010 before the first stop member 7050 is moved until it touches legs of brackets 6221, or, alternatively, the slide 7010 can move proximally simultaneously with the proximal movement of the first stop element 7050, although the slide 7010 can be well ahead of the first stop element 7050 to push the brackets 6220 into contact with the first stop element 7050. How represented in FIG. 168, cam grooves 7070 may be formed and positioned so that forming surfaces, such as, for example, forming, or cam, surfaces 7053 and 7054 of the first stop member 7050 can come into contact with at least a portion of the legs of the brackets 6221 when holding the first stop member 7050 through a stop position, or up position. In various circumstances, each of the tracking elements 7055 of the first stop element 7050 can be placed in the locking part 7071 of the cam grooves 7070 so that the forming surfaces 7053 and 7054 are in a raised position and when the stop element 7050 is held in the stop position, only partial formation of the staple legs occurs 6221. As represented in FIG. 169, as the first cam 7050 moves further along the cam grooves 7070, the cam followers 7055 of the first stop member 7050 can be guided or lower parts 7072 of the cam grooves 7070 so that the forming surfaces 7053 and 7054 move vertically down to the legs of the brackets 6021 to bring the legs of the staples 6021 into their finally formed configurations. Then, with further movement of the first stop element 7050 along the cam grooves 7070, the first stop element 7050 can be fed vertically upward into another set of locking parts 7071 of the cam grooves 7070. As shown in FIG. 168 and 169, it can be noted that the first thrust member 7050 can engage only with part of the legs of the brackets without engaging the remaining legs of the brackets. For example, the first stop member 7050 can be configured to deform only a group of brace legs, including, for example, the distal legs 6221 of the brackets 6220. For example, the first stop member 7050 can deform the distal legs of the brackets 6221 toward the center of the brackets 6220. The first stop member 7050 can contact each proximal leg of bracket 6221 twice, i.e. the first forming surface 7053 and the second forming surface 7054, which is aligned with the first forming surface 7053. For example, the first forming surfaces 7053 can deform the distal legs of the brackets 6221 in a partially deformed configuration when the first stop member 7050 is in the stopped position, or in the upper position, and the second forming surfaces 7054 can deform the distal legs of the brackets 6221 into a fully formed configuration when the first abutment element 7050 moves into the excited, silt lower, position. As represented in FIG. 163 and 164, the first abutment element 7050 may comprise a plurality of first forming surfaces 7053 and a plurality of second forming surfaces 7054 for deforming the distal legs 6221 of the brackets 6220 when the legs of the brackets 6221 are mounted coaxially in more than one row or line. As described in more detail below, the deformation of the proximal legs 6221 of the brackets 6020 can be performed, for example, by a second stop element.

In addition to the above, the first stop member 7050 can move from the distal end 7048 of the chassis 7041 to the proximal end 7049 to deform all the distal legs 6221 of the brackets 6220. As the reader will notice, the first stop member 7050 can move up and down relative to the unformed proximal legs of the bracket 6221 and in order to adapt to such relative movement, the first stop member 7050 may have one or more clearances 7057 (FIG. 165), which may be configured to receive unbent proximal knives to 6221 brackets as the first stop member 7050 bends the distal legs 6221 of the brackets. Similarly, as also presented in FIG. 163, the second stop member 7060 may include a gap-forming groove 7067, which can be configured to use the vertical movement of the drive of the first cam 7051, which moves up and down when the first stop member 7050 moves between the stop positions and the excited position, as described above. After bending all the distal legs of the brackets 6221, the second stop member 7060 can be moved from the proximal end 7049 of the chassis 7041 to the distal end 7048 using the drive of the stop member 7061. Similar to that described above, as shown in FIG. 170, the cam followers 7065 of the second stop member 7060 can slide in the cam grooves 7070 so that the second stop member 7060 moves between the stop positions or the upper positions and the excited or lower positions to deform the proximal legs of the brackets 6221, for example inward to the centers of the brackets 6220. Similar to the above, the second stop member 7060 may comprise a plurality of first forming, or cam, surfaces 7063, and a plurality of second forming, or cam, surfaces 7064, each of which can be made with the possibility of at least partial deformation and / or complete deformation of one or more proximal legs of the bracket 6021. As also shown in FIG. 164, the second abutment element 7060 may comprise a plurality of first forming surfaces 7063 and a plurality of second forming surfaces 7064, which may be able to deform the proximal legs 6221 of the brackets 6220 arranged, for example, in the form of a plurality of rows or lines. As also presented in FIG. 164, the first forming surfaces 7063 and the second forming surfaces 7064 of the second abutment element 7060 may not be aligned with the first forming surfaces 7053 and the second forming surfaces 7054 of the first abutment element 7050, whereby the proximal legs 6221 of the brackets 6220 may be arranged in other rows, or lines, compared to the distal legs 6221 of the brackets 6220. As the reader may also note, the second stop element 7060 may push the first stop element 7050 while moving the second stop element 7060 distal but. For example, the second stop member 7060 can push the first stop member 7050 back to the distal end 7048 of the chassis 7041 so that the first stop member 7050 can be returned to its original, or inactive, position. After deformation of all proximal legs 6221, brackets 6220, the second abutment element 7060 can be extended proximal and returned to its original inactive position. Thus, the surgical stapling instrument 7000 can be returned to its initial position, so that a new cartridge with brackets can be placed in the first jaw 7030, and a new holding matrix can be located in the second jaw 7040 for reusing the surgical stapler 7000.

As described above, the surgical stapler may comprise two or more abutment elements that can be moved longitudinally to engage multiple brackets in the transverse direction with the legs. The surgical stapler may include a thrust element that moves proximally, for example, to bend the first group of legs of brackets, and distally, for example, to bend the second group of legs of brackets. For example, such a thrust element may comprise, for example, forming surfaces that are proximal facing and forming surfaces that are distally facing.

As represented in FIG. 171, a thrust element, such as, for example, a thrust element 7140, may comprise a lower or fabric facing surface 7141 and a plurality of forming recesses 7142 formed therein. The thrust element 7140 may comprise more than one plate, for example a plate with recesses 7143, which can be soldered to the frame 7144. For example, each plate with recesses 7143 can be placed in the channel of the plate 7145 in the frame 7144 and welded to the frame 7144 through a weld groove 7146 passing through the frame 7144 to obtain a longitudinal weld 7147. In various circumstances ah longitudinal seam 7147 may be a continuous weld extending over the entire length of the weld groove 7146, or, for example, a series of spaced apart spot welds extending along its entire length. Each recessed plate 7143 may comprise two or more parts of the plate welded together. For example, each plate with recesses 7143 may include a first part of the plate 7143a and a second part of the plate 7143b, which can be welded together at a seam 7148. The first part 7143a and the second part 7143b of each plate 7143 can be welded to each other before the plates 7143 welded to the channels of the plates 7145 in the frame 7144. For example, the first part of the plate 7143a and the second part of the plate 7143b may have interacting profiles, such as, for example, shown in FIG. 171 zigzag profiles that can be fitted to each other to form a tight seam 7148. Each plate 7143 may have a height of, for example, approximately 0.5 mm (0.02 inches), which may exceed the depth of the channels for the plates 7145, as a result of which the contact surfaces with the fabric 7141 extend from the frame 7044 of the thrust member 7040. As shown in FIG. 172, the plates 7143 can be connected to each other, for example, using at least one weld 7149 at the distal ends of the plates 7143.

As represented in FIG. 171 and 172, each plate with recesses 7143 may comprise a plurality of forming recesses 7142 formed therein. Forming recesses 7142 can be formed in plates 7143 by any suitable manufacturing process, such as, for example, sharpening and / or burning by electrodes. For example, as shown in FIG. 173 and 174, each forming recess 7142 can be made, for example, by first forming a deep hole 7150, then forming an arcuate or curved surface 7151 around a deep hole 7150, and then forming a guide groove 7152 for the bracket foot in a curved surface 7151. Alternatively these steps can be carried out in any suitable order. As represented in FIG. 175, the recesses for forming the brackets 7142 can be formed so that the inner edges 7153 of the forming recesses are separated by a constant or at least substantially constant space 7154. For example, the space 7154 may be, for example, approximately 0.2 mm (0.008 in). Moreover, for example, the forming recesses 7142 can be located along two or more rows, or lines, the axial lines of which can be divided by a constant or at least substantially constant gap 7155. For example, the gap 7155 between the center lines can be, for example, approximately 0 89 mm (0.035 in.). As represented in FIG. 175, each forming recess 7142 may smoothly taper between a smaller width 7156 and a larger width 7157. For example, a smaller width 7156 may be approximately 1.1 mm (0.045 inches), and a larger width 7157, for example, may be approximately 1.9 mm ( 0.075 inches). The plates 7143 may be made of the same material as the frame 7144. For example, the plates 7143 and the frame 7144 may consist, for example, of stainless steel, such as, for example, grade 300 or 400 stainless steel and / or titanium. Alternatively, plates 7143 and frame 7144 may be composed of different materials. For example, plates 7143 of plate 7143 can be made, for example, of ceramic material, and the frame 7144 can be made, for example, of stainless steel and / or titanium. In various circumstances, depending on the materials used, for attaching the plates 7143 to the frame 7144, for example, at least one soldering process may be used in addition to or instead of the welding processes described above.

As represented in FIG. 176-178, the thrust member 7240 may comprise a frame 7244 and a plurality of plates with recesses 7243 that can be inserted into the frame 7244. Similarly to the above, each plate with recesses 7243 may comprise a plurality of forming recesses 7242 formed therein. The frame of the thrust element 7244 may comprise holding grooves 7246, each of which can be arranged to hold a holding rail 7247 protruding from a plate with recesses 7243. To install plates with recesses 7243 on the frame of the stop member 72 44, the side walls 7245 of the frame of the thrust member 7244 may be bent or pulled apart, as shown in FIG. 177 to increase the width of the retaining grooves 7246 so that each retaining groove 7246 can receive the retaining rail guide 7247 of the plate with recesses 7243. After placing the retaining rail guides 7247 in the retaining grooves 7246, the side walls 7245 can be released, as shown in FIG. 178, thereby allowing the frame 7244 to elastically contract and / or return to its expanded state. In such circumstances, the retaining grooves 7246 may be compressed and thereby gripping the retaining rails 7247. The retaining rail guides 7247 and / or the retaining grooves 7246 may comprise one or more common conical surfaces which, after releasing the curved retaining grooves 7246, may form a clamping cone connection, which can hold the holding rail rails 7247 in the holding grooves 7246. Similar to the above, the plates with recesses 7243 can be made of the same material ala as frame 7244, or other material. For example, plates 7243 may consist, for example, of ceramic material, and the frame 7244 may consist, for example, of stainless steel and / or titanium. In various circumstances, depending on the materials used, for attaching the plates 7243 in the frame 7244, for example, at least one soldering process and / or at least one welding process can be used.

Shown in FIG. 179 and 180, the surgical stapling and dissecting instrument 8010 may include a stop member 8014 that can repeatedly open and close by pivotally attaching to an elongated channel for brackets 8016. The brace overlay assembly 8012 may comprise a stop member 8014 and a channel 8016, whereby the assembly 8012 can be proximally attached to the elongated shaft 8018, forming the working part 8022. When the bracket assembly 8012 is closed or at least substantially closed, the working part 8022 may have a sufficiently small cross section suitable for introducing the node overlay brackets 8012 through the trocar. Manipulation of the assembly 8012 can be accomplished using a handle 8020 connected to the shaft 8018. The handle 8020 may include user controls, such as a rotary handle 8030 that rotates the elongated shaft 8018 and the brace overlay assembly 8012 around the longitudinal axis of the shaft 8018. Closing trigger 8026 , which can rotate in front of the pistol grip 8036 around the pin 8152 of the closing trigger (FIG. 181), which is meshed laterally across the handle housing 8154, can be squeezed to close I node 8012 stapling. The release button of the closing release mechanism 8038 may protrude outward on the handle 8020 while compressing the closing release mechanism 8026 so that the release button 8038 can be pressed to release the closing release mechanism 8026 and open the overlay assembly 8012, as described in more detail below. The trigger 8034, capable of pivoting in front of the closing trigger 8026, can act on the overlay site staples 8012 to simultaneously dissect and stitch the tissue clamped in it. In various situations, described in more detail below, a plurality of trigger cycles performed using the trigger hook 8034 can be used to reduce the force the surgeon has to exert with his hand in each cycle. The handle 8020 may include rotating right and / or left wheels 8040, 8041 of the indicator 8040, 8041 (FIG. 181), which may indicate the start-up process. For example, for a full trigger path, three full trigger cycles of the trigger 8034 may be required, and therefore the indicator wheels 8040, 8041 can rotate up to a third of a revolution for each trigger cycle of the trigger 8034. As described in more detail below, the manual trigger 8042 , if necessary, allow the trigger system to be pulled back until the trigger path is complete, and, in addition, the trigger lever 8042 may allow the surgeon or other doctor to pull the trigger system back in case the trigger system the theme is stuck and / or out of order.

As shown in FIG. 179 and 181, the elongated shaft 8018 may include an external part including a longitudinally reciprocating closure tube 8024 that rotates the thrust member 8014 into the closed position by proximal pressing the closing trigger mechanism 8026 of the handle 8020. The elongated groove 8018 can be connected to handle 8020 frame 8028 (FIG. 181), which is located inside with respect to the closing tube 8024. Frame 8028 can be engaged, rotatably, with handle 8020, so that the rotation of the rotary handle ki 8030 (FIG. 179) may cause rotation of the working part 8022. As shown particularly in FIG. 181, the rotary handle 8030 may be formed of two half-shells, which may include one or more internal protrusions 8031, which may extend through one or more elongated side holes 8070 in the cover tube 8024 and engage the frame 8028. As a result of the above, the rotary handle 8030 and the frame 8028 can be rotated together or synchronously, so that the rotation position of the handle 8030 determines the rotation position of the working part 8022. The longitudinal length of the longer hole 8070 is large enough to provide longitudinal closing and opening movement of the closing tube 8024. With regard to providing closing movement of the closing tube 8024, as shown mainly in FIG. 181 and 183, the upper part 8160 of the closing release mechanism 8026 can push the closing yoke 8162 forward by the closing link 8164. The closing link 8164 is pivotally attached to its distal end by a pin of the closing yoke 8166 to the closing yoke 8162, and also hinged by its proximal end the pin of the closing yoke 8168. The closing trigger 8026 can be brought into the open position by the tension spring of the closing trigger 8246, which is maximally connected to the upper part 8160 of the closing trigger 8026 and the handle housing 8154 formed by the right and left half shells 8156, 8158. The tensile force exerted by the tension spring 8246 can be overcome by applying a closing force to the closing trigger 8026 to distally advance the yoke 8162, the closing link 8164 and the closing tube 8024. When you activate or press the closing trigger 8026, as described above, the release button of the closing trigger 8038 can inyat position so that the surgeon or other doctor could, if necessary, press the release button closure trigger 8038, allowing closing the trigger 8026 and the rest of the surgical instrument back to the non-activated position. The release button of the closing release mechanism 8038 can be connected to the pivoting locking lever 8172 via a central side hinge 8173 so that movement between the release button 8038 and the locking lever 8172 can be transmitted. Refer again to FIG. 181. The compression spring 8174 can bias the release button of the closing release mechanism 8038 proximally, i.e. clockwise around the central lateral hinge 8173, when viewed from the right, and the upper part 8160 of the closing trigger 8026 may include a proximal ridge 8170 with a rear slot 8171. When you press the closing trigger 8026, the pivoting locking lever 8172 can run onto the proximal ridge 8170 and when the closing trigger 8026 reaches the fully pressed position, it should be understood that under the pivoting locking lever 8172 will be the rear slot 8171 and the lever will fall into this rear slot 8171 and udet is locked in it under the pressure of compression spring 8174. At this moment, when manually pressing the release button of the closing release mechanism 8038, the rotary locking lever 8172 rotates up and out of the rear slot 8171, as a result of which the closing release mechanism 8026 will be unlocked and will return to its unlocked position .

After the proximal compression of the closing trigger 8026, as described above, the trigger 8034 can be pulled to the pistol grip 8036 to distally advance the trigger rod 8032 from the handle 8020. The trigger 8034 can rotate around the trigger pin 8202, which runs laterally and connects to the right and the left half shells 8156, 8158 of the handle 8020. A triggered trigger 8034 can advance the trigger gear 8150 with an engaged gear. The trigger gear 8150 with a clutch gear can be brought into a retracted, inoperative position by a spring 8184, which, firstly, is attached to the pistol grip 8036 of the handle 8020 and, secondly, is attached to one of the connecting elements, for example, the trigger 8150 with chain drive, as described in more detail below. The spring 8184 may comprise a fixed end 8186 connected to the housing 8154 and a movable end 8188 connected to the proximal end 8190 of the steel strip 8192. The distally located end 8194 of the steel strip 8192 can be attached to the connecting element 8195 on the front link 8196a of the plurality of connecting elements 8196a -8196d, forming a connecting rail 8200. The connecting rail 8200 can be flexible, so that it can easily be pulled into the pistol grip 8036 and minimize the length of the handle 8020 and still form a straight rigid rack th node is capable of transmitting a significant force on the trigger starting the rod 8032, and / or through it. As described in more detail below, the trigger 8034 may come into contact with the first link 8196a when the trigger 8034 is first actuated, come into contact with the second link 8196b with the second trigger 8034, and come into contact with the third link 8196c when the third actuation of the trigger 8034 and come into contact with the fourth link 8196d with the fourth actuation of the trigger 8034, and each actuation of the trigger 8034 can move distally translationally Rail 8200 for some distance. In addition to the above, a plurality of strokes of the trigger 1034 can rotate the right and left control wheels of the indicator 1040, 1041 to indicate the distance that the connecting rail 8200 has been advanced.

As shown in FIG. 181 and 183, the 8250 backstop can prevent the connecting rail 8200 from being pulled in with the combined tension / compression spring 8184 between the start strokes. The connecting sliding tube 8131 abuts against the first connecting element 8196a and is connected to the trigger rod 8032 for transmitting the trigger movement. The trigger rod 8032 extends proximally through the proximal end of the frame 8028 and through the through hole 8408 of the backstop 8266. The size of the through hole 8408 allows the trigger rod 8032 to be slidingly sliding during perpendicular alignment and held in an inclined position. The lower reed fastener 8271 extends proximally from the lower protrusion of the proximal end of the frame 8028, passing through the hole 8269 on the lower edge of the backstop 8266. This lower reed fastener 8271 guides the bottom of the backstop 8266 near the frame 8028 so that the plate the backstop 8266 is perpendicular when the trigger rod 8032 moves distally and allows the upper rear to deviate into the holding position when the trigger is attempted rod 8032 retract. The backstop lock compression spring 8264 is compressed distally by the proximal end of the frame 8028 and proximally abuts against the top of the backstop lock plate 8266, deflecting the backstop lock plate 8266 to the lock state. Counteracting the bias of the spring, the backstop lock tube 8268 slidably connects the sliding sliding tube 8131 and abuts against the backstop lock plate 8266. The proximal protruding backstop lock beam 8256 attached to the backstop lock cam tube 8268 extends over the closing cross member 8162.

As shown in FIG. 181, an automatic pull-pull mechanism 8289 is integrated into the surgical stapling and dissecting instrument 8010 and causes the scalpel to retract at the end of the full trigger path. To this end, the distal link 8196d comprises a shank 8290 protruding upward when the distal link 8196d extends into the rail groove 8291 (FIG. 181) formed in the closing traverse 8162. This shank 8290 is aligned to activate the lower proximal cam 8292 on the release lever of the back lock 8248 (FIG. 186). As shown in particular in FIG. 186 and 187, the parts formed in the right and left half-shells 8156, 8158 limit the movement of the release lever of the backstop 8248. The socket 8296 of the pin and the round pin 8293 formed respectively between the right and left half-shells 8156, 8158 are received through a longitudinally elongated hole 8294 made in the release lever of the reverse lock 8248, distal to the lower proximal cam 8292, which allows longitudinal movement, as well as rotation around the round pin 8293. In the right half-shell 8156, prok the imperviously open groove 8295 includes a proximal horizontal portion 8295a that communicates with the upwardly and distally inclined portion 8295b that receives the right rear pin 8297 (FIG. 187) near the proximal end of the back lock release lever 8248, thereby transmitting upward rotation as the backstop release lever 8248 reaches the most distal part of this movement. A blocking part formed in the right half-shell 8156 proximal to the backstop release lever 8248 prevents its proximal movement when assembled by holding the right-hand rear pin 8297 in the proximal open channel 8295.

In addition to the foregoing, as shown in FIG. 187 and 188, the distal end 8254 of the reverse lock release lever 8248 is thus moved distally and downward, as a result of which the front right-hand pin enters the distally open stepped part 8299 formed in the right half-shell 8156, which the compression spring 8300 introduces into this contact (FIG. 188) attached to a left-handed hook 8301 on a backstop release lever 8248 between a right-hand front pin 8298 and a longitudinally elongated hole 8294. The other end of the compression spring 8300 is attached to ryuchok 8302 (FIG. 186, 188, 189), formed in the right half-shell 8156 in a more proximal and lower position just under the closing traverse 8266. Thus, the compression spring 8300 pulls the distal end 8254 of the release lever lock backward 8248 down and back, as a result, the front right-hand pin 8298 is blocked in the distally open stepped part 8299 during distal advancement. Thus, after engagement, as shown in FIG. 189, the backstop release lever 8248 remains in front, holding the backstop lock plate 8266 in a perpendicular position and, therefore, allowing the connecting rail 8200 to be pulled back. When the closing yoke 8266 is then pushed back when the end clip 8012 is released, the upwardly extending tail 8303 on the traverse beam 8266, comes into contact with the lower distal cam 8305 of the reverse lock release lever 8248, raising the front right-hand pin 8298 from the distal open stepped part 8299 so that the compression spring of the backstop 8264 can proximally push the cam tube 8268 backstop and the release lever backstop 8248 in the retracted position (FIG. 186).

As represented in FIG. 179 and 189, the trigger 8034 may be operatively connected to the connecting rail 8200 in any suitable manner. As shown in particular in FIG. 180 and 185, the trigger 8034 rotates around the trigger pin 8202, which is connected to the housing 8154. The upper part 8204 of the trigger 8034 moves distally around the trigger pin 8202 as the trigger 8034 is pressed against the pistol grip 8036, stretching proximally the located trigger tension spring 8206 (FIG. 181) proximally connected between the trigger hook upper portion 8204 8034 and the housing 8154. The trigger hook 8034 upper portion 8204 engages the connecting rail 8200 each depressing the trigger by means of a spring-loaded lateral safety mechanism 8210. When the trigger is released, the lateral safety mechanism disengages from the connecting rail 8200, and the trigger may return to an unpressed or idle position. During use, the inclined right-hand track formed by the proximal and right-sloping surface 8284 in each of the connecting elements 8196a-8196d is engaged with the side safety unit 8285. In particular, the safety slider 8270 (FIGS. 181 and 183) has a right and left lower guides 8272, which slide respectively in the left groove 8274 (FIG. 181), formed in the closing traverse 8266 under the groove 8291 rails, and the right groove 8275 in the rail of the closing traverse 8276, parallel to the groove 8291 rake and attached to the lid of the trough 8277 slats covering the open right side of the chute 8291 rack in the closing traverse 8266 located distal to the trajectory of the slider 8270 fuse. In FIG. 181, 182 and 185, a compression spring 8278 is attached between the hook 8279 at the upper proximal position of the railing of the traverse beam 8276 and the hook 8280 on the distal right slider of the fuse 8270 and holds the slider of the fuse 8270 pulled proximally until it contacts the upper part 8204 of the trigger 8034.

As shown in particular in FIG. 181, the fuse block 8318 is located on the slider of the fuse 8270, turning around the vertical rear pin 8320, which passes through the left proximal corner of the fuse block 8318 and the slider of the fuse 8270. A recess for the ejector block 8322 is formed on the distal part of the upper surface block 8318 for receiving the ejector block 8324 pivotally connected by a vertical pin 8326, the lower end of which passes into the recess for the fuse spring 8328 on the upper surface fuse slider 8270. Fuse spring 8330 in the recess for fuse spring 8328 protrudes to the right of the vertical front pin 8326 and causes the fuse block 8318 to turn counterclockwise when viewed from above, engaging with the inclined right-hand track 8282. A small coil spring 8332 in the recess for of the ejector unit 8322 causes the ejector unit 8324 to rotate clockwise, when viewed from above, brings its proximal end into contact with the simulated protrusion 8334, bath in the closing traverse 8266 above the channel for rail 8291. As shown in FIG. 184, the more mechanically strong fuse spring 8330, superior to the small coil spring 8332, causes the fuse block 8318 to engage with the ejector block 8324 rotated clockwise. As shown in FIG. 185, when the trigger hook 8034 is fully pressed and release begins, the ejector unit 8324 encounters an edge 8336 in the simulated protrusion 8334 as the fuse slider 8270 retracts, causing the eject unit 8324 to rotate clockwise when viewed from above, and thus eject the fuse unit 8318 out of engagement with the connecting rail 8200. The shape of the recess for the ejector unit 8322 prevents the ejector unit 8324 from turning clockwise in a position perpendicular to the modeled protrusion 8334, and such a violation of the connection persists throughout the entire lead back, as a result of which interference of the ratchet mechanism is excluded.

In FIG. 181, 183, 190 and 195, the surgical stapler and dissecting apparatus 8010 may include a manual retraction mechanism 8500 for manually releasing the trigger mechanism, manual retraction and, in one embodiment (FIG. 196-202), additionally performs automatic Lead back at the end of the full launch path. As shown in FIGS. 181, 190 and 191, in particular, the front intermediate gear 8220 is engaged with the upper left gear surface 8222 of the connecting rail 8200, and the front intermediate gear 8220 is also engaged with the rear intermediate gear 8230 having a smaller right-hand ratchet gear 8231. As the front intermediate gear 8220, and the rear intermediate gear 8230 are rotatably connected to the handle housing 8154, respectively, using the shaft of the front intermediate gear 8232 and the shaft of the rear intermediate gear 8234. The ends of the rear shaft 8232 pass through the corresponding right and left half shells of the housing 8156, 8158 and are attached to the left and right indicator control wheels 8040, 8041, and since the rear shaft 8234 rotates freely in the handle housing 8154 and is connected by a tongue to the rear gear 8230, the indicator control wheels 8040, 8041 rotate together with the rear gear 8230. The gear ratio between the connecting rail 8200, the intermediate gear 8220 and the rear gear 8230 can advantageously be selected so that, if appropriate According to the tooth size of the toothed front surface 8222, the rear gear 8230 made no more than one revolution during the full starting path of the trigger mechanism with the clutch gear 8150. In addition to the gear mechanism 8502 clearly shows the completed starting path or progress, the gear mechanism 8502 can also be used for manual retracting the cutting element. The smaller right-handed ratchet gear 8231 of the rear idler gear 8230 extends into the bushing 8506 of the manual pull lever 8042, which is specially aligned with a vertical longitudinally aligned groove 8508 (FIG. 190) bisecting the bushing 8506. The lateral through hole 8510 of the sleeve 8506 communicates with the upper recess 8512. The front portion 8514 is configured to receive a proximal directional locking fuse 8516 that pivots around the right-side lateral pin 8518 formed at the distal end of the upper recess 8512. The rear portion 8520 has a shape configured to receive an L-shaped spring tongue 8522 that pushes the locking fuse 8516 down into engagement with a smaller right-handed ratchet gear 8231. Holding The engaging part 8524 (FIGS. 186 and 193) protrudes from the right half-shell 8156 into the upper recess 8512, holding the locking guard 8516 from engaging with the smaller right-hand ratchet gear 8231 when the lever 8042 for manual retraction is lowered (FIG. 193). The coil spring 8525 (FIG. 181) forces the manual retraction lever 8042 to move backward.

In use, as shown in FIG. 192 and 193, the combined tension / compression spring 8184 may be detached from the connecting rail in a distal position. As shown in FIG. 194 and 195, when the manual retraction lever 8042 is raised, the locking fuse 8516 rotates clockwise and is no longer held by the holding part 8524 and engages in the smaller right-hand ratchet gear 8231, turning the rear intermediate gear 8230 clockwise when viewed from the left. In response to this, the front idler 8220 rotates counterclockwise, retracting the connecting rail 8200. In addition, a right-hand curved rib 8510 protrudes from the sleeve 8506, the size of which allows it to come into contact with the release lever of the reverse lock 8248 and move it distally, releasing the locking mechanism reverse 8250 when turning the lever 8042 manual retraction.

As shown in FIG. 196-202, the automatic retraction mechanism 8600 for surgical stapling and dissecting instrument 8010a may include automatic retraction at the end of the full trigger path, implemented using the front idler gear 8220a having a tooth 8602 that moves inside the circular groove 8604 in the cam gear 8606 until it collides with blocker 8608 after an almost complete turn, corresponding to three start cycles. In this situation, the right-side rib 8610 is rotated upward to contact the recess of the lower cam 8612 to distally move the release lever of the back lock 8248a. As shown, in particular, in FIG. 197, the backstop 8248a release lever includes a distal end 8254 operating as described above. A round pin 8293 and a pin socket 8296 formed between the right and left half shells 8156, 8158 pass through a substantially rectangular hole 8294a formed in the release lever of the backstop 8248a behind the lower cam 8192, which allows longitudinal movements as well as a blocking downward movement the distal end 8254 of the reverse lock release lever 8248a. In the right half-shell 8156, a horizontal proximal open channel 8295a near the proximal end of the reverse lock release lever 8248a receives the right-hand rear pin 8297.

During operation, before starting, as shown in FIG. 198, 198A, the connecting rail 8200, and the backstop 8268 cam tube are retracted, blocking the backstop 8250, while the backstop 8264 compression spring tilts the backstop 8266 proximally to the original backstop plate 8626. position, and the reverse lock release lever 8248a is retracted so that the link 8196a is in contact with the front idler gear 8220a. The tooth 8602 is in the “six o'clock” position, and the full path of the circular groove 8604 runs counterclockwise from it, and the right-hand rib 8610 is located directly near the tooth 8602. As shown in FIG. 199, 199A, one start-up cycle was performed by displacing one distal link 8196b in contact with the front idler gear 8220a. The tooth 8602 has traveled one third of its path along the circular groove 8604 of the fixed cam gear 8606. As shown in FIG. 200, 200A, a second start-up cycle was performed, displacing another link 8196c in contact with the front idler gear 8220a. The tooth 8602 has traveled two-thirds of its way along the circular groove 8604 of the fixed cam gear 8606. As shown in FIG. 201, 201A, a third start-up cycle was performed by displacing one distal link 8196d in contact with the front idler gear 8220a. The tooth 8602 went around the entire circumference of the circular groove 8604 until it came into contact with the blocker 8608, causing the cam gear 8606 to turn counterclockwise (when viewed from the right), as a result of which the right-hand rib 8608 came into contact with the release lever of the back lock 8248a. As shown in FIG. 2, as a result, the backstop release lever 8248a moved distally, locking the right-hand front pin 8298 in the distally open stepping 8299 and releasing the backstop 8250. Similar surgical stapling instruments are disclosed in US Patent No. 7,083,075, issued August 1, 2006. year, the contents of which are fully incorporated into this application by reference.

As shown in FIG. 3, the stapling unit 9012 of the surgical stapling instrument 9010 performs the functions of clamping tissue, pushing the staples, and stapling tissue in two separate movements longitudinally transmitted down the shaft 9016 relative to the frame of the shaft 9070. The frame of the shaft 9070 is attached proximally to the handle of the surgical stapling tool and connected to it for rotation around a longitudinal axis. An exemplary multi-stroke handle for a surgical stapler and dissecting apparatus is described in more detail in a simultaneously filed and owned by the same authors US patent application entitled “SURGICAL STAPLING MACHINE WITH A MULTI-START POSITION INDICATOR AND TRANSFER MECHANISM”. No. 10 / 374,026, the description of which is fully incorporated herein by reference. Other applications of the present invention may include a single-cycle start, as described in a simultaneously filed and owned by the same authors US patent application entitled "SURGICAL STAPLING MACHINE HAVING SEPARATE INDEPENDENT CLOSING AND STARTING SYSTEMS", ser. No. 10 / 441.632, the description of which is fully incorporated into this document by reference¸.

As shown, in particular, at 4, the distal end of the frame of the shaft 9070 is attached to the channel for brackets 9018. The stop element 9022 has a proximal pivot end 9072, which is rotatably received at the proximal end 9074 of the channel for brackets 9018 directly distal to its connection with the frame the rod 9070. When the thrust member 9022 is rotated downward, the thrust member 9022 moves the fabric contacting surface 9028 and the forming recesses 9026 toward the opposed brace unit, described in more detail below. The pivot end 9072 of the stop member 9022 includes a closure member 9076 located close to, but distal to, its pivot mount to the bracket groove 9018. Thus, the closure tube 9078, the distal end of which includes a horseshoe-shaped hole 9080, engages with this closure element 9076, selectively forces the stop element 9022 to make an opening motion with proximal longitudinal movement and a closing motion with distal longitudinal movement of the closure tube 9078 sliding over the frame rod 9070 in response to the action of a closing trigger similar to the above. The frame of the rod 9070 performs and directs the starting movement from the handle to the longitudinal reciprocating motion of the two-component cutting element and the starting rod 9090. In particular, the frame of the rod 9070 includes a longitudinal slot of the starting rod 9092, which includes the proximal part of the two-component cutting element and the starting rod 9090, in particular, a multilayer tapering trigger rod 9094. It should be understood that the multilayer tapering trigger rod 9094 can be replaced by a trigger rod of c flat and / or any other suitable material.
The three-horned element 9102 is the distal part of the two-component cutting element and the trigger rod 9090, which facilitates separate closing and starting, and also separates the thrust element 9022 from the elongated brackets 9018 when actuating. As shown, in particular, in FIG. 204 and 205, in addition to any fastening option, for example by soldering or adhesive, the cutting element and the trigger rod 9090 are configured such that a corresponding pin fastener 9106 is received in the vertical fastening receiving hole 9104 formed proximally in the three-horned element 9102, located distally on a multilayer tapering starting rod 9094, which allows each part to be formed from the selected material and processed separately, taking into account their unequal functions (for example, strength, flexibility, t ix). The three-horned element 9102 may advantageously be made of a material having properties suitable for forming a pair of upper pins 9110, a pair of middle pins 9112 and a lower pin or support 9114, as well as suitable for creating a sharp cutting edge 9116. In addition, they are integral and protruding proximally the upper guide 9118 and the middle guide 9120, covering the cutting edge 9116 from each vertical end, further form the fabric preparation area 9122, helping to direct the fabric to the sharp cutting edge 9116 before cutting iem. The middle ejector 9120 also serves to engage and start the bracketing apparatus 9012 by abutting the stepped central element 9124 of the wedge-shaped slide 9126 (FIG. 206) which acts on the formation of the brackets using the bracketing unit 9012, as described in more detail below. Due to the fact that these elements (for example, the upper pins 9110, the middle pins 9112 and the lower support 9114) form a single unit with the three-horned element 9102, their manufacture is simplified with stricter tolerances relative to each other in comparison with the assembly of many parts and the desired operation is ensured at startup and / or effective interaction with various blocking elements of the node overlay staples 9012.

Figures 7 and 208 show the overlay assembly 9012 in the open state with the tripod element 9102 fully retracted. During assembly, the lower support 9114 of the three-horned element 9102 passes through the expanded hole 9130 in the channel for the brackets 9018, and then the three-horned element 9102 moves forward so that the three-horned element 9102 distally slides along the lower track 9132 formed in the channel for the brackets 9018. In particular, the lower track 9132 includes a narrow groove 9133 opening in the form of an expanded groove 9134 on the lower surface of the channel for the brackets 9018 to form We have an inverted T-shaped configuration in a lateral cross-section, as, in particular, shown in Figures 8 and 209, which communicates with an enlarged groove 9130. Assembled components that are proximally connected to the multilayer tapering trigger rod 9094 do not allow the lower support 9114 to advance proximally further into the enlarged hole 9130 and allow disengagement. As shown at 0, a multilayer tapering trigger rod 9094 facilitates insertion of the overlay assembly 9012 through. In particular, a more distal downward projection 9136 lifts the three-horned element 9102 in a fully retracted position. This is achieved by installing the downward protrusion 9136 in the place where it rises upward at the proximal edge of the widened channel opening 9130 for the staples 9018. As shown in FIG. 211, the multi-layered tapering trigger rod 9094 also improves the operation of certain locking elements that can be integrated into the bracket groove 9018 by means of a more proximally upwardly extending protrusion 9138 that pushes down the shaft frame 9070 at the initial stage of the trigger path. In particular, between the pair of square holes 9142 in the shaft frame 9070, a lateral shaft 9140 is disposed (FIG. 204). A clamping spring 9144, which encompasses the lateral shaft 9140, pushes down a portion of the multilayer tapering trigger rod 9094 protruding distally from the longitudinal groove for the trigger rod 9092, which engages at some suitable moment some advantageous locking elements. Such an ejection is more pronounced or limited solely to that portion of the starting path in which the upward projection 9138 is in contact with the clamping spring 9144.

In FIG. 7 and 208, the three-horned element 9102 is retracted and its upper pins 9110 are located inside the recess of the abutment element 9150 near the pivoting proximal end of the abutment element 9022. The vertical downward groove 9152 of the abutment element (FIG. 203) extends laterally into the abutment element 9022, passing into the inner a latch element track 9154 that grips the upper pins 9110 of the three-horned element 9102 during their distal movement during start-up, as shown in FIG. 210 and 211, structurally separating the stop element 9022 from the groove 9018 for brackets. Thus, when the three-horned element 9102 is retracted, the surgeon can repeatedly open and close the stitching unit 9012 until the location and orientation of the tissue trapped therein for dissection and stitching are satisfactory, and the three-horned element 9102 helps to correctly position the fabric even in the case of the use of the node overlay staples 9012 reduced diameter and, therefore, reduced stiffness. In FIG. 203, 204, 206, 207, 209, and 215, a bracketing unit 9012 is provided with a removable bracket unit 9020 containing wedge-shaped slides 9126. A longitudinally aligned and parallel set of wedges grooves 9202 (FIG. 209) that are open downwardly receive corresponding wedges 9204 made as a unit with a wedge-shaped slide 9126. As shown in FIG. 209-211, the wedge-shaped slide 9126 thus lifts up a plurality of bracket ejectors 9206, vertically sliding inside the recesses 9208 of the bracket ejectors. In this illustrative embodiment, each bracket ejector 9206 includes two vertical pins, each of which moves upward into a corresponding bracket hole 9210 or bracket cavity 9024 to push upward and deform the bracket 9023 placed therein by the brace surface 9214 (FIG. 211) of the stop member 9022. The central launching recess 9216 (FIG. 204) formed in a cartridge with brackets 9020 in close proximity to the groove 9018 brackets provides passage of the lower, horizontal part 9218 (FIG. 206) wedge-shaped salas the lock 9126, as well as the middle pins 9112 of the three-horned element 9102. More precisely, the cartridge tray 9220 with brackets (FIGS. 204, 209) is attached to the polymer housing 9222 of the cartridge with brackets and has recesses for ejectors 9208 of brackets, holes 9210 of brackets and a central launching recess 9216. As the brackets 9023 are thus formed on either side, the sharp cutting edge 9116 enters the vertical through groove 9230 extending along the entire longitudinal axis of the cartridge with brackets 9020, except for its most distal end.

The start of the overlay bracket 9012 starts as shown in FIG. 211, so that the two-component cutting element and the trigger rod 9090 are pulled proximally until the downward protrusion 9136 lifts the middle ejector 9120 on the three-horn element 9102 up and back, which allows you to insert a new bracket block 9020 into the groove 9018 for brackets with an open stop element 9022, as shown in FIG. 203 and 207. As shown in FIG. 212, the two-component cutting element and the trigger rod 9090 are distally advanced a small distance, allowing the downwardly extending protrusion 9136 to enter the enlarged hole 9130 of the lower track 9132 by the action of a clamping spring 9144 opposite the upwardly extending protrusion 9138 of the multi-layer tapering starting rod 9094. The middle ejector 9120 prevents additional downward rotation, since it is located on the stepped central element 9124 of the wedge-shaped slide 9126, as a result of which the middle pin 9112 of the three-horned ele ment remains inside the central launch recess 9216. As shown in FIG. 213, the two-component cutting element and the trigger rod 9090 are distally actuated by advancing the wedge-shaped slide 9126, which leads to the formation of brackets 9023 and the dissection of the fabric 9242, sandwiched between the stop element 9022 and the bracket block 9020, using a sharp cutting edge 9116. Next, as shown in FIG. 214, the two-component cutting element and the trigger shaft 9090 are retracted, leaving the wedge-shaped slide 9126 in a distal position. As shown in FIG. 5, the middle pin 9112 is allowed to move down into the blocking recess 9240 formed in the channel for the brackets 9018 (also see FIG. 208, 211). Thus, if the wedge-shaped slide 9126 (not shown in FIG. 215) is not in the proximal position (i.e., if the cartridge with brackets 9020 is missing or expended), the operator will be able to tactilely feel that the middle pin 9112 has rested in the distal the edge of the locking recess 9240. Similar surgical staplers are disclosed in US patent No. 7,380,696, issued June 3, 2008, the contents of which are fully incorporated into this application by reference.

As described above, the cartridge with brackets may comprise a cartridge housing containing a plurality of bracket cavities provided therein. The cartridge housing may comprise a panel and an upper surface of the panel, each cavity of the bracket may form an opening in the surface of the panel. As described above, the brackets can also be located inside each cavity of the bracket so that the brackets are stored inside the block body until they are pushed out. Before removing from the cartridge housing, the brackets may be contained within the cartridge case so that the brackets do not protrude above the panel surface. Since in such embodiments, the brackets are under the surface of the panel, the possibility of damage and / or premature contact with the target tissue can be reduced. In various situations, the brackets can move between the idle position, in which they do not protrude from the block body, and the actuated position, in which they protrude from the block body and can come into contact with the stop element opposite the cartridge with brackets. the stop element and / or forming recesses formed in the stop element can be located at a predetermined distance from the panel surface so that when brackets are fed from the cartridge case, the brackets deform, acquiring a predetermined height in the formed state. In some situations, the thickness of the fabric trapped between the abutment element and the cartridge with brackets can be changed, and therefore, with some brackets you can grab a thicker fabric, and with some other brackets you can grab a thinner fabric. In any case, the pressure or clamping force applied to the fabric by brackets may, for example, differ for different brackets or may differ between brackets at one end of a row of brackets and at the other end of a row of brackets. In some situations, the gap between the stop element and the cartridge plate with brackets can be controlled so that the brackets overlap with some minimal clamping force within each bracket. However, in some such situations, there may still be significant variability in the clamping force within different brackets.

The cartridge with brackets may contain means for compensating for the thickness of the tissue captured by the brackets that were installed from the cartridge with brackets. As represented in FIG. 216, a cartridge with brackets, for example, such as a cartridge with brackets 10000, may comprise a rigid first part, for example, a carrier part 10010, and a compressible second part, for example, a tissue thickness compensator 10020. As is mainly shown in FIG. 218, the carrier portion 10010 may comprise a cartridge case, an upper surface of a panel 10011 and a plurality of cavities for brackets 10012, wherein, similarly to the above, each cavity for the brackets 10012 may form an opening on the surface of the panel 10011. The bracket 10030, for example, can be removably mounted into the cavity 10012 brackets. For example, as mainly presented in FIG. 245 and described in more detail below, each bracket 10030, each bracket 10030 may include a base 10031 and one or more legs 10032 extending from the base 10031. Before placing the brackets 10030, which is also described in more detail below, the bases 10031 of the brackets 10030 can be supported by the bracket ejectors, located inside the supporting part 10010, and, at the same time, the legs 10032 of the brackets 10030 can at least partially be contained within the cavities 10012 of the brackets. The brackets 10030 can move between the non-activated position and the activated position, as a result of which the legs 10032 pass through the fabric thickness compensator 10020, penetrate the upper surface of the fabric thickness compensator 10020, penetrate the fabric T and come into contact with the stop element opposite the cartridge with brackets 10000. When the legs 10032 are deformed against the stop element, these legs 10032 of each staple 10030 can capture part of the fabric thickness compensator 10020 and part of the fabric T inside each staple 10030 and apply it to the fabric by compressing e effort. In addition to the above, the legs 10032 of each bracket 10030 can be deformed downward to the base of the bracket 10031 to form a grip region of the bracket 10039 into which tissue T and tissue thickness compensator 10020 can be gripped. In various situations, the grip region of the bracket 10039 can be formed between the inner surfaces of the deformed legs 10032 and the inner surface of the base 10031. The size of the grip area of the bracket may depend on several factors, for example, the length of the legs, the diameter of the legs, the width of the base and / or the degree of deformation tion of legs.

In previous versions, the surgeon often needed to choose brackets that were suitable in height for the stitched fabric. For example, the surgeon could choose high staples for use on thick tissue and short staples for use on thin tissue. However, in some situations, the thickness of the stitched fabric was uneven, and therefore some brackets might not achieve the desired configuration when activated. For example, in FIG. 250 shows the high staple used when working with a thin cloth. As shown in FIG. 251, when a tissue thickness compensator, such as a tissue thickness compensator 10020, is used when operating, for example, with thin tissue, a larger bracket may be given a preferred configuration when actuated.

Due to its compressibility, a tissue thickness compensator can compensate for the thickness of the fabric trapped by each bracket. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 245 and 246, a fabric thickness compensator, for example a fabric thickness compensator 10020, can use a larger and / or smaller portion of the grip area 10039 of each bracket 10030 depending on the thickness and / or type of fabric located in the grip area of the bracket 10039. For example, if the bracket 10030, a thinner fabric T is captured, a tissue thickness compensator 10020 can occupy a larger part of the grip area of the bracket 10039 than in a situation where a thicker fabric T is caught inside the bracket 10030. Accordingly, if a thicker fabric T is caught in the bracket 10030, the compensator t The thickness of the fabric 10020 may occupy a smaller portion of the grip area of the bracket 10039 than in a situation where a thinner fabric T is trapped inside the bracket 10030. Thus, a tissue thickness compensator can compensate for thinner and / or thicker fabric and allow compressive pressure to be applied to the fabric, independently or at least substantially independently of the thickness of the tissue captured by the brackets. In addition to the foregoing, a tissue thickness compensator 10020 can compensate for the difference in types or compression ratios of tissues captured by various brackets 10030. Turning now to FIG. 246, tissue thickness compensator 10020 can apply compressive force to vascular tissue T, which may include vessels V, and, as a result, limit bleeding through more compressible vessels V, while still applying the required compression pressure to surrounding tissue T. In various circumstances, in addition to the foregoing, a fabric thickness compensator 10020 can also compensate for conditions arising from improperly formed brackets. As shown in FIG. 247, the improper formation of various staples 10030 can lead to the formation of more extensive gripping areas 10039 in such staples. Due to the elasticity of the fabric thickness compensator 10020, as shown in FIG. 248, a tissue thickness compensator 10020 located within improperly formed brackets 10030 can still exert sufficient compressive pressure on fabric T, although gripping areas 10039 formed by such improperly formed brackets 10030 can be enlarged. In various situations, the tissue thickness compensator 10020 placed between adjacent brackets 10030 can be displaced relative to the fabric T by correctly formed brackets 10030 surrounding the malformed bracket 10030, and as a result, apply compressive pressure to the fabric surrounding and / or trapped inside the incorrectly formed bracket 10030. In various situations, a tissue thickness compensator can compensate for a difference in tissue density, which may be due, for example, calcification, fibrous zones and / or tissue, a wound has been subjected to cross-linking or processing.

A fixed, or unchanged, fabric gap can be formed between the carrier part and the abutment element, as a result of which the brackets can be deformed to a predetermined height regardless of the thickness of the fabric captured by the brackets. When using a tissue thickness compensator in such embodiments, the tissue thickness compensator can adapt to the tissue trapped between the abutment member and the supporting portion of the cartridge with brackets, and due to its elasticity, the tissue thickness compensator can exert additional compressive pressure on the fabric. Turning now to FIG. 252-257, the bracket 10030 is formed to a predetermined height H. With reference to FIG. 252, a tissue thickness compensator was not used, and fabric T occupies the entire area 10039 captured by the bracket. In FIG. 259, a bracket 10030 captures a portion of a tissue thickness compensator 10020, fabric T is compressed, and at least a portion of a bracket region of a bracket 10039 is occupied. In FIG. 254, the thin tissue T is captured by the bracket 10030 T. In this example, the compressed tissue T has a height of approximately 2 / 9H, and the compressed tissue thickness compensator 10020 has a height of, for example, approximately 7 / 9H. As shown in FIG. 255, a fabric T having an intermediate thickness is gripped by a bracket 10030. In this example, the compressed fabric T has a height of approximately 4 / 9H, and the compressed tissue thickness compensator 10020 has a height of, for example, approximately 5 / 9H. As shown in FIG. 256, a fabric T having an intermediate thickness is gripped by a bracket 10030. In this example, the compressed fabric T has a height of approximately 2 / 3H, and the compressed tissue thickness compensator 10020 has a height of, for example, approximately 1 / 3H. In FIG. 255, the thick fabric T is captured by the bracket 10030 T. In this example, the compressed fabric T has a height of approximately 8 / 9H, and the compressed tissue thickness compensator 10020 has a height of, for example, approximately 1 / 9H. In various situations, the tissue thickness compensator may have a compressed height of, for example, about 10% of the bracket grip height, about 20% of the bracket grip height, about 30% of the bracket grip height, about 40% of the bracket grip height, about 50% of the grip height brackets, about 60% of the bracket grip height, about 70% of the bracket grip height, about 80% of the bracket grip height and / or about 90% of the bracket grip height.

The brackets 10030 in an unformed state may have any suitable height. The brackets 10030 in an unformed state may have a height of from about 2 mm to about 4.8 mm. For example, brackets 10030 may have an unformed height of approximately 2.0 mm, approximately 2.5 mm, approximately 3.0 mm, approximately 3.4 mm, approximately 3.5 mm, approximately 3.8 mm, approximately 4.0 mm, approximately 4.1 mm and / or approximately 4.8 mm. The height H, which the brackets may acquire after deformation, may be due to the distance between the surface of the panel 10011 of the supporting part 10010 and the opposite stop element. The distance between the surface of the panel 10011 and the surface for contact with the fabric of the abutment member may be approximately 2.5 mm (0.097 inches). The height H can also be determined by the depth of the forming recesses made in the thrust element. The depth of the forming recesses can be measured, for example, from the surface for contact with the fabric. As described in more detail below, the cartridge with brackets 10000 may further comprise brackets ejectors capable of lifting the brackets 10030 to the stop element and lifting, or “squeezing out”, the brackets above the surface of the panel 10011. In such cases, the height H that the brackets 10030 acquire when forming, can also be determined by the distance that the brackets 10030 are pulled out relative to the surface of the panel 10030. For example, the brackets 10030 can be pulled out, for example, approximately 0.71 mm (0.028 in), resulting in brackets 10030, for example, form with a height of 4.80 mm (0.189 in). The height of the brackets 10030 after formation may be approximately 0.8 mm, approximately 1.0 mm, approximately 1.5 mm, approximately 1.8 mm, approximately 2.0 mm and / or approximately 2.25 mm. The height of the brackets after formation may be, for example, from about 2.25 mm to about 3.0 mm. In addition to the foregoing, the height of the grip area of the bracket can be determined by the height of the bracket in the formed state and the thickness or diameter of the wire from which the bracket is made. The height of the grip area 10039 of the bracket 10030 can be defined as the height of the bracket in the formed state H minus two wire diameters. The diameter of the bracket wire may be, for example, approximately 0.23 mm (0.0089 in). The diameter of the bracket wire may be, for example, from about 0.18 mm (0.0069 in) to about 0.30 mm (0.0119 in). For example, the height H of the bracket 10030 in the formed state may be approximately 4.8 mm (0.189 inches), and the diameter of the wire for the bracket may be approximately 0.23 mm (0.0089 inches), resulting in a height of the grip area of the bracket, for example , approximately 4.34 mm (0.171 in.).

In addition to the above, the tissue thickness compensator may have a height in an uncompressed or unstated condition and may be configured to deform to one of a plurality of heights in a compressed state. The height of the fabric thickness compensator when uncompressed may be, for example, about 3.18 mm (0.125 in). The height of the tissue thickness compensator when uncompressed may be, for example, approximately 2.0 mm (0.080 inches). The height of the tissue thickness compensator in an uncompressed or unstated condition may exceed the height of the inactive brackets. The height of the uncompressed, or undetermined, tissue thickness compensator can be, for example, about 10% more, about 20% more, about 30% more, about 40% more, about 50% more, about 60% more, about 70% more, about 80% more, about 90% more and / or about 100% more than the height of the brackets in the inactive state. The height of the uncompressed, or undetermined, tissue thickness compensator may, for example, be no more than about 100% greater than the height of the brackets in an inactive state. The height of the uncompressed, or undetermined, tissue thickness compensator may be, for example, more than 100% greater than the height of the brackets in an inactive state. The tissue thickness compensator may have an uncompressed height equal to the height of the brackets in an inactive state. The tissue thickness compensator may have a height in an uncompressed state that is less than the height of the brackets in an inactive state. The height of the uncompressed, or undetermined, tissue thickness compensator can be about 10% less, about 20% less, about 30% less, about 40% less, about 50% less, about 60% less, about 70 % less, about 80% less and / or about 90% less than the height of the brackets in the inactive state. The compressible second part may have a height in an uncompressed state that exceeds the height of the stitched fabric T in an uncompressed state. The tissue thickness compensator may have a height in the uncompressed state, which is equal to the height of the stitched fabric T in the uncompressed state. The tissue thickness compensator may have an uncompressed height that is less than the height of the stitched fabric T in the uncompressed state.

As described above, a tissue thickness compensator can be clamped inside a plurality of formed brackets, regardless of whether thin or thick fabric is gripped into the brackets. For example, brackets within one line or a row of brackets can be deformed so that the height of the grip area of each bracket is, for example, approximately 2.0 mm, with fabric T and fabric thickness compensator being compressed to this height. For example, in some situations, the height of the fabric T in a compressed state can be approximately 1.75 mm in the grip area of the bracket, while the height of the fabric thickness compensator in the compressed state can be approximately 0.25 mm in the grip area of the bracket, resulting in a total height of the grip area brackets will be approximately 2.0 mm. For example, in some situations, the height of the fabric T in the compressed state can be approximately 1.50 mm in the grip area of the bracket, while the height of the fabric thickness compensator in the compressed state can be approximately 0.50 mm in the grip area of the bracket, resulting in a total height of the grip area brackets will be approximately 2.0 mm. For example, in some situations, the compressed tissue height T can be approximately 1.25 mm in the grip area of the bracket, while the compressed tissue thickness compensator height can be approximately 0.75 mm in the grip area of the bracket, resulting in a total height of the grip area brackets will be approximately 2.0 mm. For example, in some situations, the height of the fabric T in a compressed state can be approximately 1.0 mm in the grip area of the bracket, while the height of the fabric thickness compensator in a compressed state can be approximately 1.0 mm in the grip area of the bracket, resulting in a total height of the grip area brackets will be approximately 2.0 mm. For example, in some situations, the compressed tissue height T can be approximately 0.75 mm in the grip area of the bracket, while the compressed tissue thickness compensator height can be approximately 1.25 mm in the grip area of the bracket, resulting in a total height of the grip area brackets will be approximately 2.0 mm. For example, in some situations, the height of the fabric T in the compressed state can be approximately 1.50 mm in the grip area of the bracket, while the height of the fabric thickness compensator in the compressed state can be approximately 0.50 mm in the grip area of the bracket, resulting in a total height of the grip area brackets will be approximately 2.0 mm. For example, in some situations, the height of the fabric T in a compressed state can be approximately 0.25 mm in the grip area of the bracket, while the height of the fabric thickness compensator in the compressed state can be approximately 1.75 mm in the grip area of the bracket, resulting in a total height of the grip area brackets will be approximately 2.0 mm.

In addition to the above, the height of the tissue thickness compensator in an uncompressed state may be less than the height of the brackets in the activated state. The height of the tissue thickness compensator in an uncompressed state may be equal to the height of the brackets in the activated state. Alternatively, the height of the tissue thickness compensator in an uncompressed state may be greater than the height of the brackets in the activated state. For example, the height of the fabric thickness compensator in an uncompressed state can be, for example, approximately 110% of the height of the formed bracket, approximately 120% of the height of the formed bracket, approximately 130% of the height of the formed bracket, approximately 140% of the height of the formed bracket, approximately 150% of the height of the formed bracket, approximately 160% of the height of the formed bracket, approximately 170% of the height of the formed bracket, approximately 180% of the height of the formed bracket, approximately 190% of the height of the formed bracket and / or izitelno 200% of the height formed brackets. The height of the fabric thickness compensator in an uncompressed state can more than double the height of the brackets in the activated state. The height of the tissue thickness compensator in a compressed state may be, for example, from about 85% to about 150% of the height of the formed bracket. As described above, the height of the tissue thickness compensator can vary from a thickness in an uncompressed state to a thickness in a compressed state. The thickness of the fabric thickness compensator in a compressed state can be, for example, approximately 10% of its thickness in an uncompressed state, approximately 20% of its thickness in an uncompressed state, approximately 30% of its thickness in an uncompressed state, approximately 40% of its thickness in an uncompressed state, approximately 50 % of its thickness in an uncompressed state, approximately 60% of its thickness in an uncompressed state, approximately 70% of its thickness in an uncompressed state, approximately 80% of its thickness in an uncompressed state and / or approximately 90% of its thickness in an uncompressed state standing. The thickness of the tissue thickness compensator in an uncompressed state can, for example, be approximately doubled, approximately ten times, approximately fifty times and / or approximately one hundred times greater than its thickness in a compressed state. The thickness of the tissue thickness compensator in a compressed state can be, for example, from about 60% to about 99% of its thickness in an uncompressed state. The thickness of the fabric thickness compensator in an uncompressed state may be at least 50% greater than its thickness in a compressed state. The thickness of the fabric thickness compensator in an uncompressed state can be one hundred times greater than its thickness in a compressed state. The compressible second part may be elastic or at least partially elastic and may bias the fabric T against the deformed legs of the brackets. For example, the compressible second part can elastically expand between the fabric T and the base of the bracket, pushing the fabric T close to the legs of the bracket. As described in more detail below, a tissue thickness compensator may be located between the tissue T and the deformed brace legs. In various situations, as a result of the foregoing, a tissue thickness compensator can be configured to fill any gaps within the grip area of the bracket.

Any tissue thickness compensators described herein may contain materials that are characterized by one or more of the following properties: biocompatibility, bioabsorbability, bioabsorbability, biostability, biodegradability, compressibility, fluid absorption, swelling, self-expansion, biological activity, and drug content which is, for example, a pharmaceutical active ingredient, an anti-adhesive agent, a hemostatic agent, an antibacterial agent, antimicrobial agent, antiviral agent, nutrient, adhesive, porous agent, hydrophilic and / or hydrophobic agent. In all cases, any surgical stapler or stapler containing a stop member and a cartridge with staples or staple members may also include a tissue thickness compensator associated with the stop member and / or staple cartridge. Such a tissue thickness compensator may be any of the tissue thickness compensators described herein, and may or, in addition, may contain at least one hemostatic agent such as fibrin or thrombin, an antibacterial agent such as doxycycline, and a drug such as matrix metalloproteinases (MMP).

The tissue thickness compensator may contain synthetic and / or non-synthetic materials. The tissue thickness compensator may comprise a polymer composition comprising one or more synthetic polymers and / or one or more non-synthetic polymers. The synthetic polymer may comprise a synthetic absorbable polymer and / or a synthetic non-absorbable polymer. The polymer composition may contain, for example, a biocompatible foam. The biocompatible foam may comprise, for example, porous foam with open cells and / or closed cells. The biocompatible foam may have a uniform pore structure or gradient pore structure (i.e., small pores gradually increase in size to large pores in one direction across the thickness of the material). The polymer composition may contain one or more of a porous framework, a porous matrix, a gel matrix, a hydrogel matrix, a solution matrix, a fibrous matrix, a tubular matrix, a composite matrix, a membrane matrix, a biostable polymer, a biodegradable polymer, and combinations thereof. For example, a tissue thickness compensator may include foam reinforced with a fiber matrix, or may contain foam having an additional hydrogel layer that expands in the presence of body fluids to further compress tissue. The tissue thickness compensator may also include a coating on the material and / or a second or third layer expanding in the presence of body fluids to further provide tissue compression. Such a layer may be a hydrogel, for example, of synthetic and / or natural origin, which may be biologically stable and / or biodegradable. The tissue thickness compensator may comprise a microgel or a nanogel. The hydrogel may contain carbohydrate-derived microgels and / or nano-gels. The tissue thickness compensator can be reinforced, for example, with fibrous nonwoven fabric or mesh-type fibrous elements, which can provide additional flexibility, rigidity and / or strength. The tissue thickness compensator has a porous structure having a gradient structure, for example, small pores on one surface and larger pores on another surface. Such a structure may be more optimal for tissue ingrowth or hemostatic properties. Additionally, the gradient can be combined with a variable bioabsorption profile. A short-term resorption profile may be preferable to stop bleeding, while a long-term resorption profile can provide better healing of the tissue without separation of fluids.

Examples of non-synthetic materials include, but are not limited to, lyophilized polysaccharides, glycoproteins, bovine pericardium, collagen, gelatin, fibrin, fibrinogen, elastin, proteoglycan, keratin, albumin, hydroxyethyl cellulose, cellulose, oxidized cellulose, oxidized cellulose cellulose cellulose cellulose cellulose cellulose cellulose cellulose cellulose cellulose cellulose cellulose cellulose cellulose cellulose cellulose cellulose cellulose cellulose cellulose cellulose cellulose cellulose cellulose cellulose cellulose cellulose cellulose cellulosyl chitin, chitosan, casein, alginate, and combinations thereof.

Examples of synthetic absorbent materials are, but are not limited to, polylactic acid (PLA), poly-L-lactic acid (PLLA), polycaprolactone (PCL), polyglycolic acid (PGA), polytrimethylene carbonate (TMC), polyethylene terephthalate (PET), polyhydroxyalkanoate (PHA), copolymer glycolide and ε-caprolactone (PGCL), copolymer of glycolide and trimethylene carbonate, polyglycerol sebacinate (PGS), polydioxanone (PDS), polyesters, polyorthoesters, polyoxy ethers, polyesters containing esters, polycarbonates, polyamide polyesters, diethylamides, tyrosine-based polyarylates, polyamines, tyrosine-based polyiminocarbonates, tyrosine-based polycarbonates, poly-D, L-lactiduretan, polyhydroxybutyrate, poly-B-hydroxybutyrate, poly-ε-caprolactone, polyethylene glycol (PEG), polyamino acids -carboxylate of (phenoxy) phosphazene, pseudopolyamino acids, absorbable polyurethanes, polyphosphazine, polyphosphazenes, polyalkylene oxides, polyacrylamides, polyhydroxyethyl methyl acrylate, polyvinyl pyrrolidone, polyvinyl alcohols, polycaprolactone, polyacrylic acid, olipropilen, aliphatic polyesters, glycerols, copolymers of esters and ethers, polialkilenoksalaty, polyamides, poliiminokarbonaty, polialkilenoksalaty and combinations thereof. The polyester can be selected from the group consisting of polylactides, polyglycolides, trimethylene carbonates, polydioxanones, polycaprolactones, polybutyl ethers, and combinations thereof.

A synthetic absorbable polymer may contain, for example, one or more of a 90/10 poly (glycolide-L-lactide) copolymer marketed by Ethicon, Inc. under the trade name VICRYL (polyglactic 910), a polyglycolide marketed by American Cyanamid Co. under the trade name DEXON, a polydioxanone marketed by Ethicon, Inc. under the trade name PDS, a statistical block copolymer of poly (glycolide trimethylene carbonate) marketed by American Cyanamid Co. under the trade name MAXON, a copolymer of 75/25 poly (glycolide-ε-caprolactone-polyglexaprolactone 25), marketed by Ethicon under the trade name MONOCRYL.

Examples of synthetic non-absorbable polymers include, but are not limited to, polyurethane foam, polypropylene (PP), polyethylene (PE), polycarbonate, polyamides such as nylon, polyvinyl chloride (PVC), polymethyl methacrylate (PMMA), polystyrene (PS), polyester, polyetheretherketone (PEEK), polythene (PTFE), polytrifluorochloroethylene (PTFCE), polyvinyl fluoride (PVF), fluorinated ethylene propylene (FEP), polyacetal, polysulfone, silicones and combinations thereof. Synthetic non-absorbable polymers can include, without limitation, foam elastomers and porous elastomers, for example, silicone, polyisoprene and rubber. Synthetic polymers may contain porous polytetrafluoroethylene (ePTFE) marketed by W.L. Gore. & Associates, Inc. under the trade name GORE-TEX Soft Tissue Patch; and urethane ester polyester foam copolymer marketed by Polyganics under the trade name NASOPORE.

The polymer composition may, for example, contain from about 50% to about 90% by weight. the polymer composition PLLA and from about 50% to about 10% weight. PCL polymer composition. The polymer composition may contain, for example, approximately 70% by weight. PLLA and approximately 30% weight. PCL. The polymer composition may, for example, contain from about 55% to about 85% by weight. the polymer composition PGA and from 15% to 45% weight. PCL polymer composition. The polymer composition may contain, for example, approximately 65% by weight. PGA and approximately 35% weight. PCL. The polymer composition may, for example, contain from about 90% to about 95% weight. PGA polymer composition and from about 5% to about 10% weight. polymer composition PLA.

A synthetic absorbable polymer may comprise a bioabsorbable biocompatible elastomeric copolymer. Suitable bioresorbable, biocompatible elastomeric copolymers include, without limitation, copolymers of ε-caprolactone and glycolide (preferably with a molar ratio of ε-caprolactone to glycolide from about 30:70 to about 70:30, preferably from 35:65 to about 65:35 , and, more preferably, from 45:55 to 35:65); elastomeric copolymers of ε-caprolactone and lactide, including L-lactide, D-lactide or mixtures thereof, or lactic acid copolymers (preferably with a molar ratio of ε-caprolactone and lactide from about 35:65 to about 65:35 and more preferably from 45:55 to 30:70), elastomeric copolymers of p-dioxanone (1,4-dioxan-2-one) and lactide, including L-lactide, D-lactide and lactic acid (preferably with a molar ratio of p-dioxanone and lactide from approximately 40:60 to approximately 60:40); elastomeric copolymers of ε-caprolactone and p-dioxanone (preferably with a molar ratio of ε-caprolactone and p-dioxanone of from about 30:70 to about 70:30); elastomeric copolymers of p-dioxanone and trimethylene carbonate (preferably with a molar ratio of p-dioxanone and trimethylene carbonate from about 30:70 to about 70:30); elastomeric copolymers of trimethylene carbonate and glycolide (preferably with a molar ratio of trimethylene carbonate and glycolide from about 30:70 to about 70:30); an elastomeric copolymer of trimethylene carbonate and lactide, including L-lactide, D-lactide, mixtures thereof or lactic acid copolymers (preferably with a molar ratio of trimethylene carbonate and lactide from about 30:70 to about 70:30) and mixtures thereof. The elastomeric copolymer is a copolymer of glycolide and ε-caprolactone. In another example, the elastomeric copolymer is a copolymer of lactide and ε-caprolactone.

The descriptions given in US Patent No. 5,468,253 under the name "ELASTOMERIC MEDICAL DEVICE", issued November 21, 1995, and in US Patent No. 6,325,810 under the name "POROUS SUPPORT ELEMENT FOR STAPERING MACHINE", issued on December 4, 2001. the entirety of this document by reference.

The tissue thickness compensator may comprise an emulsifier. Examples of emulsifiers can be, but not limited to, water-soluble polymers such as polyvinyl alcohol (PVA), polyvinylpyrrolidone (PVP), polyethylene glycol (PEG), polypropylene glycol (PPG), PLURONICS, TWEEN, polysaccharides and combinations thereof.

The tissue thickness compensator may contain a surfactant.

Examples of surfactants can be, but are not limited to, polyacrylic acid, metallose, methyl cellulose, ethyl cellulose, propyl cellulose, hydroxyethyl cellulose, carboxymethyl cellulose, polyoxyethylene cetyl ether, polyoxyethylene lauryl ether, polyoxyethylene ether, polyethylene ethylene ether, polyethylene ethylene ether, polyethylene ethylene ether polyoxyethylene nonylphenyl ether, dialkylphenoxypolyethyleneoxyethanol and poloxamers.

The polymer composition may contain a pharmaceutically active agent. The polymer composition may release a therapeutically effective amount of a pharmaceutically active agent. The pharmaceutically active agent may be released as the polymer composition is dissolved / absorbed. The pharmaceutically active agent may be released into a liquid, for example, into the blood, passing through or on top of the polymer composition. Examples of pharmaceutically active agents are, but are not limited to, hemostatic agents and drugs, for example fibrin, thrombin and oxidized regenerated cellulose (ORC); anti-inflammatory drugs, for example, diclofenac, aspirin, naproxen, sulindac and hydrocortisone; antibiotics and antimicrobial drugs or agents, for example triclosan, silver ions, ampicillin, gentamicin, polymyxin B, chloramphenicol; and anti-cancer agents, for example cisplatin, mitomycin, adriamycin.

The polymer composition may contain hemostatic material. The tissue thickness compensator may contain hemostatic materials containing polylactic acid, polyglycolic acid, polyhydroxybutyrate, polycaprolactone, polydioxanone, polyalkylene oxides, ether-ether, collagen, gelatin, thrombin, fibrin, fibrinogen, fibronectin, elastin, albumin, hemin, albumin, heminine, albumin, heminine, albumin, hemin , hyaluronic acid, chondroitin sulfate, hydroxyethyl starch, hydroxyethyl cellulose, cellulose, oxidized cellulose, hydroxypropyl cellulose, carboxyethyl cellulose, carboxymethyl cellulose, chi tin, chitosan, agarose, maltose, maltodextrin, alginate, coagulation factors, methacrylate, polyurethanes, cyanoacrylates, platelet activation factors, vasoconstrictors, aluminum, calcium, arginyl glycyl asparaginic acid, proteins, protamine sulfate, ferric acid, ferric acid, basic acid iron salt, iron chloride, zinc, zinc chloride, aluminum chloride, aluminum sulfates, aluminum acetates, permanganates, tannins, bone wax, polyethylene glycols, fucans and combinations thereof. The tissue thickness compensator may have hemostatic properties.

The polymer composition of the tissue thickness compensator may be characterized, for example, by a coefficient of porosity, pore size and / or hardness. The porosity coefficient of the polymer composition may be from about 30% vol. up to about 99% vol. The porosity coefficient of the polymer composition may be from about 60% vol. up to about 98% vol. The porosity coefficient of the polymer composition may be from about 85% vol. up to approximately 97% vol. The polymer composition may contain, for example, approximately 70% by weight. PLLA and approximately 30% weight. PCL, and its porosity coefficient may be approximately 90% vol. For example, because of this, the polymer composition will contain about 10% vol. copolymer. The polymer composition may contain, for example, approximately 65% by weight. PGA and approximately 35% weight. PCL, and its porosity coefficient may be from about 93% vol. up to about 95% vol. The porosity of the polymer composition may be more than 85% vol. The pore size of the polymer composition can be, for example, from about 5 micrometers to about 2000 micrometers. The pore size of the polymer composition may, for example, be from about 10 micrometers to about 100 micrometers. For example, the polymer composition, for example, may contain a copolymer of PGA and PCL. The pore size of the polymer composition may, for example, be from about 100 micrometers to about 1000 micrometers. For example, the polymer composition, for example, may contain a copolymer of PLLA and PCL.

In accordance with some aspects, the hardness of the polymer composition can be expressed as Shore hardness, which is defined as the long-term indentation resistance of a material and is measured by a durometer, for example, a Shore durometer. To measure the value of the durometer for a particular material, pressure is applied to it using the pressure tip of the durometer in accordance with ASTM D2240-00, entitled "Standard Method for Analyzing Rubber Hardness on a Durometer," which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. The pressing tip of the durometer can act on the material for a sufficient time, for example 15 seconds, after which readings are taken from the corresponding scale. Depending on the type of scale used, a value of 0 can be obtained if the pressing tip has completely penetrated into the material, and a value of 100 can be obtained if the penetration of the tip into the material is not observed. This value is dimensionless. The value of the durometer can be determined on any suitable scale, for example, on scales of type A and / or type OO in accordance with ASTM D2240-00 D2240-00. The polymer composition of the tissue thickness compensator may have a Shore A hardness value of, for example, from about 4 A to about 16 A, which corresponds to values from about 45 OO to about 65 OO on a Shore OO scale. For example, the polymer composition may contain, for example, a PLLA / PCL copolymer or a PGA / PCL copolymer. The polymer composition of the fabric thickness compensator can have a Shore A hardness of less than 15 A. The polymer composition of the fabric thickness compensator can have a Shore A hardness of less than 10 A. The polymer composition of the fabric thickness compensator can have a Shore A hardness of less than 5 A. Polymer material may have a Shore OO composition value, for example, from about 35 OO to about 75 OO.

The polymer composition may have at least two of the above properties. The polymer composition may have at least three of the above properties. The polymer composition may have porosity, for example, from 85% to 97% vol., Pore size from 5 micrometers to 2000 micrometers, shore hardness A from 4 A to 16 A, shore hardness OO from 45 OO to 65 OO. The polymer composition may contain, for example, 70% by weight. the polymer composition PLLA and 30% weight. PCL polymer composition, have a porosity of 90% by volume, pore size from 100 micrometers to 1000 micrometers, shore hardness A from 4 A to 16 A and shore hardness OO from 45 OO to 65 OO. The polymer composition may contain, for example, 65% by weight. PGA polymer composition and 35% weight. PCL polymer composition, having a porosity of 93% to 95% by volume, pore size of 10 micrometers to 100 micrometers, Shore A hardness of 4 A to 16 A and Shore OO hardness of 45 OO to 65 OO.

Any tissue thickness compensators that have been described herein may contain expandable material. As discussed above, the tissue thickness compensator may contain compressed material that expands, for example, after stopping compression or installation. In an additional or alternative embodiment, any such tissue thickness compensators may contain a self-expanding material that can be formed in situ. For example, a tissue thickness compensator may comprise at least one precursor selected to spontaneously crosslink after reacting with at least one of the other precursor or other precursors, water and / or body fluids. As represented in FIG. 534, the first precursor may react with one or more precursors to form an expandable and / or swellable tissue thickness compensator. The tissue thickness compensator may comprise a liquid-swellable composition, such as a water-swellable composition and / or a water-containing gel.

As represented in FIG. 518A and B, for example, a tissue thickness compensator 70,000, which is any of the tissue thickness compensators described herein, may include at least one hydrogel precursor 70010 selected to form an in situ and / or in vivo hydrogel to expand the tissue thickness compensator 70,000 . FIG. 518A illustrates such a fabric thickness compensator 70,000, prior to expansion comprising a capsule containing a first hydrogel precursor 70010A and a second hydrogel precursor 70010B. As shown in FIG. 518A, the first hydrogel precursor 70010A and the second hydrogel precursor 70010B can be physically separated from each other in the same capsule. Alternatively, the first capsule may contain a first hydrogel precursor 70010A, and the second capsule may contain a second hydrogel precursor 70010B. In FIG. 518B shows the expansion of a tissue thickness compensator of 70,000 when hydrogel is formed in situ and / or in vivo. As represented in FIG. 518B, the capsule may be broken, and the first hydrogel precursor 70010A may react with the second hydrogel precursor 70010B to form hydrogel 70020. As shown, the hydrogel may contain expandable material. It can expand, for example, up to 72 hours.

Any of the tissue thickness compensators described herein, including those discussed in the previous paragraph, may contain biodegradable foam having capsules containing dry particles or hydrogel granules. Capsules in the foam may form upon contact of the aqueous hydrogel precursor solution with an organic solution of a biocompatible material during the formation of the foam. As represented in FIG. 535, an aqueous solution and an organic solution can form a micelle. The aqueous solution and the organic solution can be dried to encapsulate dry hydrogel particles or granules within the foam. For example, a hydrogel precursor, such as a hydrophilic polymer, can be dissolved in water to form a micelle dispersion. The aqueous solution may come in contact with an organic solution of dioxane containing polyglycolic acid and polycaprolactone. Aqueous and organic solutions can be lyophilized to form a biodegradable foam in which dry particles or hydrogel granules are dispersed. It is believed that micelles can form capsules containing dry particles or hydrogel granules dispersed within the foam. Subsequently, these capsules can be broken, after which the dry particles or granules of the hydrogel can react with a liquid, such as body fluid, and expand.

In general, any tissue thickness compensator described herein can be formed to expand upon contact with an activator, such as, for example, a liquid. As represented in FIG. 519, for example, a tissue thickness compensator 70050, which is any of the tissue thickness compensators described herein, may contain a swellable material, such as a hydrogel, that expands upon contact with a liquid 70055, such as, for example, body fluids, saline, water and / or activator. Examples of body fluids can be unlimitedly blood, plasma, peritoneal fluid, cerebrospinal fluid, urine, lymph, synovial fluid, vitreous fluid, saliva, gastrointestinal lumen contents, bile and / or gas (e.g., CO ₂ ). In some cases, the fabric thickness compensator 70050 may expand when the fabric thickness compensator 70050 absorbs liquid. In other cases, the fabric thickness compensator 70050 may contain an uncrosslinked hydrogel that expands upon contact with an activator 70055 containing a crosslinking agent to form the crosslinked hydrogel. In all cases, a tissue thickness compensator can be formed to expand or swell after contact for up to 72 hours, including, for example, from 24 to 72 hours, up to 24 hours, up to 48 hours and up to 72 hours, to ensure continuous application increasing pressure and / or compression of the tissue. As represented in FIG. 519, in this regard, the initial thickness of the fabric thickness compensator 70050 is less than the thickness in the expanded state after the contact of the fabric thickness compensator 70050 with liquid 70055.

As represented in FIG. 516 and 517, the cartridge with brackets 70100 may comprise a tissue thickness compensator 70105, which is any of the tissue thickness compensators described herein, and a plurality of brackets 70110, each of which comprises legs of brackets 70112. As shown in FIG. 516, the tissue thickness compensator 70105 may have an initial thickness, or height in a compressed state, which is less than the height of the brackets 70110 in the activated state. The tissue thickness compensator 70100 can be configured to expand in situ and / or in vivo when in contact with a liquid 70102, such as, for example, body fluids, saline and / or activator, to push tissue T to the legs 70112 of brackets 70110. As shown in FIG. 517, the tissue thickness compensator 70100 can expand and / or swell when in contact with the liquid 70102. The tissue thickness compensator 70105 can compensate for the thickness T captured by each bracket 70110. As shown in FIG. 517, the tissue thickness compensator 70105 may have a thickness in the expanded state, or a height in the uncompressed state, which is less than the height of the brackets 70110 in the activated state.

Any of the tissue thickness compensators described or claimed herein may have an initial thickness and an expanded thickness. In all cases, the initial thickness of the tissue thickness compensator can be approximately 0.001% of its thickness in the expanded state, approximately 0.01% of its thickness in the expanded state, approximately 0.1% of its thickness in the expanded state, approximately 1% of its thickness in the expanded state, approximately 10% of its thickness in the expanded state, approximately 20% of its thickness in the expanded state, approximately 30% of its thickness in the expanded state, approximately 40% of its thickness in the expanded state, p iblizitelno 50% of its thickness in the expanded condition, approximately 60% of its thickness in the expanded condition, approximately 70% of its thickness in the expanded condition, approximately 80% of its thickness in an expanded state or approximately 90% of its thickness in an expanded state. Alternatively, in all cases, the thickness of the tissue thickness compensator in the expanded state may be approximately two times, approximately five times, approximately ten times, approximately fifty times, approximately one hundred times, approximately two hundred times, approximately three hundred times, about four hundred times, about five hundred times, about six hundred times, about seven hundred times, about eight hundred times, about nine hundred times, or about a thousand times its outcome thickness. Alternatively, in all cases, the initial thickness of the tissue thickness compensator can be up to 1% of its thickness in the expanded state, up to 5% of its thickness in the expanded state, up to 10% of its thickness in the expanded state, or up to 50% of its thickness in the expanded state. Alternatively, in all cases, the thickness of the tissue thickness compensator in the expanded state can be at least 50% more than its original thickness, at least 100% more than its original thickness, at least 300% more than its original thickness, or at least 500% more than its original thickness. As a result of the above, the tissue thickness compensator can be configured to fill any gaps within the grip area of the bracket.

Any of the tissue thickness compensators described herein may contain a hydrogel. The hydrogel may be homopolymer hydrogels, copolymer hydrogels, multipolymer hydrogels, interpenetrating polymer hydrogels, or combinations thereof. The hydrogel may be microgels, nanogels, and combinations thereof. The hydrogel may generally be a hydrophilic polymer network capable of absorbing and / or retaining liquids. The hydrogel may be a non-crosslinked hydrogel, a crosslinked hydrogel, or combinations thereof. A hydrogel may have chemical bonds, physical bonds, hydrophobic segments and / or water-insoluble segments. The hydrogel can be chemically crosslinked by polymerization, crosslinking of low molecular weight compounds and / or crosslinking of the polymers with each other. The hydrogel can be physically crosslinked using ionic bonds, hydrophobic bonds, hydrogen bonds, stereo complex formation and / or supramolecular chemistry. The hydrogel may be substantially insoluble due to bonds, hydrophobic segments and / or water insoluble segments, but be expandable and / or swellable due to absorption and / or retention of liquids. Moreover, a hydrogel precursor can be used that crosslinks with endogenous substances and / or tissues.

In any of the hydrogel containing tissue thickness compensators, the hydrogel may be an environmental sensitive hydrogel (ESH). ESH may be materials that have the ability to swell in a liquid, which depends on environmental conditions. Environmental conditions can unlimitedly represent physical conditions, biological conditions and / or chemical conditions in the surgical field. For example, a hydrogel may swell or contract in response to temperature, pH, electric fields, ion concentration, enzymatic and / or chemical reactions, electrical and / or magnetic stimuli, or other physiological and environmental variables. ESH may contain multifunctional acrylates, hydroxyethyl methacrylate (HEMA), elastomeric acrylates, or related monomers.

Any of a tissue thickness compensator containing a hydrogel (including any tissue thickness compensator described or claimed herein containing a hydrogel or modified to contain a hydrogel) may contain at least one of the non-synthetic materials and synthetic materials described above. The hydrogel may be a synthetic hydrogel and / or non-synthetic hydrogel. As an addition, or instead, a tissue thickness compensator may comprise multiple layers. The plurality of layers may be porous layers and / or non-porous layers. For example, a tissue thickness compensator may include a non-porous layer and a porous layer. In another example, the tissue thickness compensator may comprise a porous layer between the first non-porous layer and the second non-porous layer. In another example, the tissue thickness compensator may comprise a non-porous layer between the first porous layer and the second porous layer. Non-porous layers and porous layers can be arranged in any order relative to the surfaces of the cartridge with brackets and / or thrust element.

Examples of the non-synthetic materials mentioned in the previous paragraph include, but are not limited to, albumin, alginate, carbohydrate, casein, cellulose, chitin, chitosan, collagen, blood, dextran, elastin, fibrin, fibrinogen, gelatin, heparin, hyaluronic acid, keratin, protein, serum blood and starch. Cellulose may be hydroxyethyl cellulose, oxidized cellulose, oxidized regenerated cellulose (ORC), hydroxypropyl cellulose, carboxyethyl cellulose, carboxymethyl cellulose, and combinations thereof. Collagen may be bovine pericardium. The carbohydrate may be a polysaccharide, such as a lyophilized polysaccharide. The protein may be a glycoprotein, proteoglycan, or combinations thereof.

Similarly, examples of the previously mentioned synthetic materials are unlimitedly polylactic acid, polyglycolic acid, polyhydroxybutyrate, polyphosphazine, polyesters, polyethylene glycols, polyethylene oxide, a copolymer of polyethylene oxide and polypropylene oxide, a copolymer of polyethylene oxide, polyalkylene hydroxy-vinyl polyethylene, poly (polyacrylated), polyacrylic acid, polyacetate, polypropylene, aliphatic polyesters, glycerides polyamino acids, copolymers of ethers and esters, polyalkylene oxalates, polyamides, polyiminocarbonates, polyoxy esters, polyorthoesters, polyphosphazenes, and combinations thereof. These non-synthetic materials, for example, synthetic hyaluronic acid, can be obtained synthetically, for example, using conventional methods.

In any of the tissue thickness compensators containing the hydrogel (including any tissue thickness compensator described or claimed herein containing the hydrogel or modified to contain the hydrogel), the hydrogel can be obtained from one or more hydrogel precursors. Such precursors may be a monomer and / or macromer. The hydrogel precursor may comprise an electrophilic functional group and / or a nucleophilic electrophilic functional group. In general, electrophiles can react with nucleophiles to form a bond. As used herein, the term “functional group” refers to electrophilic or nucleophilic groups capable of reacting with each other to form a bond. Examples of electrophilic functional groups indefinitely are N-hydroxy succinimides (NHS), sulfosuccinimidyl, carbonyldiimidazole, sulfonyl chloride, aryl halide, sulfosuktsinimidilefiry, N-gidroksisuktsinimidilefiry, suktsinimidilefiry such as succinimidyl succinate and / or succinimidyl propionate, isocyanates, thiocyanates, carbodiimides, benzotriazolkarbonaty, epoxides, aldehydes, maleimides, imidoesters, their combinations, etc. In one specific example, the electrophilic functional group may be a succinimidyl ether. Examples of nucleophilic functional groups are, but not limited to, —NH ₂ , —SH, —OH, —PH _2, and —CO — NH — NH ₂ .

A hydrogel may be formed from one precursor or several precursors. For example, a hydrogel may be formed from a first precursor and a second precursor. The first hydrogel precursor and the second hydrogel precursor, upon contact, can form the hydrogel in situ and / or in vivo. In general, the hydrogel precursor may be a polymer, a functional group, a macromolecule, a small molecule, and / or a crosslinking agent, which may be involved in the hydrogel formation reaction. The precursor may be a homogeneous solution, a heterogeneous solution or a multiphase solution in a suitable solvent, such as, for example, water or a buffer. The buffer may have a pH from about 8 to about 12, for example, from about 8.2 to about 9. Examples of buffers are unlimited borate buffers. In some situations, the precursor (s) may be in the emulsion. Thus, the first precursor can react with the second precursor to form a hydrogel. For example, the first precursor may spontaneously crosslink upon contact with the second precursor, and / or the first set of electrophilic functional groups in the first precursor may react with the second set of nucleophilic functional groups in the second precursor. If the precursors are mixed in a medium that provides a reaction (for example, in terms of pH, temperature and / or solvent), the functional groups can react with each other to form covalent bonds. Precursors can be crosslinked when at least some of the precursors react with more than one other precursor.

The tissue thickness compensator may contain at least one monomer selected from the group consisting of potassium salt of 3-sulfopropyl acrylate (KSPA), sodium acrylate (NaA), N-tris-hydroxymethylmethylacrylamide (tris-acryl) and 2-acrylamide-2-methyl -1-propanesulfonic acid (AMPS). The tissue thickness compensator may comprise a copolymer containing two or more monomers selected from the group consisting of KSPA, NaA, Tris Acrylic and AMPS. The tissue thickness compensator may contain homopolymers derived from KSPA, NaA, Tris acrylic and AMPS. The tissue thickness compensator may contain copolymerizable hydrophilic modifying monomers. The hydrophilicity modifying monomers may be methyl methacrylate, butyl acrylate, cyclohexyl acrylate, styrene and styrene sulfonic acid.

The tissue thickness compensator may contain a crosslinking agent. The crosslinker may be a low molecular weight di- or polyvinyl crosslinking agent such as a diacrylate or dimethacrylate, ethylene glycol diacrylate or dimethacrylate, di-, tri- or tetraethylene glycol, allyl methacrylate, diacrylate or dimethacrylate, C ₂ -C ₈ -alkylene, divinyl ether, divinyl sulfone, di- - and trivinylbenzene, trimethylolpropane triacrylate or trimethacrylate, pentaerythritol tetraacrylate or tetramethacrylate, bisphenol diacrylate or dimethacrylate, methylene bisacrylamide or methylene bisacrylamide, ethylene bisacrylamide or bisme ethylene acrylamide triallilftalat or diallylphthalate. As a specific example, the crosslinking agent may be N, N'-methylenebisacrylamide (MBAA).

The tissue thickness compensator may contain at least one of hydrogels with acrylate and / or methacrylate functional groups, a biocompatible photoinitiator, alkyl cyanoacrylate, macromers substituted by isocyanate, macromers optionally containing amine functional groups, macromers substituted by succinimidyl ether, macromers, and optionally or sulfhydryl functional groups, macromers substituted by an epoxy group, macromers optionally containing amine functional groups, mixtures of proteins and / or polypeptides and aldehyde crosslinkers, genipin and water-soluble carbodiimides, anionic polysaccharides and polyvalent cations.

The tissue thickness compensator may contain unsaturated organic acid monomers, acrylic substituted alcohols and / or acrylamides. The tissue thickness compensator may contain methacrylic acids, acrylic acids, glycerin acrylate, glycerol methacrylate, 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate, 2-hydroxyethyl acrylate, 2-dimethylaminoethyl methacrylate, N-vinyl pyrrolidone, methacrylamide and / or N, N-dimethylacrylamide.

The tissue thickness compensator may contain reinforcing material. The reinforcing material may be at least one of the non-synthetic and synthetic materials described above. The reinforcing material may contain collagen, gelatin, fibrin, fibrinogen, elastin, keratin, albumin, hydroxyethyl cellulose, cellulose, oxidized cellulose, hydroxypropyl cellulose, carboxyethyl cellulose, carboxymethyl cellulose, polyethylene glycol polyglycol, polyglycol, polyglycol polyglycol polyalkylene oxides, polyacrylamides, polyhydroxyethyl methyl acrylate, polyvinyl pyrrolidone, polyvinyl alcohols, polycaprolactone, polydioxanone, polyacrylic acid, floor acetate, polycaprolactone, polypropylene, aliphatic polyesters, glycerins, polyamino acids, copolymers of ethers and polyesters, polyalkylene oxalates, polyamides, polyiminocarbonates, polyalkylene oxalates, polyoxoesters, polyorthoesters, polyphosphazenes and combinations thereof.

The tissue thickness compensator may have a layer containing reinforcing material. The porous layer and / or non-porous layer of tissue thickness compensator may contain a reinforcing material. For example, the porous layer may contain a reinforcing material, and the non-porous layer may not contain a reinforcing material. The reinforcing layer may be an inner layer between the first non-porous layer and the second non-porous layer. The reinforcing layer may be the outer layer of the tissue thickness compensator and / or form the outer surface of the tissue thickness compensator.

The reinforcing material may take the form of nets, single-fiber filaments, windings of a plurality of fibers, fibers, fabric mats, non-woven materials, particles and / or powders. A reinforcing material may be contained in the tissue thickness compensator layer. The reinforcing material may be contained in at least one non-porous layer and a porous layer. A mesh of reinforcing material can be obtained using conventional techniques, such as, for example, knitting, weaving, tatting and / or weaving lace. Many reinforcing materials may be oriented arbitrarily and / or have a general direction. The general direction may, for example, be parallel to the row of brackets or perpendicular to the row of brackets. Single-fiber filaments and / or windings of a plurality of fibers can be randomly oriented and / or have a common direction. Single-fiber filaments and windings of a plurality of fibers may be bonded to a non-porous layer and / or porous layer. The tissue thickness compensator may comprise a plurality of reinforcing fibers oriented arbitrarily and / or having a common direction with the non-porous layer.

As represented in FIG. 528, the stop member 70300 may comprise a tissue thickness compensator 70305, which is any of the tissue thickness compensators described herein, comprising a first non-porous layer 70307 and a second non-porous layer 70309, hermetically surrounding the reinforcement layer 70310. The reinforcement layer 70310 may comprise a hydrogel containing immersed ORC particles or fibers therein, and the non-porous layer may contain ORC. As represented in FIG. 528, a fabric thickness compensator 70305, which is any of the fabric thickness compensators described herein, may be configured to conform to the contour of the abutment member 70300. The inner layer of the tissue thickness compensator 70305 may correspond to the inner surface of the abutment member 70305, which includes forming recesses 70301.

In all cases where reinforcing fibers are used in the fabric thickness compensator, the fibers can form a non-woven material, such as, for example, a fabric mat or felt. The fibers may have any suitable length, such as, for example, from 0.1 mm to 100 mm and from 0.4 mm to 50 mm. Alternatively, the reinforcing material may be pulverized. The powder may have a particle size of, for example, from 10 micrometers to 1 cm. The powder may be contained in the tissue thickness compensator.

Any of the tissue thickness compensators described or claimed herein may be formed or partially formed in situ. For example, if the tissue thickness compensator contains a hydrogel, the hydrogel may be formed in situ. The tissue thickness compensator can be formed in situ by the formation of covalent, ionic and / or hydrophobic bonds. Physical (non-covalent) bonds can appear as a result of complexation, the formation of hydrogen bonds, desolvation, Van der Waals interaction, the formation of ionic bonds, or combinations thereof. Chemical (covalent) bonds can be formed by many mechanisms, such as: free radical polymerization, condensation polymerization, anionic or cationic polymerization, stepwise polymerization, reactions between electrophiles and nucleophiles and their combinations.

The formation of a tissue thickness compensator in situ may involve a reaction between two or more precursors that, for example, are physically separated from each other before in situ contact and / or react with each other to form a hydrogel only in response to certain environmental conditions. Polymerizable polymers can be obtained in situ from the precursor (s), which can react to form a polymer in the surgical field. A tissue thickness compensator may be formed during the in situ crosslinking reaction of the precursor (s) with each other. At least one precursor may comprise an initiator capable of initiating a polymerization reaction to form a tissue thickness compensator in situ. The tissue thickness compensator may comprise a precursor that can be activated during application to form, for example, a crosslinked hydrogel. The formation of a tissue thickness compensator in situ may involve the activation of at least one precursor to form bonds providing the formation of a tissue thickness compensator. Such activation can be achieved due to changes in physical conditions, biological conditions and / or chemical conditions in the surgical field, which are unlimitedly represented by temperature, pH, electric fields, ion concentration, enzymatic and / or chemical reactions, electrical and / or magnetic stimuli and other physiological and environmental variables. Alternatively, the precursors can be in contact with each other outside the body and introduced into the surgical field.

Another way of forming or partially forming a tissue thickness compensator in situ or in vivo, applicable to any of the tissue thickness compensators described herein, is to use a tissue thickness compensator that contains one or more capsules or cells that can be stored at least one component. For example, the capsule may be configured to store a hydrogel precursor. The capsule can be made, for example, with the possibility of storing two components, as already described above. The capsule may be configured to store a first hydrogel precursor and a second hydrogel precursor. Alternatively, the first capsule may be configured to store the first hydrogel precursor, and the second capsule may be configured to store the second hydrogel precursor. As described above, these capsules can be matched or at least substantially matched to the legs of the brackets to pierce and / or rupture the capsules in another way by contacting the capsules with the legs of the brackets. Capsules can be compressed, squeezed, wrinkled and / or otherwise torn when brackets are arranged. After capsule rupture, the components stored in them may leak from the capsules. The component stored in the capsule may come into contact with other components, layers of a tissue thickness compensator, and / or tissue. Similar other components can flow from the same or different capsules provided in the tissue thickness compensator or its layers, and / or delivered to the surgical field by a doctor. As a result of the above, the components stored inside the capsules can expand and / or swell the tissue thickness compensator.

The tissue thickness compensator may comprise a layer containing such capsules. Such capsules may contain voids, recesses, domes, tubes, and combinations thereof associated with the layer. Capsules may be voids in a layer. For example, a layer may comprise two layers that are attached to each other, wherein capsules may form between two layers. Capsules may be domes on the surface of the layer. For example, at least a portion of the capsules may be located inside domes that protrude beyond the layer up. Capsules may be recesses formed within the layer. For example, the first part of the capsules may be domes, and the second part of the capsules may be recesses. Capsules may be tubes immersed in a layer. Such a tube may contain any of the non-synthetic materials and / or synthetic materials described herein, such as PLA. The tissue thickness compensator may comprise a bioabsorbable foam, such as ORC, containing PLA tubes immersed in it, and the tube, for example, can encapsulate a hydrogel. Capsules may contain separate cells that do not communicate with each other. Alternatively, one or more capsules may be in fluid communication with each other, for example, through one or more channels, passages and / or ducts passing through a layer.

The rate of release of a component from the capsule can be controlled, for example, by the thickness of the tissue thickness compensator, the composition of the tissue thickness compensator, the size of the component, the hydrophilicity of the component and / or the physical and / or chemical interactions between the components, the composition of the tissue thickness compensator and / or surgical apparatus. The layer may contain one or more components of lesser thickness or weakened parts, such as, for example, partial perforations, which can facilitate dissection of the layer and rupture of the capsules. Such partial perforations can only pass through a portion of the layer or, alternatively, perforations can pass through the entire layer.

As represented in FIG. 523 and 524, a tissue thickness compensator 70150, which is any of the tissue thickness compensators described herein, may comprise an outer layer 70152A and an inner layer 70152B containing capsules 70154. The capsules may contain a first encapsulated component and a second encapsulated component. Alternatively, the capsules may independently contain one of the first encapsulated component and the second encapsulated component. The first encapsulated component may be separated from the second encapsulated component. The outer layer 70152A may include a surface for contact with the fabric. The inner layer 70152B may include a surface for contact with the apparatus. The contact surface of the apparatus 70152B may be detachably attached to the abutment member 70156. The outer layer 70152A may be attached to the inner layer 70152B to form voids between the outer layer 70152A and the inner layer 70152B. As represented in FIG. 523, each capsule 70154 may be a dome on the surface for contact with the apparatus of the inner layer 70152B. The dome may contain partial perforations to facilitate dissection of the layer by the legs of the brackets and rupture of the capsule. As represented in FIG. 524, the thrust member 70156 may comprise a plurality of rows of forming recesses 70158, wherein the capsule domes 70154 may be aligned with the forming recesses 70158. The tissue contact surface may have a flat surface without domes, and / or the tissue contact surface may comprise one or more protruding capsules from it, such as, for example, capsules 70154.

the abutment element of the surgical stapler may comprise a tissue thickness compensator comprising an encapsulated component comprising at least one spherical microparticle. As described above, a tissue thickness compensator may comprise a capsule containing a first encapsulated component and a second encapsulated component, and / or a tissue thickness compensator may comprise a capsule containing a first spherical microparticle and a second spherical microparticle.

As represented in FIG. 525, the stapler may include a stop member 70180 and a cartridge with brackets (shown in other figures). The brackets 70190 from the cartridge with brackets can be deformed by the stop element 70180 when the stop element 70180 is moved to the closed position and / or the bracket ejector system 70192, which moves the brackets 70190 to the closed stop element 70180. The bracket legs 70194 can be in contact with the stop element 70180 in this way that the brackets 70190 are deformed at least partially. The abutment member 70180 may comprise a tissue thickness compensator 70182 comprising an outer layer 70183A and an inner layer 70183B. The tissue thickness compensator 70182 may comprise a first encapsulated component and a second encapsulated component. Capsules 210185 can be positioned or at least substantially located such that when the legs of the brackets 70194 are pushed through the fabric T and the outer layer 70183A, the legs of the brackets 70194 can puncture and / or otherwise disrupt the integrity of the capsules 70185. As shown in FIG. 525, the bracket 70190C is in the fully activated position, the bracket 70190B is in the activation process, and the bracket 70190A is in the inactive position. The legs of the brackets 70190C and 70190B were moved through the fabric T, the outer layer 70183A and the inner layer 70183B of the fabric thickness compensator 70182, after which they touched the stop element 70180 opposite the cartridge with brackets. After capsule 70185 ruptures, the encapsulated components can leak and react, for example, with each other, body fluids and / or tissue T. The encapsulated components can react to form a reaction product, such as, for example, a hydrogel, to expand between tissue T and the base of the bracket and pushing fabric T to the legs of the brackets. As a result of the above, the tissue thickness compensator can be configured to fill any gaps within the grip area of the bracket.

The tissue thickness compensators described herein, including all formed, partially formed, or expandable in situ or in vivo, may be suitable for use with any surgical device. As described above, a tissue thickness compensator may be associated with a cartridge with brackets and / or a stop member. The tissue thickness compensator can be configured to match the cartridge with brackets and / or thrust element in any shape, size and / or volume. As described herein, a tissue thickness compensator can be releasably attached to a cartridge with brackets and / or a stop member. The tissue thickness compensator can be attached to the cartridge with brackets and / or the stop element by any mechanical and / or chemical means, ensuring that the tissue thickness compensator is kept in contact with the cartridge with brackets and / or the stop element before and during the stitching process. The tissue thickness compensator can be removed or released from the cartridge with brackets and / or the stop member after piercing the tissue thickness compensator with brackets. The tissue thickness compensator can be removed or released from the cartridge with brackets and / or the stop element as soon as the cartridge with brackets and / or the stop element are removed from the tissue thickness compensator.

As represented in FIG. 520-522, any stapler 70118 may include a stop member 70120 and a cartridge with brackets 70122, containing a trigger 70124, a plurality of brackets 70128, a cutting edge 70129 and a fabric thickness compensator 70130. The fabric thickness compensator 70130, which is any of those described herein tissue thickness compensators may contain at least one encapsulated component. The encapsulated component may rupture if the tissue thickness compensator is compressed, stitched and / or dissected. As represented in FIG. 521, for example, the brackets 70128 can be placed between the inactive position and the activated position so that the legs of the brackets move through the fabric thickness compensator 70130, pierce the lower surface and the upper surface of the fabric thickness compensator 70130, pierce the fabric T and come into contact with the thrust element 70120 opposite cartridge with brackets 70118. The encapsulated components can react with each other, with hydrophilic powder contained or dispersed in the tissue thickness compensator, and / or Fluid body to expand or swell compensator tissue thickness 70130. After deformation legs stop element legs of each bracket can capture portion compensator thickness tissue portion T 70130 and tissue inside each bracket 70128 and exert a compressive force to tissue T. As shown in FIG. 521 and 522, the fabric thickness compensator 70130 can compensate for the thickness of the tissue T captured by each bracket 70128.

As represented in FIG. 526, the surgical apparatus 70200 may include a stop member 70205 containing an upper tissue thickness compensator 70210, and a cartridge with brackets 70215 containing a lower tissue thickness compensator having an outer layer 70220 and an inner layer 70225. An upper tissue thickness compensator 70210 may be located on the first side target tissue, and a lower tissue thickness compensator may be located on the second side of the fabric. The upper tissue thickness compensator 70210, for example, may contain ORC, the outer layer of the lower tissue thickness compensator may contain a hydrogel containing ORC particles, and the inner layer of the lower tissue thickness compensator may contain ORC.

As represented in FIG. 529-531, the surgical apparatus 70400 may comprise a cartridge with brackets 70405 and a stop member 70410. A cartridge with brackets 70405 may comprise a tissue thickness compensator 70415 containing bioabsorbable foam. The bioabsorbable foam may contain capsules containing the encapsulated component 70420. For example, the bioabsorbable foam may contain ORC, and the encapsulated component may contain a drug. The fabric thickness compensator 70415 of the abutment member 70410 may comprise an inner layer 70425 and an outer layer 70430. For example, the inner layer 70425 may contain bioabsorbable foam, and the outer layer 70430 may contain a hydrogel, optionally containing reinforcing materials. In one example of a start sequence, as mainly presented in FIG. 530, the slide 70435 may first come in contact with the bracket 70440A and begin to lift the bracket up. With further distal advancement, the slide 70435 may begin to raise the brackets 70440B-D and all other subsequent brackets in turn. The slide 70435 can move the brackets 70440 up so that the legs of the brackets are in contact with the opposite stop element 70410 and deformed to the desired shape. In view of the starting sequence shown in FIG. 530, the brackets 70440A-C are moved to fully activated positions, the brackets 70440D are in the process of activation, and the brackets 70420E remain in the inactive position. The encapsulated component 70470 may be torn apart by the legs of the bracket during the execution of an exemplary starting sequence. The encapsulated component 70420 may leak from the capsule around the legs of the brackets to come in contact with tissue T. In various circumstances, additional compression of the tissue thickness compensator may squeeze additional drug from the capsule. The drug can immediately have a therapeutic effect on the tissue and reduce bleeding from the tissue.

In various circumstances, the surgeon or other doctor may deliver fluid to the tissue thickness compensator to provide a tissue thickness compensator containing at least one drug stored and / or absorbed therein. The cartridge with brackets and / or thrust element may include a port configured to provide access to the tissue thickness compensator. As represented in FIG. 532B, the cartridge with brackets 70500, for example, at the distal end may comprise a port 70505. Port 70505 may be configured to hold a needle 70510, such as the needle with holes shown in FIG. 532A. A doctor may insert a needle 70510 through port 70505 into a tissue thickness compensator 70515 to deliver fluid to a tissue thickness compensator 70515. The fluid may contain, for example, a drug and a hydrogel precursor. As described above, fluid may flow from the tissue thickness compensator into the fabric if the tissue thickness compensator is torn and / or compressed. For example, a drug may be released from tissue thickness compensator 70515 by biodegradation of tissue thickness compensator 70515.

As represented in FIG. 216, a cartridge with brackets, such as, for example, a cartridge with brackets 10000, may comprise a carrier portion 10010 and a compressible tissue thickness compensator 10020. As shown in FIG. 218-220, the support portion 10010 may comprise a panel surface 10011 and a plurality of bracket cavities 10012 formed in the support portion 10010. Each bracket cavity 10012 may be shaped and sized to include a bracket, for example, bracket 10030, that can be removed from it. Cartridge with brackets 10000 may additionally contain many pushers 10040 brackets, each of which can be configured to support one or more brackets 10030 inside the cavities 10012 brackets when brackets 10030 and pushers 10040 brackets are inoperative and. For example, as predominantly shown in FIG. 224 and 225, each bracket ejector 10040 may comprise, for example, one or more sockets or grooves 10041, for example, which may be configured to support the brackets and restrict relative movement between the brackets 10030 and the bracket ejectors 10040. As also shown in FIG. . 218, the cartridge with brackets 10000 may further comprise a carrier for activating the brackets 10050, which can be moved from the proximal end 10001 to the distal end 10002 of the cartridge with brackets for successively lifting the ejectors of brackets 10040 and brackets 10030 from their inactive position to the stop element opposite the cartridge with brackets 10000. As mainly shown in FIG. 218 and 220, each bracket 10030 may comprise a base 10031 and one or more legs 10032 extending from the base 10031, each bracket may have, for example, at least one of a substantially U-shaped and substantially V-shaped. The brackets 10030 can be designed so that the ends of the legs of the brackets 10032 are recessed relative to the surface of the panel 10011 of the supporting part 10010 when the brackets 10030 are in an inactive position. The brackets 10030 can be designed so that the ends of the legs of the brackets 10032 are flush with the surface of the panel 10011 of the supporting part 10010 when the brackets 10030 are in an inactive position. The brackets 10030 can be designed so that the ends of the legs of the brackets 10032 or at least some of the legs of the brackets 10032 protrude above the surface of the panel 10011 of the bearing part 10010 when the brackets 10030 are in an inactive position. In such cases, the legs of the brackets 10032 can pass through the thickness compensator fabric 10020 and can be placed in it when the brackets 10030 are in the inactive position. For example, the legs of the brackets 10032 may protrude above the surface of the panel 10011, for example, approximately 1.9 mm (0.075 inches). The legs of the brackets 10032 can protrude above the surface of the panel 10011 at a distance of, for example, from about 0.64 mm (0.025 in.) To about 3.18 mm (0.125 in.). In addition to the above, the tissue thickness compensator 10020 may, in an uncompressed state, have a thickness of from about 2.0 mm (0.08 inches) to about 3.18 mm (0.125 inches).

In use, in addition to the foregoing, and referring mainly to FIG. 233, a stop member, such as a stop member 10060, can be moved to the closed position opposite the cartridge with brackets 10000. As described in more detail below, the stop member 10060 can position the fabric, for example, close to the tissue thickness compensator 10020 and press the fabric thickness compensator 10020 close to the surface of the panel 10011 of the supporting part 10010. After the stop element 10060 has taken a suitable position, it is possible to place the brackets 10030, as shown in 3. As noted above, the slide for activating the brackets 10050 can be moved away proximally the end 10001 of the cartridge with brackets 10000 to the distal end 10002, as shown in FIG. 234. When advancing the slide 10050, these slide 10050 can come into contact with the ejectors 10040 brackets and lift the ejectors 10040 brackets up inside the cavities 10012 brackets. Each of the slides 10050 and the ejector brackets 10040 may contain one or more inclined surfaces that can together move the ejector brackets 10040 up from their inactive position. For example, as shown in FIG. 221-225, each ejector brackets 10040 may contain at least one inclined surface 10042, and the slide 10050 may contain one or more inclined surfaces 10052, which can be made so that these inclined surfaces 10052 can slide under the inclined surface 10042 with distal promoting the sled 10050 in the cartridge with brackets. When the brackets pushers 10040 rise up in the respective parenthesis cavities 10012, the brackets pushers 10040 can lift the brackets 10030 upward so that the brackets 10030 can exit the brackets 10012 through the openings in the bracket panel 10011. In one example, the start sequence, as shown, mainly , at 7-229, the slide 10050 may first contact the bracket 10030a and begin to lift the bracket 10030a up. With further distal advancement, the sled 10050 may begin to raise the brackets 10030b, 10030c, 10030d, 10030e and 10030f and all other subsequent brackets in turn. As shown in FIG. 229, the slide 10050 can push the brackets 10030 upward so that the legs of the brackets 10032 contact the opposite stop element, deform to become the desired shape, and are ejected from the support portion 10010. In various situations, the slide 10030 may move upward several brackets during the start sequence at the same time. If we consider the starting sequence shown in FIG. 229, the brackets 10030a and 10030b are moved to the fully actuated position and pushed out of the support portion 10010, the brackets 10030c and 10030d are in the process of being actuated and at least partially placed in the support portion 10010, and the brackets 10030e and 10030f are still located out of service.

As described above and as shown in FIG. 235, the legs 10032 of the bracket 10030 may protrude above the panel surface 10011 of the support portion 10010 when these brackets 10030 are in an idle position. If we further consider the starting sequence shown in FIG. 229, the brackets 10030e and 10030f are shown in an inactive position, and their bracket legs 10032 protrude above the panel surface 10011 and enter the fabric thickness compensator 10020. The ends of the brace legs 10032 or some other part of the brace legs 10032 may not pass through the upper contact surface with fabric 10021 of a fabric thickness compensator 10020 when the brackets 10030 are in an inactive position. As the brackets 10030 move from the idle position to the actuated position, as shown in FIG. 229, the ends of the legs of the brackets can pass through the surface 10032 in contact with the fabric. The ends of the legs of the brackets 10032 can contain sharp ends capable of dissecting and piercing the tissue thickness compensator 10020. The thickness compensator of the fabric 10020 can contain many holes that can be configured to hold the legs of the brackets 10032 and ensuring that the legs of the brackets 10032 slide relative to the tissue thickness compensator 10020. The support portion 10010 may further comprise a plurality of ejectors 10013 protruding from the surface of the panel 1 0011. The pushers 10013 may be adjacent to the holes of the brackets cavities in the surface of the panel 10011 so that the legs of the brackets 10032 can be supported at least partially by these pushers 10013. The pusher 10013 may be located at the proximal end and / or distal end of the opening of the bracket cavity. The first ejector 10013 can be located on the first end of each hole of the bracket cavity, and the second ejector 10013 can be located on the second end of each hole of the bracket cavity so that each first ejector 10013 can hold the first leg 10032 of the bracket 10030, and every second ejector 10013 can hold the second leg 10032 brackets. As represented in FIG. 235, each ejector 10013 may include a groove or groove, such as, for example, a groove 10016, within which the leg of the bracket 10032 can be slidably held. Each ejector 10013 may include a hook, protrusion and / or spike that can protrude from the surface of the panel 10011 and extend into the fabric thickness compensator 10020. As described in more detail below, these hooks, protrusions and / or spikes can reduce the relative movement between the fabric thickness compensator 10020 and the carrier portion 10010. The ends of the legs of the brackets 10032 can be located inside These ejectors 10013 and may not protrude above the upper surface of the ejectors 10013 when the brackets 10030 are in the inactive position. In at least one such embodiment, the pushers 10013 can determine the height of the pusher, and the brackets 10030 may not protrude above this height of the pusher when the brackets are in the idle position.

A fabric thickness compensator, such as, for example, a fabric thickness compensator 10020, may be formed from a single sheet of material. The tissue thickness compensator may comprise a continuous sheet of material capable of covering the entire upper surface of the panel 10011 of the supporting part 10010, or, in an alternative embodiment, not covering the entire surface of the panel 10011. The material sheet may cover the openings of the cavity for the brackets in the supporting part 10010, whereas as alternatively, the sheet of material may contain holes that can be aligned or at least partially aligned with the holes of the cavities for brackets. A tissue thickness compensator can be formed from multiple layers of material. As represented in FIG. 217, the tissue thickness compensator may comprise a compressible core and a sheath surrounding this compressible core. The shell 10022 may be configured to releasably hold the compressible core on the carrier portion 10010. For example, the carrier portion 10010 may include one or more protrusions, such as protrusions 10014 (FIG. 220), for example, continuing from it, which can be embedded in one or more holes and / or grooves, such as holes 10024, for example, formed in the shell 10022. The protrusions 10014 and the holes 10024 can be made so that the protrusions 10014 can hold the shell 10022 on the supporting part 10010. The ends of the protrusions 10014 can be deformed s, for example, by thermal stretching to increase the ends of the protrusions 10014 and, as a result, limit the relative movement between the shell 10022 and the carrier 10010. The shell 10022 may contain one or more holes 10025 that can facilitate the release of the shell 10022 from the carrier 10010 as shown in FIG. 217. As shown in FIG. 226, the tissue thickness compensator may comprise a sheath 10222 including a plurality of holes 10223, the holes 10223 can be aligned or at least partially aligned with the holes of the brace cavities in the support portion 10010. The core of the tissue thickness compensator can also contain holes that are aligned or at least partially aligned with the holes 10223 in the sheath 10222. Alternatively, the core of the tissue thickness compensator may have a continuous body and extend under the holes 10223 so that they are continuous housing covers openings in the staple cavities of the panel 10011.

As described above, the tissue thickness compensator may comprise a sheath for releasably holding the compressible core on the carrier portion 10010. For example, as shown in FIG. 218, the cartridge with brackets may further comprise holding clips 10026, which may be configured to prevent premature separation of the shell and compressible core from the carrier portion 10010. Each holding clip 10026 may include holes 10028 that may be configured to hold the protrusions 10014 extending from the carrier portion 10010 so that the holding clips 10026 can be held on the carrier portion 10010. Each holding clip 10026 may comprise at least one portion of a pallet 10027 that a paradise can extend under the carrier part 10010 and support and hold the ejectors of the brackets 10040 inside the carrier part 10010. As described above, the fabric thickness compensator can be removably attached to the carrier part 10010 using brackets 10030. More specifically, as also described above, the bracket legs 10030 can pass into the fabric thickness compensator 10020 when the brackets 10030 are in an idle position, as a result of which the fabric thickness compensator 10020 can be removed with a possibility of removal on the supporting part 10010. The legs of the brackets 10030 can come into contact with the side walls the corresponding cavities for the brackets 10012, and due to the friction between the legs of the brackets 10032 and the side walls, the brackets 10030 and the fabric thickness compensator 10020 can be held in position until the brackets 10030 are placed from the cartridge with brackets 10000. When the brackets 10030 are brought into the working position, the fabric thickness compensator 10020 can be held in brackets 10030 and held close to the stitched fabric T. After this, when the abutment element moves the abutment element to the open position to release the tissue T, the abutment part 10010 can be moved away from the sator of fabric thickness 10020, which remains sewn to the fabric. An adhesive may be used to removably attach the tissue thickness compensator 10020 to the carrier portion 10010. A two-component adhesive can be used, whereby the first component of the adhesive can be applied to the surface of the panel 10011, and the second component of the adhesive can be applied to the fabric thickness compensator 10020 so that when the fabric thickness compensator 10020 is placed close to the surface of the panel 10011, the first component can contact with the second component, as a result of which the adhesive is activated with the formation of a detachable connection between the tissue thickness compensator 10020 and the carrier part 10010. changing any other suitable means for creating a releasable retaining connection between the compensator thickness tissue supporting portion and the staple cartridge.

In addition to the above, the slide 10050 can advance from the proximal end 10001 to the distal end 10002, fully accommodating all the brackets 10030 contained within the cartridge with brackets 10000. As shown in FIG. 258-262, the slide 10050 can move distally inside the longitudinal cavity 10016 in the bearing portion 10010 by means of a trigger, or holder of a cutting element, 10052 of a surgical stapler. During use, a cassette with brackets 10000 can be inserted into the groove of the cartridge with brackets in the jaw of the surgical stapler, for example into the groove 10070 of the cartridge with brackets, and advance the actuation element 10052 until it comes into contact with the rails 10050, as shown in 8. When distally sliding the rails 10050, the trigger element 10052, the slide 10050 can come into contact with the extreme proximal ejector or ejectors 10040 brackets and actuate or push the brackets 10030 from the cartridge body with brackets 10010, as described above e. As shown in FIG. 258, the trigger element 10052 may further comprise a cutting edge 10053, which can move distally along the groove for the cutting element made in the support portion 10010 as the brackets 10030 are actuated. The corresponding groove for the cutting element may extend through a thrust element located opposite the cartridge with brackets 10000, so that the cutting edge 10053 can protrude between the abutment element and the bearing part 10010 and dissect the tissue located between them and the fabric thickness compensator. In various situations, the trigger 10052 can advance the slide 10050 distally until the slide 10050 reaches the distal end 10002 of the cartridge with brackets 10000, as shown in 0. At this point, the trigger 10052 can be retracted proximally. The trigger 10052 can retract the slide 10050 proximally, however, as shown in FIG. 261, when the trigger element 10052 is pulled back, the slide 10050 may remain at the distal end 10002 of the cartridge with brackets 10000. After the trigger element 10052 is pulled back enough, the stop element can be opened again, the tissue thickness compensator 10020 can be separated from the support part 10010, and the remaining unimplanted part of the used cartridge with brackets 10000, including the supporting part 10010, can be removed from the groove 10070 of the cartridge with brackets.

After removing the used cartridge with brackets 10000 from the bracket groove of the cartridge with brackets, in addition to the above, a new cartridge with brackets 10000 or any other suitable bracket cartridge can be inserted into the bracket groove 10070 of the brackets. In addition to the above, the channel for the cartridge with brackets 10070, the trigger element 10052 and / or the cartridge with brackets 10000 can contain auxiliary elements that can prevent the distal advancement of the trigger element 10052 for the second, subsequent time, without installing a new inactive cartridge with brackets 10000 in a channel for the cartridge with brackets 10070. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 258, when pushing the trigger 10052 into contact with the slide 10050, and also when the slide 10050 is in the proximal inoperative position, the nose nose 10055 of the trigger element 10052 can be located on and / or over the support lip 10056 on the slide 10050 so that the trigger element 10052 held in a high enough position to prevent the fuse, or crossbar, 10054, extending from the trigger element 10052, from entering the fuse hole in the cartridge groove with brackets. Since fuse 10054 will not fall into the fuse hole, in such a situation, fuse 10054 will not be able to abut against the distal side wall 10057 of the fuse hole while advancing the trigger element 10052. As the trigger element 10052 distally pushes the slide 10050, the trigger element 10052 can be supported in the upper starting position due to the fact that the supporting nose 10055 lies on the supporting protrusion 10056. When the trigger element 10052 is retracted relative to the slide 10050, as described above and shown in 1, the trigger e element 10052 can move out of an elevated position and fall down, since the supporting nose 10055 no longer lies on the supporting protrusion 10056 of the slide 10050. For example, the surgical brace may include a spring 10058 and / or any other suitable biasing element that can be biased trigger element 10052 in the lower position. After the trigger element 10052 is fully extended backward, as shown in Fig. 2, the trigger element 10052 cannot be distally advanced again through the used cassette with brackets 10000. More specifically, the trigger element 10052 cannot be held in the upper position by the slide 10050, since the slide 10050 on this the moment of the working sequence remains at the distal end 10002 of the cartridge with brackets 10000. Therefore, as noted above, if the trigger element 10052 is again advanced forward without replacing the cartridge with brackets, the crossbars and the fuse 10054 will contact the side wall 10057 of the recess for the fuse, which will not allow you to once again distally advance the actuation element 10052 into the cartridge with brackets 10000. In other words, after replacing the used cartridge with brackets 10000 with a new cartridge with brackets, the new cartridge will have a slide 10050 located proximally, which will be able to hold the actuation element 10052 in the upper position and will provide an opportunity to again distally advance the actuation element 10052.

As described above, the slide 10050 can be arranged to move the bracket levers 10040 between the first inoperative position and the second actuated position to eject the brackets 10030 from the support portion 10010. The ejectors of the brackets 10040 after the brackets 10030 are ejected from the carrier portion 10010 may be inside the cavities for brackets 10012. The carrier portion 10010 may comprise one or more retaining elements that may be configured to prevent the brackets 10040 from being ejected or dropped out of cavities for brackets 10012. Alternatively, the carriage 10050 can be configured to push the ejectors 10040 brackets from the bearing part 10010 together with the brackets 10030. For example, the ejectors brackets 10040 can be formed from a bioabsorbable and / or biocompatible material, such as Ultem . The ejector brackets can be connected to the brackets 10030. For example, the ejector brackets can be formed on top of and / or around the base of each bracket 10030 so that the ejector is made as a unit with the bracket. US Patent Application No. 11 / 541,123, entitled “SURGICAL BRACKETS HAVING COMPRESSIBLE OR REMOVABLE ELEMENTS FOR FIXING IN THIS FABRIC, AND SEWING APPLIANCES FOR USING SUCH BRACKETS”, sent in its entirety on September 29, 2006.

In various situations, in addition to the foregoing, a compressible tissue thickness compensator can move, twist and / or deviate relative to the underlying rigid supporting part of the cartridge with brackets. The carrier part and / or any other suitable cartridge part with brackets may contain one or more elements configured to limit the relative movement between the tissue thickness compensator and the carrier part. As described above, at least a portion of the brackets 10030 may protrude above the surface of the panel 10011 of the support portion 10010, and in some situations, as shown in 3 and 264, the side loads applied to the tissue thickness compensator 10120, for example, the brackets 10030 and / or hooks 10013 extending from the support portion 10010. In various situations, the brackets 10030, resisting lateral movement of the fabric thickness compensator 10120, can tilt and / or bend inside the cavities for the brackets 10012, and the cavities for the brackets 10012 and the brackets 10030 can be made the form and size to provide a relative alignment of the legs of brackets 10032 10030 10062 recesses and forming a stop element located opposite 10060, whereby brackets 10000 acquire the correct shape during formation. The brackets 10030 and / or hooks 10013 may be configured to prevent or at least limit lateral deformation within the tissue thickness compensator 10020, as shown in FIG. 264. For example, brackets 10030 and / or hooks 10013, for example, can be configured to provide stiffness or restrict lateral and / or longitudinal movement of the first surface in contact with fabric 10021 of the tissue thickness compensator relative to the second or lower surface 10029. Cartridge with brackets and / or channel for the cartridge with brackets in which the cartridge with brackets is located may contain at least one element that minimizes deformation, which can protrude upward and limit the lateral and / or longitudinal remeschenie or deformation compensator tissue thickness. A shell that at least partially surrounds the tissue thickness compensator, as described above, can also prevent or at least limit lateral and / or longitudinal movement or deformation of the tissue thickness compensator.

As also presented in FIG. 263 and 264, a tissue thickness compensator, such as, for example, tissue thickness compensator 10120, may comprise a core 10128 and a sheath 10122. Sheath 10122 and a compressible core 10128 may be formed from different materials or, in an alternative embodiment, from one material. In any case, the sheath 10122 may have a higher density than the core 10128. In cases where the sheath 10122 contains the upper part of the fabric thickness compensator 10120, the ends of the legs of the staples 10032 can be placed in the sheath 10122. Since the sheath contains the lower part of the fabric thickness compensator 10120 , the legs of the brackets 10032 can pass through the shell as well as into the core. In any case, the sheath of the tissue thickness compensator can help keep the legs of the brackets 10032 aligned with the forming recesses 10062 of the abutment element 10060. Sheath 10122 may have a density that, for example, is about 10% more than the density of the core 10128, about 20% more than the density of the core 10128, approximately 30% higher than the density of the core 10128, approximately 40% higher than the density of the core 10128, approximately 50% higher than the density of the core 10128, approximately 60% higher than the density of the core 10128 70% more than the density of the core 10128, about 80% more than the density of the core 10128, about 90% more than the density of the core 10128 and / or about 100% more than the density of the core 10128. The shell 10122 may, for example, have a density that is higher than the density cores 10128 and less than twice the density of cores 10128. Cladding 10122 may, for example, have a density that is greater than twice the density of cores 10128. In addition to those described above, cladding 10122 and core 10128 can be formed or fabricated simultaneously by the way. For example, a liquid containing any suitable material described herein may be cast into a dish or mold, and after solidification of the liquid, a shell or layer having a higher density than the rest of the material can be obtained. Many layers of material can be formed during a process in which one or more successive layers of material are poured onto a previously hardened layer. Two or more layers can be glued to each other, for example, with an adhesive. Two or more layers, for example, can be bonded to each other by one or more crosslinking elements and / or one or more mechanical interlocking elements. For example, adjacent layers may, for example, be joined together by one or more dovetail compounds. The shell may have a sealed surface capable of preventing or at least restricting the penetration of fluid through it. Alternatively, the shell may have, for example, a porous structure with open cells.

In addition to the above, the sheath may be cut off from the tissue thickness compensator. The tissue thickness compensator can be cut from a larger block of material so that the tissue thickness compensator does not contain a sheath. For example, a tissue thickness compensator can be formed, for example, from a homogeneous or at least substantially homogeneous material containing large pores.

The cartridge with brackets can contain many cavities for brackets, each of which contains a bracket, and the cavities for brackets can be arranged in several rows, and the stop element located opposite the cartridge with brackets can contain many forming cavities corresponding to the cavities for brackets in the cartridge with brackets. In other words, the thrust element may comprise a plurality of rows of forming recesses, where each forming recess may be located opposite the bracket cavity in the cartridge with brackets. Each forming hole may contain, for example, two forming holes configured to hold the legs 10032 of the bracket 10030 therein, each forming hole configured to hold the legs of the bracket 10032 therein and form or bend the legs of the bracket 10032 to the other side of the bracket 10032. In various situations, the legs 10032 may or may not fall into the forming holes incorrectly, as a result of which the legs of the brackets 10032 may become irregular during the starting sequence. the thrust element may contain a combination or a grid of forming recesses, each of which is configured to hold and form the legs of the bracket. For example, a plurality of forming recesses may comprise a number of forming recesses that exceeds the number of brackets contained in the cartridge with brackets. The cartridge with brackets may contain, for example, six longitudinal rows of cavities for brackets, and the thrust element may contain six rows of forming recesses aligned with six rows of cavities for brackets, and, in addition, may contain forming recesses located between these rows of forming recesses. For example, on one side of the thrust element, the first row of forming cavities may be located, which can be positioned above the first row of cavities of brackets, the second row of forming cavities, which can be placed above the second row of cavities of brackets, which is adjacent to the first row of cavities of brackets, and, in addition , a series of forming depressions located between the first row of forming depressions and the second row of forming depressions. As represented in FIG. 276-279, the stop member 10260 may comprise six rows of forming recesses 10261, which may be arranged to fit over six corresponding rows of cavities for brackets in a cartridge with brackets 10200. For example, rows of intermediate forming recesses 10262 may be located between and / or adjacent to in rows of forming recesses 10261. As shown in FIG. 277, 278 and 280, each forming cavity 10261 and 10262 may have two forming holes, each forming hole may comprise a distal portion 10263, which may be configured to form or proximal bend the brace leg 10032, and a proximal portion 10264, which may be configured to form or distally bend the legs of the bracket 10032. In various other situations, the formation of the brackets 10030 can be performed in various other ways. For example, the bracket 10030 can be formed so that one leg 10032 is curved outward and the other leg 10032 is curved inward (FIG. 281), or so that both legs 10032 are curved outward (FIG. 282) depending on, firstly, into which forming hole the bracket leg 10032 enters and / or, secondly, whether the leg 10032 enters the proximal part 10263 or the distal part 10064 of each forming hole, for example.

In addition to the above, each forming recess 10261 and / or forming recess 10262, for example, may be triangular or diamond-shaped. Each distal portion 10263 and / or each proximal portion 10264 of the forming recesses may have a triangular shape, for example, the triangular distal parts 10263 and the proximal parts 10264 may be located so that their vertices are directed in opposite directions. the stop element may comprise, for example, a plurality of substantially square forming recesses. For example, the forming surface of each square forming recess may comprise an arched surface extending between the sides of the square. the stop element may contain, for example, a set of round or spherical holes. In addition to the above, the forming recesses 10261 can be located along one or more lines, and, by analogy, the forming recesses 10262 can also be located along one or more lines. Alternatively, the forming recesses 10261 and / or the forming recesses 10262 may be arranged in one or more circular rows. For example, the forming recesses 10261 may be located along the main circle, and the forming recesses 10262 may be located along the other circle. The main circle and the other circle may be concentric or at least substantially concentric. Forming recesses 10262 can be located, for example, along an inner circle located radially inside relative to the main circle, and / or on an outer circle located radially outside from the main circle. The main circle may be formed by the main diameter, the inner circle may be formed by the inner diameter, and the outer circle may be formed by the outer diameter. For example, the inner diameter may be smaller than the main diameter, and the outer diameter may be larger than the main diameter.

As described above, the stop element can move from the open position to the closed position and squeeze the fabric with a tissue thickness compensator of the cartridge with brackets, such as, for example, tissue thickness compensator 10020. In various situations, the tissue thickness compensator can be adjacent to the support before it is placed relative to the fabric part of the cartridge with brackets. Before moving the stop element to the closed position, the tissue thickness compensator 10020 may occupy a position in which it abuts against the carrier part 10018. Alternatively, the tissue thickness compensator 10020 may be in a position in which there is a gap between the tissue thickness compensator 10020 and the carrier part 10018 . For example, the stop element can bias the fabric and fabric thickness compensator 10020 down until the fabric thickness compensator 10020 abuts against the carrier portion 10018, at which point the stop element can be moved to the closed position and create pressure inside the fabric. In the event that the surgeon does not satisfy the location of the tissue between the abutment element and the brace unit, the surgeon can open the abutment element, adjust the position of the abutment element and the cartridge with brackets and close the abutment element again. Due to such installation and reinstallation of the cartridge with brackets relative to the fabric in various situations, the distal end of the tissue thickness compensator 10020 may, for example, detach from the support portion 10010. In some such situations, the distal end of the tissue thickness compensator 10020 may come into contact with the fabric and peel or wrap relatively the supporting part 10010. As described in more detail below, the cartridge with brackets may contain one or more elements configured to detachably hold the tissue thickness compensator and on the underlying carrier of the cartridge with brackets.

As represented in FIG. 265, the cartridge with brackets 10300 may comprise a carrier portion 10310, a tissue thickness compensator 10320 held by the carrier 10310, and a distal end 10302 comprising a nose 10303 configured to detachably hold the distal end 10325 of the tissue thickness compensator 10320 in a desired position. The nose portion 10303 may include a groove 10305 configured to hold the distal end 10325 of the tissue thickness compensator 10320. The distal end 10325 can be pressed or pinched into the groove 10305 so that the distal end 10325 can be held in place when the cartridge with brackets 10300 is located near the fabric . For example, the groove 10305 may be oriented in a direction parallel or at least substantially parallel to the surface of the panel 10311 of the bearing portion 10310. The groove 10305 may be horizontal to the surface of the panel 10311. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 266, the cartridge with brackets 10400 may comprise a carrier portion, a tissue thickness compensator 10420 supported by the carrier, and a distal end 10402 comprising a nose 10403 configured to detachably hold the distal end 10425 of the tissue thickness compensator 10420 in a desired position. The distal end 10425 may comprise a protrusion extending from it, and the nose 10403 may include a vertical groove 10405 configured to hold the protrusion of the distal end 10425. The distal end 10425 and / or the protrusion extending therefrom may be pressed or pinched into the groove 10405 in such a way that the distal end 10425 can be held in place when the cartridge with brackets 10400 is located near the fabric. The tissue thickness compensator 10420 may comprise a groove, such as, for example, a groove 10429, which may be configured to hold at least a portion of the bow 10403. The groove 10405 may be oriented in a direction perpendicular to or at least substantially perpendicular to the surface of the panel 10411 bearing part. As represented in FIG. 267, the cartridge with brackets 10500 may include a carrier portion, a tissue thickness compensator 10520 supported by the carrier, and a distal end 10502 comprising a nose configured to detachably hold the distal end 10525 of the tissue thickness compensator 10520 in a desired position. The nose portion may include a vertical groove 10505 configured to hold the distal end 10525 of the tissue thickness compensator 10520. The distal end 10525 can be clamped or pinched into the groove 10505 so that the distal end 10525 can be held in place when the cartridge with brackets 10500 is located near the fabric .

As also presented in FIG. 265, the tissue thickness compensator 10320 may comprise an upper surface 10324 that may be located above the upper surface 10304 of the bow 10303. Another embodiment in which the upper surface of the tissue thickness compensator is located above the bow of the cartridge with brackets is shown at 8, with the upper surface 10721 tissue thickness compensator 10720 is located, for example, above the upper surface 10004 of the bow 10003. During use, as shown in 5, the fabric can creep onto the upper surface 10304 of the bow 10303 and in a certain situation, the fabric may contact the distal end 10325 of the tissue thickness compensator 10320 and apply force to the tissue thickness compensator 10320, which may lead to the separation of the tissue thickness compensator 10320 from the support portion 10310. In the embodiments described herein, this separating the force can be resisted by the part of the distal end 10325, clamped in the bow 10303. In any case, after the optimal location of the fabric relative to the cartridge with brackets 13000, the stop element can be rotated l to the closed position and press the fabric and fabric thickness compensator 10320 close to the supporting part 10310. For example, the stop element can be turned into a position in which it is in contact with the upper surface 10304 of the nose part 10303, thereby preventing further rotation of the stop element. In various situations, due to the fact that the upper surface 10324 of the tissue thickness compensator 10320 is located above the upper surface 10304 of the bow 10303, the upper surface 10324 may be pressed down towards the supporting part 10310 when closing the stop element, and in some situations, the upper surface 10324 may be , for example, pressed below the upper surface 10304 of the bow 10303. After placing the brackets contained within the cartridge with brackets 10300 and dissecting the tissue thickness compensator 10320, as described herein, the support Part 10310 and 10303 nose portion can be moved from the tissue thickness compensator 10320 such that the distal end tissue thickness compensator 10325 10320 can slip out of the slot 10305.

As described above, the stop element, for example, the stop element 10060, can be rotated to the closed position in which the stop element 10060 is in contact with the upper surface of the bow of the cartridge 10004 with brackets, for example, the cartridge with brackets 10000. After the stop element has reached the closed position, the compression ratio of the tissue thickness compensator, for example tissue thickness compensator 10020, will depend, inter alia, on the thickness in the uncompressed state or the height of the tissue thickness compensator, as well as on the thickness of the fabric. As shown in FIG. 236 and 237, the tissue thickness compensator 10920 may comprise an upper surface located at the same level or at least substantially flush with the upper surface 10004 of the bow 10003. In such cases, the upper surface of the tissue thickness compensator 10920 may be pressed below the upper surface 10004 bow 10003. As shown in FIG. 241 and 242, a tissue thickness compensator, such as a tissue thickness compensator 10820, may include an upper surface 10821 below the upper surface of the bow 10004 before the tissue thickness compensator 10820 is compressed by the fabric T and the stop member 10060. In situations where the fabric T is relatively thin, as shown in FIG. 239 and 240, the tissue thickness compensator 10920 may undergo relatively small compression. As shown in FIG. 241 and 242, the tissue thickness compensator 10820 may undergo more compression if the tissue T is relatively thicker. In situations where the T fabric has both thin and thick sections, as shown in FIG. 243 and 244, the tissue thickness compensator 10820 can contract to a greater extent under the thicker fabric T, and to a lesser extent under the thinner fabric T. Thus, as described above, the tissue thickness compensator can compensate for differences in tissue thickness.

As represented in FIG. 268-270, the surgical stapler may comprise, firstly, a channel for cartridge 16670 configured to hold the cartridge with brackets 16600, and secondly, a stop member 16660 pivotally connected to the channel for cartridge 16670. Cartridge with brackets 16600 may comprise a support portion 16610 and a tissue thickness compensator 16620, wherein the distal end 16625 of the tissue thickness compensator 16620 can be held removably on the support portion 16610 by the nose 16603 on the distal end 16602 of the cartridge with brackets 16600. The nose 166 03 may comprise a groove 16605 and may be formed of a flexible material. In use, as shown mainly in FIG. 269, the nose 16603 may bend downward to widen the opening of the groove 16605. The nose 16603 may include slots or cutouts 16606 that may be configured to allow the nose 16603 to bend downward. In any case, in different situations, the widened opening of the groove 16605 can simplify the insertion of the distal end 16625 of the fabric thickness compensator 16620 into the groove 16605. After the fabric thickness compensator 16620 is properly positioned, the nose 16603 can be released and, due to the elasticity of the material of which the nose 16603 consists , the nose 16603 may return or at least substantially return to an unbent state and clamp the distal end 16625 of the tissue thickness compensator 16620 against the surface of the panel 16611, as shown in FIG. 270. During use, similarly to the foregoing, the distal end 16625 can be pulled out from the groove 16605 when the support portion 16610 is moved away from the stitched fabric. In various situations, the flexible nose 16603 may be configured to deflect upon disconnecting the tissue thickness compensator 16620 from the supporting portion 16610. As also shown in FIG. 270, the tissue thickness compensator 16620 may comprise an upper surface 16621 aligned with or at least substantially aligned with the upper surface 16604 of the nose 16603.

As represented in FIG. 271, the surgical stapler may include, firstly, a channel 10770 configured to hold the cartridge with brackets 10700, and secondly, a stop member 10760 rotatably connected to the channel 10770. The cartridge with brackets 10700 may include a support portion 10710 and tissue thickness compensator 10720. The tissue thickness compensator 10720 can be held in place by a protrusion of the nose 10703, which can slide along the carrier 10710. As is predominantly shown in FIG. 272, the protrusion of the bow 10703 may contain one or more side grooves 10707, which, for example, can be made to removably hold one or more rail guides extending along the carrier 10710. The tissue thickness compensator 10720 can be located between the side grooves 10707. The protrusion the nose 10703 may further comprise a distal end 10702 and a cavity 10706 formed at the distal end 10702, and the cavity 10706 can also be configured to hold, for example, at least a portion of the carrier hour ty 10710. During use, the nose element of the nose 10703 can be worn on the support part 10710 in the direction from the distal to the proximal end. The tissue thickness compensator 10720 can be detachably attached to the protrusion of the bow 10703 so that after activating the brackets through the thickness compensator 10720, the tissue thickness compensator 10720 can be separated from the protrusion of the bow 10703 while moving the carrier 10710 and the protrusion of the bow 10703 from the tissue thickness compensator 10720. The upper surface 10721 of the tissue thickness compensator 10720 may be located below the upper surface 10704 of the bow 10703.

As represented in FIG. 273 and 274, the surgical stapler may comprise, firstly, a cartridge channel with brackets 11070 configured to hold the cartridge with brackets 11000, and secondly, a stop member 11060 rotatably coupled to channel 11070. The cartridge has the brackets 11000 may comprise a support portion 11010 and a fabric thickness compensator 11020. The fabric thickness compensator 11020 may be held in place by one or more longitudinal rail guides 11019 extending from the panel 11011 of the bearing portion 11010. The longitudinal rail guides 11019 may be placed in the fabric thickness compensator 11020. As predominantly shown in FIG. 274, the tissue thickness compensator 11020 may include a longitudinal recess 11029, which may be configured to hold the longitudinal rail 11019. For example, the recess 11029 may be configured and sized, for example, to hold the rail 11019 by interference fit. Such elements, in addition to the foregoing, can be performed, for example, with the possibility of preventing or at least limiting the relative lateral movements between the tissue thickness compensator 11020 and the supporting part 11010 and, in addition, limiting the premature separation of the fabric thickness compensator 11020 from the supporting part 11010 As presented in FIG. 275, the surgical stapler may include, firstly, a cartridge channel with brackets 11170 configured to hold the cartridge with brackets 11100, and secondly, a stop member 11160 rotatably coupled to channel 11170. Cartridge with brackets 11100 may comprise a support portion 11110 and a tissue thickness compensator 11120. The tissue thickness compensator 11120 may be held in place by one or more longitudinal rows of spikes or teeth 11119 extending from the panel 11111 of the bearing portion 11110. The longitudinal rows of spikes 11119 can be placed in a comp The thickness gauge 11120.

In relation to presented in FIG. 273, in addition to the above, the tissue thickness compensator 11020 of the cartridge with brackets 11000 can gradually separate from the carrier portion 11010 as the brackets are ejected from the brackets for brackets 10012 formed therein. More specifically, in addition to the above, brackets located in the brackets 10012 of the brackets can be pushed sequentially from the proximal end 11001 of the cartridge with brackets 11000 to the distal end 11002 of the cartridge with brackets 11000 so that the brackets during ejection can exert an upward biasing force to compensate The thickness of the fabric thickness compensator 11020 leads to a shift of the fabric thickness compensator 11020 from the rail 11019. Under such circumstances, the proximal end 11006 of the fabric thickness compensator 11020 can separate from the supporting part 11010 as the brackets are pushed out of the most proximal cavities 10012 of the brackets. Then the tissue thickness compensator 11020 can gradually separate from the supporting part 11010 as the brackets are gradually ejected from the supporting part 11010 from the proximal end 11001 to the distal end 11002 of the cartridge with brackets 11000. When ejecting the brackets located in the most distal cavities 10012 of the brackets, from the supporting part 11010 the distal end 11007 of the tissue thickness compensator 11020 may separate from the support portion 11010. With respect to that shown in FIG. 275, the tissue thickness compensator 11120 may gradually separate from the studs 1119 extending from the carrier portion 11110 as the brackets are gradually ejected from the cartridge with brackets from the proximal end 11101 to the distal end 11102.

As described above, the tissue thickness compensator can gradually be separated from the supporting portion of the cartridge with the brackets as the brackets are gradually ejected from the supporting portion and are in contact with the tissue thickness compensator. Brace legs, such as, for example, brace legs 10032, may be able to pass through the fabric thickness compensator without separating the fabric thickness compensator from the carrier portion. In such cases, the tissue thickness compensator may remain engaged with the carrier until the brace bases, such as bases 10031, come into contact with the tissue thickness compensator and are pushed up. However, the straps and / or other retaining elements extending from the carrier part may, for example, counteract the separation of the tissue thickness compensator from the carrier part. As described in more detail below, the carrier part may contain holding elements, which can be configured to gradually separate the tissue thickness compensator from the carrier part as the brackets from the cartridge with brackets gradually activate. Turning now to FIG. 283, a brace unit, such as, for example, a brace unit 11200, may include a support portion 11210 including retaining elements 11213 that can be detachably held to compensate for tissue thickness compensator 11220 (FIG. 284) on the support portion 11210. Restraining the elements 11213 can be placed, for example, at the ends of each cavity for the bracket 11212, and each holding element 11213 may include a guide groove 11216 made therein, which is capable of slidingly supporting the legs 10032 of the bracket 10030. B in such cases, both the legs of the brackets 10032 and the holding elements 11213 can be configured to detachably hold the tissue thickness compensator 11220 on the carrier portion 11210. When used, as shown in FIG. 284, the bracket ejectors 10040 contained within the support portion 11210 can be pushed upward by the slide 10050 as described above, the bracket ejectors 10040 can be configured to contact the holding members 11213 to at least partially separate the holding members 11213 from the supporting portion 11210 and moving the retaining elements 11213 outward from the brackets 10030 and the cavity 11212 of the brackets. By separating the holding elements 11213 from the support portion 11210 and / or moving them outward, as shown in FIG. 284, the holding elements 11213 may already be unable to hold the tissue thickness compensator 11220 on the support portion 11210, and as a result, the tissue thickness compensator 11220 may separate from the support portion 11210. Similarly, the tissue thickness compensator 11220 may gradually separate from the support portion 11210 as it gradually pushing the brackets 10030 out of the cartridge with brackets in the direction of the stop element, such as, for example, the stop element 11260. The ejector brackets 10040 may come into contact with the holding elements 11213, when the top the surface of the ejector brackets 10040 go to the same level or at least substantially the same level as, for example, the surface of the panel 11211 of the carrier part 11210. In such cases, the tissue thickness compensator 11220 may be separated from the carrier part 11210 at that moment and / or just before the brackets 10030 are formed to their fully formed, or fully activated, configuration. For example, as predominantly represented in FIG. 285, the ejectors 10040 can be pushed out so much that they extend beyond the surface of the panel 11211 to completely form the brackets 10030 and during this ejection, the retaining elements 11213 will be separated from the carrier part 11210. As also shown in FIG. 284, the retaining elements 11213 may protrude above the brackets for the brackets 11212 or go into the hollows for the brackets 11212 until they are separated or displaced outward, as a result of which the ejectors 10040 can come into contact with the holding elements 11213 just at the moment when the ejectors 10040 reach the surface of the panel 11211. In any case, after separating the tissue thickness compensator 11220 from the support portion 11210, as shown in FIG. 285, the support portion 11210 can be moved away from the implanted tissue thickness compensator 11220.

As described above, the compressible tissue thickness compensator of the cartridge with brackets may gradually separate from the support portion, or the housing, of the cartridge with brackets as the brackets are actuated or pushed out of the cartridge with brackets. In various circumstances, such separation may include the gradual detachment of the tissue thickness compensator from the support portion, and in some circumstances, complete separation of the tissue thickness compensator from the support portion may not occur until the stop member is opened and the support portion moves from the implanted tissue thickness compensator. As represented in FIG. 289, a cartridge with brackets, such as, for example, a cartridge with brackets 11300, may include a tissue thickness compensator 11320 that is fixed so that it can be separated on the carrier portion 11310. The carrier portion 11310 may comprise a plurality of protruding retaining elements 11313 configured to be detachable to compress and hold the longitudinal sides of the tissue thickness compensator 11320 on the carrier portion 11310. For example, each holding element 11313 may comprise an inwardly facing channel, or groove, 11316, which may be configured to retaining the longitudinal sides of the fabric thickness compensator 11320. In various circumstances, a plurality of retaining elements 11313 may protrude along the first longitudinal side of the support portion 11310 and a plurality of retaining elements 11313 may protrude along the second longitudinal side of the support portion 11310, and in some circumstances, the retaining elements 11313 may be formed with the possibility of preventing, or at least limiting, the relative lateral movement of the compensator for the thickness of the fabric 11320 and the supporting part 11310, and t also preventing, or at least limiting, prematurely separating the tissue thickness compensator 11320 from the support portion 11310. The retaining elements 11313 may be integral with the carrier portion 11310, and as shown in FIG. 290, the holding elements 11313 can be detached or at least partially detached from the carrier portion 11310 to allow the tissue thickness compensator 11320 to separate from the carrier portion 11310, as shown, for example, in FIG. 291. A stop member, such as, for example, a stop member 11360, may be configured to compress the tissue thickness compensator 11320, and, in response to the pressure created within the tissue thickness compensator 11320, the tissue thickness compensator 11320 may expand laterally for at least partial detachment, or separation, of the retaining elements 11313 from the tissue thickness compensator 11320. The above-described advancement of the cutting element through the stop element 11360 and the cartridge with brackets 11300 can lead to the placement of brackets contained in the cartridge and one temporary closer pressing of the stop element 11360 and the staple cartridge 11300 to each other, which may exert an additional compressive force to the tissue thickness compensator 11320 and thereby lead to a consistent unpinning retaining elements 11313 as passing the cutting member through the staple cartridge 11300.

As represented in FIG. 292-294, a cartridge with brackets, such as, for example, a cartridge with brackets 11400, may comprise a fabric thickness compensator 11420 that is removably mounted on the carrier portion 11410. A cartridge with brackets 11400 may include one or more retaining bars 11413 that may be formed with the possibility of holding the longitudinal sides of the compensator for the thickness of the fabric 11420 on the surface of the panel 11411. For example, each holding bar 11413 may contain opposite each other shoulders 11418, which can form a channel 11416 between themselves. In such cases One of the shoulders 11418 may be configured to extend over the thickness compensator of the fabric 11420, and the other shoulder 11418 may be configured to extend under the protrusion 11419 extending from the carrier portion 11410. As shown mainly in FIG. 292, the size and configuration of the channel 11416 of each retaining bar 11413 can be selected to apply compressive force to the longitudinal sides of the tissue thickness compensator 11420 before using the cartridge with brackets 11400. During use, as shown mainly in FIG. 293, the cartridge with brackets 11400 can be placed inside the groove for the cartridge with brackets, and after appropriate placement of the cartridge with brackets 11400, the stop member, such as, for example, stop member 11460, can be moved to a position where it can compress the tissue thickness compensator 11420. Similarly to the foregoing, the tissue thickness compensator 11420 may expand laterally or outwardly during compression, and as a result, separate the retaining bars 11413 from the cartridge with brackets 11400. As an alternative, the closure of the stop member 114 60 may not lead to separation or may not completely separate the retaining bars 11413 from the cartridge with brackets. For example, the advancement of a launch rod described above through a cartridge with brackets 11400 may result in brackets 10030 from the carrier portion 11410 being placed and simultaneously pressing the stop member 11460 and the cartridge with brackets 11400 closer to each other to apply compressive force to the tissue thickness compensator 11420 sufficient to expand the tissue thickness compensator 11420 sideways and separating the retaining bars 11413 from the cartridge with brackets 11400. After separating the retaining bars 11413 from the cartridge with brackets 11400, as shown in FIG. 294, the support portion 11410 can be moved away from the implanted tissue thickness compensator 11420 and removed from the surgical field. In some alternative embodiments, implementation, as shown in FIG. 295, the cartridge with brackets 11400 'may comprise retaining bars 11413', which, similarly to the foregoing, may comprise shoulders 11418 'extending therefrom. For example, each of the shoulders 11418 'may include a wedge-shaped retainer 11417', which can be configured to detachably hold the retaining bars 11413 'on the cartridge with brackets 11400'. More specifically, the carrier portion 11410 'of the cartridge with brackets 11400' may include lower grooves 11419 ', which, together with the wedge-shaped latches 11417', can be removably held to the retaining bars 11413 'on the cartridge with brackets 11400 and block the premature separation of the tissue thickness compensator 11420 from the bearing part 11410 '. In use, similarly to the foregoing, the retaining bars 11413 ′ may separate from the cartridge with brackets 11400 ′, for example, by applying sufficient compressive force to the tissue thickness compensator 11420.

In various circumstances, as described above and as also shown in FIG. 259 and 260, the cartridge slide with brackets 10050 and the trigger element 10052 of the surgical stapler can be moved from the proximal end 10001 of the cartridge with brackets 10000 to the distal end 10002 (FIG. 219) of the cartridge with brackets 10000 to bring the brackets 10030 out of the support part 10010 In at least one such circumstance, each bracket 10030 can be moved from the inoperative position to the activated position and can be pushed out of the support portion 10010 to capture the entire tissue thickness compensator 10020 against the fabric and located between the abutment element 10060 and the bracket unit 10000. In some circumstances, the surgeon may need to actuate not all the brackets 10030 from the cartridge with the brackets 10000, and the surgeon may stop the advancement of the slide 10050 and the trigger rod 10052 at the point between the proximal end 10001 and the distal cartridge end 10002 with brackets 10000. In such circumstances, tissue thickness compensator 10020 can only be partially implanted in tissue T, and to separate the unimplanted portion of tissue thickness compensator 10020 from the support 10010 Asti, the surgeon can pull the support part 10010 of partially implanted tissue thickness compensator 10020 such that the unimplanted portion separated or detached from the support portion 10010. Although such embodiments may be used in different circumstances, in FIG. 300-302 shows an improved embodiment in which a tissue thickness compensator, such as, for example, a tissue thickness compensator 11520 of a cartridge with brackets 11500, may comprise a plurality of connected segments that can be configured to separate from each other. For example, the fabric thickness compensator 11520 may, for example, comprise a first, or most proximal, segment 11520a, a second segment 11520b detachably connected to a first segment 11520a, a third segment 11520c detachably connected to a second segment 11520b, a fourth segment 11520d detachably connected to a third a segment 11520c, and a fifth segment 11520e detachably connected to a fourth segment 11520d. The tissue thickness compensator 11520 may comprise at least one thin portion 11529 located between any two adjacent segments 11520a-11520e, which may be configured to form a predetermined tear-off or separation point at which the tissue thickness compensator segments may separate. The tissue thickness compensator may comprise any suitable hole arrangement, thin parts and / or any other means for creating a separation point within the tissue thickness compensator. As shown primarily in FIG. 301, the stop element 11560 is in the closed position and the trigger element 10052 is in a partially extended position through the cartridge with brackets 11500 so that the brackets 10030 lying at the base of the first segment 11520a, the second segment 11520b and the third segment 11520c are extended to the activated position to capture the compensator the thickness of the fabric 11520 close to the fabric T. In this position, the trigger element 10052 is not yet extended to bring into the activated position the brackets 10030 lying at the base of the fourth segment 11520d and the fifth segment 11520e, for example. In the position shown in FIG. 302, the stop member 11560 is moved to the open position and the cartridge support part 11510 with brackets 11500 is moved from the portion of the tissue thickness compensator 11520 that has been implanted. As shown in FIG. 302, a thin portion 11529 (FIG. 300) located between the third segment 11520c and the fourth segment 11520d allowed the unimplanted portion of the tissue thickness compensator 11520 to separate from its implanted portion.

In addition to the foregoing, the cartridge with brackets may comprise a plurality of fasteners configured to releasably hold the tissue thickness compensator on the supporting portion of the cartridge with brackets. The support part may comprise a plurality of holes formed, for example, in the surface of the panel, the fastening elements being able to pass through the fabric thickness compensator and can be releasably held in the holes of the supporting part. In use, the fasteners may gradually separate from the support portion as the brackets gradually eject from the support portion. Fasteners can be implanted together with a tissue thickness compensator, and fasteners can be formed, for example, from at least one bioabsorbable material. For example, the fasteners may separate from the support portion after at least partially implanting the tissue thickness compensator and when the support portion is moved from the implanted tissue thickness compensator. As shown in FIG. 323-325a, a cartridge with brackets, such as, for example, a cartridge with brackets 11600, may comprise a fabric thickness compensator 11620 detachably fixed to the support portion 11610 by a plurality of fasteners 11613 Each fastener 11613 may include a first end 11618 placed inside and / or otherwise connected to the fabric thickness compensator 11620, a second end 11618 connected to the support portion 11610, and a connector 11616 that connects the first end 11618 to the second end 11618. Fasteners 11613 may extend through a groove 11615 of the cutting element formed located in the support portion 11610. When using the trigger 10052, described above, can move the cutting edge through the groove 11615 of the cutting element in the support portion 11610 and cut the fasteners 11613 to separate the fabric thickness compensator 11620 from the support portion 11610. For example, the trigger rod 10052 may move from the proximal end 11601 of the cartridge with brackets 11600 to the distal end 11602 of the cartridge with brackets 11600 in order, firstly, to distally advance the slide 10050 and gradually actuate the brackets 10030, as described above, and, secondly, warmly dissect and / or crush the fasteners 11613 to gradually separate the tissue thickness compensator 11620 from the support portion 11610. Similarly, the fabric thickness compensator 11620 may comprise a plurality of detachable segments 11620a-11620e, each of which, for example, can be held on the support part 11610 by one or more fasteners 11613. If the trigger 10052 is stopped between the proximal end 11601 and the distal end 11602 of the cartridge with brackets 11600, as shown in FIG. 324, fasteners 11613 can help hold the non-implanted portion of the tissue thickness compensator 11620 on the support portion 11610 after opening the stop member 11660 and move the support portion 11610 away from the tissue T, as shown in FIG. 325. In addition to the above, the cutting edge 10053 of the trigger element 10052 may be configured to cut and / or remove the fasteners 11613. In some alternative embodiments, as shown in FIG. 327 and 328, the slide to accommodate the brackets, such as, for example, the slide 11650, may include a cutting edge 11653, which can be cut so that the connectors 11616 of the fasteners 11613 can be cut when the slide 1150 moves along the bracket block 11600. For example, each connector 11616 can comprise a cylindrical element extending between the T-ends 11618 of the fasteners 11613, wherein the blade of the cutting element 11653 may comprise a concave profile 11653, which, for example, may be configured to receive a cylindrical single 11616.

As described above, the cartridge with brackets can be loaded into the groove of the cartridge with brackets of a surgical stapling instrument. In various circumstances, a surgeon or other physician can insert a cartridge with brackets into the groove of the cartridge with brackets by applying a downward force to the cartridge with brackets to hold the cartridge with brackets in place. In some such circumstances, in order to apply such a downward force, the physician may, for example, place his thumb on the upper surface of the cartridge with brackets. The upper surface of the cartridge with brackets may contain the upper surface of the tissue thickness compensator, and, as described above, the tissue thickness compensator can be compressible, and the downward force applied to the tissue thickness compensator can compress the tissue thickness compensator to such an extent that large the doctor’s finger touches the ends of the brackets located in the supporting part. To insert the cartridge with brackets into the channel for the cartridge with brackets, an applicator for the cartridge with brackets can be used, which can be configured to prevent or at least limit the likelihood of the doctor touching the brackets in the bracket cassette. After properly placing the cartridge with brackets inside the groove of the cartridge with brackets, as described in more detail below, the applicator can be separated from the cartridge with brackets.

As shown in FIG. 305 and 306, the applicator for the cartridge with brackets may include a rigid cover, such as, for example, a cover 10080, which can be attached to the bracket unit 10000. In addition to the above, the cover 10080 can be configured to prevent, or at least limit , the likelihood of contact, for example, of the doctor’s thumb with the ends of brackets 10030 located in the cartridge with brackets 10000, when inserting the cartridge with brackets 10000 into the groove of the cartridge with brackets. As shown in FIG. 307 and 308, the cover 10080 may be distributed over the upper surface 10021, or at least a portion of the upper surface 10021, of the fabric thickness compensator 10020, and may include, firstly, a lower surface 10081, which may be distributed over and / or abut into the tissue thickness compensator 10020, and secondly, the upper surface 10082, which can, for example, provide a surface on which the doctor can press to apply the required downward force. In use, the physician may take the handle 10084 of the cap 10080, align the cartridge support part 10010 with brackets 10000 with the bracket groove for the cartridge, and at least partially insert the cartridge with brackets 10000 into the bracket groove of the cartridge. The physician can then fully seat the cassette with brackets 10000 into the channel for the cartridge with brackets by applying a downward force to the top surface 10082 of the lid 10880 which can transmit the downward force directly to the support portion 10010. For example, the lid 10080 may contain proximal supports 10087, which can pass down and come into contact with the surface of the plate 10011 of the supporting part. The lid 10080 may further comprise a distal abutment 10083, which may be configured to abut against the nose 10003. When a downward force is applied to the lid 10080, the downward force can be transmitted through the proximal supports 10087 and / or the distal abutment 10083 without transmission , or at least essentially without transmission, downward force directed to the supporting part 10010 through the tissue thickness compensator 10020. In various circumstances, as a result of the above, the doctor cannot directly but in contact with the tissue thickness compensator 10020. Also as a result of the above-described cap 10080 may not compress, or at least does not substantially compress the fabric thickness compensator 10020 when inserting the staple cartridge 10000 within the channel to the staple cartridge. The cover may comprise any suitable number of supports configured to transmit downward force to the support portion without transmission, or at least substantially without transmission, downward force through the tissue thickness compensator. Supports may extend along the distal end, proximal end and / or longitudinal sides of the tissue thickness compensator. Supports can pass through a tissue thickness compensator. For example, supports can pass through holes in the tissue thickness compensator and abut against the panel of the support portion. At least some supports may not contact the panel until a downward force is applied to the cover; however, the cover can be made with the possibility of bending, or moving, down to the contact of the supports with the plate of the supporting part. At this point, bending or moving the lid down may be stopped, or at least substantially stopped.

As described above, the cover 10080 can be attached to the cartridge with brackets 10000 and used to control the position of the cartridge with brackets 10000. The cover 10080 may contain any suitable number of gripping elements that can be made, for example, with the ability to detachably hold the cover 10080 on the support part 10010 cartridge with brackets 10000. For example, the cover 10080 may further comprise one or more retaining elements, such as, for example, latches 10088 and / or 10089. The latches 10089 may be configured to walking along the sides of the bow 10003 and engaging with the bottom surface 10009 (FIG. 306) of the bow 10003. Similarly, the latches 10088 can extend around the sides of the locking protrusions 10008 extending from the supporting part 10010, and engage with the lower surfaces of the locking the protrusions 10008. Such latches can be arranged to place the cover 10080 over the area or region in which the brackets are located inside the support part 10010. In any case, after the cartridge with brackets 10000 is properly placed, the cover 10080 may be separated from the cartridge with brackets 10000. The doctor can apply an upward lifting force to the handle 10084 to separate the distal end of the cap 10080 from the distal end of the cartridge 10002 with brackets 10000. For example, the latches 10088 and 10089 can bend outward when lifting the handle 10084 up so that the latches 10088 and 10089 can bend around the locking tabs 10008 and the nose 10003, respectively. Then, the proximal end of the cap 10080 can be lifted from the proximal end 10001 of the bracket cartridge, and the cap 10080 can be moved away from the cartridge with brackets 10000.

In some embodiments, implementation, as shown in FIG. 309 and 310, the bracket applicator for the cartridge, such as, for example, the bracket applicator 10680, may be arranged to accommodate an upper tissue thickness compensator, such as, for example, tissue thickness compensator 10690, relative to the abutment element in addition to the placement of the cartridge with brackets, such as, for example, cartridge 10600, in the groove of the cartridge with brackets. Similarly to the above, the applicator 10680 may include latches 10688 that can releasably engage with locking tabs 10608 extending from the cartridge support portion 10610 with brackets 10600 so that the applicator 10680 can be held in position above the thickness compensator of the cartridge tissue 10620 with brackets 10600. In various embodiments, the upper tissue thickness compensator 10690 can be removably mounted on the cartridge applicator with brackets 10680 so that the abutment element of the surgical instrument such as, for example, the stop element 10060, can be closed on the applicator 10680, engage with the tissue thickness compensator 10690 and separate the tissue thickness compensator 10690 from the applicator 10680. The tissue thickness compensator 10690 and / or the stop element 10060 may contain one or more holding elements, which can be arranged to releasably hold the tissue thickness compensator 10690 on the stop member 10060. For example, the tissue thickness compensator 10690 may comprise, for example, a longitudinal rail guide 10695 extending from the top the surface 10691 of the fabric thickness compensator 10690, which can be received in the longitudinal groove 10065 of the cutting element, made in the abutment element 10060. The fabric thickness compensator 10690 and the longitudinal rail guide 10695 may be formed from any suitable compressible material, for example, such as described in this application moreover, the longitudinal rail guide 10695 may, for example, be pressed and / or inserted by a wedge into the groove for the cutting element 10065. After the stop element 10060 engages with the tissue thickness compensator 10690, the stop element 10060 can be moved back to the open position, and in such circumstances, the tissue thickness compensator 10690 can separate from the applicator 10680. Then, the applicator 10680 can be separated from the cartridge with brackets 10600, so that the stop element 10060 and the cartridge with brackets 10600 can be position relative to the fabric to be sewn and / or cut. In use, the brackets in the activated position a slide, such as the slide 10050 (FIG. 236), for example, can be extended distally through the cartridge with brackets 10600 trigger element 10052 (FIG. 236), for example, in order to push the brackets out cartridge with brackets 10060, as described above. When the brackets are deformed, each bracket can capture part of the fabric thickness compensator 10690 close to the upper surface of the fabric and part of the fabric thickness compensator 10620 close to the lower surface of the fabric. At the same time, the trigger 10052 will be able to extend the cutting edge 10053 (FIG. 236) through the fabric thickness compensator 10620 and / or fabric thickness compensator 10690, and the cutting edge 10053 can be advanced through the longitudinal rail 10695 to cut the rail 10695 and gradually separate the tissue thickness compensator 10690 from the abutment element 10060. After placing the staples, the abutment element 10060 can be re-opened and moved away from the implanted tissue thickness compensator 10690, and, similarly, the cartridge support portion 10610 and with brackets 10600, it can be moved from the implanted tissue thickness compensator 10620. In addition to the foregoing, the tissue thickness compensator 10620 and / or tissue thickness compensator 10690 may comprise a plurality of detachable segments that can be detached from each other if only parts of tissue thickness compensators 10620 and 10690 will be implanted in brackets.

In addition to the above, the applicator 10680 may include one or more retaining elements, which can be configured to releasably hold the tissue thickness compensator 10690 on the applicator 10680. For example, as shown mainly in FIG. 310, the applicator 10680 may include a longitudinal retaining rail 10685, which can be adapted to receive into the longitudinal retaining groove 10694, made in the lower surface 10692 of the tissue thickness compensator 10690, for example, when installed with an interference fit. In various circumstances, the holding rail 10685 and the holding groove 10694 can be configured to hold the tissue thickness compensator 10690 in the applicator 10680 until the stop element 10060 applies sufficient upward lifting force to the tissue thickness compensator 10690, as described above. For example, the retaining rail 10685 extending from the applicator 10680 may further comprise end stops 10686 located at the proximal and distal ends of the retaining rail 10685, which can be configured to prevent, or at least limit, relative longitudinal movement between the thickness compensator tissue 10690 and applicator 10680. As also shown in FIG. 310, one or more adhesives can be placed on the contact surface 10691 of the fabric thickness compensator 10690, such as, for example, longitudinal adhesive strips 10693 so that when the abutment element 10060 contacts the fabric thickness compensator 10690, as described above, the adhesives can releasably attach the compensator the thickness of the fabric 10690 on the abutment element 10060. One or more adhesives may be used, for example, in addition to or instead of the compressible retaining elements described above. One or more adhesives can be used to releasably hold the tissue thickness compensator on the bracket applicator for the cartridge. As shown in FIG. 310A, cover 10080, for example, may include one or more adhesive pads 12185, which may be removably held to hold an upper tissue thickness compensator, such as, for example, tissue thickness compensator 12190, on top surface 10082 of cover 10080. For example, similarly to the embodiments described above, the stop member may be closed on the fabric thickness compensator 12190 to engage with the longitudinal retaining rail 12195 of the fabric thickness compensator 12190. Between the thickness compensator the fabric 12190 and the cover 10080, a release mechanism can be placed that can be used to break the adhesive bonds holding the tissue thickness compensator 12190 and the cover 10080, and to separate the fabric thickness compensator 12190 from the cover 10080. The release mechanism may include a tongue 12196 and a loop 12197, with a loop 12197 may contain first and second ends, mounted on the tongue 12196. The loop 12197 may contain, for example, a thread that can form a perimeter surrounding the adhesive pads 12185 so that with distal stretching of the tongue 12196, the thread can slide between the tissue thickness compensator 12190 and the cover 10080 and come into contact with the adhesive pads 12185. In such circumstances, the thread can lead to at least one of, for example, the separation of the adhesive pads 12185 from the tissue thickness compensator 12190, the separation of the adhesive pads 12185 from the cap 10080 and / or dissection of the adhesive pads 12185.

As shown in FIG. 311, the cartridge with brackets may contain, for example, a support portion 10710, which, similarly to the above, may include a longitudinal groove for cutting element 10715 passing through it. For example, an applicator for a cartridge with brackets, such as, for example, applicator 10780, may include a longitudinal holding and a leveling element 10786 that can extend into the groove for the cutting element 10715 in the support portion 10710. The holding element 10786 can be adapted to engage with the side walls of the groove for the scalpel 10715, for example er, when installed with an interference fit, so that the applicator 10780 can be detachably held on the support portion 10710. Although not shown, the first part of the tissue thickness compensator may be located on the first side of the retainer 10786, and the second part of the tissue thickness compensator may be on the opposite or the second side of the holding element 10786. Similarly to the above, the first and second parts of the tissue thickness compensator can be fixed to the supporting part 10710 of the cartridge with brackets using, for example, holding elements entov 10013. Also, similarly to the above, the upper fabric thickness compensator 10790 can be detachably mounted on the applicator 10780 using a longitudinal holding element 10785 extending from the loading surface 10782 of the applicator 10780, and the holding element 10785 can be detachably mounted with an interference fit in the longitudinal groove 10794, made, for example, on the lower surface 10792 of the tissue thickness compensator 10790. Also similar to the above, the tissue thickness compensator 10790 may further comprise a longitudinal bead the neighing element 10795 extending from the upper surface 10791 of the tissue thickness compensator 10790, which can be detachably held, for example, in a longitudinal groove for the scalpel 10065 formed in the abutment element 10060. For example, the longitudinal holding element 10795 may have a wedge-shaped cross section containing the upper part, which is larger than the lower part, and the lower part can, for example, fix the holding element 10795 on the compensator for the thickness of the fabric 10790.

As shown in FIG. 312 and 313, the cartridge with brackets 10800, comprising a support portion 10810 and a tissue thickness compensator 10820, can be loaded into the groove of the cartridge with brackets, for example, using the applicator 10880 of the cartridge with brackets. Similarly to the above, the cartridge applicator 10880 with brackets can also be arranged to accommodate an upper tissue thickness compensator 10890, for example, relative to a stop element, such as, for example, a stop element 10060, so that when the stop element 10060 is closed, the stop element 10060 can contact with fabric thickness compensator 10890 and engage with it. The fabric thickness compensator 10890 may comprise a plurality of retaining legs 10895 extending from the upper surface 10891 of the fabric thickness compensator 10890, which may be adapted to engage with the stop element 10060 and releasably hold the fabric thickness compensator 10890 on the stop element 10060. The legs 10895 may be located in the form of a longitudinal row, each leg 10895 may contain at least one foot, made with the possibility of entering made in the stop element 10060 groove for the scalpel 10065 and zats Warmth with him. Some of the legs of the legs 10895 can extend in one direction, and the rest of the legs can extend in the other direction. Some paws may extend in the opposite direction. In any case, after the stop member 10060 engages with the tissue thickness compensator 10890, as shown in FIG. 313 and 314, the abutment member 10060 can be opened again, and the doctor can move the cartridge applicator with brackets 10880 away from the tissue thickness compensators 10820 and 10890. Then, as shown in FIG. 314A, an upper tissue thickness compensator 10890 may be located on the first side of the target fabric, and a tissue thickness compensator 10820, which may include a lower tissue thickness compensator, may be located on the second side of the fabric. After the proper location of the fabric thickness expansion joints 10820 and 10890, as shown in FIG. 314B, a cutting edge of a trigger element, such as, for example, a cutting edge 10053, can be advanced through the fabric and through tissue thickness compensators. As shown in FIG. 318, the applicator for the cartridge with brackets, such as, for example, the applicator 12280, may include a tissue thickness compensator 12290 mounted on it with a possibility of separation, which, similarly to the above, can be inserted into the channel for the cartridge with brackets, as shown in FIG. 319, and engages with the stop member 10060 when the stop member 10060 is moved to the closed position. For example, the fabric thickness compensator 12290 may comprise a plurality of retaining elements 12295 extending upward from the upper surface 12291 of the fabric thickness compensator 12290, each holding element 12295 may comprise a plurality of flexible legs 12296 that can be inserted into the groove 10065 of the cutting element of the thrust element 10060. As shown mainly in FIG. 321 and 322, the flexible legs 12296 of each holding element 12295 can be separated by a gap 12298 so that when the legs 12296 are inserted into the groove 10065 of the cutting element, the legs 12296 can bend inward and then elastically return outward after passing the enlarged legs of the flexible legs 12296 through the groove 10065 cutting element. The enlarged tabs of the flexible legs 12296 can bend behind the oppositely held retaining protrusions 12297 formed in the abutment element 10060, and as a result of the interaction between the legs 12296 and the protrusions 12297, the tissue thickness compensator 12290 can be held on the abutment element 10060. Then, the cartridge applicator with brackets 12280 can be moved from tissue thickness compensator 12290, as shown in FIG. 320. When using the tissue thickness compensator 12290 after implantation, close to the fabric, for example, with brackets placed from the cartridge with brackets 10000, the stop element 10060 can be reopened, and when the stop element 10060 is moved from the implanted tissue thickness compensator 12290, the legs 12296 of the holding elements 12995 can bend inward so that they can be pulled out of the groove 10065 of the cutting element.

As shown in FIG. 315 and 316, a tissue thickness compensator, such as, for example, tissue thickness compensator 11990, may be longitudinally loaded into a stop member, such as, for example, stop member 11960. More specifically, fabric thickness compensator 11990 may comprise one or more longitudinal rail guides 11995, which can be inserted into the distal opening in the groove for the scalpel 11965 of the abutment element 11960 and then proximally pushed until the tissue thickness compensator 11990 is properly placed in the abutment element 11960. For example, each rail 11995 may include a longitudinal holding tab 11996, which may be located, for example, behind the longitudinal holding protrusion 11997, which at least partially forms a groove for the cutting element 11965. As shown in FIG. 316, tab 11996 may extend in opposite directions to be placed behind retaining protrusions 11997 located on opposite sides of cutting element groove 11965. Between the rail guides 11995, a longitudinal gap 11998 can be formed, which can be adapted to allow the rail guides 11995 to bend inward to each other while separating the tissue thickness compensator 11990 from the stop member 11960. As shown in FIG. 317, a tissue thickness compensator, such as, for example, a tissue thickness compensator 12090, may include one or more latches 12098 that can extend around the sides of the abutment element, such as, for example, the abutment element 12060. In use, the latches 12098 may engage with the stop element 12060 and detachably hold the fabric thickness compensator 12090 on the stop element 12060. the stop element 12060 may comprise, for example, one or more recesses or retainer shoulders, 12097, each of which can be adapted have a foot extending from latch 12098. When using the latches 12098 can be bent outward and separated from the abutment element 12060 when moving the abutment element 12060 from the tissue thickness compensator 12090 after at least partial implantation of the tissue thickness compensator 12090.

As described above, the surgical stapler may include a cartridge groove with brackets configured to receive a cartridge with brackets, a stop member rotatably coupled to the cartridge groove with brackets, and a trigger element containing a cutting edge that is configured to the ability to move relative to the thrust element and the groove for the cartridge with brackets. In use, the cartridge with brackets can be placed inside the groove of the cartridge with brackets, and after at least partially spending the cartridge with brackets, the cartridge with brackets can be removed from the groove of the cartridge with brackets and replaced with a new cartridge with brackets. In some such embodiments, the implementation of the cartridge groove with brackets, the abutment element and / or trigger element of the surgical stapler can be reused with a replaceable cartridge with brackets. In some other embodiments, the implementation of the cartridge with brackets may include part of a disposable assembly of the loading module, which may include, for example, a groove for the cartridge with brackets, a thrust element and / or trigger element, which can be replaced with the cartridge with brackets as part of the replacement of the disposable node load module. Some variations of the disposable loading module assembly are disclosed in US Patent Application No. 12 / 031,817 entitled “DESIGNS FOR CONNECTING AN END CLIP FOR SURGICAL CUTTING AND BINDING TOOL”, filed February 15, 2008, the entire disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference. As shown in FIG. 370, a disposable loading module, such as, for example, a disposable loading module 12500, may comprise a support portion 12510, a stop member 12560 rotatably coupled to the support portion 12510, and an elongated shaft 12570 extending from the support portion 12510. Like the brace blocks, described herein, the support portion 12510 may comprise a plurality of bracket cavities 10012 and brackets, such as, for example, brackets 10030 placed, for example, in each bracket cavity 10012. The disposable loading module 12500 may further comprise a triggering element 12552, which can be moved distally to move the thrust element 12560 from the open position, as shown in FIG. 370, in the closed position. The disposable loading module 12500 may further comprise a tissue thickness compensator 12520 located on and / or fixed to the support portion 12510, wherein when the stop member 12560 is in its closed position, the stop member 12560 may be located opposite the tissue thickness compensator 12520 and, in some embodiments, the stop member 12560 may at least partially compress the tissue thickness compensator 12520 when the stop member 12560 is in its closed position. In any case, the trigger element 12552 can be advanced further to push the brackets out of the support portion 12510. As the push-outs, the brackets can be deformed by the stop element 12560 and trap at least part of the tissue thickness compensator 12520. Then, the trigger element 12552 can be retracted proximally, the stop element 12560 can be reopened, and the support portion 12510 can be moved away from the implanted tissue thickness compensator 12520.

In addition to the above, the tissue thickness compensator 12520 may be detachably mounted on the support portion 12510. For example, the support portion 12510 may include a longitudinal retaining rail rail 12526 mounted on its both sides, each rail rail 12526 may contain one or more holes 12528, which can be configured to receive at least a portion of the tissue thickness compensator 12520. After at least partial implantation of the tissue thickness compensator 12520 computer the tissue thickness thicknessator 12520 can be pulled out of the holes 12528 by moving the support portion 12510. As shown in FIG. 371-373, the disposable loading module 12600 may comprise a support portion 12610, a tissue thickness compensator 12620 mounted to separate on the support portion 12610, and one or more retaining rail guides 12626, which may be configured to extend under the tissue thickness compensator 12620 and securing the tissue thickness compensator 12620 to the supporting portion 12610. Each holding rail rail 12626 may comprise, for example, a plurality of holding hooks 12628, which may engage with the supporting portion 12610, on an example, through retaining grooves 12614 made in the supporting part 12610. When using the tissue thickness compensator 12620 can be made, for example, with the possibility of separation from the retaining rail guides 12626 after at least partial implantation of the tissue thickness compensator 12620 and moving the supporting part 12610 from the compensator fabric thickness 12620. In various embodiments, as shown in FIG. 374-376, the disposable loading module 12700 may comprise one or more retaining rail guides 12726, each of which may include a lower bar 12725, which may extend under the fabric thickness compensator 12720, and an upper bar 12727, which may extend over the upper surface 12621 of the thickness compensator fabric 12620. The fabric thickness compensator 12620 can be at least partially compressed between the upper bars 12727 and the lower bars 12725 so that the retaining rail guides 12726 can detachably hold the compensation Op thickness tissue supporting part relative 12620 12610. For example, each retaining guide rail 12726 can comprise one or more retaining hooks 12728, which are engageable with the supporting portion 12610 for retaining the retaining rails on the supporting part 12726 12610.

As shown in FIG. 377 and 378, the disposable loading module 12800 may comprise a holding member 12822, which may be configured to install a tissue thickness compensator 12620 on the supporting portion 12610. For example, the holding member 12822 may comprise a sheet of material placed adjacent to the surface of the supporting portion panel 12611, wherein a tissue thickness compensator 12620 may be attached to a sheet of material, for example, at least one adhesive. The holding member 12822 may further comprise a longitudinal holding rail 12825 configured to extend downward into the groove 12615 of the cutting member provided in the supporting portion 12610. For example, the dimensions and configuration of the holding rail 12825 may be selected so that it is sandwiched between the side the walls of the groove 12615 of the cutting element. When using the trigger element 12552 may contain a cutting edge, which can pass through the groove 12615 of the cutting element during the distal advancement of the trigger element 12552 and longitudinally cut the tissue thickness compensator 12620 and the retaining rail guide 12825. Also, when using brackets, ejected from the supporting part 12610, can pierce a holding member 12822, a fabric thickness compensator 12820, and a fabric located between the fabric thickness compensator 12820 and a stop member 12560. The holding member 12822 may be formed and a biocompatible and / or bioabsorbable material. In some embodiments, the holding member 12822 may be formed of sufficiently compressible material to comprise a tissue thickness compensator defining a tissue thickness compensator 12620. As shown in FIG. 379-381, the disposable loading module 12900 may include a loading assembly including a lower portion 12922 that can be removably secured to the support portion 12610, an upper portion 12990 that can be removably mounted to the abutment member 12560, and flexible a connecting element 12991 connecting the lower part 12922 and the upper part 12990. Similarly to the above, the longitudinal holding rail rail 12825 can extend downward from the lower part 12922 and into the groove 12615 of the cutting element made in the supporting part 12610 in such a way that the lower part 12922 can be detachably held on the supporting part 12610. Similarly, the longitudinal holding rail 12995 can extend upward from the upper part 12990 into the groove of the cutting element formed in the abutment element 12560, so that the upper part 12990 can detachably be held on the stop member 12560. As shown in FIG. 380 and 381, the tissue thickness compensator 12620 can be installed on the lower part 12922 of the loading unit, and to place the fabric thickness compensator 12620 relative to the supporting part 12610, the doctor can bend the upper part 12990 and the lower part 12922 to each other, place the loading unit between the stop element 12560 and the supporting part 12610 and free the curved loading unit so that it can elastically expand and move the upper part 12990 close to the stop element 12560 and the lower part 12922 close to the supporting part 12610. As shown in FIG. 382-384, the boot assembly may further comprise one or more snap hooks extending therefrom, such as, for example, snap hooks 12994, which may be removably coupled to the upper portion 12990 and the stop member 12560 and / or detachably connect the lower part 12922 with a supporting part 12610.

As shown in FIG. 385, the disposable loading module 15900 may, for example, comprise a stop element 15960 and a cartridge channel with brackets 15970, the cartridge channel with brackets 15970 can rotate relative to the stop element 15960. For example, the stop element 15960 may not be able to rotate. The fabric may be located between the stop element 15960 and the channel for the cartridge with brackets 15970, and then the channel for the cartridge with brackets 15970 can be rotated to the fabric to press the fabric against the stop element. For example, the disposable loading module 15900 may further comprise a tissue thickness compensator 15920, which may be configured to contact the tissue.

As discussed above and as shown in FIG. 332, a cartridge with brackets, such as, for example, a cartridge with brackets 10000, may comprise a support portion 10010 and a fabric thickness compensator 10020, the plurality of brackets 10030 may be at least partially stored in the support portion 10010 and may extend into a fabric thickness compensator 10020, when the brackets 10030 are in their inactive positions. The ends of the brackets 10030 do not protrude from the tissue thickness compensator 10020 when the brackets 10030 are in their inactive positions. When the brackets 10030 are moved from their non-activated positions to their activated positions by the brace ejectors 10040, as discussed above, the ends of the brackets 10030 can pierce the tissue thickness compensator 10020 and / or pierce the top layer or sheath 10022. In some alternative embodiments, the ends of the brackets 10030 may extend through the upper surface of the tissue thickness compensator 10020 and / or sheath 10022 when the brackets 10030 are in their inactive positions. In any case, the brackets 10030, extending upward from the support part 10010 before installation, can tilt and / or deviate relative to the support part, as also discussed above. As shown in FIG. 329, a cartridge with brackets, such as, for example, a cartridge with brackets 13000, may include a plurality of guide elements or stops that can be configured to limit the relative movement of the cartridge support portion 13010 with brackets 13000 and the ends of the brackets located therein. As shown mainly in FIG. 330, the cartridge with brackets 13000 may comprise a fabric thickness compensator 13020 mounted on the support portion 13010, and in addition, a plurality of gaskets 13022 fixed to the upper surface 13021 of the fabric thickness compensator 13020. Each gasket 13022 may include a plurality of holes 13029 formed therein, which may be adapted to slide and / or guide the legs 13022 of the bracket 13030 inwardly. In addition to or instead of such holes, the gasket may include any suitable hole, such as for example, a groove, a guide and / or a groove that can be adapted to slide and / or guide the legs 13022. As shown in FIG. 330, the ends of the brace legs 13032 can be located inside the holes 13029 when the brackets 13030 are in their inactive positions. For example, the ends of the brace legs 13032 may protrude above the shims 13022 when the brackets are in their inactive positions. In some other embodiments, the ends of the brace legs 13032 can be located directly below the shims 13022 when the brackets 13030 are in their inactive positions, so that when the brackets 13030 move upward through the fabric thickness compensator 13020, the brace legs 13032 can enter the holes 13029 of the shims 13029 and slide through them. In any case, when the legs 13032 of the bracket 13030 are inside the gaskets, the lateral and / or longitudinal movement of the legs of the bracket 13032 can be limited without blocking the vertical movement of the legs of the bracket 13032 when the brackets 13030 are in the activated position. When placing the brackets 13030, as shown in FIG. 331, the brace legs 13032 can slide upward through the spacers 13022 and pierce the fabric T, make contact with the abutment element opposite the cartridge with the brackets 13030, and deform downwardly with the fabric T and tissue thickness compensator 13030.

In addition to the above, the Gaskets 13022 can be fixed to the fabric thickness compensator 13020 using, for example, at least one biocompatible and / or bioabsorbable adhesive. The pads 13022 and / or the retaining element passing through each tampon may be at least partially placed in the tissue thickness compensator 13020. The tissue thickness compensator 13020 may comprise recesses formed therein that are capable of at least partially receiving the tampon 13022. The compensator the thickness of the fabric 13020 can be formed at the same time, or formed around, gaskets 13022 during molding during production. Gaskets 13022 may contain separate stops that can move independently of one another. As shown mainly in FIG. 330, each tampon 13022 may contain interlocking and / or shaped elements that can be configured to allow and to some extent limit the relative lateral and longitudinal movement of the pads 13022. Each tampon 13022 may contain, for example, a protrusion 13026 and one or more recesses 13027 moreover, the protrusion 13026 of the first tampon 13022 can be placed inside and / or aligned with the recesses 13027 adjacent to it of the second and third gaskets 13022. Between adjacent gaskets 13022 there may be gaps that may allow 13022 rokladkam move or slide relative to one another prior to contact with the adjacent seal gaskets 13022. 13022 can be freely connected to each other. Gaskets 13022 may be detachably connected to each other. For example, gaskets 13022 can be made in the form of a sheet of gaskets connected to each other, and when sufficient force is applied to such a sheet, one or more gaskets 13022 can separate from the rest. As also shown in FIG. 329, the first sheet 13024 of gaskets 13022 can be placed on the first side of the longitudinal groove 13025 and the second sheet 13024 of gaskets 13022 can be placed on the second side of the groove 13025. In addition to the above, the longitudinal groove 13025 passing through the fabric thickness compensator 13020 can be configured to facilitating the passage of the blade of the cutting element of the starting element through the compensator for the thickness of the fabric 13020, and when passing the starting element, the starting element can exert a compressive force on the sheets 13024 and separate or separate less least some pads 13022.

Gaskets 13022 may be formed, for example, from biocompatible and / or bioabsorbable plastic. Gaskets 13022 may be formed, for example, from a solid material, a semi-solid material, and / or a flexible material. The pads 13022 may be placed in the tissue thickness compensator such that the pads 13022 move with the tissue thickness compensator. For example, gaskets 13022 may be flexible enough to bend along with the upper surface of the tissue thickness compensator. The pads 13022 may be configured to remain in the tissue thickness compensator, while in other embodiments, the pads 13022 may be configured to exit or separate from the tissue thickness compensator. Gaskets 13022 may include an upper surface that is flush with the upper surface of the tissue thickness compensator. The upper surfaces of the pads 13022 may be located above and / or below the upper surface of the tissue thickness compensator. The upper surfaces of the gaskets 13022 can be positioned so that they will be visible when looking at the upper surface of the fabric thickness compensator, while in other embodiments, the upper surfaces of the gaskets 13022 can be located, for example, below the layer of the fabric thickness compensator. Guiding elements, for example, can be formed on the upper surface of the tissue thickness compensator. For example, a tissue thickness compensator may not contain a composite material and may, for example, be made from a single piece of material.

As shown in FIG. 338, the cartridge with brackets may comprise, for example, a tissue thickness compensator 13620 and a sheath or topcoat 13621. For example, one or more shims or stops 13622 may be placed in the sheath 13621. Each stop 13622 may contain one or more the holes 13629 formed therein, which can be adapted to receive the legs 13032 of the brackets 13030 when the brackets 13030 are in their inactive positions, as shown in FIG. 338. In use, in addition to the above, the brace legs 10032 can slide through the holes 13629 when the brackets 13030 move from their inactive position to their activated position until the bases 13031 of the brackets 13030 come into contact with the fabric thickness compensator 13620 and, for example, at least a portion of tissue thickness compensator 13620 will not be pressed against the lower surfaces of gaskets 13622. As shown in FIG. 333, the cartridge with brackets may comprise, for example, a tissue thickness compensator 13120 and a sheath or topcoat 13122. For example, a tissue thickness compensator 13120 may comprise, for example, conical legs, outgrowths and / or protrusions 13128 that may extend upward from an upper surface 13121 tissue thickness compensator 13120. The protrusions 13128 may be configured to receive and embrace the ends of the legs 13032 of the bracket 13030 when the brackets 13030 are in their inactive positions, as shown in FIG. 333. The top layer 13122 may also contain conical legs, outgrowths and / or protrusions 13129 that can be aligned, or at least substantially aligned, with protrusions 13128. When using the leg 10032, the brackets can pierce the protrusions 13128 and 13129 and exit the compensator the thickness of the fabric 13120. As shown in FIG. 337, the cartridge with brackets may comprise, for example, a tissue thickness compensator 13520 and a sheath or topcoat 13522. For example, sheath 13522 may comprise conical legs, outgrowths and / or protrusions 13529 that may extend upward from upper surface 13521 of a tissue thickness compensator 13520. Similarly to the foregoing, the protrusions 13529 can be configured to receive and embrace the ends of the legs 13032 of the bracket 13030 when the brackets 13030 are in their inactive positions, as shown in FIG. 337. When using legs 10032, the brackets can pierce the protrusions 13529 and exit the shell 13522.

As shown in FIG. 334, the cartridge with brackets may comprise, for example, a tissue thickness compensator 13220 and a sheath or topcoat 13222. For example, tissue thickness compensator 13220 may include conical dimples and / or recesses 13128 that can extend downward to upper surface 13221 of tissue thickness compensator 13220. The ends of the brace legs 13032 can extend through the recesses 13128 when the brackets 13030 are in their inactive positions, as shown in FIG. 334. The top layer 13222 may also contain conical pits and / or recesses 13229, which can be aligned or at least substantially aligned with the recesses 13228. As shown in FIG. 335, the cartridge with brackets may comprise, for example, a tissue thickness compensator 13320 and a sheath or topcoat 13322. For example, sheath 13320 may comprise thickened portions 13329 that can extend downward to the upper surface 13321 of tissue thickness compensator 13320. In various circumstances, the thickened portions 13329 can be configured to receive at least a portion of the legs 13032 of the bracket 13030 when the brackets 13030 are in their inactive positions, as shown in FIG. 335. In such embodiments, the thickened portions 13329 may hold the bracket legs 13032 in such a position that the legs 13032 will be aligned or at least substantially aligned with the recesses to form the brackets of the thrust member opposite the fabric thickness compensator 13320. As shown in FIG. 336, the cartridge with brackets may comprise, for example, a tissue thickness compensator 13420 and a sheath or topcoat 13422. For example, sheath 13422 may comprise thickened portions 13429 that may extend upward from the upper surface 13421 of tissue thickness compensator 13420. In various circumstances, the thickened portions 13429 can be configured to receive at least a portion of the legs 13032 of the bracket 13030 when the brackets 13030 are in their inactive positions, as shown in FIG. 336. In such embodiments, the thickened portions 13429 may hold the bracket legs 13032 in such a position that the legs 13032 will be aligned or at least substantially aligned with the recesses to form the brackets of the thrust member opposite the tissue thickness compensator 13420.

As shown in FIG. 339 and 340, the cartridge with brackets may comprise, for example, a tissue thickness compensator 13720 and a sheath or topcoat 13721. For example, a tissue thickness compensator 13720 may comprise, for example, pyramidal and / or step legs, outgrowths and / or protrusions 13728, which may extend upward from the upper surface 13721 of the tissue thickness compensator 13720. The protrusions 13728 may be configured to receive and cover the ends of the legs 13032 of the bracket 13030 when the brackets 13030 are in their inactive positions, as shown in FIG. 340. Similarly, the top layer 13721 may contain pyramidal and / or step legs, outgrowths and / or protrusions 13729, which can be aligned, or at least substantially aligned, with protrusions 13728. Shell 13721 may further comprise one or more teeth 13727 extending upward from protrusions 13729, which may be adapted to mesh with a fabric located adjacent to the upper layer 13721 and to prevent or at least limit the relative lateral and / or longitudinal movement of the fabric, the upper th layer 13721 and / or the tips of the legs 13032 parentheses. When using the legs 13032, the brackets can pierce the protrusions 13728 and 13729 and exit the tissue thickness compensator 13720 when the brackets 13030 move from their inactive positions to their activated positions. As shown in FIG. 341 and 342, the cartridge with brackets may comprise, for example, a tissue thickness compensator 13820 and a sheath or topcoat 13821. For example, a tissue thickness compensator 13820 may comprise, for example, pyramidal and / or step legs, outgrowths and / or protrusions 13828, which may extend upward from the upper surface 13821 of the fabric thickness compensator 13820. The protrusions 13828 may be configured to receive and embrace the ends of the legs 13032 of the bracket 13030 when the brackets 13030 are in their inactive positions, as shown in FIG. 342. Similarly, top layer 13821 may comprise pyramidal and / or step legs, outgrowths and / or protrusions 13829 that can be aligned, or at least substantially aligned, with protrusions 13828. Top layer 13821 may further comprise one or more teeth 13827 extending downward into the tissue thickness compensator 13820, which may be configured to prevent or at least limit relative lateral and / or longitudinal movement, for example, of the top layer 13821 and tissue thickness compensator 13820. When used zovanii 10032 feet brackets can pierce the projections 13828 and 13829 and out of the tissue thickness compensator 13820 when the brackets 13030 are moved from their non-activated positions to their actuated position.

As shown in FIG. 343, the cartridge with brackets may include a tissue thickness compensator, such as, for example, a tissue thickness compensator 13920, which may include ribs 13923 and grooves 13924 formed on it, and grooves 13924 can be made between ribs 13923. Each rib 13923 can have one and the same height, essentially the same height or different heights. Similarly, each groove 13924 may have the same depth, substantially the same depth, or different depths. A plurality of brackets 13030 may be at least partially positioned within the tissue thickness compensator 13920 such that the ends of the brackets 13030 can be placed inside the ribs 13923. For example, the legs 13032 of the brackets 13030 may not protrude from the thickness compensator of the fabric 13920 and / or shell or top layer , 13921, mounted on the tissue thickness compensator 13920, when the brackets 13030 are in their inactive positions. Ribs 13923 and / or grooves 13924 may extend laterally through the bracket unit. For example, the cartridge with brackets may include a longitudinal groove for the cutting element, and the ribs 13923 and grooves 13924 can extend in the direction transverse and / or perpendicular to the groove for the cutting element. In various circumstances, the ribs 13923 can be configured to hold the ends of the legs 13032 of the bracket in position until the brackets 13030 are moved from their inactive position to their activated position. As shown in FIG. 344, the tissue thickness compensator and / or the sheath covering the tissue thickness compensator may include longitudinal ribs and / or grooves. For example, a tissue thickness compensator may comprise an upper surface defined by ribs 14023 and grooves 14024, wherein grooves 14024 may, for example, be formed between ribs 14023. The tissue thickness compensator may comprise a sheath 14021, which may comprise a plurality of holes 14029 formed therein, each which may be configured to receive a bracket leg 13032. Holes 14029 can be formed in the ribs 14023, and the ends of the legs of the brackets 13032 can be located below the vertices 14028 of the ribs 14029, located on the same level with the vertices 14028 and / or located above the vertices 14028. In addition to or instead of the above, holes 14029 can be made, for example, in grooves 14024. Each hole may be surrounded, or at least partially surrounded, for example, by a bulge that can strengthen the sheath and / or tissue thickness compensator around the holes. In any case, in addition to the foregoing, the sheath 14021 may be secured to the tissue thickness compensator in any suitable manner, including, for example, using at least one adhesive.

As described above and as also shown in FIG. 233, the surgical stapling instrument may comprise a stop member, such as, for example, a stop member 10060 that can move between the open position and the closed position, for example, to compress tissue T against the thickness compensator of the cartridge fabric 10020 with brackets 10000. In various circumstances, the stop element 10060 can rotate toward the cartridge with brackets 10000 until its downward movement is stopped by some part of the cartridge with brackets 10000 and / or some part of the groove in which the cartridge is located with a bracket sides 10000. At least in some such circumstances, the stop element 10060 can turn downward until the nose of the cartridge 10003 with brackets 10000 and / or fabric T located between the nose 10003 and the cartridge with brackets 10000 begins to interfere with its movement. In some circumstances the stop element 10060 can compress the tissue thickness compensator 10020 sufficiently enough to ensure that the tissue T is in contact with the ends of the staples 10030. In certain circumstances, depending on the thickness of the fabric T, the stop element 10060 can compress p of the thickness of the fabric 10020 is strong enough to ensure that the stop element 10060 is in contact with the brackets 10030 by the time the stop element 10060 reaches its fully closed position. In other words, in such circumstances, the stop element 10060 can deform the brackets 10030 before the trigger element 10052 is advanced into the cartridge with brackets 10000 to bring the brackets 10030 to the activated position. Such circumstances may be acceptable in some embodiments; however, as shown in FIG. 358 and 359, other embodiments are provided in which a distal clearance element, such as, for example, an element, is used to limit the distance at which the stop element 10060 can be closed before the trigger rod 10052 is advanced into the cartridge with brackets 10000 10059. The element 10059 may extend upward from the upper surface 10021 of the fabric thickness compensator 10020 so that the downward movement of the abutment element 10060 can be blocked by pressing the fabric T against the element 10059 and Creating between the resistance forces. When used as described above, the trigger 10052 can move distally into the cartridge with brackets 10000 to the distal end 10002 of the cartridge with brackets 10000 to push the brackets 10030 out of the support portion 10010. At the same time, the trigger element 10052 can engage with the stop element 10060 and place the stop element 10060 at the required distance from the surface of the panel 10011 (FIG. 218) of the support part 10010 above the formed brackets 10030. Thus, the trigger element 10052 can control the distance, or gap, between the fabric contacting the surface of the stop element 10060 and the surface of the panel 10011 in a particular place, and this particular place can move distally while distally moving the trigger element 10052. In various circumstances, this gap may be less than the gap between the stop element 10060 and the surface of the panel 10011 and is controlled or set by the distal a gap-setting member 10059 at the distal end of the tissue thickness compensator 10020. As shown in FIG. 359, the scalpel edge 10053 of the trigger element 10052 can be configured to dissect the distal gap-setting element 10059 when the trigger element 10052 reaches the distal end of the tissue thickness compensator 10020 so that after dissection of the element 10059, the trigger element 10052 can pull the stop element 10060 down to the support part 10010 and reduce the clearance to the required height when actuating the brackets 10030 at the distal end of the cartridge with brackets 10000. In some alternative embodiments, the distal setting yuschy gap member may be configured to crease when approaching said actuator toward the distal end of the staple cartridge. For example, the distal gap-setting element may include a column that can provide resistance to the stop element, as described above, and then crumple sharply when crushing strength is reached when the trigger element approaches the distal end of the cartridge with brackets. This crushing strength may be, for example, approximately 44 N (10 psi). The gap setting element may be configured to fall down on the support plate, for example, when a force is applied to the gap setting element in excess of a predetermined value. In some other embodiments, the distal clearance can be controlled using the bow of the cartridge with brackets. For example, the downward movement of the thrust member 10060 may be limited by the nose until the trigger element reaches the distal end of the block, at which point a compressive force applied to the nose may cause the nose to wrinkle. The nasal part may contain a cavity formed by the walls of the cavity, which can allow the cavity to crumple when a compressive force is applied to it that exceeds a predetermined value. For example, the cavity may be formed by crushable walls.

As described above, the abutment element, such as, for example, the abutment element 10060, can be moved between the open position and the closed position to compress the tissue thickness compensator between the abutment element and the supporting part of the cartridge with brackets. In certain circumstances, as shown in FIG. 360 and 361, the cartridge thickness compensator of the cartridge with brackets, such as, for example, the cartridge thickness compensator 14120 of the cartridge with brackets 14100, can expand laterally and / or longitudinally when the tissue thickness compensator 14120 is pressed against the supporting part 14110 of the cartridge with brackets 14100 The ends and / or sides of the tissue thickness compensator 14120 are optionally limited by the support portion 14110 and / or the stop element 10060, and as a result, the tissue thickness compensator 14120 can expand in these directions without creating compressive pressure, or at least undesirable compressive pressure, inside the tissue thickness compensator 14120. In such embodiments, a trigger element, such as trigger element 10052 (FIG. 236), for example, extending through the tissue thickness compensator 14120, may not experience excessive resistance from the unwanted compressive pressure inside fabric thickness compensator 14120. In other embodiments, as also shown in FIG. 360, the distal end 14125 of the tissue thickness compensator 14120 may be limited, for example, to the nose portion 14103 of the cartridge with brackets 14100. In this particular embodiment, similarly to the above, the distal end 14125 of the tissue thickness compensator 14120 may be bounded by the nose portion 14103 to reduce the likelihood of premature separation the compensator for the thickness of the fabric 14120 from the supporting part 14110. In any case, as a result of the above, significant internal pressure can be created inside the distal end 14125, which can move forward the trigger 10052, especially when the trigger 10052 reaches the distal end 14125. More specifically, in certain circumstances, the trigger 10052 can distally push, raise and / or move the tissue thickness compensator 14120 when it crosses the tissue thickness compensator 14120, and as a result inside an even greater internal pressure can be created at the distal end 14125 of the tissue thickness compensator 14120. In order to at least partially quench this pressure inside the tissue thickness compensator 14120, the nose 14103 can be formed from a flexible material that can allow the nose 14103, for example, to distally bend and create additional space for the tissue thickness compensator 14120. In some embodiments, as shown in FIG. 362 and 363, the bow of the cartridge with brackets may include a part that can slide distally. More specifically, the nose portion 14203 of the cartridge with brackets 14200 may include a sliding portion 14204 that can be slidably connected to the nose portion 14203 so that when the stop element 10060 is closed and / or the trigger element 10052 is advanced to the distal end of the cartridge with brackets 14200 the sliding part 14204 can glide distally and create additional space for the tissue thickness compensator 14200 and thereby at least partially weaken the internal pressure created therein. One of the bow part 14203 and the sliding part 14204 may contain one or more rail guides, and the other of the bow part 14203 and the sliding part 14204 may contain one or more grooves configured to slide in the rail guides therein. For example, the gutters and rail guides may be configured to jointly limit the movement of the sliding portion 14204, for example, by a longitudinal distal trajectory.

In various circumstances, in addition to the above, some brackets, such as, for example, the most distal brackets in a brace cartridge, can capture most of the tissue thickness compensator compared to the proximal brackets in a brace cartridge. As a result, in such circumstances, a greater compressive force will be applied to the tissue trapped in the distal brackets than the tissue in the proximal brackets. Such circumstances may occur when at least a portion of the tissue thickness compensator is moved toward and / or assembled at the distal end of the cartridge with brackets when used as described above, even though the tissue thickness compensator can be formed from a substantially uniform material, having a substantially constant thickness. In various circumstances, it may be desirable for some brackets to exert a greater compressive force on the fabric than the rest of the brackets, and the design of the support portion and / or the tissue thickness compensator may be selected so as to control which brackets can exert a greater compressive force on the fabric and which brackets can apply less compressive force to the fabric. As shown in FIG. 364, the cartridge with brackets 14300 may include a support portion 14310 and, in addition, a tissue thickness compensator 14320 located on the surface of the plate 14311 of the support portion 14310. Compared to the embodiments disclosed herein that comprise a support portion 14310 having a flat or at least substantially flat, the surface of the panel, the surface of the panel 14311 may be tilted to one side or another between the distal end 14305 and the proximal end 14306 of the support portion 14310. The surface of the plate 14311 of the support portion 14310 may have the height of the plate at its distal end 14305, which is less than the height of the plate at its proximal end 14306. For example, the brackets 10030 at the distal end of the cartridge with brackets 14300 can extend over the surface of the plate 14311 more than the brackets 10030 at the proximal end. In various alternative embodiments, the surface of the panel of the support portion may have a surface height at its distal end that is greater than a surface height at its proximal end. As also shown in FIG. 364, the tissue thickness compensator 14320 may have a thickness varying along its longitudinal length. The tissue thickness compensator 14320 may, for example, have a thickness at its distal end 14325 that is greater than the thickness at its proximal end 14326. For example, the tissue thickness compensator 14322 may include a bottom surface 14322 that can be tilted to one side or another to match, or of at least a substantially conformance inclined to one side or another of the surface of the plate 14311 of the support portion 14310. As a result, the upper, or in contact with the fabric, surface 14321 of the fabric thickness compensator 14320 may contain a flat, or at least it is essentially flat, the surface on which tissue T can be placed. In any case, since the tissue thickness compensator 14320 is thicker at its distal end 14325, distal staples 10030 can grab most of the tissue thickness compensator 14320 compared to the proximal brackets 10030, and as a result, the distal braces 10030 can exert a greater compressive force on the tissue T, especially with a constant, or at least substantially constant, gap between the abutment element 10060 and the surface of the panel 14311 at the proximal and distal the ends of the cartridge with brackets. In certain circumstances, however, the stop element 10060 may not reach the fully closed position, and as a result, the gap between the stop element 10060 and the surface of the panel 14311 may be larger at the distal end of the cartridge with brackets 14300 than at the proximal end. Under various circumstances, the distal brackets 10030 may not be fully formed and, as a result, the distal brackets 10030 may not apply the necessary compressive pressure to the tissue T. In embodiments where the tissue thickness compensator is thicker at the distal end of the bracket cartridge, the tissue thickness compensator may to compensate for the conditions created by the non-deformation of the brackets, and apply sufficient pressure to the tissue T.

As shown in FIG. 365, a cartridge with brackets, for example, such as a cartridge 14400, may include a support portion 14410 and, in addition, a tissue thickness compensator 14420 located on the surface of the plate 14411 of the support portion 14410. Similarly to the above, the surface of the plate 14411 can be tilted into one and / or the other side such that, in at least one embodiment, the distal end 14405 of the support portion 14410 may, for example, have a plate surface height that is less than the plate surface height at the proximal end 14406. Thickness compensator tk Ani 14420 may have a constant, or at least substantially constant, thickness along its length, and as a result, the upper or tissue contacting surface 14421 of the tissue thickness compensator 14420 may be parallel, or at least substantially parallel, to the surface contour of the plate 14411. Cartridge brackets 10030 with brackets 14400 can be fully placed in tissue thickness compensator 14420 and support portion 14410 when brackets 10030 are in their inactive position. The brackets 10030 located at the proximal end of the cartridge with brackets 14400 can be fully placed in the fabric thickness compensator 14420 and the support portion 14410 when the brackets 10030 are in their inactive position, while due to the downward inclination of the plate surface 14411 and the upper surface 14421 the tips some brackets 10030, including brackets 10030 located at the distal end of the cartridge with brackets 14400, may protrude from the upper surface 14421 of the fabric thickness compensator 14420 when the brackets 10030 are in their inactive th position.

As described above, the fabric thickness compensator may be formed from one material, the entire fabric thickness compensator may have the same, or at least substantially the same, material properties, such as, for example, density, stiffness, coefficient of elasticity, strength and / or elasticity at each point. In other embodiments, as shown in FIG. 368, a fabric thickness compensator, such as, for example, fabric thickness compensator 14520, may comprise a plurality of materials or layers of materials. The tissue thickness compensator 14520 may comprise a first or central layer 14520a, second or intermediate layers 14520b fixed to the first layer 14520a on both sides thereof, and a third or outer layer 14520c fixed to each of the second layers 14520b. In some embodiments, the intermediate layers 14520b may be fixed to the center layer 14520a using at least one adhesive, and similarly, the outer layers 14520c may be fixed to the second layers 14520 using at least one adhesive. In addition to or instead of adhesive, layers 14520a-14520c can be bonded together, for example, by one or more pairs of interlocking elements and / or fasteners. In any case, the inner layer 14520a can be formed, for example, from a first material having a first set of material properties, the intermediate layers 14520b can be formed from a second material having a second set of material properties, and the outer layers 14520c can be formed from a third material having third set of material properties. Such sets of material properties may include, for example, density, stiffness, coefficient of elasticity, strength and / or elasticity. The cartridge with brackets may comprise, for example, six rows of brackets 10030, wherein the row of brackets 10030 may be at least partially located, for example, in each of the outer layers 14520c and in each of the inner layers 14520b, and wherein two rows of brackets 10030 may be at least partially located in the inner layer 14520a. In use similar to the above, the brackets 10030 can be pushed out of the cartridge with brackets so that the legs 10032 of the brackets 10030 pierce the upper surface 14521 of the fabric thickness compensator 14520, pierce the fabric pressed against the upper surface 14521 against the stop element, and then contact the stop element with so that the legs 10032 are deformed with the grip of the tissue thickness compensator 14520 and the fabric inside the brackets 10030. Also, similarly to the above, the fabric thickness compensator 14520 can be dissected by the trigger element m when advancing the launch element through the cartridge with brackets. For example, the trigger element may cut through the inner layer 14520a and the fabric along a path defined, for example, by the axis 14529.

In addition to the above, the rows of brackets 10030 located inside the inner layer 14520a may contain rows of brackets closest to the edges of the dissected tissue. Accordingly, the rows of staples 10030 located inside the outer layers 14520c may contain rows of staples farthest from the edges of the dissected tissue. The first material constituting the inner layer 14520a may, for example, have a density higher than the density of the second material constituting the intermediate layers 14520b, and, similarly, the density of the second material may exceed the density of the third material constituting the outer layers 14520c. As a result, in various circumstances, the brackets 10030 located inside the inner layer 14520a can create a greater compressive force than the brackets 10030 located inside the intermediate layers 14520b and the outer layers 14520c. Similarly, the brackets 10030 located inside the intermediate layers 14520b can, for example, create a greater compressive force than the brackets 10030 located inside the outer layers 14520c. In alternative embodiments, the first material constituting the inner layer 14520a may, for example, have a density that is less than the density of the second material constituting the intermediate layers 14520b, and, similarly, the density of the second material may be less than the density of the third material constituting the outer layers 14520c. As a result, in various circumstances, the brackets 10030 located inside the outer layers 14520c can create a greater compressive force than the brackets 10030 located inside the intermediate layers 14520b and the inner layer 14520a. Similarly, the brackets 10030 located inside the intermediate layers 14520b can, for example, create a greater compressive force than the brackets 10030 located inside the inner layer 14520a. In other embodiments, any other suitable combination of layers, materials and / or material properties may be used. In any case, the layers 14520a-14520c of the tissue thickness compensator 14520 can be configured to remain bonded to each other after implantation. In other embodiments, tissue thickness compensator layers 14520a-14520c 14520 may be configured to separate from each other after implantation. For example, layers 14520a-14520c can be glued together using one or more bioabsorbable adhesives that can initially hold the layers together and then allow the layers to separate from each other over time.

As described above, the tissue thickness compensator of the cartridge with brackets, such as, for example, tissue thickness compensator 14520, may comprise a plurality of longitudinal layers. In other embodiments, as shown in FIG. 369, the cartridge with brackets may comprise a tissue thickness compensator, such as, for example, a tissue thickness compensator 14620, which may comprise a plurality of horizontal layers. The tissue thickness compensator 14620 may comprise a first or lower layer 14620a, a second or intermediate layer 14620b fixed to the lower layer 14620a, and a third or upper layer 14620c fixed to the intermediate layer 14620b. The first layer 14620a may comprise, for example, a flat, or substantially flat, lower surface 14626a and a triangular, or pyramidal, upper surface 14625a. For example, the second layer 14620b may comprise a triangular or pyramidal lower surface 14626b, which may be configured to extend in parallel and abut against the upper surface 14625a of the first layer 14620a. Similarly to the foregoing, the second layer 14620b may comprise, for example, a triangular, or pyramidal, upper surface 14625b, which may extend parallel to and abut against the lower triangular, or pyramidal, surface 14626c of the third layer 14620c. The upper surface of the third layer 14626c may comprise a flat, or at least substantially flat, fabric contacting surface 14621. Also, similarly to the foregoing, the tissue thickness compensator 14620 may be configured to at least partially accommodate six rows of brackets, such as, for example, brackets 10030, wherein the trigger element can cut through the tissue thickness compensator 14620 between the two innermost rows of staples along a path running, for example, along axis 14629. Similarly to the above, each layer 14620a, 14620b and 14620c may be made of different materials, which may have different material properties, and as a result of the triangular or pyramidal configuration of the layers 14620a-14620c, the fabric thickness compensator 14620 as a whole may have different properties at different points. For example, the outermost rows of brackets 10030 can absorb more than the third layer 14620c than the first layer 14620a, while the innermost rows of brackets 10030 can absorb less than the third layer 14620c than the first layer 14620a, and as a result, the fabric thickness compensator 14620 can for example, compressing the fabric gripped by the outermost brackets 10030 is not the same as the tissue gripping the innermost brackets 10030, even though the tissue thickness compensator 14620 may have the same, or at least substantially the same same, common to all Kah thickness.

As shown in FIG. 286, the cartridge thickness compensator of the cartridge with brackets, such as, for example, the tissue thickness compensator 14720 of the cartridge with brackets 14700, may contain, for example, voids, recesses, channels and / or grooves formed therein, which can change the thickness of the tissue thickness compensator 14720. For example, the fabric thickness compensator 14720 can be placed close to the surface of the panel 14711 of the cartridge support portion 14710 with brackets 14700 so that voids 14723 formed in the lower surface 14722 of the fabric thickness compensator 14720 can be opposite to indiscrete certain cavities 10012 parentheses. The voids 14723 may extend, for example, transverse to the groove for the cutting element 14715 of the support portion 14710, perpendicularly to the groove for the cutting element 14715 and / or parallel to the groove for the cutting element 14715. The voids 14723 may form a protrusion arrangement on the lower surface 14722 of the fabric thickness compensator 14720. B in any case, when placing brackets, such as, for example, staples 10030, from the support portion 14710, as shown in FIG. 287 and 288, some staples 10030 can grip the tissue thickness compensator 14720 inside the region containing the void 14723, while other staples 10030 can grip the tissue thickness compensator 14720 inside the region located between the voids 14723. In addition to or instead of the above, the tissue thickness compensator 14720 may contain, for example, voids, recesses, channels and / or grooves made in the upper or in contact with the fabric surface 14721. As shown in FIG. 366 and 367, the cartridge with brackets 14800, for example, may comprise a tissue thickness compensator 14820, which may comprise a plurality of pads 14823 extending in at least one of the upward directions from the upper surface 14821 of the tissue thickness compensator 14820, inward to the central groove 14825 and / or distal to the distal end of the cartridge with brackets 14800. The pads 14823 can be separated by channels, grooves and / or grooves, such as, for example, channels 14824. As a result of the above, under various circumstances, the full thickness of the tissue thickness compensator may vary between rows of brackets and / or vary between brackets in the same row of brackets. In some circumstances, the protrusions, or thickened parts, can be made and arranged in such a way that they can move in the desired direction, for example, inward, while compressing the tissue thickness compensator.

As shown in FIG. 303, a cartridge with brackets, such as, for example, a cartridge with brackets 14900, may include a support portion 14910 and, in addition, a tissue thickness compensator 14920 located adjacent to the support portion 14910. Similarly to the above, the support portion 14910 may include brace ejectors that can be lifted upward by leading brackets to the activated position by a slide to raise brackets, such as, for example, brackets 10030, at least partially located inside the supporting part 14910, to a stop element, such as, for example, a stop element 10060, p located opposite the cartridge with brackets 14900. The supporting part 14910 may contain six rows of cavities for brackets, such as, for example, two outer rows of cavities for brackets, two inner rows of cavities for brackets and two intermediate rows of cavities for brackets located between the inner rows and outer in rows, wherein the thrust member 10060 may comprise six rows of forming recesses 10062 aligned with or at least substantially aligned with the cavities for the brackets. The inner rows of brackets can contain brackets pushers 14940a located in them, the intermediate rows of brackets can contain brackets pushers 14940b and the outer rows of brackets can contain brackets 14940c, each of the brackets 14940a can contain a pocket 14949a configured to support brackets 10030, each of the brackets ejectors 14940b may comprise a pocket 14949b configured to support brackets 10030, and each of The brackets 14940c may comprise a pocket 14949c configured to support the brackets 10030. In its inactive positions, i.e. when the brackets pushers 14940a-14940c are located on the pusher supports 14926 that extend under the support portion 14910, the brackets of the brackets pushers 14940a can be placed closer to the stop element 10060 than the brackets of the brackets pushers 14949b 14940b of the brackets and pushers 1494940 of the brackets 1494940. In this position, the first forming distance between the pockets 14949a and the forming recesses 10062 located above the pockets 14949a can be determined, the second forming distance between the pockets 14949b and the forming recesses 10062 located above the pockets 14949b can be determined, and the third forming distance between the pockets 14949c and forming recesses 10062 located above the pockets 14949c, and in various embodiments, for example, the first forming distance may be less than the second a spanning distance, and the second forming distance may be less than the third forming distance. When the brackets ejectors 14940a-14940c move from their inactive position (FIG. 303) to their activated position, each bracket ejector can move upward by an equal, or at least substantially equal, distance to the stop element 10060 by the action of the brackets driving the slide so that the first ejectors 14940a push the corresponding brackets 10030 to the first height in the formed state, the second ejectors 14940b push the corresponding brackets 10030 to the second height in the formed state The lights and the third ejectors 14940c will push the corresponding brackets 10030 to a third height in the formed state, for example, the first height in the formed state may be less than the second height in the formed state, and the second height in the formed state may be less than the third height in a formed state. Various other embodiments are also contemplated in which the first ejector brackets 14940a are displaced upward by a first distance, the second ejector brackets 14940b are displaced upward by a second distance and the third ejector brackets 14940c are displaced upward by a third distance, one or more of the first distance, the second distance, and third distances may be different.

As also shown in FIG. 303, the surface of the plate 14911 of the support portion 14910 may have a variable height with respect to the fabric contacting surface 10061 of the abutment element 10060. Such a change in height can occur in the transverse direction, and the height of the surface of the plate 14911 surrounding the inner rows of cavities of the brackets may be greater than the height of the surface of the plate 14911 surrounding the outer rows of cavity brackets. The lower surface 14922 of the tissue thickness compensator 14920 may be made parallel, or at least substantially parallel, to the surface of the plate 14911 of the support portion 14910. In addition to the above, the thickness compensator of the fabric 14920 may also have a variable thickness, with the upper or in contact with the fabric, the fabric thickness compensator surface 14921 14920 may be tilted inward from its outer or lateral edges. For example, as a result of the foregoing, the tissue thickness compensator 14920, for example, may be thinner in the region located above the inner rows of brace cavities and thicker in the region located above the outer rows of brace cavities. As shown in FIG. 304, the plate surface of the support portion 15010 may comprise, for example, a stepped surface of the plate, for example, the highest sections of the stepped surface may surround the inner rows of cavities for brackets and the lowest sections of the stepped surface may surround the outer rows of cavities for brackets. For example, areas of intermediate height may surround intermediate rows of cavities for brackets. A fabric thickness compensator, such as, for example, a fabric thickness compensator 15020, may comprise a lower surface that can extend parallel to and abut against the plate surface of the support portion 15010. The upper or tissue contact surface 15021 of the fabric thickness compensator may comprise, for example, an arcuate a parabolic and / or curved surface, which, for example, can extend from the first side of the tissue thickness compensator 15020 to the second side of the tissue thickness compensator 15020, and its apex, for example, udet aligned, or at least substantially aligned with the center of the staple cartridge 15000. As shown in FIG. 299, the cartridge with brackets 15300, for example, may include a support portion 15310, a plurality of brackets ejectors 15340 arranged to move in brackets cavities made in the support portion 15310, and a tissue thickness compensator 15320 located above the plate surface 15311 of the support portion 15310. Cartridge with brackets 15300 may additionally contain one or more parts of the tray 15326, which can be fixed on the support part 15310 and pass around the lower part of the support part 15310 and support the ejectors 15340 and brackets 15330 in their inactive bathroom provisions. When the slide leading the brackets to the activated position is moved through the cartridge with the brackets, the slide can also be supported by the lower parts of the tray 15326 when the rails 15340 and 15330 lift the brackets upwards through the fabric thickness compensator 15320. The fabric thickness compensator 15320 may contain the first or the inner part 15322a located above the inner row of cavities for brackets, the second or intermediate part 15322b located above the intermediate row of cavities for brackets, and the third or outer part 15322c located above the other row of cavities for the brackets, for example, the inner part 15322a may have a greater thickness than the intermediate part 15322b, and the intermediate part 15322b may have a greater thickness than the outer part 15322c. The tissue thickness compensator 15320 may comprise, for example, longitudinal channels formed therein, which can create thinner parts 15322b and 15322c of the tissue thickness compensator 15320. In alternative embodiments, the longitudinal channels can be formed on the upper surface and / or on the lower surface of the fabric thickness compensator. The upper surface 15321 of the tissue thickness compensator 15320 may comprise, for example, a flat or at least substantially flat surface.

As shown in FIG. 296, the cartridge with brackets may comprise a tissue thickness compensator, such as, for example, a tissue thickness compensator 15120, which may comprise a plurality of parts having different thicknesses. The tissue thickness compensator 15120 may comprise a first, or inner, part 15122a, which may have a first thickness, second, or intermediate, parts 15122b extending from a first part 15122b, each of which may have a second thickness, and third or external, parts 15122c extending from the second parts 15122b, each of which may have a third thickness. For example, the third thickness may exceed the second thickness, and the second thickness may exceed the first thickness, although any suitable thickness values may be used in various other embodiments. Parts 15122a-15122c of the tissue thickness compensator 15120 may comprise stepped portions with different thicknesses. Similarly to the foregoing, a cartridge with brackets may comprise several rows of brackets 10030 and a plurality of ejector brackets having different heights that can deform the brackets 10030 to different heights in the formed state. Also similar to the above, the cartridge with brackets may contain first brackets pushers 15140a that can push the brackets 10030 they support to the first height in the formed state, second brackets pushers 15140b that can push the brackets supported by them 10030 to the second height in the formed state, and the third pushers brackets that can push the brackets 10030 they support to a third height in the formed state, and, for example, the first height in the formed state can be less than a second height in the formed state, and a second height in the formed state may be less than a third the height in the formed condition. As shown in FIG. 296, each bracket 10030 may have the same, or substantially the same, height in an unformed or unactivated state. In other embodiments, as shown in FIG. 296A, first pushers 15140a, second pushers 15140b and / or third pushers 15140c may support brackets of different heights in an unformed state. For example, the first ejector brackets 15140a can support brackets 15130a having a first height in an unformed state, the second ejector brackets 15140b can support brackets 15130b having a second height in an unformed state, and the third ejector brackets 15140c can support brackets 15140c having a third height in an unformed and, for example, the first height in the unformed state may be less than the second height in the unformed state, and the second height in the unformed state may be T he longer a third height of unshaped state. As also shown in FIG. 296A, the ends of the brackets 15130a, 15130b and / or 15130c may lie, or at least substantially lie, in one plane, while in other embodiments, the ends of the brackets 15130a, 15130b and / or 15130c may not lie in the same plane. As shown in FIG. 297, the bracket cartridge may include a tissue thickness compensator 15220 having a plurality of parts with different thicknesses that can be implanted close to tissue T with brackets 15130a, 15130b and 15130c, as described above. As shown in FIG. 298, the brackets 15130a, 15130b and / or 15130c can be deformed to different heights in the formed state, the first brackets 15130a can be formed to the first height in the formed state, the second brackets 15130b can be formed to the second height in the formed state, and the third brackets 15130c be formed to a third height in the formed state, and wherein, for example, the first height in the formed state may be less than the second height in the formed state, and the second height in the formed state may be m nshe third height in the formed condition. Other embodiments are also contemplated in which brackets 15130a, 15130b and 15130c may be formed to any corresponding height values in the formed state and / or any relative height values in the formed state.

As described above, the abutment element of the surgical stapling instrument can move between the open position and the closed position. In such circumstances, the surface of the abutment element in contact with the tissue can be moved to its final or forming position when the abutment element is moved to its closed position. After moving the stop element to the closed position, the surface in contact with the fabric can no longer be adjusted. In other embodiments, as shown in FIG. 351, a surgical stapler, such as, for example, a surgical stapler 15500, may include a stop of the stop member 15560 and an adjustable tissue-contacting adjustment plate of the stop member 15561 located inside the groove of the stop member 15560. In such embodiments, the stop member 15561 can be raised and / or lowered inside the chute of the stop element 15560 to adjust the position of the tissue contact surface of the plate of the stop element 15561 relative to the cartridge with brackets located opposite plate stop element 15561. 15500 The surgical stapler can comprise an adjusting slide member 15564 which, as shown in FIG. 356 and 357, can slide between the channel of the stop element 15560 and the plate of the stop element 15561 to adjust the distance between the plate of the stop element 15561 and the cartridge with brackets. As also shown in FIG. 351 and 352, the surgical stapler 15500 may further comprise a control device 15562 associated with the adjustment slide 15564, which can be advanced proximally to proximally advance the adjustment slide 15564 and / or advanced distally to distally advance the adjustment slide 15564. As also shown in FIG. 356 and 357, the control device 15562 may advance between two or more predetermined positions for adjusting the plate of the thrust member 15561, respectively, between two or more positions. Such predefined positions can be marked on the surgical stapler 15500 in the form of marks 15563 (FIG. 351). As shown in FIG. 357, the adjustment sliding member 15564 may comprise a plurality of abutment surfaces, such as, for example, a first abutment surface 15565a, a second abutment surface 15565b, and a third abutment surface 15565c that can be aligned with a plurality of plate-positioning surfaces, such as, for example, a first positioning surface 15569a, the second positioning surface 15569b and the third positioning surface 15569c, respectively, on the back side of the plate of the stop element 15561 for mounting the plate of the stop element 1 5561 to the first position. To set the plate of the stop member 15561 in the second position, the drive 15562 and the slide member 15564 can, for example, be advanced proximally to re-align the bearing surfaces 15565a-15565c of the slide member 15564 with the positioning surfaces 15569a-15569c of the plate of the stop member 15561. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 356, the sliding member 15564 can be distally advanced so that the first supporting surface 15565a of the sliding member 15564 can be located behind the second positioning surface 15569b of the plate of the stop member 15561, and so that the second supporting surface 15565b of the sliding member 15564 can be located behind the third the positioning surface 15569c of the plate of the stop element 15561 to move the plate of the stop element 15561 closer to the cartridge with brackets. When the plate of the stop element 15561 moves from its first position to its second position, in such circumstances, the adjustable plate of the stop element 15561 can further compress the fabric T located between the plate 15561 of the stop element and the cartridge with brackets. In addition to the above, the height of the brackets in the formed state can be adjusted by the position of the plate of the stop element 15561 relative to the cartridge with brackets, since the forming recesses made in the plate of the stop element 15561, when adjusting the plate of the stop element 15561 will move closer to and / or further from the cartridge with brackets . Although only two positions have been discussed above, the sliding member 15564 can advance to a suitable number of positions to move the plate of the stop member 15561 closer to and / or further from the cartridge with brackets. In any case, after a suitable placement of the plate of the stop element 15561, the slider for accommodating the brackets 15550 can be distally advanced inside the cartridge with brackets for lifting the ejectors of the brackets 15540 and brackets 15530 to the plate of the stop element 15561 and stitching the fabric T, as shown in FIG. 354. Similar surgical stapling instruments are described in US Patent Application No. 13 / 036,647, entitled “SURGICAL STAPLING INSTRUMENT”, filed February 28, 2011, the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.

As shown in FIG. 353, the cartridge with brackets can be placed inside the channel for the cartridge with brackets 15570 of the surgical stapler 15500, which may include a tissue thickness compensator, such as, for example, tissue thickness compensator 15520. When moving the plate of the stop member 15561 to the cartridge with brackets, as described above , the plate of the stop element 15561 can compress the tissue thickness compensator 15520 and / or the fabric T located between the plate of the stop element 15561 and the tissue thickness compensator 15520. As the brackets 15530 are brought into the activated position from the cartridge with brackets as shown in FIG. 355, the brackets 15530 can compress or implant the tissue thickness compensator 15520 close to the tissue T. When the stop plate 15561 is opposite the sliding member 15564 and the fabric has not yet been placed between the stop plate 15561 and the tissue thickness compensator 15520, a gap can be formed between the plate 15561 of the thrust member and upper surface 15521 of the fabric thickness compensator 15520 when the thrust member plate 15561 is in the first position. When the plate of the stop element 15561 is moved to the second position, the plate of the stop element 15561 can come into contact with the tissue thickness compensator 15520. In alternative embodiments, when the plate of the stop element 15561 is located close to the sliding element 15564 and between the plate of the stop element 15561 and the tissue thickness compensator 15520 is not yet placed fabric, a gap can be created between the plate of the stop member 15561 and the upper surface 15521 of the fabric thickness compensator 15520 when the plate of the stop member 15561 is in the first the decomposition and / or second position. For example, the plate of the stop element 15561 may not be in contact with the tissue thickness compensator 15520. In further alternative embodiments, when the plate of the stop element 15561 is adjacent to the sliding member 15564 and the fabric is not yet placed between the plate of the stop element 15561 and the thickness compensator of the fabric 15520, the plate of the stop element 15561, for example, can be in contact with the upper surface 15521 of the fabric thickness compensator 15520 regardless of whether the plate of the stop element 15561 is in the first position and / or second position. Although only two positions of the plate of the abutment member 15611 are described herein, the plate of the abutment member 15611 may fit, or translate, into any suitable number of positions.

As a result of the above, the surgical stapler may include means for adjusting the height of the brackets in the formed state, which in various circumstances can compensate for the difference in tissue thickness. In addition, the surgical stapling instrument may contain other means to compensate for differences in tissue thickness and / or, for example, variations in tissue thickness. For example, the plate of the thrust element 15561 can be raised upward or outward from the cartridge with brackets opposite it to increase the height of the bracket in the formed or actuated state. Accordingly, the plate of the thrust element 15561 can be lowered downward or inward to the bracket unit located opposite it to reduce the height of the brackets in the formed or actuated state. The adjustment of the plate of the stop element 15561, for example, can regulate, for example, the gap between the forming recesses made in the plate of the stop element 15561 and the height of the ejector brackets in the activated state, or, more specifically, the height of the pockets of the ejector brackets in the activated state. Even with such possibilities, it is possible to adjust the height of the staples in the formed state, for example, for working with thicker and / or thinner fabrics, the tissue thickness compensator also allows compensation for working with thicker and / or thinner fabrics and / or compensation for variation in tissue thickness as described above. In such embodiments, the surgeon may have at his disposal several means of compensation in the same surgical stapler.

As described above and shown in several embodiments, a cartridge with brackets with a linear arrangement of slots for brackets and brackets can be used in the surgical stapler, moreover, to launch the brackets from the brackets, the trigger element can be moved distally through the bracket cassette. A cartridge with brackets may contain rows of cavity brackets and brackets that are curved. As shown in FIG. 345 and 346, a surgical stapler, such as, for example, a stapler 15600, may comprise one or more circular or annular rows of cavities for brackets formed in a circular or annular support portion 15610. Such circular rows of brackets may comprise, for example, a circular row internal cavities 15612 brackets and a circular row of external cavities 15613 brackets. For example, circular rows of cavities for brackets may surround a circular or annular opening 15615 made in a stapler 15600, in which a circular or annular scalpel can be positioned to move. In use, the fabric can be placed close to the surface 15611 of the panel of the supporting part 15610 and a stop member (not shown) can be mounted on the surgical stapler 15600 through the drive passing through and / or placed inside the opening 15615 so that when the drive is actuated the abutment element can be pressed against the supporting part 15610 and can press the fabric against the surface 15611 of the panel. After sufficiently pressing the fabric, the brackets located in the cavities 15612 and 15613 of the brackets can be pushed out of the supporting part 15610 and can pass through the fabric so that the brackets can come into contact with the stop element and be sufficiently deformed to grasp the fabric. As the brackets are actuated and / or after all the brackets are actuated, a circular cutting element can be advanced to dissect the tissue. Then, the stop member can be moved away from the support portion 15610 and / or separated from the surgical stapler 15600 so that the stop member and the surgical stapler 15600 can be removed from the surgical field. Such surgical staplers 15600 and such surgical methods can be used, for example, to join two parts of the large intestine. In various circumstances, the circular lines of the staples may be configured to hold together parts of the large intestine for the duration of tissue healing and at the same time allow the retained parts of the large intestine to expand elastically. Similar surgical stapling instruments and surgical methods are disclosed in US Pat.

In addition to the foregoing, a tissue thickness compensator may, for example, be placed and / or secured close to a support portion 15610 of a surgical stapler 15600. A tissue thickness compensator may be formed from a circular or annular piece of material having, for example, an inner radius and an outer radius. In some circumstances, the fabric may be adjacent to the material ring, and if the abutment is used to move the fabric to the supporting portion 15610, the fabric thickness compensator may be squeezed between the fabric and the surface of the panel 15611. In use, the brackets can be operated through the compensator the thickness of the fabric and the fabric in such a way that the brackets can come into contact with the stop element and deform in order to reach their activated position for gripping the parts of the fabric and the comp tissue thickness sensor. In various circumstances, in addition to the above, the ring of material containing the tissue thickness compensator must be sufficiently elastic to allow the parts of the large intestine surrounding the lines of the braces to expand. As also shown in FIG. 345 and 346, the flexible tissue thickness compensator 15620 may comprise, for example, a circular or annular flexible inner ring 15624, which, for example, may form a circular or annular opening 15625. The inner ring 15624 may be designed so that it is not caught by brackets mounted from a surgical stapler 15600; instead, the inner ring 15624 can be placed radially inward with respect to the inner row of cavities for the brackets 15612. For example, the thickness compensator for the fabric 15620 can contain many reeds, such as, for example, the inner reeds 15622 and the outer reeds 15623, passing from it in this way that the tongues can be at least partially captured in brackets when they are deformed. More specifically, as shown mainly in FIG. 345, each inner tongue 15622 may comprise a head located above the bracket cavity 15612 made in the surgical stapler 15600, the head being attached to the inner ring 15624, for example, the neck 15626, and, likewise, each outer tongue 15623 may comprise a head, located above the cavity for the bracket 15613, made in the surgical stapler 15600, and the head can be attached to the inner ring 15624, for example, the neck 15627. The heads of the inner tongues 15622 and the outer tongues 15623 may have yubuyu suitable form such as, for example, round, oval and / or elliptical. The necks 15626 and / or 15627 can also be of any suitable shape, the necks 15627 connecting the heads of the outer tongues 15623 with the inner ring 15624 can be arranged to pass between adjacent inner cavities 15612 of the brackets in the supporting part 15610 so that the necks 15627 are not captured inside the brackets placed from the internal cavities of 15612 brackets.

As shown in FIG. 347 and 348, the flexible tissue thickness compensator 15720 may comprise, for example, a circular or annular flexible outer ring 15724. The outer ring 15724 may be configured so that it is not caught by brackets mounted from a surgical stapler 15600; instead, the outer ring 15724 may be radially outward with respect to the outer row of cavities for the brackets 15613. For example, the tissue thickness compensator 15720 may comprise a plurality of tongues, such as, for example, the inner tongues 15622 and the outer tongues 15623 extending therefrom, that the tongues can be at least partially captured in brackets when they are deformed. More specifically, as shown mainly in FIG. 347, each inner tongue 15622 may comprise a head located above the bracket cavity 15612 made in the surgical stapler 15600, the head being attached to the outer ring 15724, for example, the neck 15726, and similarly, each outer tongue 15623 may comprise a head, located above the bracket seat 15613, made in the surgical stapler 15600, and the head can be attached to the outer ring 15724, for example, the neck 15727. The heads of the inner tongues 15622 and the outer tongues 15623 can have any suitable giving shape, such as, for example, round, oval and / or elliptical. The necks 15726 and / or 15727 can also be of any suitable shape, the necks 15726 connecting the heads of the inner tongues 15622 to the outer ring 15724 can be configured to extend between adjacent outer cavities for the brackets 15613 so that the necks 15726 are not caught inside the brackets placed from external cavities for brackets 15613. In some alternative embodiments, the tissue thickness compensator may comprise a circular or annular flexible inner ring, a circular or annular flexible outer ring, and e, a plurality of tabs that can be connected to the inner ring and / or the outer ring. Some tabs can be connected to the inner ring and some other tabs can be connected to the outer ring. At least some of the tongues can be simultaneously connected with both the inner ring and the outer ring. In any case, in addition to the above, the inner tissue thickness compensator ring 15624 15620, the outer tissue thickness compensator ring 15724 15720 and / or any other suitable tissue thickness compensator can be elastically expandable and / or compressed to expand and / or compression of the tissue to which it was implanted. In addition, although circular or annular support rings are used in the various embodiments described herein, the tissue thickness compensator may comprise a support structure of any suitable shape for connecting tongues to it. In addition to the above, a circular cutting element promoted by a surgical stapler for dissecting tissue sandwiched between the abutment element and the supporting part can also dissect the supporting material. For example, the cutting element may separate the inner support ring from the reeds by dissecting their necks.

In addition to the foregoing, the tissue thickness compensator may comprise detachable and / or relatively movable portions that can be configured to allow the tissue thickness compensator to expand and / or contract to move the tissue to which it was implanted. Turning now to FIG. 349 and 350, a circular or circular tissue thickness compensator 15820 can be positioned flush and / or supported by a panel surface 15611 of a surgical stapler 15600 that can be held in an unfolded position (FIG. 349) as it is inserted into the tissue and after implantation fabric thickness compensator 15820, fabric thickness compensator 15820 can be configured to expand outward, as shown in FIG. 350. The fabric thickness compensator 15820 may comprise a plurality of arcuate portions 15822 that can be joined together, for example, by an inner ring 15824. Arcuate portions 15822 can be separated by seams 15828. In at least one other embodiment, arcuate portions 15822 can be connected to each other, and, for example, the location of the perforations may allow the arcuate parts 15822 to separate from each other. In any case, each of the arcuate portions 15822 may contain interlocking elements, such as, for example, protrusions 15826 and recesses 15823, which can jointly limit the relative movement of the arcuate portions 15822 before implantation of the tissue thickness compensator 15820. In addition to the above, each arcuate portion 15822 can be connected to the inner ring 15824, for example, one or more connectors 15827, which can be configured to releasably hold the arcuate portions 15822 in position. After using brackets, such as, for example, staples 10030 stored inside the support portion 15610, to implant a tissue thickness compensator 15620 close to the fabric, as shown mainly in FIG. 350, connectors 15827 may separate from inner ring 15824 and allow tissue thickness compensator 15820 to at least partially expand to perform movement within the respective fabric. In various circumstances, all arched parts 15822 can be separated from the inner ring 15824, while in other circumstances only some of the arched parts 15822 can be separated from the inner ring 15824. In some alternative embodiments, the arched parts 15822 can be joined by flexible parts that can allow the arched parts 15822 move relative to each other, but do not separate from each other. For example, the flexible parts cannot accept brackets and can be configured to stretch and / or contract to perform relative movement of the arched parts 15822. In FIG. 349 and 350, the tissue thickness compensator 15820 may comprise, for example, eight arcuate portions 15822. In other embodiments, the tissue thickness compensator may comprise any suitable number of arcuate portions, such as, for example, two or more arcuate portions.

In addition to the foregoing, tissue thickness compensators 15620, 15720 and / or 15820, for example, can be configured to compensate for a larger and / or smaller tissue thickness trapped between the abutment element and the abutment portion 15610 of the surgical instrument 15600. Similarly to the foregoing, the height of the brackets in the formed or actuated state can be corrected by moving the stop element to and / or from the support part 15610. More specifically, the stop element can be moved closer to the support part 15610 to reduce the height of the staples in formed state, and, accordingly, the thrust element can be moved further from the supporting part 15610 to increase the height of the brackets in the formed state. As a result, in such embodiments, the surgeon can retract the abutment element from the supporting part 15610 for working with thick tissue and bring the abutment element to the supporting part 15610 for working with thin tissue. In various other circumstances, the surgeon may decide not to adjust the position of the abutment element and rely on a tissue thickness compensator to work with thinner and / or thicker tissue. As a result, in various embodiments, the surgical apparatus 15600 may comprise at least two means for compensating for different tissue thicknesses and / or variations in tissue thicknesses.

As described above, the tissue thickness compensator can be fixed to the supporting part of the cartridge with brackets. The lower surface of the tissue thickness compensator may comprise one of a layer of hooks or a layer of loops, and the surface of a plate of a support portion may comprise another of a layer of hooks or a layer of loops. For example, hooks and loops can be configured to engage with each other and releasably hold the fabric thickness compensator on the support portion. Each hook may comprise, for example, an enlarged head extending from the neck. For example, a plurality of pads containing loops can be glued to the lower surface of the tissue thickness compensator, and a plurality of pads containing hooks can be glued to the surface of the support portion plate. The supporting part may contain, for example, one or more holes and / or recesses, which can be configured to receive an insert containing hooks and / or loops. In addition to or instead of the foregoing, a fabric thickness compensator can, for example, be mounted removably on a thrust member using such hook and loop structures. Hooks and loops may contain, for example, a fibrous surface.

As described above, the cartridge with brackets may comprise a support portion and a tissue thickness compensator fixed to the support portion. As also described above, the support portion may comprise a longitudinal groove configured to receive the cutting element, and the tissue thickness compensator may comprise a retaining element that can be held in the longitudinal groove. As shown in FIG. 386, the cartridge with brackets 16000 may include a support portion 16010 including the surface of the plate 16011 and a longitudinal groove 16015. The cartridge with brackets 16000 may further comprise a tissue thickness compensator 16020 located above the surface of the plate 16011. The tissue thickness compensator 16020 may include a longitudinal a holding member 16025 that extends downward into the longitudinal groove 16015. For example, the holding member 16025 can be pressed into the groove 16015 so that the interaction between the holding member 16025 and the groove 16015 can interfere relative movement of the support portion 16010 and 16020. tissue thickness compensator housing tissue thickness compensator 16020 may be formed of a first material, and a retaining member 16025 may be formed from a second, or different from the first material. The body of the tissue thickness compensator 16020 may be formed of a material having a first strength, and the retaining element 16025 may be formed of a material having a second strength, the second strength may, for example, be higher than the first strength. In use, the brackets 10030 can be fed upward by the ejectors of the brackets 10040 so that the ends of the brackets 10030 can pass through the tissue thickness compensator body 16020, exit the tissue contacting surface 16021 and grab at least a portion of the tissue thickness compensator 16020 close to the target fabric. The cutting element extending through the groove 16015 can cut through the retaining element 16025 as the brackets 10030 are placed. After implantation of the tissue thickness compensator 16020, the holding element 16025 can be pulled out from the groove 16015. In other embodiments, the body of the tissue thickness compensator 16020 can be detached from the holding element 16025.

As shown in FIG. 387 and 389, the cartridge with brackets 17000 may comprise a support portion 17010 including the surface of the plate 17011 and a longitudinal groove 17015. The cartridge with brackets 17000 may further comprise a tissue thickness compensator 17020 located above the surface of the plate 17011. The tissue thickness compensator 17020 may include a longitudinal holding member 17025, which extends downward into the longitudinal groove 17015. For example, the holding member 17025 can be pressed into the groove 17015 so that the interaction between the holding member 17025 and the groove 17015 can interfere the relative movement of the supporting part 17010 and the tissue thickness compensator 17020. The retaining element 17025 can pass through the entire tissue thickness compensator 17020 to its upper surface 17021, and parts of the fabric thickness compensator housing 17024 17020 can be fixed on opposite sides of the holding element 17025. The holding element 17025 also can be configured to resist, for example, lateral deviation of the tissue thickness compensator 17020. Parts of the housing 17024 can be formed from the first material, and the living element 17025 may be formed from a second, or different from the first, material. Parts of the housing 17024 may be formed of a material having a first strength, and the holding member 17025 may be formed of a material having a second strength, the second strength may, for example, be higher than the first strength. In addition to the above, the cutting element extending along the groove 17015 may cut through the retaining element 17025 as the brackets 10030 are placed. After the thickness compensator 17020 has been implanted, the holding element 17025 can be pulled out from the groove 17015. In other embodiments, parts of the housing 17024 may be detachable from the holding member 17025.

As shown in FIG. 388, the cartridge with brackets 18000 may include a support portion 18010 including the surface of the plate 18011 and a longitudinal groove 18015. The cartridge with brackets 18000 may further comprise a tissue thickness compensator 18020 located above the surface of the plate 18011. The tissue thickness compensator 18020 may include a longitudinal retaining element 18025, which extends downward into the longitudinal groove 18015. For example, the retaining element 18025 can be pressed into the groove 18015 so that the interaction between the retaining element 18025 and the groove 18015 can prevent the relative movement of the support portion 18010 and tissue thickness compensator 18020. The retaining element 18025 can extend through the entire tissue thickness compensator 18020 to its upper surface 18021, wherein parts of the body 18024 of the tissue thickness compensator 18020 can be fixed on opposite sides of the retaining element 18025. The holding element 18025 can contain an enlarged part 18026, which can be inserted into the cavity 18016 formed in the groove 18015. For example, the enlarged part 18026 may prevent the retaining element 18025 from being removed from the groove 18015.

The tissue thickness compensator may comprise a composition obtained by extrusion pressing, casting and / or molding into a mold containing at least one of the synthetic and / or non-synthetic materials described herein. The tissue thickness compensator may comprise a film or sheet containing two or more layers. The fabric thickness compensator can be obtained using conventional methods, such as, for example, mixing, mixing, joining, spraying, nourishing, evaporating the solvent, dipping, brushing, vapor deposition, extrusion pressing, calendering, casting, injection molding and that sort of way. During extrusion pressing, the hole can be made in the form of a preform containing at least one hole to shape the forming extrudate. When calendering, the hole may contain a gap between the two rolls. Conventional injection methods may include, without limitation, blow molding, injection molding, foam injection, direct compression, thermoforming, extrusion pressing, foam extrusion, film blowing, calendaring, rolling, solvent welding, coating methods such as dipping and coating run-in, solution casting and film casting, plastisol processing (including coating applied with a knife device, roller and casting) and combinations thereof. In injection molding, the hole may comprise a injection hole and / or channels / distribution gates and / or cavities and mold elements. In direct compression, the composition can be located in the cavity of the mold, heated to the appropriate temperature and molded under compression under relatively high pressure. When casting, the composition may contain a liquid or suspension, which can be poured or otherwise placed in, on and / or around the mold or object to repeat the elements of the mold or object. After casting, the composition may be dried, cooled and / or polymerized to obtain a solid.

A method of manufacturing a tissue thickness compensator may typically comprise the steps of producing a fabric thickness compensator composition, liquefying the composition to provide fluidity and forming the composition in a molten, semi-molten or plastic state into a layer and / or film having a desired thickness. As shown in FIG. 527A, a tissue thickness compensator can be made by dissolving a hydrogel precursor in an aqueous solution, dispersing biocompatible particles and / or fibers therein, providing a molding mold containing biocompatible particles, placing the solution in a molding mold, bringing the activator and solution into contact, and curing solution with the formation of a compensator for the thickness of the fabric containing the outer layer containing biocompatible particles, and the inner layer containing biocompatible particles embedded in them. As shown in FIG. 527A, a biocompatible layer 70250 may be provided at the bottom of the injection mold 70260, an aqueous solution of the hydrogel precursor 70255 having biocompatible particles 70257 located therein may be fed into the injection mold 70260, the aqueous solution may be cured to form a fabric thickness compensator having a first layer containing biocompatible material, such as, for example, oxidized regenerated cellulose, and a second layer containing hydrogel, having biocompatible fibers, such as oxidized regenerated fiber llyulozy disposed therein. The tissue thickness compensator may comprise a foam containing an outer layer containing biocompatible particles and an inner layer containing biocompatible particles embedded therein. A tissue thickness compensator can be made by dissolving sodium alginate in water, dispersing oxidized regenerated cellulose particles therein, providing a casting mold having oxidized regenerated cellulose particles, pouring the solution into a casting mold, spraying or infusing calcium chloride to bring it into contact with a solution to initiate crosslinking of sodium alginate by drying the hydrogel by freezing to form a compensator for the thickness of the tissue containing the outer layer containing oxidized regenerated cellulose, and an inner layer containing a hydrogel and particles of oxidized regenerated cellulose embedded in it.

As shown in FIG. 527B, a method of manufacturing a three-layer tissue thickness compensator may typically comprise the steps of dissolving the first hydrogel precursor in a first aqueous solution, dispersing the biocompatible particles and / or fibers in the first aqueous solution, providing a casting mold 70260 having a first layer 70250 consisting of biocompatible particles, feeding the first aqueous solution into a casting mold, bringing the activator and the first aqueous solution into contact, curing the first aqueous solution to form a second layer 70255, dissolving W halogen hydrogel precursor in the second aqueous solution, feeding the second aqueous solution to the casting mold, curing the second aqueous solution to form a third layer 70265. A three-layer tissue thickness compensator can be made by dissolving sodium alginate in water to form the first aqueous solution, dispersing the oxidized regenerated particles cellulose in a first aqueous solution, by providing a casting mold having a first layer of oxidized regenerated cellulose particles, pouring a first aqueous solution solution in the mold, by spraying or infusing calcium chloride to bring it into contact with the first aqueous solution to initiate the crosslinking of sodium alginate, freeze-drying the first aqueous solution with the formation of a second layer containing a hydrogel having particles of oxidized regenerated cellulose embedded in it, dissolving sodium alginate in water to form a second aqueous solution; pouring a second aqueous solution into a mold for casting, spraying or infusing calcium chloride to bring it to ntakt with a second aqueous solution to initiate the crosslinking of sodium alginate, drying the second aqueous solution to form a third layer comprising a hydrogel.

A method of manufacturing a tissue thickness compensator containing at least one drug stored and / or absorbed therein may typically comprise the steps of providing a tissue thickness compensator and contacting a tissue thickness compensator and a drug to hold the drug in the tissue thickness compensator . A method of manufacturing a tissue thickness compensator containing an antibacterial material may include the steps of providing a hydrogel, drying the hydrogel, swelling the hydrogel in an aqueous solution of silver nitrate, contacting the hydrogel and a solution of sodium chloride to form a tissue thickness compensator having antibacterial properties. The tissue thickness compensator may contain silver particles dispersed therein.

As shown in FIG. 533, a method of manufacturing a tissue thickness compensator may comprise coextrusion pressing and / or chemical bonding. The fabric thickness compensator 70550 may comprise a laminate comprising a first layer 70555 and a second layer 70560, hermetically closing the inner layer 70565 containing, for example, a hydrogel. The hydrogel may contain, for example, a dry film, dry foam, powder and / or granules. The hydrogel may contain superabsorbent materials, such as, for example, polyvinylpyrrolidone, carboxymethyl cellulose, polymer sulfur propyl acrylate. The first and / or second layers can be made in series by feeding the raw materials of the first and second layers, respectively, to the extruder from the hopper, followed by the supply of the first and second layers. The raw material of the inner layer 70565 may be added to the hopper of the extruder. Raw materials can be dispersedly mixed and added at elevated temperatures to the extruder. When the raw material exits the preform 70570 through the hole, the inner layer 70565 can be applied to the surface of the first layer 70555. The tissue thickness compensator may contain foam, film, powder and / or granules. The first and second layers 70555 and 70560 may be face to each other. The second layer 70560 can be aligned with the first layer 70555 to face it with a roll 70575. The first layer 70555 can adhere to the second layer 70560, the first and second layers 70555, 70560 can physically surround the inner layer 70565. The layers can be joined together under the action of a small pressure, under ordinary conditions, an inventory chemical bonding process and / or, for example, using an adhesive to form a fabric thickness compensator 70550. As shown in FIG. 407, the first and second layers 70555 and 70560 can be joined together by a rolling process using, for example, a grooved roller 70580. As a result of the above, the inner layer 70565 can be and / or be hermetically surrounded by the first and second layers 70555 and 70560, which can together form the outer layer, or barrier. The outer layer can prevent or reduce the contact of moisture with the inner layer 70565 until the outer layer is destroyed.

As shown in FIG. 390, the end clamp 12 for the surgical apparatus 10 (FIG. 1) may be configured to receive a staple cartridge assembly, such as, for example, a cartridge with brackets 20000. As shown in FIG. 390, the cartridge with brackets 20000 can be configured to accommodate the chute 20072 for the cartridge cartridge jaw 20070 end clamp 12. In addition, the cartridge with brackets 20000 can be an integral part of the end clamp 12 so that the cartridge with brackets 20000 and the end clamp 12 are formed in type of construction of a single unit. The cartridge with brackets 20000 may include a first housing part, such as, for example, a rigid support part 20010. The cartridge with brackets 20000 may also include a second housing part, such as, for example, a compressible part or fabric thickness compensator 20020. In addition, a compensator the thickness of the fabric 20020 may not be an integral part of the cartridge with brackets 20000, but may be otherwise located with respect to the end clamp 12. For example, the compensator for the thickness of the fabric 20020 can be attached to the stop element 20060 of the end clamp 12 or an otherwise be retained in the end clamp 12. As shown in FIG. 407, the cartridge with brackets may further comprise holding clips 20126, which may be configured to prevent premature separation of the tissue thickness compensator 20020 from the support portion 20010. It should be understood that the tissue thickness compensators described herein may be installed in or otherwise engage with various end clamps, and that such embodiments are within the scope of the present invention.

Similar to tissue thickness compensators described herein, as also shown in FIG. 407, the tissue thickness compensator 20020 can be released from or come out and engaged with the surgical end clamp 12. For example, the rigid cartridge support portion 20010 with brackets 20000 can remain engaged with the staple cartridge channel 20072 of the end clamp branch 20070 when the tissue thickness compensator 20020 comes out meshing with the rigid support portion 20010. The fabric thickness compensator 20020 may be released from the end clamp 12 after the brackets 20030 (FIG. 407-412) are released from the brace cavities 20012 into the rigid support portion 20010, similar to various embodiments described herein. The brackets 20030 may fire from the brackets 20012 so that the brackets 20030 will engage with the tissue thickness compensator 20020. Also, similar to the various embodiments described herein, as shown mainly in FIG. 392, 411 and 412, the bracket 20030 can grab a portion of the tissue thickness compensator 20020 together with the clamped fabric T. The tissue thickness compensator 20020 can be deformable, and the portion of the tissue thickness compensator gripped by the activated bracket 20030 can be compressed. Like fabric thickness compensators described herein, fabric thickness compensator 20020 can compensate for the different thicknesses, compressibility and / or density of fabric T captured by each bracket 20030. Also, as also described herein, fabric thickness compensator can compensate for the effect of gaps formed by improperly formed brackets 20030.

The fabric thickness compensator 20020 may be compressed to a height between uncompressed height (s) and compressed height (s). As shown in FIG. 407, the fabric thickness compensator 20020 may have an upper surface 20021 and a lower surface 20022. The height of the fabric thickness compensator may be the distance between the upper surface 20021 and the lower surface 20022. The uncompressed height of the fabric thickness compensator 20020 may be the distance between the upper surface 20021 and the lower surface 20022 when a minimum or zero force is applied to the tissue thickness compensator 20020, i.e. when the fabric thickness compensator 20020 is not compressed. The compressed height of the fabric thickness compensator 20020 may be the distance between the upper surface 20021 and the lower surface 20022 when a force is applied to the fabric thickness compensator 20020, which is generated, for example, when a portion of the fabric thickness compensator 20020 is activated by the bracket 20020. The fabric thickness compensator 20020 may have a distal end 20025 and a proximal end 20026. As shown in FIG. 407, The uncompressed height of the tissue thickness compensator 20020 may be the same from the distal end 20025 to the proximal end 20026 of the tissue thickness compensator 20020. Furthermore, the uncompressed height may vary between the distal end 20025 and the proximal end 20026. For example, the upper surface 20021 and / or the lower surface 20022 of the tissue thickness compensator 20020 can be tilted or made stepwise with respect to each other so that the uncompressed height changes in the area between the proximal end 20026 and the distal end 20025. N The compressed height of the fabric thickness compensator 20020 may be, for example, approximately 2.0 mm (0.08 inches). In addition, the uncompressed height of the fabric thickness compensator 20020 may vary, for example, between approximately 0.64 mm (0.025 inches) and approximately 2.5 mm (0.10 inches).

As described in more detail in this document, the tissue thickness compensator 20020 can be compressed to various compressed heights in the region between its proximal end 20026 and the distal end 20025. In addition, the tissue thickness compensator 20020 can be equally compressed along its entire length. The compressed height (s) of the fabric thickness compensator 20020 may depend, for example, on the geometry of the end clamp 12, the characteristics of the fabric thickness compensator 20020, the gripped fabric T and / or the engaged brackets 20030. The compressed height of the fabric thickness compensator 20020 may be related to the clearance of the fabric in the end clamp 12. When the stop member 20060 is pressed against the cartridge with brackets 20000, between the upper surface of the plate 20011 (FIG. 407) of the cartridge with brackets 20000 and the fabric contacting surface 20061 (FIG. 390) of the stop member 20060, for example, may form sya gap. The fabric clearance may be, for example, approximately 0.64 mm (0.025 inches) or approximately 2.5 mm (0.100 inches). The fabric clearance may be approximately 0.750 mm or approximately 3.500 mm, for example. The compressed height of the fabric thickness compensator 20020 may, for example, equal or substantially equal the clearance of the fabric. When the fabric T is placed within the fabric gap of the end clamp 12, the compressed height of the fabric thickness compensator may be smaller to accommodate fabric T. For example, when the fabric clearance is approximately 0.750 mm, the compressed height of the fabric thickness compensator may be approximately 0.500 mm. And when the tissue clearance is approximately 3,500 mm, the compressed height of the tissue thickness compensator may be, for example, approximately 2,500 mm. Moreover, the fabric thickness compensator 20020 may comprise a minimum compressed height. For example, the minimum height of the fabric thickness compensator 20020 may be approximately 0.250 mm. The tissue gap formed by the honey on the surface of the cartridge plate with brackets and the surface of the abutment element in contact with the tissue can, for example, equal or at least substantially equal the uncompressed height of the tissue thickness compensator.

As shown mainly in FIG. 391, fabric thickness compensator 20020 may comprise fibrous, non-woven fabric 20080 containing fibers 20082. Fabric thickness compensator 20020 may comprise felt or materials based thereon. Fibers 20082 of non-woven fabric 20080 can be sewn together by any means known to a person skilled in the art, including, without limitation, needle-punched, thermal bonding, hydro-bonding, ultrasonic bonding, chemical bonding, and bloom bonding. In addition, layers of nonwoven fabric 20080 can be mechanically, thermally or chemically crosslinked together to form a fabric thickness compensator 20020. As described in more detail herein, fibrous nonwoven fabric 20080 can be compressed to allow fabric thickness compensator 20020 to compress. Fabric thickness compensator 20020 may also contain an incompressible part. For example, a fabric thickness compensator 20020 may comprise a compressible nonwoven fabric 20080 and an incompressible portion.

Also, as shown mainly in FIG. 391, the nonwoven fabric 20080 may comprise a plurality of fibers 20082. At least some of the fibers 20082 of the nonwoven fabric 20080 may be crimped fibers 20086. Curved fibers 20086 may be, for example, crimped, twisted, rolled into a ring, curved, curved, spiral, twisted and / or curved in non-woven fabric 20080. As described in more detail herein, crimped fibers 20086 can be formed in any suitable shape so that deformation of crimped fibers 20086 creates a spring load or recovers pressing force. Curled fibers 20086 may be formed by temperature to form an annular or substantially similar annular shape. The crimped fibers 20086 can be formed from the twisted fibers of 20084. For example, the twisted fibers of 20084 can be wound around a heated core to form a substantially similar annular shape.

The tissue thickness compensator 20020 may comprise a uniform absorbable polymer matrix. The uniform absorbable polymer matrix may comprise, for example, foam, gel and / or film. Additionally, many fibers 20082 can be dispersed in a uniform absorbable polymer matrix. At least some of the fibers 20082 in the uniform absorbable polymer matrix may be, for example, crimped fibers 20086. As described in more detail herein, the uniform absorbable polymer matrix of the tissue thickness compensator 2002 may be compressible.

As shown in FIG. 394 and 395, crimped fibers 20086 can be randomly dispersed in at least a portion of nonwoven fabric 20080. For example, crimped fibers 20086 can be randomly dispersed in nonwoven fabric 20080 such that one part of nonwoven fabric 20080 contains more crimped fibers 20086, than the other part of non-woven fabric 20080. Additionally, crimped fibers 20086 in non-woven fabric 20080 can be collected, for example, in fiber clusters 20085a, 20085b, 20085c, 20085d and 20085e. The shape of crimped fibers 20086 may cause tangling of fibers 20086 during the production of nonwoven fabric 20080; tangling of crimped fibers 20086 can, in turn, lead to the formation of fibrous clusters 20085a, 20085b, 20085c, 20085d and 20085e. In addition, or in addition, crimped fibers 20086 may be randomly oriented in non-woven fabric 20080. For example, as shown in FIG. 391, the first crimped fiber 20086a can be oriented in the first direction, the second crimped fiber 20086b can be oriented in the second direction, and the third crimped fiber 20086c can be oriented in the third direction.

The crimped fibers 20086 can be systematically distributed and / or arranged in at least a portion of the nonwoven fabric 20080. For example, as shown in FIG. 396, crimped fibers 20186 can be arranged in a pattern 20185 in which a plurality of crimped fibers 20186a are arranged in a first direction and another plurality of crimped fibers 20186b are arranged in a different direction. Curved fibers 20186 can overlap each other in such a way that they are tangled or interconnected. Curved fibers 20186 can be arranged in a systematic manner such that one crimped fiber 20186a is substantially parallel to another crimped fiber 20186a. And yet another curved fiber 20186b can be arranged substantially transverse to some crimped fibers 20186a. Curved fibers 20186a may be substantially aligned with the first Y axis, and crimped fibers 20186b may be substantially aligned with the second X axis. In some embodiments, the first Y axis may be, for example, perpendicular or substantially perpendicular to the second X axis.

As shown mainly in FIG. 397, crimped fibers 20286 may be located at location 20285. Each of crimped fibers 20286 may include a longitudinal axis located between the first end 20287 and second end 20289 of crimped fiber 20286. Curled fibers 20286 can be systemically distributed in non-woven fabric 20080 in such a way that the first end 20287 of one crimped fiber 20286 is adjacent to the second end 20289 of another crimped fiber 20286. In another example, as shown already in FIG. 398, the fiber arrangement 20385 may comprise, for example, a first crimped fiber 20386a oriented in the first direction, a second crimped fiber 20386b oriented in the second direction, and third crimped fiber 20386c oriented in the third direction. The same pattern or arrangement of crimped fibers 20286 may be repeated throughout the nonwoven fabric 20080. Curled fibers may be arranged in different patterns throughout the nonwoven fabric 20080. In addition, additionally, the nonwoven fabric 20080 may comprise at least one pattern of crimped fibers, and a plurality of randomly oriented and / or randomly distributed crimped fibers.

As shown again in FIG. 391, the plurality of fibers 20082 in the nonwoven fabric 20080 may comprise at least several non-twisted fibers 20084. Such non-twisted fibers 20084 and crimped fibers 20086 in the non-woven material 20080 may be tangled or interconnected. The ratio of crimped fibers 20086 to uncoiled fibers 20084 may be, for example, approximately 25: 1. In another example, the ratio of crimped fibers 20086 to non-twisted fibers 20084 may be, for example, approximately 1:25. In other embodiments, the ratio of crimped fibers 20086 to non-twisted fibers 20084 may be, for example, approximately 1: 1. As described in more detail in this document, the number of crimped fibers 20086 per unit volume of non-woven material 20080 may affect the recovery force created by the non-woven material 20080 after deformation of the non-woven material 20080. As also described in more detail in this document, the recovery force created by the non-woven material 20080 may also depend, for example, on the material, shape, size, position and / or orientation of the crimped and non-twisted fibers 20086, 20084 in the non-woven material 20080.

Fibers 20082 non-woven material 20080 may contain a polymer composition. The polymer composition of fibers 20082 may contain non-absorbable polymers, absorbable polymers, or combinations thereof. Examples of absorbed polymers are bioresorbable, biocompatible elastomer polymers. Moreover, the polymeric fiber compound 20082 may contain synthetic polymers, non-synthetic polymers, or combinations thereof. Examples of synthetic polymers are, without limitation, polyglycolic acid (PGA), polylactic acid (PLA), polycaprolactone (PCL), polydioxanone (PDO) and their copolymers. For example, 20082 fibers may contain a 90/10 poly (glycolide-L-lactide) copolymer, such as, for example, a copolymer sold by Ethicon, Inc. under the trade name "VICRYL (polyglactic 910)." Examples of non-synthetic polymers are, without limitation, lyophilized polysaccharide, glycoprotein, elastin, proteoglycan, glutin, collagen, and oxidized regenerated cellulose (ORC). Similar to the polymeric compounds in the tissue thickness compensator, the polymeric fiber compound 20082 may include a varying amount by weight in percent, for example, of absorbable polymers, non-absorbable polymers, synthetic polymers and / or non-synthetic polymers.

Curled fibers 20086 of nonwoven fabric 20080 may comprise a first polymer compound, and uncoiled fibers 20084 of nonwoven fabric 20080 may comprise another polymer composition. For example, crimped fibers 20086 may contain synthetic polymer (s), such as, for example, 90/10 poly (glycolide-L-lactide), while un twisted fibers 20084 may contain non-synthetic polymer (s), such as, for example, oxidized regenerated cellulose. In other embodiments, crimped fibers 20086 and uncoiled fibers 20084 may contain the same polymer composition.

As described herein, crimped fibers 20086 and twisted fibers 20084 can be bonded together, for example, by needle punching, thermal bonding, hydro-bonding, ultrasonic bonding, chemical bonding, and bloom bonding. Curled fibers 20086 containing synthetic polymers, such as, for example, “VICRYL (polyglactic 910)” and uncoiled fibers 20084 containing oxidized regenerated cellulose, can be bonded together by needle punching to form a non-woven material 20080. Non-woven material 20080 may contain, for example from about 5 to 50 weight. % crimped fibers "VICRYL (polyglactic 910)" 20086 and from about 5 to 50 weight. % unrefined fibers of oxidized regenerated cellulose (ORC) 20084. When non-woven fabric 20080 is in contact with T tissue, uncoiled fibers of ORC 20084 can quickly react with tissue plasma to form, for example, a gluten mass. The formation of gluten mass ORC can occur instantly or almost instantly in contact with tissue. Additionally, after the formation of the ORC gluten mass, the “VICRYL (polyglactic 910)” crimped fibers 20086 may remain dispersed in the non-woven fabric 20080. For example, the 20086 crimped fibers may be suspended in the ORC gluten mass. When the ORC gluten mass is biologically absorbed, the crimped VICRYL (polyglactic 910) 20086 fibers can exert spring force on adjacent tissue, as described in more detail herein. Additionally, the tissue may begin to heal around the fibers of "VICRYL (polyglactic 910)" and / or the formed brackets 30030, which is also described in more detail herein.

As shown mainly in FIG. 407-410, the cartridge support portion 20010 with brackets 20000 may comprise a cartridge housing 20017, an upper surface of a plate 20011, and a plurality of brace cavities 20012. Each bracket cavity 20012 may form an opening in the surface of the plate 20011. The bracket 20030 may be removably mounted in the bracket cavity 20012. In each cavity 20012 for the bracket is placed one bracket 20030. As shown mainly in FIG. 411 and 412, and similarly to the brackets described herein, each bracket 20030 may comprise a base 20031 having a first end 20035 and a second end 20036. The bracket leg 20032 may extend from the first end 20035 of the base 20031, and the other bracket leg 20032 may extend from the second end 20036 of this foundation 20031. As can be seen from FIG. 407-410, before installing the brackets 20030, the base 20031 of each bracket 20030 can be supported by a bracket ejector 20040 located inside the rigid support portion 2010 of the cartridge with brackets 20,000. Also, before installing the brackets 20030, the legs 20032 of each bracket 20030 may be at least partially inside the cavity 20012 for brackets.

The brackets 20030 can be set between the initial position and the activated position. For example, as shown mainly in FIG. 410, the brackets 20030 may be in the initial position (brackets 20030e, 20030f), in the partially activated or intermediate position (brackets 20030c, 20030d), or in the activated position (brackets 20030a, 20030b). The ejector 20040 can facilitate the movement of the bracket between the initial position and the activated position. For example, the base 20031 of each bracket 20030 may be supported by the ejector 20040. The bracket legs 20032 (for example, the bracket legs 20030e, 20030f in FIG. 409) may be located within the bracket cavity 20012. As the trigger element or activating slide 2050 brackets move from the proximal end 20001 to the distal end 20002 of the cartridge with brackets 20000, the inclined surface 20051 of the slide 20050 can be brought into contact with the inclined surface 20042 of the ejector 20040 in order to establish the bracket 20030 located above ejector 20040, which came into contact with the inclined surface of the sled. The brackets 20030 can be installed between the initial position and the activated position so that the legs 20032 pass through the nonwoven fabric 20080 of the fabric thickness compensator 20020, penetrate the upper surface 20021 of the fabric thickness compensator 20020, penetrate the fabric T and are brought into contact with the stop element 20060 ( FIG. 390), located opposite the cartridge with brackets 20000 in the end clamp 12. The legs 20032 brackets can be deformed by the stop element 20060, and the legs 20032 of each bracket 20030 can tear part of the non-woven material 20080 and part ani T.

In the activated configuration (FIGS. 411 and 412), each bracket 20030 can exert a compressive force on the fabric T and tissue thickness compensator 20020 trapped inside the bracket 20030. As shown mainly in FIG. 409 and 410, the legs 20032 of each bracket 20030 can be deformed downward towards the base 20031 of the bracket 20030 to form a grip area of the bracket 20039. The grip area of the bracket 20039 can be an area in which the fabric T and the thickness compensator 20020 can be caught by the activated bracket 20030. In various situations, the grip area of the bracket 20039 may be formed between the inner surfaces of the deformed legs 20032 and the inner surface of the base 20031 of the bracket 20030. The size of the grip area of the bracket 20039 for the bracket 20030 may depend l from several factors, such as the length of the legs, the diameter of the legs, the width of the base and / or the degree of deformation of the legs.

When the nonwoven fabric 20080 is gripped in the grip area of the bracket 20039, the captured portion of the nonwoven fabric 20080 can be compressed. The compressed height of the nonwoven fabric 20080 captured in the grip area of the bracket 20039 may vary within the cartridge with the brackets 20000 depending on the fabric T falling into the same grip area of the bracket 20039. For example, in the case where the tissue T is thinner, the grip area of the bracket 20039 may have more space for the non-woven fabric 20080, and as a result, the non-woven fabric 20080 may not be as compressed as in the case of a thicker fabric T. In the case where the fabric T is thicker, the non-woven fabric 20080 may be compressed more strongly, for example to accommodate thicker tissue T. For example, as shown in FIG. 411, the nonwoven fabric 20080 can be compressed, for example, to a first height in the first grip area of the bracket 20039a, to a second height in the second grip area of the bracket 20039b, to a third height in the third grip area of the bracket 20039c, to a fourth height in the fourth grip area of the bracket 20039d and to a fifth height in the fifth bracket capture region 20039e. Similarly, as shown in FIG. 412, the nonwoven fabric 20080 can be compressed, for example, to a first height in the first gripping area of the bracket 20039a, to a second height in the second gripping area of the bracket 20039b, to a third height in the third gripping area of the bracket 20039c and to a fourth height in the fourth gripping area of the bracket 20039d. In alternative embodiments, the compressed height of the nonwoven fabric 20080 may be the same at each point of the cartridge with brackets 20010.

The applied force can translate the nonwoven fabric 20080 from the initial uncompressed configuration into a compressed configuration. Additionally, the nonwoven fabric 20080 may be resilient so that the compression of the nonwoven fabric 20080 can create a spring or restoring force. In a deformed state, the nonwoven material 20080 may tend to bounce back from a compressed or deformed configuration. As the nonwoven fabric 20080 tends to bounce back, it can exert a springing or restoring force on the fabric, which is also trapped in the grip region of the bracket 30039, as described in more detail herein. After subsequently the applied force ceases to act, the restoring force may cause the nonwoven material to bounce back from the compressed configuration. Non-woven fabric 20080 may bounce back to the initial, uncompressed configuration, or may bounce back to a substantially similar, uncompressed configuration. The deformation of the nonwoven material 20080 may be elastic. The deformation of the nonwoven material may be partially elastic and partially inelastic.

When a portion of the nonwoven fabric 20080 is compressed in the grip area of the bracket 20039, crimped fibers 20086 in this portion of the nonwoven compensator 20039 can also be compressed or otherwise deformed. The degree of deformation of crimped fiber 20086 may correspond to the degree of compression of the captured portion of the nonwoven material 20080. For example, as shown in FIG. 392, the nonwoven fabric 20080 may be gripped by the installed brackets 20030. If the nonwoven fabric 20080 is more compressed by the installed brackets 20030, the average deformation of the crimped fibers 20086 may be larger. Also, if the non-woven fabric 20080 is less compressed by the set brackets, the average deformation of the crimped fibers 20086 may be less. Similarly, as shown in FIG. 411 and 412, in the grip region of the bracket 20039d, where the nonwoven fabric 20080 is more compressed, the crimped fibers 20086 in such a grip region of the bracket 20039d can be more deformed on average. Additionally, in the grip area of the bracket 20039a, where the nonwoven fabric 20080 is less compressed, the crimped fibers 20086 in such a grip area of the bracket 20039a can be less deformed on average.

The ability of non-woven fabric 20080 to bounce back from a deformed configuration, i.e. the elasticity of the nonwoven fabric 20080 may be a function of the elasticity of the crimped fibers 20086 in the nonwoven fabric 20080. The curled fibers 20086 may deform elastically. Deformation of crimped fibers 20086 may be partially elastic and partially inelastic. Compression of each crimped fiber 20086 may result in crimped fibers 20086 creating a springing or restoring force. For example, compressed crimped fibers 20086 can create a restoring force as 20086 fibers tend to bounce out of their compressed configuration. Fibers 20086 may seek to return to their initial, uncompressed configuration, or to a configuration substantially similar to the initial, uncompressed configuration. The crimped fibers 20086 may seek to partially return to their initial configuration. Only a portion of crimped fibers 20086 in nonwoven fabric 20080 can be resilient. If the crimped fiber 20086 consists of a linearly elastic material, the recovery force of the compressed crimped fiber 20086 can be, for example, a function of the compression ratio of the crimped fiber 20086 and the stiffness coefficient of the crimped fiber 20086. The stiffness coefficient of the crimped fiber 20086 can at least depend, for example, on orientation, material, shape and / or size of crimped fiber 20086.

Curled fibers 20086 in non-woven fabric 20080 may contain the same stiffness coefficient. In alternative embodiments, the stiffness coefficient of crimped fibers 20086 in nonwoven fabric 20080 may be different. The more squeezed fiber 20086 is compressed with a high stiffness coefficient, the greater the restoring force is created by such crimped fiber. The less squeezed fiber 20086 is compressed with the same high stiffness coefficient, the less restoring force this crimped fiber creates. The total restoring force created by compressed crimped fibers 20086 in non-woven fabric 20080 can create a combined restoring force at each point of the non-woven fabric 20080 of the fabric thickness compensator 20020. The non-woven material 20080 can exert a combined restoring force on the fabric T trapped inside the activated bracket 20030 with the compressed non-woven fabric material 20080.

Moreover, the number of crimped fibers 20086 in a unit volume of nonwoven fabric 20080 may affect the stiffness coefficient of nonwoven fabric 20080. For example, the elasticity of nonwoven fabric 20080 may be low when, for example, the number of crimped fibers 20086 in a unit volume of nonwoven fabric 2080 is small; the elasticity of the nonwoven material 20080 may be higher when, for example, the number of crimped fibers 20086 in a unit volume of the nonwoven material 20080 is higher; and the elasticity of the nonwoven material 20080 can be even higher when, for example, the number of crimped fibers 20086 in a unit volume of the nonwoven material 20080 is even greater. When the elasticity of the non-woven fabric 20080 is low, as in the case where the number of crimped fibers 20086 in a unit volume of the non-woven fabric 20 080 is small, the combined restoring force exerted by the compensator for the thickness of the fabric 20020 to the captured fabric T can also be small. When the elasticity of the nonwoven fabric 20080 is higher, as in the case where the number of crimped fibers 20086 in the unit volume of the nonwoven fabric 20080 is greater, the total restoring force exerted by the compensator of the thickness of the fabric 20020 to the captured fabric T can also be higher.

As shown mainly in FIG. 393, a non-woven fabric 20080 'of a fabric thickness compensator 20020' may comprise, for example, a therapeutic preparation 20088, such as a medicine and / or a pharmaceutically active drug. Non-woven fabric 20080 ′ may produce a therapeutically effective amount of therapeutic drug 20088. For example, therapeutic drug 20088 may be released as the non-woven fabric 20080 ′ is absorbed. The therapeutic drug 20088 can be released into a liquid, such as, for example, blood passing near or through the non-woven fabric 20080 ′. Examples of therapeutic drugs 20088 are, without limitation, hemostatic agents and drugs, such as, for example, fibrin, thrombin and / or oxidized regenerated cellulose (ORC); anti-inflammatory drugs, for example, diclofenac, aspirin, naproxen, sulindac and / or hydrocortisone; antibiotics and antimicrobial drugs or agents, such as, for example, triclosan, silver ions, ampicillin, gentamicin, polymyxin B and / or chloramphenicol; and anti-cancer agents, for example, cisplatin, mitomycin and / or adriamycin. The therapeutic agent 20088 may comprise a biological cell, such as, for example, a stem cell. Fibers 20082 of nonwoven fabric 20080 ′ may comprise therapeutic agent 20088. In alternative embodiments, therapeutic agent 20088 may be added to nonwoven fabric 20080 ′ or otherwise integrated into a fabric thickness compensator 20020 ′.

As shown mainly in FIG. 399-399B, the fabric thickness compensator 20520 of the end clamp 12 (FIG. 390) may comprise a plurality of spiral or coiled fibers 20586. Similarly to the crimped fibers 20086 described herein, the coiled fibers 20586 may be, for example, crimped, twisted folded into a ring, curved, curved, twisted, twisted and / or curved in the fabric thickness compensator 20520. Coiled fibers 20586 can be wound around a core to form a coiled or substantially coiled form . Coiled fibers 20586 may be randomly oriented and / or randomly distributed over the fabric thickness compensator 20520. In alternative embodiments, coiled fibers 20586 may be systematically arranged and / or uniformly distributed over the fabric thickness compensator 20520. For example, as shown in FIG. 399, the coiled fibers 20586 may comprise a longitudinal axis located between the first end 20587 and the second end 20589 of the coiled fibers 20586. The longitudinal axes of the coiled fibers 20520 in the tissue thickness compensator 20520 may be parallel or substantially parallel. The first end 20587 of each rolled fiber 20520 can be located along the first longitudinal side 20523 of the fabric thickness compensator 20520, and the second end 20589 of each rolled fiber 20520 can be located along the second longitudinal side 20524 of the fabric thickness compensator 20520. With this arrangement, rolled into the ring of fiber 20586 can move the tissue thickness compensator laterally. In alternate embodiments, coiled fibers 20586 can move tissue thickness compensator 20520 in the longitudinal or diagonal direction.

Similarly to the crimped fibers 20086 described herein, coiled fibers 20586 may contain a polymer compound. The crimped fibers 20586 can be at least partially elastic so that the deformation of the crimped fibers 20586 creates a restoring force. The polymer compound of the coiled fibers 20586 may contain, for example, polycaprolactone (PCL) so that the coiled fibers 20586 are not soluble in the chlorophyll solvent. As shown in FIG. 399A, springs or ring-rolled fibers 20520 can be held in the compensating material 20580. Compensating material 20580 can hold the ring-rolled fibers 20586 in a loaded position so that the fibers rolled into the ring will exert a spring load on or inside the compensating material 20580. The compensating material 20580 can hold the 20586 rolled fibers in a neutral position in which the rolled fibers do not exert a spring load on or inside the compensating material 20580. K mpensiruyuschy material 20580 may be biologically absorbable, and may contain foam, such as, e.g., foam polyglycol acid (PGA). Moreover, the compensating material 20580 may be soluble, for example, in a chlorophyll solvent. The tissue thickness compensator may contain coiled fibers 20586, which contain polycaprolactone (PCL), and compensating material 20580, which contains, for example, polyglycolic acid foam (PGA), which makes coiled fibers 20520 insoluble in a chlorophilic solvent, while while compensating material 20580 is soluble in a chlorophyll solvent. The compensating material 20580 may be at least partially resilient so that the compression of the compensating material 20580 creates a restoring force. Additionally, as shown in FIG. 399B, compensating material 20580 'tissue thickness compensator 20520' may comprise, for example, a therapeutic preparation 20588, such as, for example, stem cells. Compensating material 20580 can release a therapeutically effective amount of therapeutic drug 20588 as absorbing material 20580 is absorbed.

Similar to the fabric thickness compensator 20020 described herein, fabric thickness compensator 20520 can be compressed. for example, as the brackets 20030 (FIG. 407-410) are set from the initial position to the activated position, the brackets 20030 can grab a portion of the tissue thickness compensator 20520. The brace 20030 can grab a portion of the tissue thickness compensator 20520 and adjacent fabric T. The brace 20030 can exert compressive force to the captured portion of the fabric thickness compensator 20520 and fabric T so that the fabric thickness compensator 20520 is compressed from an uncompressed height to a compressed height. Compression of the tissue thickness compensator 20520 may result in corresponding deformation of the 20586 fibers rolled into the ring located in it. As described in more detail in this document, the deformation of each coiled fiber 20586 can create a restoring force, which can depend, for example, on the elasticity of the coiled fiber, the degree of deformation of the coiled fiber 20586 and / or the stiffness coefficient of the coiled fiber 20586 The stiffness coefficient of fiber 20586 rolled into a ring may at least depend, for example, on the orientation, material, shape and / or size of fiber 20586 rolled into a ring. tissue thickness compensator 20520 can produce a restoring force at each point of the tissue thickness compensator 20520. 20520 compensator tissue thickness can be applied to the captured tissue by activated T 20030 brackets total restoring force created by the fibers in the deformed folded ring 20586 and / or 20586 elastic compensating material.

As shown mainly in FIG. 400 and 401, the tissue thickness compensator 20620 of the end clamp 12 may comprise a plurality of spring coils 20686. Similarly to crimped fibers 20086 and coiled fibers 20586 described herein, spring coils 20686 may, for example, be coiled, twisted, coiled, curved, curved, spiral, twisted and / or curved arc in the fabric thickness compensator 20620. Like the fibers and coils described herein, spring coils 20686 may comprise a polymer compound. Additionally, the spring coils 20686 can be at least partially elastic so that the deformation of the spring coils 20686 creates a restoring force. Each of the spring coils 20686 may comprise a longitudinal axis located between the first end 20687 and the second end 20689. As shown in FIG. 400, the first end 20686 of the spring coil 20686 may be located near or near the proximal end 20626 of the tissue thickness compensator, and the second end 20689 of the same spring coil 20686 may be located near or near the distal end 20625 of the tissue thickness compensator 20620 so that the spring coil 20686 moves the compensator the thickness of the fabric 20620, for example, in the longitudinal direction. In alternate embodiments, rolled fibers 20686 may move tissue thickness compensator 20620 in the transverse or diagonal direction.

The tissue thickness compensator 20620 may comprise an outer film 20680 that at least partially surrounds at least one spring coil 20686. As shown in FIG. 400, the outer film 20680 can extend around the perimeter of multiple spring coils 20686 in the tissue thickness compensator 20620. In alternative embodiments, the outer film 20680 can fully tightly hold the spring coils 20686 or at least one spring coil 20686 of the tissue thickness compensator 20620. The outer film 20680 can hold spring coils 20686 in the end clamp 12. The outer film 20680 can hold the spring coils 20686 in the loaded position so that the spring coils 20686 create a spring load and exert a spring force onto the outer film 20680. In alternative embodiments, the outer film 20680 may hold the spring coils 20686 in a neutral position. The tissue thickness compensator 20620 may also contain filling material 20624. The filling material 20624 may be held inside and / or around the spring coils 20686 using an outer film 20680. The filling material 20624 may contain a therapeutic preparation 20688 similar to the therapeutic drugs described herein. Additionally, the filling material 20624 can support spring coils 20686 inside the tissue thickness compensator 20620. The filling material 20624 can be compressible and at least partially resilient so that the filling material 20624 contributes to the creation of a spring compensating or restoring force by the thickness compensator fabric 20620, as described in more detail in this document.

Similar to tissue thickness compensators described herein, fabric thickness compensator 20620 can be compressed. As the brackets 20030 (FIG. 407-410) are set from the initial position to the activated position, the brackets 20030 can grab a portion of the tissue thickness compensator 20620. Each bracket 20030 can grab a portion of the tissue thickness compensator 20620 and adjacent fabric T. The bracket 20030 can exert a compressive force on the captured portion of the tissue thickness compensator 20620 and fabric T so that the tissue thickness compensator 20620 is compressed between the uncompressed height and the compressed height. Compression of the tissue thickness compensator 20620 may result in corresponding deformation of the spring coils 20686 held therein (FIG. 401). As described in more detail in this document, the deformation of each spring coil 20686 can create a restoring force, which depends, for example, on the elasticity of the spring coil 20686, the degree of deformation of the spring coil 20686 and / or the stiffness coefficient of the spring coil 20686. The stiffness coefficient of the spring coil 20686 can at least depend, for example, on the orientation of the material, the shape and / or size of the spring loop 20686. Moreover, depending on the elasticity of the filling material 20624 and the outer film 20680, the compression of the filling material ala 20624 and / or 20680 of the outer film can also can generate a restoring force. The total restoring force created by at least deformable spring coils 20686, filling material 20624 and / or outer film 20680 in the tissue thickness compensator 20620 can create a restoring force at each point of the tissue thickness compensator 20620. The tissue thickness compensator 20620 can be applied to the gripped activated brackets 20030 T fabrics total recovery force created by deformed spring coils.

As shown mainly in FIG. 402, tissue thickness compensator 20720 of end clamp 12 may comprise a plurality of spring coils 20786. Like the fibers and springs described herein, spring coils 20786 can be, for example, crimped, twisted, curled, curved, curved, spiral twisted and / or curved by an arc in the tissue thickness compensator 20720. Spring coils 20786 may be at least partially elastic so that deformation of the spring coils 20786 creates a restoring force. Additionally, the spring coils 20786 may include a longitudinal axis located between the first end 20787 and the second end 20789. As is mainly shown in FIG. 404, the first end 20787 of the spring coil 20786 may be located near or near the proximal end 20726 of the tissue thickness compensator 20720, and the second end 20789 of the same spring coil 20786 may be located near or near the distal end 20725 of the tissue thickness compensator 20720 so that the spring coil 20786 moves compensator for the thickness of the fabric 20720, for example, in the longitudinal direction. The spring coil 20786 can run longitudinally in two parallel rows in the tissue thickness compensator 20720. The tissue thickness compensator 20720 can be positioned in the end clamp 12 so that the slide 20050 (FIG. 390) or the cutting element 20052 can move along the groove 20015 between the parallel rows of spring turns 20786. In alternative embodiments, spring turns 20786 can move the thickness compensator of the fabric 20720 in the transverse or diagonal direction.

As shown in FIG. 404, the spring coils 20786 can be held or integrated into the compensating material 20780. The compensating material 20780 can be biologically absorbable and may contain a foam, such as, for example, polyglycolic acid foam (PGA). The compensating material 20780 may be resilient so that deformation of the compensating material 20780 creates a spring force. Compensating material 20780 may be, for example, soluble in a chlorophyll solvent. For example, a tissue thickness compensator may include spring coils 20786, which contain polycaprolactone (PCL), and compensating material 20780, which contains polyglycolic acid foam (PGA), which makes spring coils 20786 insoluble in a chlorophyll solvent, while compensating material 20780 soluble in chlorophyll solvent. The compensating material 20780 may be at least partially resilient so that deformation of the compensating material 20780 creates a spring load or a restoring force.

The fabric thickness compensator 20720 may comprise interwoven yarns 20790 that can extend between parallel rows of spring coils 20786. For example, as shown in FIG. 404, the first interwoven yarn 20790 can move two parallel rows of spring coils 20786 in a diagonal direction, and the second interwoven yarn 20790 can also move two parallel rows of spring coils 20786 in a diagonal direction. The first and second interwoven yarns 20790 may intersect. Such interwoven yarns 20790 can cross multiple times along the length of the fabric thickness compensator 20720. The interwoven yarns 20790 can hold the spring coils 20786 in a loaded configuration such that the spring coils 20786 are held in a substantially flat configuration in the fabric thickness compensator 20720. The interwoven yarns 20790, which move the fabric thickness compensator 20720, can be attached directly to the spring coils 20786. In alternative embodiments, interwoven yarns 20790 can communicate with the spring coils Ami 20786 with support 20792 passing through each spring coil 20786 along its longitudinal axis.

As described in more detail in this document, the cartridge with brackets 20000 may include a groove 20015 configured to receive a movable slide 20050 containing a cutting element 20052 (FIG. 390). As the slide 2050 moves along the groove 20015, the slide 20050 can eject the brackets 20030 from the cavities of the stapler 20012 in the cartridge with the brackets 20000, and the cutting element 20052 or almost simultaneously dissect the fabric T. As shown in FIG. 404, as the cutting element 20052 moves, it can also cut through interwoven yarns 20790, which intersect between parallel rows of spring coils 20786 in the fabric thickness compensator 20720. As the interwoven yarns 20790 are cut, each coil 20786 can be released from its loaded configuration in such a way that each spring coil 20786 returns from the loaded, essentially flat position to the extended position in the tissue thickness compensator 20720. When the spring coil expands 20786, compensating Material 20780 around spring coil 20786 may also expand.

As the brackets 20030 (FIG. 407-410) are set from the initial position to the activated position, the brackets 20030 can grab a portion of the tissue thickness compensator 20720, and the tissue thickness compensator 20720 may expand or attempt to expand inside the brackets 20030 and may exert a compressive force on the fabric T. At least one bracket 20030 can capture a portion of the tissue thickness compensator 20720 together with adjacent tissue T. Such a bracket 20030 can exert a compressive force on the captured portion of the tissue thickness compensator 20720 and the captured tissue T in such a way that the fabric thickness compensator 20720 will be sandwiched between the uncompressed height and the compressed height. Compression of the tissue thickness compensator 20720 may result in corresponding deformation of the spring coils 20786 and the compensating material 20780 held therein. As described in more detail in this document, the deformation of each spring coil 20786 can create a restoring force, which can depend, for example, on the elasticity of the spring coil, the degree of deformation of the spring coil 20786 and / or the stiffness coefficient of the spring coil 20786. The stiffness coefficient of the spring coil 20786 can at least depend, for example, on the orientation, material, shape and / or size of the spring coil 20786. The total recovery force generated by at least the deformable spring turns 20786 and / or compensating material 30380 in the tissue thickness compensator 20720 can create a restoring force at each point of the tissue thickness compensator 20720. The tissue thickness compensator 20720 can apply the total restoring force created by the deformed spring coils 20786 in the tissue thickness compensator 20720 to the tissue T 207 which is activated by the brackets.

As basically shown in FIG. 405 and 406, the tissue thickness compensator 20820 of the surgical end clamp 12 may comprise a spring coil 20886. Similarly to the fibers and coils described herein, the spring coil 20886 may be, for example, crimped, twisted, rolled into a ring, curved, curved, paired, a twisted and / or curved arc in the tissue thickness compensator 20820. The spring coil 20886 may comprise a polymer compound and may be at least partially resilient so that deformation of the spring coil 20886 creates a spring force. Additionally, the spring coil 20886 may comprise a first end 20887 and a second end 20889. As shown in FIG. 405, the first end 20887 may be located near or near the proximal end 20826 of the tissue thickness compensator 20820, and the second end 20889 may be located near or near the distal end 20825 of the tissue thickness compensator 20820. A spring coil 20886 may curl or twist from the proximal end of 20825 to the distal end of 20826 fabric thickness compensator 20820.

As shown in FIG. 405, the spring coil 20886 may be retained or integrated into the compensating material 20880. The compensating material 20880 may be biologically absorbable and may contain foam, such as, for example, polyglycolic acid foam (PGA). Compensating material 20880 may be, for example, soluble in a chlorophyll solvent. The tissue thickness compensator may comprise spring coils 20886 that comprise polycaprolactone (PCL) and compensating material 20880 that contains, for example, polyglycolic acid foam (PGA), which makes coil coils 20886 insoluble in a chlorophyll solvent, while the compensating material 20880 is soluble in a chlorophyll solvent. The compensating material 20880 may be at least partially resilient so that deformation of the compensating material 20880 creates a spring load or a restoring force.

Similar to tissue thickness compensators described herein, fabric thickness compensator 20820 may, for example, be compressed. Compression of the tissue thickness compensator 20820 may result in deformation of at least a portion of the spring coil 20886 held or integrated in the tissue thickness compensator 20880 of the tissue thickness compensator 20880. As described in more detail herein, deformation of the spring coil 20886 can create restoring forces that may depend. for example, from the elasticity of the spring coil 20886, the degree of deformation of the spring coil 20886 and / or the stiffness coefficient of the spring coil 20886. The total recovery force created by the deformable spring coil 20886 and / or compensating material 20880, can create a restoring force at each point of the tissue thickness compensator 20820. The tissue thickness compensator 20820 can apply the total restoring force to the tissue T captured by the activated brackets 20030.

As shown in FIG. 413, the surgical end clamp 12 may include a tissue thickness compensator 30020 having at least one tubular member 30080. The tissue thickness compensator 30020 may be held in the surgical end clamp 12. As described in more detail in this document, the stapling element in the end clamp 12 can be installed so that the stapling element goes into the activated position and deforms at least part of the tubular element 30080 in the fabric thickness compensator 30020. It should be understood that the fabric thickness compensators, described herein, containing at least one tubular element can be installed in or otherwise engage with various surgical end clamps, and that such options are Branches are within the scope of the present invention.

As also shown in FIG. 413, the tissue thickness compensator 30020 may be positioned relative to the abutment member 30060 of the end clamp 12. In alternative embodiments, the tissue thickness compensator 30020 may be positioned relative to a staple cartridge assembly, such as a cartridge with brackets 30000, of the end clamp 12. A cartridge with brackets 30000 may be provided with the ability to accommodate a groove 30072 for a cartridge jaw 30070 end clamp 12. For example, the compensator for the thickness of the fabric 30020 can be fixed with the possibility of separation on the cartridge with brackets 30000. Tubular element 30080 a tissue thickness compensator 30020 may be adjacent to the upper surface 30011 of the plate of the rigid support portion 30010 of the cartridge with brackets 30000. The tubular member 30080 may be secured to the upper surface 30011 of the plate using adhesive or by winding similar to at least one winding described herein document (e.g. see FIG. 218). The tissue thickness compensator 30020 may be an integral part of the assembly containing the cartridge with brackets 30000 so that the cartridge with brackets 30000 and the tissue thickness compensator 30020 are formed as a single assembly. For example, a cartridge with brackets 30000 may comprise, for example, a first body part, such as a rigid support part 30010, and a second body part, such as a fabric thickness compensator 30020.

As shown in FIG. 413-415, the tubular member 30080 in the tissue thickness compensator 30020 may comprise an elongated portion 30082 having at least one lumen 30084 at least partially extending therethrough. As shown mainly in FIG. 415, an elongated portion 30082 of the tubular member 30080 may comprise woven or braided strands 30090, as described in more detail herein. In alternative embodiments, the elongated portion 30082 may comprise a solid structure such as an extruded polymer rather than woven strands 30090. The elongated portion 30082 of the tubular member 30080 may comprise a thickness. The thickness of the elongated portion 30082 may be substantially the same along the length and diameter; in other embodiments, the thickness may vary. The elongated portion 30082 may be elongated so that the length of the elongated portion 30082 is greater than, for example, the diameter of the elongated portion 30082. The elongated portion may comprise a length of, for example, from about 30.5 mm (1.20 in) to about 66.0 mm ( 2.60 inches) and a diameter of from about 2.5 mm (0.10 inches) to about 3.81 mm (0.15 inches). The length of the tubular member 20080 may be approximately 35.6 mm (1.40 inches), for example, and the diameter of the tubular member 20080 may be approximately 3.18 mm (0.125 inches), for example. Moreover, the elongated portion 30082 may form, for example, a substantially circular or elliptical cross section. In alternative embodiments, the cross-sectional shape may comprise a polygon shape, such as, for example, a triangle, a hexagon and / or an octagon. As also shown in FIG. 413, the tubular member 30080 may comprise a first distal end 30083 and a second proximal end 30085. The cross-sectional shape of the elongated portion 30082 may taper at the first and / or second ends 30083, 30085, wherein at least one end 30083, 30085 of the tubular member 30080 may be closed and / or hermetically sealed. In alternative embodiments, the lumen 30084 may extend through the distal ends 30083, 30085 of the tubular member 30080 so that the ends 30083, 30085 remain open.

The tubular element 30080 may comprise a single central lumen 30084, which at least partially passes through the elongated portion 30084. The clearance 30084 may pass through the elongated portion 30084 along its entire length. In alternative embodiments, additionally, the tubular element 30080 may contain several gaps 30084 passing through it. The gaps 30084 passing through the tubular element 30080 can be round, semicircular, have a wedge shape and / or have a combined shape. The tubular element 30080 may also contain supporting nets, which may form, for example, a modified “T” or “X” shape within the lumen 30084. The dimensions, lumen (s) and / or supporting mesh (s) inside the tubular element 30080 may determine the shape of the transverse the cross-section of the tubular element 30080. The cross-sectional shape of the tubular element 30080 may be constant over its entire length or, as in alternative embodiments, the cross-sectional shape of the tubular element 30080 may vary at different lengths of the tubular element . As described in more detail herein, the cross-sectional shape of the tubular member 30080 can affect the compressibility and elasticity of the tubular member 30080.

The tubular member 30080 may comprise a vertical diameter and a horizontal diameter; their sizes can be selected depending on the location of the tubular element 30080 in the end clamp 12, the size of the end clamp 12, including the clearance of the tissue of the end clamp 12 and the proposed geometry of the gripping areas of the brackets 30039. For example, the vertical diameter of the tubular element 30080 can be selected based on the estimated height of the formed parenthesis. In such cases, the vertical diameter of the tubular element 30080 can be selected so that the vertical diameter can be reduced by about 5-20%, while the tubular element 30080 is gripped inside the formed bracket 30030. For example, the tubular element 30080 having a vertical diameter of approximately 2.5 mm (0.100 inches) can be used for brackets having an estimated height in the formed state from about 2.0 mm (0.080 inches) to about 2.4 mm (0.095 inches). As a result, the vertical diameter of the tubular member 30080 can be reduced by approximately 5-20% when gripping within the formed bracket 30030 even when the bracket does not grasp the fabric T. When the tissue T is gripped by the formed bracket 30030, the compression of the tubular member 30080 can be even greater. The vertical diameter may be the same along the entire length of the tubular element 30080 or, as in alternative embodiments, the vertical diameter may vary in different parts of the length of the tubular element.

The horizontal diameter of the tubular element 30080 may be larger, smaller, or equal to the vertical diameter of the tubular element 30080 when the tubular element 30080 is in an undeformed or returned configuration. For example, as shown in FIG. 414, the horizontal diameter may, for example, be approximately three times larger than the vertical diameter. In some embodiments, the horizontal diameter may be approximately 10 mm (0.400 inches), and the vertical diameter may be approximately 3.18 mm (0.125 inches), for example. In alternative embodiments, as shown already in FIG. 416, the horizontal diameter of the tubular member 31080 may equal or substantially equal to the vertical diameter of the tubular member 31080 when the tubular member 31080 is in an undeformed or returned configuration. In some embodiments, the horizontal diameter may be approximately 3.18 mm (0.125 inches), and the vertical diameter may also be approximately 3.18 mm (0.125 inches), for example. The tubular member 30080 may comprise a vertical diameter of approximately 3.18 mm (0.125 inches), a horizontal diameter of approximately 10 mm (0.400 inches), and a length of approximately 36 mm (1.400 inches). As described in more detail herein, when a force A is applied to the tubular member 30080 and / or 31080, the tubular member may be deformed such that the geometry of the cross section, including horizontal and vertical diameters, can vary.

As also shown in FIG. 413-415, the tubular member 30080 in the tissue thickness compensator 30020 may be deformed. The entire tubular member 30080 may be deformed. For example, the tubular member 30080 may deform from the proximal end 30083 to the distal end 30085 of the elongated portion 30082 and around its entire circumference. In alternative embodiments, only a portion of the tubular member 30080 may be deformed. For example, only an intermediate portion of the length of the elongated portion 30082 and / or only a portion of the circumference of the tubular member 30080 can be deformed.

When a compressive force is applied to the contact point on the elongated portion 30082 of the tubular member 30080, the contact point may be displaced, which may change the cross-sectional dimensions of the tubular member 30080. For example, as also shown in FIG. 414, the tubular member 30080 may comprise an upper peak 30086 and a lower peak 30088 on an elongated portion 30082. In an initial, undeformed configuration, the tubular member 30080 may comprise undeformed cross-sectional dimensions, including an undeformed vertical diameter between the upper peak 30086 and the lower peak 30088. When a compressive force A is applied to the top apex 30086, the tubular element 30080 can go into a deformed configuration. In a deformed configuration, the cross-sectional dimensions of the tube 30080 can be changed. For example, the tube 30086 may contain a deformed vertical diameter between the upper peak 30086 and the lower peak 30088, which may be smaller than the undeformed vertical diameter. As shown in FIG. 416, the horizontal diameter of the deformed tube 30080 may be elongated, for example, when the tubular member 30080 transitions from an undeformed configuration to a deformed configuration. The deformed cross-sectional dimensions of the deformed tube 30080 may at least depend on the position, angular orientation, and / or amplitude of the applied force A. As described in more detail herein, deformation of the tubular element 30080 can create a spring or restoring force, which may depend on elasticity tubular element 30080.

As shown in FIG. 414, the tubular member 30080 creates a spring or restoring compressive force. In such cases, as described in this document, the tubular member 30080 can transition from an initial undeformed configuration to a deformed configuration when a force A is applied to the contact point on the elongated portion 30082 of the tubular member 30080. After the termination of the force A, the deformed tube 30080 may bounce from the deformed configuration . The deformed tube 30080 may bounce back into the initial, undeformed configuration, or may bounce back into a substantially similar, undeformed configuration. The ability of the tubular member 30080 to bounce from a deformed configuration is determined by the elasticity of the tubular member 30080.

As shown in FIG. 414, the tubular member 30080 may exert a springing or restoring force. A restoring force can be generated by the tubular member 30080 when a force A is applied to the tubular member 30080, for example, using a bracket 30030 (FIGS. 417 and 418), as described in more detail herein. The applied force A can vary the cross-sectional dimensions of the tubular element 30080. Moreover, in linearly elastic materials, the restoring force of each deformed part of the tubular element 30080 can be a function of the deformed dimensions of the tubular element 30080 and the stiffness coefficient of the part of the tubular element 30080. The stiffness coefficient of the tubular element 30080 may at least depend on the orientation, material, geometry and / or cross-sectional dimensions of the tubular element 30080, for example. The tubular element 30080 in the tissue thickness compensator 30020 may have the same stiffness coefficient. In alternative embodiments, the stiffness coefficient may vary at different points in the length and / or diameter of the tubular member 30080. When a portion of the tubular member 30080 having the first stiffness factor is compressed more strongly, the tubular member 30080 may create a greater restoring force. When a portion of the tubular member 30080 having the same first stiffness coefficient is less compressed, the tubular member 30080 may produce less restoring force.

As also shown in FIG. 413, the tubular member 30080 in the tissue thickness compensator 30020 may comprise a polymer compound. The elongated portion 30082 of the tubular member 30080 may comprise a polymer compound. Additionally, the polymer compound may contain at least partially elastic material, so that the deformation of the tubular element 30080 creates a restoring force. The polymer compound may contain, for example, non-absorbable polymers, absorbable polymers, or combinations thereof. Examples of synthetic polymers are, without limitation, polyglycolic acid (PGA), polylactic acid (PLA), polycaprolactone (PCL), polydioxanone (PDO) and their copolymers. Examples of absorbable polymers can be, for example, bioresorbable, biocompatible elastomer polymers. Moreover, the polymer combination of the tubular element 30080 may contain, for example, synthetic polymers, non-synthetic polymers, or combinations thereof. The polymer combination of the tubular element 30080 may contain a varying amount by weight in percent, for example, absorbable polymers, non-absorbable polymers, synthetic polymers and / or non-synthetic polymers.

As shown in FIG. 413 and 414, the tubular member 30080 may comprise, for example, a therapeutic preparation 30098 such as a pharmaceutically active drug or drug. The therapeutic agent 30098 may be held in the lumen 30084 of the tubular member 30080. The elongated portion 30082 may hermetically hold or partially hermetically hold the therapeutic agent 30098. In addition, in alternative embodiments, the polymer combination of the elongated portion 30082 may comprise the therapeutic agent 30098. The tubular member 30080 may therapeutically release an effective amount of a therapeutic preparation 30098. A therapeutic preparation 30098 may be released as the tubular element 30080 is absorbed. For example, The therapeutic agent 30098 may be released into a fluid (such as, for example) blood passing near or through the tubular member 30080. In alternative embodiments, the additional therapeutic agent 30098 may be released when, for example, the bracket 30030 (FIGS. 417 and 418) puncture the tubular element 30080 and / or when the cutting element 30052 activating the bracket bracket 30050 (FIG. 413) cuts a portion of the tubular element 30080. Examples of therapeutic agents 30098 include, but are not limited to, hemostatic agents and drugs. such as fibrin, thrombin and / or oxidized regenerated cellulose (ORC), anti-inflammatory drugs, such as, for example, diclofenac, aspirin, naproxen, sulindac and / or hydrocortisone, antibiotics and antimicrobials, such as, for example, triclosan, silver ions, ampicillin, gentamicin, polymyxin B and / or chloramphenicol, anticancer agents, such as, for example, cisplatin, mitomycin and / or adriamycin, and / or biological substances, such as, for example, stem cells.

As can be seen from the same FIG. 413, 417 and 418, fasteners such as brackets 30030, for example, can be mounted from a cartridge with brackets 30000 so that the brackets 30030 mesh with the thickness compensator fabric 30020 and apply force A to the tubular element 32080 located therein . As described herein, the application of force A to the tubular member 30080 can cause the tubular member 30080 to deform. Like the end clamps 12 described herein, the rigid cartridge support portion 30010 with brackets 30000 may comprise a cartridge body 30017, a plate surface 30011, and a plurality of cavities 30012 brackets located in it. Each bracket cavity 30012 may form an opening in the surface of the plate 30011, and the bracket 30030 may be removably positioned in the bracket cavity 30012 (FIG. 433). As shown mainly in FIG. 417 and 418, each bracket 30030 may include a base 30031 and two bracket legs 30032 extending from the base 30031. Before installing the brackets 30030, the base 30031 of each bracket 30030 may be supported by a bracket ejector 30040 (FIG. 433) located inside the cartridge cartridge rigid support portion 30010 with brackets 30000. Also before installing the brackets 30030, the legs 30032 of each bracket 30030 can at least partially be located inside the cavity 30012 for brackets (FIG. 433)

As described in more detail in this document, brackets 30030 can be set between the initial position and the activated position. For example, the bracket activating slide 30050 may engage with the ejector 30040 (FIG. 433) so that at least one bracket 30030 moves between the initial position and the activated position. As shown mainly in FIG. 417, the bracket 30030 can be moved to the activated position, with the legs 30032 of the bracket 30030 engaging with the tubular member 32080 of the tissue thickness compensator 32020, penetrating the tissue T and being brought into contact with the stop member 30060 (FIG. 433) located opposite the cartridge with brackets 30000 in the surgical end clamp 12. The forming brackets of the recess 30062 in the abutment element 30060 can bend the legs of the brackets 30032 so that the activated bracket 30030 will capture part of the tubular element 32080 and part of the fabric T in the area of capture brackets 30039. As described in more detail in this document, at least one leg brace 30032 may puncture the tubular member 32080 32020 compensator tissue thickness when the bracket 30030 moves between an initial position and an activated position. In alternative embodiments, the brace legs 30032 can move around the perimeter of the tubular member 32080 so that the brace legs 30032 prevent the tubular member 32080 from being punctured. Like the fasteners described herein, the legs 30032 of each brace 30030 can deform downward toward the base 30031 of the bracket 30030 for the formation of the capture region of the brackets 30039 between them. The grip area of the bracket 30039 may be an area in which the fabric T and part of the tissue thickness compensator 32020 can be gripped by the activated bracket 30030. In the activated position, each bracket 30030 can exert a compressive force on the fabric T and the tissue thickness compensator 32020 trapped inside the bracket grip area 30039.

As shown in FIG. 417, when the tubular member 32080 is gripped in the grip area of the bracket 30039, the captured portion of the tubular member 32080 may be deformed as described herein. Moreover, the tubular element 32080 can be deformed into various deformed configurations in different gripping areas of the bracket 30039 depending on, for example, the thickness, compressibility and / or density of the fabric T trapped in the same gripping area of the bracket 30039. The tubular element 32080 in the tissue thickness compensator 32080 may extend longitudinally through successive gripping regions of fabric 30039. In such an arrangement, tubular member 32080 may be deformed into various deformed configurations in each gripping area of bracket 30039 along a row activated brackets 30030. As shown already in FIG. 418, the tubular elements 33080 in the tissue thickness compensator 33020 can be located in the gripping areas of the bracket 30039 on the side along a series of activated brackets 30030. The tubular elements 33080 can be held by flexible shells 33210. In such arrangements, the tubular elements 33080 and flexible shells 33210 can be deformed into various deformed configurations in each gripping area, the brackets 30039. For example, if the fabric T is thinner, the tubular elements 33080 can compress less, and if the fabric T is thicker, the tubular elements 33080 can compress more to eniya thicker tissue T. In alternative embodiments, the dimensions of the deformed tubular elements 33080 may be the same throughout the length and / or width of 33020 compensator tissue thickness.

As shown in FIG. 419-421, the tubular member 34080 in the tissue thickness compensator 34020 may comprise a plurality of strands 34090. As shown mainly in FIG. 419, the strands 34090 may be woven or braided into a trellis tube 34092 forming a tubular member 34080. The trellis tube 34092 formed by the strands 34090 may be substantially hollow. The strands 34090 of the tubular member 34080 may be solid strands, tubular strands and / or have another suitable shape. For example, as shown in FIG. 420, one strand 34090 of trellis tube 34092 may be a tube. As shown in FIG. 422, a strand 34090 may contain at least one clearance 34094 passing through it. The number, geometry, and / or dimensions of the gaps 34094 may determine the cross-sectional shape of the 34090 strand. For example, the 34090 strand may comprise round lumen (s), semicircular lumen (s), wedge-shaped lumen (s), or combined lumen (s). The strand 34090 may also comprise supporting grids 34096, which may form, for example, a modified “T” or “X” shape. At least the diameter of the strand is 34090, the clearance (s) passing through it, and the supporting mesh (s) can characterize the cross-sectional shape of the strand 34090. The cross-sectional shape of each strand 34090, as described in more detail herein, can affect the spring or the restoring force created by the lock 34090, and the corresponding springing or restoring force created by the tubular element 34080.

As shown in FIG. 423, the grill tube 34092 of the strands 34090 may be deformed. The lattice tube 34092 can form or contribute to the deformability and / or elasticity of the tubular element 34080. For example, the strands 34090 of the lattice tube 34092 can be woven together so that the strands 34090 are able to slide and / or bend relative to each other. When a force is applied to the elongated portion 34082 of the tubular member 34080, the strands 34090 located therein can slide and / or bend so that the grating tube 34092 becomes deformed. For example, as seen in the same FIG. 423, the brace 30030 can compress the grating tube 34092 and the fabric T caught in the grip area of the brace 34039, which can cause the strands 34090 of the grating tube 34092 to slide and / or bend relative to each other. Upper apex 34086 of trellis tube 34092 can move toward lower apex 34088 of trellis tube 34092 when the trellis tube 34092 is compressed into a deformed configuration to accommodate tissue T captured in the grip area 30039. Under various circumstances, the trellis tube 34092 trapped by the activated bracket 30030 will tend return to its undeformed configuration and can apply a restoring force to the captured tissue T. Additionally, the positions of the lattice tube 34092 located between brackets capture areas 30039, i.e. those not caught inside the activated bracket 30030 may also be deformed due to deformation of adjacent parts of the grill tube 34092 that are within the gripping regions of the bracket 30039. If the grill tube 34092 is deformed, the grill tube 34092 may tend to bounce or partially bounce from the deformed configuration. Some parts of the trellis tube 34092 can bounce into their initial configurations, while other parts of the trellis tube 34092 can only partially bounce and / or remain fully compressed.

Similar to the description of the tubular elements described in this document, each strand 34090 can also be deformed. Additionally, deformation of the strand 34090 can create a restoring force, which depends on the elasticity of each strand 34090. As shown mainly in FIG. 420 and 421, each strand 34090 of the trellis tube 34092 may be tubular. In alternate embodiments, each strand 34090 of trellis tube 34092 may be continuous. In alternative embodiments, further, the trellis tube 30092 may comprise at least one tubular strand 34090, at least one continuous strand 34090, at least one strand in the form of an “X” or “T” 34090 and / or a combination thereof.

The strands 34090 in the tubular element 34080 may contain a polymer compound. The polymer compound strand 34090 may contain nonabsorbable polymers, absorbable polymers, or combinations thereof. Examples of synthetic polymers are, without limitation, polyglycolic acid (PGA), polylactic acid (PLA), polycaprolactone (PCL), polydioxanone (PDO) and their copolymers. Examples of absorbable polymers can be, for example, bioresorbable, biocompatible elastomer polymers. Moreover, the polymer compound strand 34090 may contain synthetic polymers, non-synthetic polymers, or combinations thereof. The polymer composition of the strand 34090 may include a varying amount by weight in percent, for example, of absorbable polymers, non-absorbable polymers, synthetic polymers and / or non-synthetic polymers.

The strands 34090 in the tubular member 34080 may further comprise a therapeutic drug 34098 (FIG. 420) such as a pharmaceutically active drug or a medicine, for example. A strand 34090 can release a therapeutically effective amount of a therapeutic preparation 34098. A therapeutic preparation 34098 can be released as the tubular strand 34090 is absorbed. For example, a therapeutic preparation 30098 can be released into a fluid, such as, for example, blood passing near or through a strand 34090. In alternative variants, in addition, the therapeutic drug 34098 may be released when, for example, the bracket 30030 punctures the strand 34090 and / or when the cutting element 30052 activates the bracket of the slide 3050 (FIG. 413) cut t part of the lattice tube 34092. Examples of therapeutic agents 34098 include, but are not limited to, hemostatic agents and drugs, such as fibrin thrombin and / or oxidized regenerated cellulose (ORC), anti-inflammatory drugs, such as, for example, diclofenac, aspirin, naproxen, sulindac and / or hydrocortisone, antibiotics and antimicrobials or agents, such as, for example, triclosan, silver ions, ampicillin, gentamicin, polymyxin B and / or chloramphenicol, anticancer agents, such as, for example, cisplatin, mit mitsin and / or adriamycin; and / or biological substances, such as, for example, stem cells.

As shown in FIG. 424 and 425, the tubular member 35080 may comprise multiple layers 35100 of strands 35090. The tubular member 35080 may comprise multiple layers 35100 of trellised tubes 35092. As shown in FIG. 424, the tubular member 35080 may comprise a first layer 35100a and a second layer 35100b of strands 35090, for example. As shown already in FIG. 425, the tubular thickness compensation element 35180 of the fabric thickness 35120 may comprise a third layer 35100c of strands 35090, for example. Moreover, the various layers 35100 in the tubular element 35180 may contain various materials. Each layer 35100a, 35100b, 35100c may be biologically absorbable, each layer 35100a, 35100b, 35100c may contain a different polymer composition. For example, the first layer 35100a may comprise a first polymer composition; the second layer 35100b may comprise a second polymer composition; and the third layer 35100c may contain a third polymer composition. In such embodiments, layers 35100a, 35100b, 35100c of tubular member 35180 may be biologically absorbed at different rates. For example, the first layer 35100a can be absorbed quickly, the second layer 35100b can be absorbed more slowly than the first layer 35100a, and the third layer 35100c can be absorbed more slowly than the first layer 35100a and / or the second layer 35100b. In alternative embodiments, the first layer 35100a can be absorbed slowly, the second layer 35100b can be absorbed faster than the first layer 35100a, and the third layer 35100c can be absorbed faster than the first layer 35100a and / or second layer 35100b.

Similarly to the strands 34090 described in this document, the strands 35090 in the tubular element 35180 may contain the drug 35098. As shown already in FIG. 424, to control the desorption or release of drug 35098, the first layer 35100a of strands 35090 containing drug 35098a can be biologically absorbed at a first speed, and the second layer 35100b of strands 35090 containing drug 30098b can be biologically absorbed at a second speed. For example, the first layer 35100a can be absorbed quickly to provide a quick initial release of the drug 35098a, and the second layer 35100b can be absorbed more slowly, which allows you to control the release of the drug 30098b. The medicine 35098a in the strands 35090 of the first layer 30100a may differ from the medicine 35098b in the strands 35090 of the second layer 35100b. For example, strands 35090 in the first layer 35100a may contain oxidized regenerated cellulose (ORC), and strands 35090 in the second layer 35100b may contain a solution containing hyaluronic acid. In such embodiments, the initial absorption of the first layer 35100a can release oxidized regenerated cellulose to help control bleeding, while subsequent absorption of the second layer 35100b can release a solution containing hyaluronic acid that helps prevent tissue adhesion. In alternative embodiments, layers 35100a, 35100b may contain the same drug 35098a, 35098b. For example, as seen in the same FIG. 425, strands 35090 in layers 35100a, 35100b and 35100c may contain an anticancer drug, such as, for example, cisplatin. Moreover, the first layer 35100a can be absorbed quickly, providing a quick initial release of cisplatin, the second layer 35100b can be absorbed more slowly, providing a controlled release of cisplatin, and the third layer 35100c can be absorbed more slowly, providing a more extended controlled release of cisplatin.

As shown in FIG. 426 and 427, the fabric thickness compensator 36020 may comprise material 36024 cast in layers. deposited material 36024 may be formed outside the tubular member 36080, inside the tubular member 36080 or inside and outside the tubular member 36080. As shown in FIG. 426, layered cast material 36024 can be coextruded both inside and outside of the tubular member 36080, and the tubular member 36080 may comprise a wireframe 36092 of 36090 strands. Like the polymer compound described herein, the weld 36060 may contain polyglycol acid (PGA), polylactic acid (PLA), and / or any other biologically absorbable and biocompatible elastomer polymers. Additionally, the weld material 36024 may not have pores, whereby the weld material 36024 forms a fluid impermeable layer in the tubular member 36080. The weld material 36024 may form a gap 36084 passing through it.

In addition to the foregoing, the tubular member 36080 and / or the strands 36090 in the trellised tube 36092 may contain the therapeutic preparation 36098. As can be seen from the same FIG. 426 and 427, the pore-free deposited material 36024 may contain a drug 36098 inside the inner lumen 36084a. In addition or in addition to the foregoing, the pore-free deposited material 36024 may contain a drug 36098 inside an intermediate lumen 36084b, such as, for example, an intermediate lumen 36084b, which contains a grill tube 36092 of strands 36090 containing the drug. Similarly to the above, the tubular element 36080 can be positioned relative to the cavities 30012 for the brackets and the cutting tool 30052 of the cartridge with the brackets 30000 (FIG. 413). For example, setting the brackets 30030 and / or moving the cutting element 30052 may be capable of piercing or tearing the pore-free deposited material 36024 so that the drug 36098 contained in at least one lumen 36084 of the tubular element 30080 can be released from clearance 30084. As shown in FIG. 428, the tubular member 37080 may comprise a pore-free film 37110. The pore-free film 37110 may at least partially surround the grating tube 37092 or the first layer 37100a and the second layer 37100b of the grating tubes 30092, thereby forming a fluid-tight sheath similar to deposited material 36024 described in this document.

As described herein, a tubular member may comprise at least one of the following components: a biologically absorbable material, a therapeutic agent, a plurality of strands, a trellis tube, layers of trellis tubes, a deposited material, a pore-free film, or a combination thereof. For example, as shown in FIG. 429, the tubular member 38080 may comprise a weld material 38024 and a plurality of strands 38090 extending through the central lumen 38084 of the tubular member 38080. The strands 38090 may comprise a therapeutic agent 38098. In alternative embodiments, for example, as shown in FIG. 430, the tubular member 39080 may comprise a weld material 39024 and a therapeutic preparation 39098 located in the central lumen 39084 of the tubular member 39080, for example. At least one tubular element 39080 and deposited material 39024 may contain a liquid therapeutic preparation 39098.

As can be seen mainly in the same FIG. 413, the tubular member 30080 may be positioned relative to the rigid cartridge support portion 30010 with brackets 30000. The tubular member 30080 may be longitudinally adjacent to the rigid support portion 30010. The tubular member 30080 may be substantially parallel to or aligned with a longitudinal groove or cavity 30015 in the rigid support parts 30010. The tubular member 30080 can be aligned with the longitudinal groove 30015 so that part of the tubular member 30080 overlays part of the longitudinal groove 30015. In such embodiments, the cutting element 30052 activates their sled brackets 30050 may cut through part of the tubular member 30080 as the cutting edge 30052 moves along the longitudinal groove 30015. In alternative embodiments, the tubular member 30080 may be longitudinally located on the first or second side of the longitudinal groove 30015. In alternative embodiments, additionally, the tubular member 30080 may be located relative to the rigid support portion 30010 of the cartridge with brackets 30000 so that the tubular member 30080 will laterally or diagonally move at least a portion of the rigid support portion 30010.

As shown in FIG. 431, for example, tissue thickness compensator 40020 may comprise multiple tubular elements 40080. Tubular elements 40080 may comprise, for example, various lengths, cross-sectional shapes and / or materials. Additionally, the tubular elements 40080 may be positioned relative to the rigid support portion 40010 of the cartridge with brackets 30,000 so that the axis of the tubes of the tubular elements 40080 are parallel to each other. The axis of the tubes of the tubular members 40080 can be longitudinally aligned so that the tubular member 40080 will be located inside another tubular member 40080. In alternative embodiments, the parallel tubular members 40080 can move the cartridge with brackets 30000, for example, in the longitudinal direction. In alternative embodiments, additionally, parallel tubular members 40080 can move the cartridge with brackets 30000 in the transverse or diagonal direction. In alternative embodiments, the non-parallel tubular members 40080 may be angled with respect to each other so that the axes of their tubes intersect and / or are not parallel to each other.

As shown in FIG. 431-434, tissue thickness compensator 40020 may have two tubular elements 40080; the first tubular element 40080a may be longitudinally placed on the first side of the longitudinal groove 30015 in the rigid support portion 30010, and the second tubular element 40080b may be longitudinally placed on the second side of the longitudinal groove 30015. Each tubular element 40080 may comprise a trellis tube 40092 of strands 40090. Cartridge with brackets 30000 can contain up to six rows of cavities 30012 for brackets, and three rows of cavities 30012 for brackets are located, for example, on each side of the longitudinal groove 30015. In such embodiments, the cutting edge 30052 on moving a iviruyuschih staple sled 30050 may not be required for the dissection of the tubular member 40080.

Similarly, as shown already in FIG. 435-436, the fabric thickness compensator 41020 may comprise two tubular elements 41080a, 41080b longitudinally disposed in the cartridge with brackets 30000. Similarly, the brackets 30030 of the first three rows of brace cavities 30012 can mesh with one tubular element 41080a, and the brackets 30030 from the other three rows of cavities 30012 for brackets may engage with another tubular member 41080b. As also shown in FIG. 435-436, the installed brackets 30030 may engage with the tubular member 40080 at other locations in the cross section of the tubular member 40080. As described herein, the spring elasticity and the corresponding restoring force exerted by the tubular member 41080 may depend, inter alia, on the shape of the transverse sections of the tubular element 41080. The bracket 30030, located in the grip area of the bracket 30039, located near or near the rounded part of the tubular element 41080, may be under the influence of a larger anavlivayuschego effort than brace 30030 in capturing parentheses 30039, located near the area not rounded. Similarly, the bracket 30030 located in the grip region of the bracket 30039 in the non-rounded portion of the tubular member 41080 may be subject to less restoring force than the restoring force experienced by the bracket 30030 located near or closer to the rounded portion of the tubular member 30080. In other words, the rounded portions the tubular element 41080 may have a greater stiffness coefficient than the non-rounded portions of the tubular element 41080 due to the ability of the brackets 30030 to capture a greater amount of elastic wow material along such parts. As a result, as shown mainly in FIG. 436, the restoring force exerted by the tissue thickness compensator 41020 may be greater near the brackets 30030a and 30030c and less near the bracket 30030b in the tubular member 30080a. Accordingly, the restoring force created by the tissue thickness compensator 41020 may be greater near the brackets 30030d and 30030f than near the bracket 30030e in the tubular member 30080b.

As also shown in FIG. 431-434, the cross-sectional geometries of the strands 40090 containing the grating tube 40092 can be selected to provide the desired spring elasticity and the corresponding restoring force exerted by the grating tube 40092. For example, as also shown in FIG. 432, strands 40090a located in the rounded portions of the tubular member 40080 may contain X-shaped cross sections, while strands 40090b located in the non-rounded portions of the tubular member 40080 may contain tubular cross sections. Strands 40090a and 40090b containing various cross-sectional geometries can be woven together to form a lattice tube 40092. In alternative embodiments, strands 40090a and 40090b can be attached to each other, for example, by adhesive. As shown in FIG. 433 and 434, the different cross-sectional geometries of the strands 40090 in the tubular element 40080 can optimize the restoring force acting in the gripping areas of the brackets 30039 in the cartridge with brackets 30000. You can select special cross-sectional geometries so that the elastic constant in the gripping areas of the brackets 30039 in the cartridge with brackets was essentially balanced or equal.

As shown in FIG. 437, the tubular thickness compensator tubular members 41080a, 41080b of the fabric 41120 can be fastened together using the abutting portion 41126. Although the moving cutting element 30052 can be configured to extend between the tubular members 41080a and 41080b, the cutting element 30052 may need to cut at least a portion of the abutting parts 41126. The adjacent part 41126 may contain soft material, such as, for example, foam or gel, which can be easily dissected by the moving cutting element 30052. The adjacent part 41026 may connector in this way, attach the tissue thickness compensator 41120 to the surgical end clamp 12. The abutment portion 41126 can be attached to the upper surface of the plate 30011 of the rigid support portion 30010 so that the abutment portion 41126 remains held by the surgical end clamp 12 after the tubular members 41080a, 41080b released from it.

As shown in FIG. 438-439, the fabric thickness compensator 42020 may comprise multiple tubular elements 42080 so that the number of tubular elements 42080 is the same as the number of rows of cavities 30012 for the brackets in the cartridge with brackets 30,000, for example. The cartridge with brackets 30000 may contain six rows of cavities 30012 for brackets, and the thickness compensator fabric 42020 may contain six tubular elements 42080. Each tubular element 42080 can be essentially aligned with a number of cavities 30012 for brackets. When the brackets 30030 are ejected from the row of cavities 30012 for the bracket, each bracket 30030 from this row can pierce the same tubular element 42080 (FIG. 439). Deformation of one tube 42080 can have little or no effect on the deformation of adjacent tubes 42080. Thus, tubular elements 42080 can exert a substantially discrete and individual spring force in the gripping areas of the bracket 30039 across the width of the cartridge with brackets 30030. Where the brackets 30030 are activated of the multiple rows of cavities 30012 for brackets engage with the same tubular element 35080 (FIG. 436), the deformation of the tubular element 35080 may be less individual. For example, deformation of the tubular element 35080 in the grip region of the bracket 30039 in the first row can affect the deformation of this tubular element 35080 in the grip region of the bracket 30039 in another row. A movable cutting edge 30052 may avoid dissecting the tubular members 42080. In alternative embodiments, as shown in FIG. 440, the fabric thickness compensator 43020 may comprise more than six tubular elements 43080, for example, seven tubular elements 44080. Additionally, the tubular elements 43080 may be symmetrically or asymmetrically located in the end clamp 12. When the odd number of tubular elements 43080 are longitudinally and symmetrically located in the end clamp 12, the moving cutting element 30052 may be configured to cut through the middle tubular element, which lies on top of the longitudinal channel 30015.

As shown in FIG. 441, the tissue thickness compensator 44020 may comprise a central tubular member 44080b that is at least partially aligned with a longitudinal groove 30015 in the rigid cartridge support portion 33010 with brackets 30000. The tissue thickness compensator 44020 may further comprise at least one peripheral tubular member 44080a, 44080c located on the side of the longitudinal groove 30015. For example, the fabric thickness compensator 44020 may include three tubular elements 44080: the first peripheral tubular element 44080a can be longitudinally placed on the first side e of the longitudinal groove 30015 of the cartridge with brackets 30000, the central tubular member 44080b may be substantially above and / or aligned with the longitudinal groove 30015, and the second peripheral tubular member 44080c may be longitudinally located on the second side of the longitudinal groove 30015. The central tubular member 44080b may contain a horizontal diameter that is substantially elongated with respect to the vertical diameter. The central tubular element 44080b and / or any other tubular element may overlap multiple rows of brace cavities 30012. As also shown in FIG. 441, the central tubular member 44080b may be superimposed on four brace cavities 30012, and each peripheral tubular member 44080a, 44080c may overlap one row of brace cavities 30012, for example. In alternative embodiments, the central tubular member 44080b may overlap less than four rows of brace cavities 30012, for example, two rows of brace cavities 30012. Additionally, the peripheral tubular elements 44080a, 44080c can be superimposed on more than one row of cavities 30012 brackets, for example, on two rows of cavities 30012 for brackets. As shown already in FIG. 442, the central tubular member 44120 of a tissue thickness compensator 44120 may comprise a therapeutic preparation 44198 in the lumen 44184 of the central tubular member 44180b. The central tubular element 44180b and / or at least the peripheral tubular element 44080a, 44080c may comprise a therapeutic preparation 44198 and / or any other suitable therapeutic preparation.

As shown in FIG. 443, the fabric thickness compensator 44220 may comprise a sheath 44224, which may be similar to the weld material 32024 described herein. Sheath 44224 holds a plurality of tubular elements 44080 in their place in the end clamp 12. Sheath 44224 can be coextruded together with tubular elements 44080. The tubular elements 44080 may comprise a lattice tube 44092 from strands 44090. Like the polymer compounds described in this document, sheath 44224 may contain polyglycolic acid (PGA), polylactic acid (PLA) and / or any other biologically absorbable and biocompatible elastomer polymers, for example. Additionally, the sheath 44224 may not contain pores so that the sheath 44224 forms a fluid tight layer in the tissue thickness compensator 44220, for example. In addition to what is described in this document, the tubular member 44080 and / or strands 44090 in the trellis tube 44092 may comprise a therapeutic preparation 44098. The pore-free sheath 44224 may contain a therapeutic preparation 44098 in a tissue thickness compensator. As described herein, the tubular member 44080 may be positioned relative to the brackets 30012 for the cartridge and the cutting tool 30052 of the cartridge with the brackets 30000. For example, setting the brackets 30030 and / or moving the cutting member 30052 may be configured to pierce or tear the pore-free sheath 44224 so that the therapeutic preparation 44198 contained therein can be released from the tissue thickness compensator 44020.

As shown in FIG. 444, the tissue thickness compensator 44320 may comprise a central tubular member 44380b comprising a grill tube 44392. The grill tube 44392 may have a non-woven portion or gap 44381 substantially aligned with a longitudinal groove 30015 of the rigid support portion 30010. In such embodiments, the woven portion of the grill tube 44092 the tubular member 44380b does not overlap the longitudinal groove 30015. Accordingly, the cutting element 30052 on the movable bracket-activating slides 30052 can move along the longitudinal groove 30015 without cutting through the overlap of the woven portion p 44392 for the braided tube. Although the brackets 30030c and 30030d adjacent to the gap 44381 in the tubular element 44380b may receive less support from the lattice tube structure 44392, additional elements may provide support for such brackets 30030 and / or additional restoring force in their brackets 30039. For example, as described in more detail herein, additional tubular elements, supporting mesh, springs and / or supporting material may be located at least inside or outside of the tubular of the element 44380b near the gap 44381, for example.

As shown already in FIG. 445-448, the fabric thickness compensator 45020 may comprise multiple tubular elements 45080 that laterally move the cartridge with brackets 30000. The tubular elements 45080 may be perpendicular to the rows of cavities 30012 for the bracket and / or the longitudinal axis of the rigid support portion 30010 of the cartridge with brackets 30000. How shown in FIG. 445, the tubular elements 45080 can move the longitudinal groove 30015 in the cartridge with brackets 30000 so that the cutting element 30052 of the bracket-activated slide 30050 will be able to cut through the tubular elements 45080 as you move the bracket-activated slide 30050 along the longitudinal groove 30015. In alternative embodiments, as shown already in FIG. 446, the fabric thickness compensator 46020 may comprise two sets of transversely moving tubular members 46080. A first set of transversely moving tubular members 46080a may be located on a first side of a longitudinal groove 30015, and a second set of transversely moving tubular elements 46080b may be located on a second side of a longitudinal groove 30015 In such an arrangement, the cutting member 30052 may be configured to extend between two sets of tubular members 46080 without cutting a portion of the tubular member in 46080. In alternative embodiments, the cutting element 30052 can cleave at least one tubular member 46080 that moves the longitudinal slot 30015, while at least one other tubular member 46080 does not move longitudinal groove 30015 and 30052 is cut by the cutting element.

As the cartridge with brackets transversely moves 30,000 tubular members 45080, as shown in FIG. 447 and 448, the bracket 30030 may mesh with at least one tubular member 45080 in each gripping area of the bracket 30039. In this arrangement, each tubular member 45080 can exert a discrete restoring force along the length of the cartridge with brackets 30000. For example, as shown generally in FIG. 448, tubular elements 45080 located near the proximal end of the tissue thickness compensator 45020, where the fabric is thicker, can be strongly compressed compared to tubular elements 45080 located near the distal end of the tissue thickness compensator 45020, where the fabric is thinner. As a result, tubular elements 45080 located closer to the proximal end of the tissue thickness compensator 45020 can provide a greater restoring force than the restoring force that could be created by tubular elements 46080 located closer to the distal end of the tissue thickness compensator 45020. Additionally, as shown also in FIG. 448, deformation of one tube 45080 can have little or no effect on the deformation of adjacent tubes 45080. Thus, tubular elements 45080 can exert a substantially discrete and individual spring force in the grip areas of the bracket 30039 along the length of the cartridge with brackets 30030. Where multiple brackets 30030 activated from one row of cavities 30012 brackets engage with the same tubular element 35080, deformation of the tubular element 35080 may be less individual. For example, deformation of the tubular element 35080 in one gripping area of the bracket 30039 may affect the deformation of this tubular element 35080 in another gripping area of the bracket 30039.

In alternative embodiments, additionally, as shown in FIG. 449-454, tubular members 47080 of a tissue thickness compensator 47020 can move the cartridge with brackets 30,000 in a diagonal direction. Tubular elements 47080 can move the longitudinal groove 30015 in the cartridge with brackets 30000 in the transverse direction so that the cutting element 30052 of the bracket-activating slide 30050 will be able to cut through the diagonally moving tubular elements 47080 as the bracket-activating slide of 30052 along the longitudinal groove 30015 moves. alternative embodiments, the fabric thickness compensator 47020 may comprise two sets of diagonally moving tubular elements 47080. The first set of diagonally moving tubular elements Of these elements, 47080 may be located on the first side of the longitudinal groove 30015, and a second set of diagonally moving tubular elements 47080 may be located on the second side of the longitudinal groove 30015. In this arrangement, the cutting element 30052 may extend between two sets of tubular elements 47080 and may not cut no tubular element 47080.

As shown also in FIG. 449-452, the diagonally moving tubular elements 47080 can be arranged in the cartridge with brackets 30,000 so that a gap is formed between the tubular elements 47080. The gap between adjacent tubular elements 47080 can provide space for horizontal expansion of the tubular elements 47080 when a compressive force is applied to them, such as, for example, the force exerted by the fabric T caught within the grip area of the bracket 30039 of the formed bracket 30030. The tubular elements 47080 can be connected through the gap film or sheet material 47024. The sheet of material may be located on at least one surface of the plate 30011 of the rigid support portion 30010 and / or on the surface of the fabric in contact with the fabric tube elements 47080.

As shown in FIG. 453 and 454, at least one diagonally moving tubular member 47080 may be positioned relative to the brace cavities 30012 in the brace cartridge 30000 so that the tubular member 47080 is located between the legs 30032 of the brackets 30030 mounted from multiple rows of brace cavities 30012. As the brackets 30030 move from the initial position to the activated position, as described in more detail herein, the brace legs 30032 can remain positioned around the tubular member 47080. Additionally, the brackets can be deformed so that the brace legs 30032 are wrapped around the perimeter of the tubular member 47080 , eg. In such an arrangement, the brackets 30030 may be configured to move into an activated position or a formed position without piercing the tubular member 47080. The movement of the legs of the brackets 30032 around the tubular member 47080 may in some embodiments prevent the therapeutic drug 47098 from being held therein accidentally released. The selected angular orientation of each tubular element 47080 relative to the longitudinal groove of the cartridge with brackets 30000 may depend on the position of the brackets 30012 for the brackets in the cartridge with brackets 30000. For example, the tubular elements 47080 may be located at an angle of approximately forty-five (45) degrees relative to the longitudinal groove 30015 cartridge with brackets 30000. In alternative embodiments, the tubular elements 47080 can be located at an angle from fifteen (15) to seventy-five (75) degrees relative to the longitudinal groove 30015 of the cartridge with brackets 30000, for example.

Similar to the descriptions given in the text of this disclosure, multiple tubular elements in a tissue thickness compensator can be joined, for example, by a bonding agent, winding, mesh, fusing, compensating material and / or other suitable bonding adhesive or structure. As shown in FIG. 455-457, flexible jacket 48024 can surround or seal tubular members 48080 in tissue thickness compensator 48020. Flexible jacket 48024 can hold tubular members 48080 in end clamp 12 and can hold each tubular member 48080 in place, for example, in longitudinal alignment with a row cavities 30012 for brackets. The fabric thickness compensator 48020 may comprise, for example, six tubular members 48080. The flexible shell 48024 can be suitably deformable and resilient to restrain the tubular members 48020 enclosed therein, allowing deformation and bending of the tubular members 48080. Additionally, the flexible shell 48024 may surround the tubular elements 48080 with tension and may be tensioned to engage with the tubular elements 48080 as they deform and / or bounce.

As shown in FIG. 456, before installing the brackets 30030, the abutment member 30060 can be pivotally or rotated downward to compress the tissue thickness compensator 48020 and the fabric T between the abutment member 30060 and the cartridge with brackets 30000. Compressing the tissue thickness compensator 48020 may include appropriate compression of the flexible shell 48024 and tubular elements 48020 located therein. As the tubular members 48020 deform, the flexible sheath 48024 may deform similarly. The tubular members 48020 can be equally compressed across the width of the cartridge with brackets 30000, and the flexible sheath 48024 may experience similar compression along the tubular members 48080. As shown in FIG. 457, when the stop member 30060 opens after the brackets 30030 have been installed from the cartridge with the brackets 30000, the tubular members 48080 may bounce or partially bounce from the compressed configurations (FIG. 456). The tubular member 48080 can bounce so that the tubular member 48080 returns to its initial, undeformed configuration. The tubular element 48080 can partially bounce so that the tubular element 48080 partially returns to its initial, undeformed configuration. For example, the deformation of the tubular member 48080 may be partially elastic and partially inelastic. As the tubular members 48080 bounce, the flexible sheath 48024 may remain tensioned by each tubular member 48080. The tubular members 48080 and the flexible sheath 48024 may bounce to such an extent that the tubular members 48080 and fabric T fill the grip regions of the bracket 30039, while the tubular members 48080 exert the necessary restoring force on the tissue T located in them. As shown in FIG. 458, in alternative embodiments, a tissue thickness compensator 48120 comprising six tubular members 48180 held in a flexible sheath 48124 may be located on the abutment member 30060 of the end clamp 12, for example.

As shown in FIG. 459-462, tissue thickness compensator 49020 may comprise a tubular member 49080 longitudinally spaced along the longitudinal axis of thrust member 30060. Tissue thickness compensator 49020 may be secured to thrust member 30060 of end clamp 12 using compressible compensating material 49024. Additionally, compressible compensating material 49024 may surround or tightly enclose the tubular element 49080. Similar to the descriptions given in this document, the tubular element 49080 may contain at least one therapeutic drug 49 098, which may be released due to the absorption of various components of the fabric thickness compensator 49020, piercing of the tubular element 49080 with brackets 30030 activated from the cartridge with brackets 30000, and / or cutting element 30052.

As shown in FIG. 460, the cartridge with brackets 30000 may contain brackets 30030 located in the cavities 30012 for brackets, and before installing the brackets 30030, the stop element 30060 and the fabric thickness compensator 49020 attached to it can pivotally rotate to the cartridge with brackets 30000 and compress the fabric T caught between them. The tubular element 49080 of the fabric thickness compensator 49020 can be equally deformed along the length of the cartridge with brackets 30,000 by a hinged stop element 30060 (FIG. 460). As shown in FIG. 461 and 462, the bracket-activating slide 3050 can move along the longitudinal groove 30015 in the cartridge with brackets 30000 and engage with each ejector 30040 located under the bracket 30030 in the cavity 30010 for brackets, each ejector 30040 in engagement can activate or push the bracket 30030 from cavity 30012 for brackets. When the abutment member 30060 relieves the pressure on the fabric T and the fabric thickness compensator 49020, the fabric thickness compensator 49020, including the tubular element 49080 and compressible compensating material 49024, may bounce or partially bounce from the compressed configuration (FIG. 460) to the rebound configuration (FIG. 461 and 462). The tubular member 49080 and compressible compensating material 49024 can bounce so that the tissue thickness compensator 49020 and fabric T fill the grip areas of the bracket 30039, while fabric thickness compensator 49020 exerts a restoring force on the captured fabric T.

As shown in FIG. 463-465, two tissue thickness compensators 50020a, 50020b may be located in the end clamp 12 of the surgical instrument. For example, the first tissue thickness compensator 50020a may be attached to the cartridge with brackets 30,000 in the lower jaw 30070, and the second tissue thickness compensator 50020b may be attached to the stop member 30060. The first tissue thickness compensator 50020a may comprise a plurality of tubular elements 50080 longitudinally positioned and held in the first compensating material 50024a. At least one tubular member 50080 may comprise a therapeutic agent 50098 similar to the therapeutic agents described herein. The first compensating material 50024a may be deformable or substantially rigid. Additionally, the first compensating material 50024a can hold the tubular elements 50080 in place relative to the gutter 30000 for brackets. For example, the first compensating material 50024a can hold each tubular member 50080 longitudinally aligned with a series of brace cavities 30012. The second tissue thickness compensator 50020b may comprise a first compensating material 50024a, a second compensating material 50024b and / or a third compensating material 50024c. The second and third compensating material 50024b, 50024c may be deformable or substantially rigid.

The abutment member 30060 can pivot and apply compressive force to the tissue thickness compensators 50020a, 50020b and the tissue T between the abutment member 30060 and the cartridge with brackets 30000. The first tissue thickness compensator 50020a and the second tissue thickness compensator 50020b need not be compressible. In alternative embodiments, at least a component of the first tissue thickness compensator 50020a and the second tissue thickness compensator 50020b may be compressible. When the brackets 30030 are activated from the cartridge with brackets 30000, as shown in FIG. 464 and 465, each bracket 30030 can pierce the tubular member 50080 held in the first tissue thickness compensator 50020a. As shown in FIG. 464, the therapeutic agent 50098 held in the tubular member 50080 can be released when the bracket 30030 punctures the tubular member 50080. After being released, the therapeutic agent 50098 can cover the legs of the brackets 30032 and the fabric T surrounding the activated bracket 30030. The brackets 30030 can also pierce the second compensator the thickness of the fabric 50020b when the brackets 30030 are activated from the cartridge with brackets 30000.

As shown in FIG. 466-469, tissue thickness compensator 51020, which is any of the tissue thickness compensators described herein, may include at least one tubular member 51080 that laterally moves the tissue thickness compensator 51020. For example, as shown in FIG. 466, the tissue thickness compensator 51020 can be positioned relative to the cartridge with brackets 30000 so that the first end 51083 of the transverse tubular element 51080 can be located near the first longitudinal side of the cartridge with brackets 30000, and the second end 51085 of the transverse tubular element 51080 can be located near the second longitudinal side of the cartridge with brackets 30000. The tubular element 51080 may have, for example, a shape similar to a capsule. As shown in FIG. 467, the tubular element 51080 may have a perforation between the first end 51083 and the second end 51085, and the tubular element 51080 may have a perforation near or near the center 51087 of the tubular element 51080. The tubular element 51080 may contain a polymeric compound, such as a biocompatible, biocompatible polymer of elastomers, eg. Additionally, as also shown in FIG. 466, the tissue thickness compensator 51020 may comprise a plurality of transversely moving tubular elements 51080. For example, thirteen tubular elements 51080 may be laterally arranged in the tissue thickness compensator 51020.

As shown also in FIG. 466, the tissue thickness compensator 51020 may further comprise a compensating material 51024 that at least partially surrounds the tubular elements 51080. The compensating material 51024 may comprise a biologically absorbable polymer, such as, for example, a lyophilized polysaccharide, glycoprotein, elastin, proteoglycan, glutin, collagen and / or oxidized regenerated cellulose (ORC). The compensating material 51024 can hold the tubular elements 51080 in place in the tissue thickness compensator 51020. Additionally, the compensating material 51024 can be attached to the upper surface of the plate 30011 of the rigid support portion 30010 of the cartridge with brackets 30000 so that the compensating material 51020 is securely located in the end clamp 12. Compensating material 51024 may contain at least one drug 51098.

As also shown in FIG. 466, transversely arranged tubular members 51080 can be positioned relative to the moving cutting member 30052 so that the cutting member 30052 is able to cut through the tubular members 51080. The cutting member 30052 can cut through the tubular members 51080 near or near the perforation made therein. When the tubular elements 51080 are cut in half, the dissected parts of the tubular elements 51080 may be able to swell or expand, as shown in FIG. 468. For example, the tubular element 51080 may contain a hydrophilic substance 51099, which can be released and / or released when the tubular element 51080 is dissected. Moreover, when the hydrophilic substance 51099 is in contact with body fluids in tissue T, the hydrophilic substance 51099 can attract this fluid, which can lead to swelling or expansion of the tubular element 51080. As the tubular element 51080 expands, the compensating material 51024 surrounding the tubular element 51080 may move or adjust to accommodate the swollen tubular element 51080. For example, if the compensating material 51024 contains glutin, the latter may be displaced to accommodate the swollen tubular elements 51080. As for azano already in FIG. 469, the expansion of the tubular elements 51080 and the offset of the compensating material 51024 may cause a corresponding expansion of the tissue thickness compensator 51020.

Similar to other tissue thickness compensators described herein, fabric thickness compensator 51020 can be deformed or compressed by application of force. Additionally, the fabric thickness compensator 51020 may be elastic enough to produce a spring force upon deformation by the applied force and may subsequently bounce or partially bounce when the applied force ceases to act. When the tissue thickness compensator 51020 is gripped in the grip region of the bracket 30039, the bracket 30030 can deform the tissue thickness compensator 51020. For example, the bracket 30030 can deform the tubular members 51080 and / or the compensator material 51024 of the tissue thickness compensator 51020 that are trapped inside the activated bracket 30030. Unrecorded parts the tissue thickness compensator 51020 may also be deformed due to deformation in the gripping areas of the bracket 30039. The deformable tissue thickness compensator 51020 may tend to bounce from the deformed on configuration. Such a bounce can occur before the hydrophilic expansion of the tubular element 51080, simultaneously with the hydrophilic expansion of the tubular element 51080 and / or after the hydrophilic expansion of the tubular element 51080. As the tissue thickness compensator 51020 tends to bounce back, it can exert a restoring force on the fabric, which also captured in the gripping area of the bracket 30039, as described in more detail in this document.

At least one of the tubular elements 51080 and the compensating material 51024 in the tissue thickness compensator 51020 may contain a therapeutic preparation 51098. When the tubular element 51080, which contains the therapeutic preparation 51098, is dissected, the therapeutic preparation 51098 that was contained in the tubular elements 51080 may be released. Moreover, when the compensating material 51024 contains the therapeutic drug 51098, the therapeutic drug 51098 can be released as the biologically absorbable compensating material 51024 is absorbed. The tissue thickness compensator 51020 can provide a quick initial release of the therapeutic drug 51098 followed by the controlled release of the therapeutic drug 51098. For example, the thickness compensator tissue 51020 can provide rapid initial release of therapeutic drug 51098 from tubular cells ntov 51080 in tissue T along the cutting line when the tubular elements 51080, 51098 containing the therapeutic preparation dissected. Additionally, as the biologically absorbable compensating material 51024 is absorbed containing the therapeutic drug 51098, the tissue thickness compensator 51020 may provide enhanced control over the release of the therapeutic drug 51098. At least some therapeutic drug 51098 may remain in the tubular member 51080 for a short period of time before therapeutic agent 51098 flows into compensating material 51024. In alternative embodiments, at least m Here, a certain amount of therapeutic agent 51098 may remain in the tubular member 51080 until the absorption of the tubular member 51080. The therapeutic agent 51098 released from the tubular member 51080 and the compensating material 51024 may be the same. In alternative embodiments, the tubular element 51080 and the compensating material 51024 may contain different therapeutic agents or, for example, different combinations of therapeutic agents.

As shown in FIG. 469, end clamp 12 can cut tissue T and activate brackets 30030 into dissected tissue T almost simultaneously or in quick succession. In such embodiments, the bracket 30030 can be installed in the fabric T immediately after the cutting element 30052 has cut the tubular element 51080 adjacent to the fabric T. In other words, the brackets 30030 can engage with the thickness compensator fabric 51020 immediately after or simultaneously with the swelling of the tubular element 51080 and expansion of the fabric thickness compensator 51020. The fabric thickness compensator 51020 may continue to increase or expand after the brackets 30030 have been activated in the fabric T. The brackets 30030 can be configured to pierce the pipes openings 51080 when brackets 30030 are installed. In such embodiments, therapeutic agents 51098 still held in dissected tubular elements 51080 can be released from the tubular elements 51080 and cover the legs 30031 of the activated brackets 30030.

As shown in FIG. 470, a fabric thickness compensator 51020 can be manufactured, for example, using casting technology. The housing or mold 51120 may comprise a first longitudinal side 51122 and a second longitudinal side 51124. Each longitudinal side 51124 may contain one or more recesses 51130, each of which may be configured to receive a first or second end 50183, 50185 of the tubular element 51080. The first end 50183 of the tubular element 51080 can be located in the first recess 51130a on the first longitudinal side 51122, and the second end 50183 of the tubular element 51080 can be located in the second recess 51130b on the second longitudinal side 51124 ohm, that the tubular element 51080 laterally moves the housing 51120. The recess 51180 may comprise a semicircular groove that can securely fasten the first or second end 50183, 50185 of the tubular element 51080. The first recess 51130a can be located directly opposite the second recess 51130b, and the tubular element 51080 can be perpendicular or at least substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the housing 51120. In alternative embodiments, the first recess 51130a may be offset from the second recess 51130b, with the tubular element 51080 being located beneath angle with respect to the longitudinal axis of the housing 51120. In alternative embodiments, additionally, at least one tubular element 51080 may be longitudinally located inside the housing 51120 so that the tubular element extends between the transverse sides 51126, 51128 of the housing 51120. Additionally, at least one tubular element may be located at an angle in the housing between two recesses in the transverse sides 51126, 51128 of the housing and / or, for example, between a recess in the transverse side 51126 and a recess in the longitudinal side 51124. The housing 51120 may hold the shoulder 51136 for support, which can support the tubular elements 51080 located inside the housing 51120.

The housing 51120 may include recesses 51130 for accommodating, for example, twelve tubular elements 51080. The recesses 51130 of the housing may be filled with tubular elements 51080, while in alternative embodiments, not all recesses 51130 may be filled. At least one tubular element 51080 may be located in the housing 51120. In an exemplary embodiment, at least half of the recesses 51130 may receive tubular elements 51080. After the tubular elements 51080 are located in the housing 51120, compensating material may be added to the housing 51120 51024. The compensating material 51024 may be liquid at the time of addition to the body 51120. For example, the compensating material 51024 may be poured into the body 51120 and may spread around the tubular elements 51080 located therein. As shown in FIG. 471, liquid compensating material 51024 can spread around the tubular element 51080 supported in the recesses 51130 of the housing 51120. After polymerization or at least sufficient polymerization of the compensating material 51024, as shown already in FIG. 472, a fabric thickness compensator 51020 comprising compensating material 51024 and tubular elements 51080 can be removed from the housing 51120. The fabric thickness compensator 51020 can be trimmed. For example, excess compensating material 51024 can be removed from the tissue thickness compensator 51020 so that the longitudinal sides of the compensating material are substantially flat. Moreover, as shown in FIG. 473, the first and second ends 50183, 50185 of the tubular elements 51080 can be compressed together or closed to seal the tubular element 51080. The ends can be closed before the tubular elements 51080 are housed in the housing 51120. In alternative embodiments, the ends 51083 are cut during the trimming process. 51085 can be dissected, and a vertical assembly process by heating can be used to seal and / or close the ends 51083, 51085 of the tubular elements 51080.

As also shown in FIG. 470, a reinforcing axis 51127 may be located within each tubular element 51080. For example, the reinforcing axis 51127 may extend through the longitudinal clearance of the tubular element 51080. The reinforcing axis 51127 may extend beyond each tubular element 51080 so that the reinforcing axis 51127 may be located in recesses 51130 of housing 51120. In embodiments using reinforcing axles 51127, reinforcing axes 51127 may support tubular elements 51080, for example, when pouring compensating material 51204 into housing 51120 and when A suitable compensating material 51024 spreads around the tubular elements 51080. After polymerization, curing and / or drying by freezing of the compensating material 51024, the tissue thickness compensator 51020 can be removed from the housing 51120, and the reinforcing axes 51127 can be removed from the longitudinal gaps of the tubular elements 51080. Tubular elements 51080 after that they can, for example, be filled with medicines. After the tubular elements 51080 are filled with drugs, the tissue thickness compensator 51020, including the ends 51083, 51085 of the tubular elements 51080, can, for example, be trimmed. The fabric thickness compensator 51020 can, for example, be cut according to the pattern and / or sealed under the influence of temperature and / or pressure.

As described herein, a fabric thickness compensator 52020 may comprise multiple tubular elements 51080. As already shown in FIG. 474, tubular elements 51080 may have various material properties, dimensions, and geometric characteristics. For example, the first tubular element 51080a may have a first thickness and comprise a first material, and the second tubular element 51080b may have a second thickness and comprise a second material. At least two tubular elements 51080 in the tissue thickness compensator 52020 may contain the same material. In alternative embodiments, each tubular element 51080 in the tissue thickness compensator 5202 may contain a different material. Similarly, at least two tubular elements 51080 in the tissue thickness compensator 52020 may have the same geometric characteristics. In alternative embodiments, each tubular element 51080 in the tissue thickness compensator 52020 may have different geometric characteristics.

As shown already in FIG. 537-540, tissue thickness compensator 51220 may comprise at least one tubular member 51280 that transversely moves tissue thickness compensator 51220. As shown in FIG. 537, a tissue thickness compensator 51220 may be positioned relative to the abutment member 30060 of the end clamp 12. A tissue thickness compensator 51220 may be mounted, for example, on the mounting surface 30061 of the abutment member 30060 of the end clamp. As shown mainly in FIG. 538, the tubular member 51280 may, for example, have a capsule-like shape. The tubular member 51280 may comprise a polymer combination, such as a biologically absorbable, biocompatible polymer of elastomers, for example.

As shown also in FIG. 537, the tissue thickness compensator 51220 may further comprise a compensating material 51224 that at least partially surrounds the tubular members 51280. The compensating material 51224 may comprise a biologically absorbable polymer, such as, for example, a lyophilized polysaccharide, glycoprotein, elastin, proteoglycan, glutin, collagen and / or oxidized regenerated cellulose (ORC). Similar to the above, the compensating material 51024 can hold the tubular elements 51280 in place in the fabric thickness compensator 51220. Additionally, the compensating material 51224 can be mounted on the mounting surface 30061 of the stop element 30060 so that the compensating material 51220 will be permanently located in the end clamp 12 Compensating material 51224 may contain at least one drug.

As also shown in FIG. 537, transversely arranged tubular members 51280 can be positioned relative to the cutting member 30252 on the moving slide 30250 so that the moving cutting member 30252 is able to cut through the tubular members 51280. The cutting member 30252 can cut through the tubular members 51280, for example, near or near the center of each tubular element 51280. When the tubular elements 51280 are cut in half, the dissected parts of the tubular elements 51280 may be able to swell or expand, as shown in FIG. 537. As shown mainly in FIG. 539, the tubular member 51280 may comprise a hydrophilic substance 51099, which may be released and / or released when the tubular member 51280 is dissected. Moreover, as shown already in FIG. 540, when the hydrophilic substance 51099 is in contact with body fluids in tissue T, the hydrophilic substance 51099 can attract this fluid, which can lead to swelling or expansion of the tubular member 51280. As the tubular member 51280 expands, the compensating material 51224 surrounding the tubular member 51280 may shift or adjusted to accommodate the swollen tubular member 51280. For example, if the compensating material 51224 contains glutin, the latter may be shifted to accommodate the swollen tubular member 51280. As again shown but in FIG. 537, the expansion of the tubular elements 51280 and the offset of the compensating material 51224 may cause a corresponding expansion of the tissue thickness compensator 51220.

Similar to other tissue thickness compensators described herein, fabric thickness compensator 51220 can be deformed or compressed by application of force. Additionally, the fabric thickness compensator 51220 may be elastic enough to produce a spring force when deformed by the applied force, and may subsequently bounce or partially bounce when the applied force ceases to act. When the tissue thickness compensator 51220 is gripped in the grip region of the bracket 30039 (FIG. 417), the bracket 30030 can deform the tissue thickness compensator 51220. For example, the bracket 30030 can deform the tubular members 51280 and / or the compensating material 51224 of the tissue thickness compensator 51220 that are trapped inside the activated brackets 30030. Unreached parts of the fabric thickness compensator 51220 may also deform due to deformation in the gripping areas of the bracket 30039. A deformed fabric thickness compensator 51220 may tend to bounce out of the deformation bathroom configuration. Such a bounce can occur before the hydrophilic expansion of the tubular member 51280, simultaneously with the hydrophilic expansion of the tubular member 51280 and / or after the hydrophilic expansion of the tubular member 51280. As the fabric thickness compensator 51220 tends to bounce back, it can exert a restoring force on the fabric, which also captured in the gripping area of the bracket 30039, as described in more detail in this document.

As shown in FIG. 475-478, fabric thickness compensator 52020 may comprise one or more tubular elements 52080 that laterally move fabric thickness compensator 52020, similar to at least one fabric thickness compensator described herein. The fabric thickness compensator 52020 may comprise a plurality of transversely moving tubular elements 52080. The fabric thickness compensator 52020 may further comprise one or more sheets of material 52024 that contains or holds at least one tubular element 52080 in the fabric thickness compensator 52020. One or more sheets of material 52024 can be located above and / or below the tubular elements 52080 and can securely hold each tubular element 52080 in the tissue thickness compensator 52020. As shown mainly in FIG. 475, the tissue thickness compensator may comprise a first sheet of material 52024a and a second sheet of material 52024b. Tubular elements 52080 may be located between the first and second sheets of material 52024a, 52024b. Additionally, as also shown in FIG. 475, the sheet of material 52024b can be attached to the upper surface of the cartridge plate 30011 of the rigid support portion of the cartridge with brackets 30000 so that the tissue thickness compensator 52020 is permanently located in the end clip 12. In alternative embodiments, one or more sheets of material 52024 can be attached to the stop element 30060 or otherwise held in end clamp 12.

As shown mainly in FIG. 476, tissue thickness compensator 52020 may be porous and / or permeable. For example, a sheet of material 52024 may comprise a plurality of holes 52026. Holes 52026 may be substantially circular. Holes 52036 may be visible on the sheet of material 52024 with the naked eye. In alternative embodiments, holes 52036 may be microscopic. As shown in FIG. 476, tubular elements 52080 may also comprise a plurality of holes a52026. As shown in FIG. 477, the fabric thickness compensator 52120 may comprise sheet material 52124, which comprises a plurality of non-circular holes 52126. For example, holes 52126 may be in the form of a rhombus and / or slot. In alternative embodiments, as shown in FIG. 478, tissue thickness compensator 52220 may comprise a tubular element 52280 that comprises a permeable lattice tube 52292. Sheet of material 52224 may contain a biocompatible, biocompatible polymer of elastomers, for example, and may contain a drug.

In each of the tissue thickness compensators described herein, at least one tubular element 52080 may be configured to swell or expand, as shown in FIG. 479A-479D. For example, as shown in FIG. 479A, tubular members 52080 may be spaced between the first and second sheets of material 52024a, 52024b in the fabric thickness compensator 52020. When the fabric thickness compensator 52020 is in contact with fabric T, as shown in FIG. 479B, fabric thickness compensator 52020 may expand. For example, the tubular elements 52080 may contain a hydrophilic substance 52099, which expands when exposed to a fluid in and / or on the fabric T. Additionally, the sheet of material 52024 and the tubular elements 52080 can be permeable, as described herein, so that the fluid from fabric T could penetrate into the fabric thickness compensator 52020, thus providing fluid contact with the hydrophilic substance 52099 inside the tubular elements 52080. As the tubular elements 52080 expand, the sheet of material 52024 surrounding the pipes chat elements 52080 can be biased or adjusted to accommodate the swollen tubular elements 52080. Similar to the various tissue thickness compensators described in the text of the present disclosure, the expanded tissue thickness compensator 52020 can be deformed or compressed by an applied force, such as, for example, compressive force applied by activated brackets as shown in FIG. 479C. Additionally, the tissue thickness compensator 52020 may be elastic enough to produce a spring force when deformed by the applied force, and may subsequently bounce when the applied force ceases to act. As shown in FIG. 479D and 479E, the fabric thickness compensator 52020 can bounce into different configurations in different gripping areas of the brace 30039 to properly hold the gripped fabric T.

As shown in FIG. 480-485, the fabric thickness compensator 53020 may comprise a plurality of vertically arranged tubular elements 53080. Each tubular element 53080 may comprise an axis of a tube that is substantially perpendicular to the upper surface of the plate 30011 of the rigid cartridge support portion 30010 with brackets 30000. Additionally, the first end of each tubular element 53080 may be located, for example, adjacent to the upper surface of the plate 30011. The tubular elements 53080 may be deformed and may contain, for example, polymers of elastomers. As shown in FIG. 481, the tubular elements 53080 can be compressed when they are gripped in the grip area of the bracket 30039 together with the captured tissue T. The tubular element 53080 may comprise resilient material so that deformation of the tubular element 53080 creates a restoring force as the tubular element 53080 tends to bounce out of a deformed configuration. The deformation of the tubular element 53080 may be at least partially elastic and at least partially inelastic. The tubular element 53080 may be configured to act as a spring under conditions of application of force and may be configured to not bend. As shown in FIG. 482, tubular elements 53080 may be substantially cylindrical. As shown in FIG. 483, the tubular member 53180 may comprise a bending portion 53112. The tubular member 53180 may be configured to bend or deform in the bending portion 53112 by applying compressive force thereto. The tubular element 53180 can be deformed elastically and / or inelastically and can be designed so that it then abruptly bends in the bending section 53112 under the action of a preselected bending force.

As shown mainly in FIG. 484, a first tubular element 53080 may be located near the first end of the bracket cavity 30012, and another tubular element 53080 may be located near the second end of the bracket cavity 30012. As shown in FIG. 482, the tubular member 53080 may comprise a lumen 53084 passing through it. As also shown in FIG. 481, when the bracket 30030 moves from the initial position to the activated position, each bracket leg 30032 may be able to pass through the lumen 53084 of each tubular element 53080. In alternative embodiments, as shown mainly in FIG. 485, vertically arranged tubular elements 54080 may be located in the tissue thickness compensator 54020 so that the tubular elements 54080 abut or are brought into contact with each other. In other words, tubular elements 54080 can be clustered or assembled together. The tubular elements 54080 may be systemically positioned in a tissue thickness compensator 54020; however, in alternative embodiments, the tubular elements 54080 may be randomly positioned.

As also shown in FIG. 480, 484, and 485, the fabric thickness compensator 53020 may also include a sheet of material 53024 that holds or holds the tubular elements 53080 in the fabric thickness compensator 53020. The material sheet 53024 can be located above and / or below the tubular elements 53080 and can permanently hold each tubular element 53080 in the fabric thickness compensator 53020. The fabric thickness compensator 53020 may comprise a first and second sheet of material 53024. Tubular elements 53080 may be located between the first and second sheets of material 53024. Additionally, the material sheet and can be attached to the upper surface of the plate 30011 of the rigid support part of the cartridge with brackets 30000 so that the fabric thickness compensator 53020 is permanently located in the end clamp 12. In alternative embodiments, the sheet of material 53024 can be attached to the stop element 30060 or otherwise held in end clamp 12. The sheet of material 53024 can be deformable enough so that the sheet of material 53024 deforms like springs 55080 in the tissue thickness compensator.

As shown in FIG. 486 and 487, the fabric thickness compensator 55020 may comprise at least one spring 55080, which is so elastic that it is capable of producing a spring force during deformation. As shown mainly in FIG. 486, tissue thickness compensator 55020 may comprise a plurality of springs 55080, for example, three rows of springs 55080. Springs 55080 may be systemically and / or randomly located in fabric thickness expansion joints 55020. Springs 55080 may comprise polymer elastomers, for example. The shape of the springs 55080 may allow their deformation. Springs 55080 can be deformed from the initial configuration to a deformed configuration. For example, when a portion of the tissue thickness compensator 55020 is gripped in the grip region of the bracket 30039, springs 55080 in and / or around the grip region of the bracket 30039 may be deformed. The springs 55080 can bend or flatten under the compressive force exerted on the activated bracket 30030, and the springs 55080 can create a restoring force, which, for example, is a function of the stiffness coefficient of the deformed spring 55080 and / or the degree of deformation of the spring 55080. The spring 55080 can act as the sponge under the action of the force applied by the activated bracket 30030. Additionally, the spring 55080 may contain compensating material, as described in more detail in the text of this document.

The fabric thickness compensator 55020 may further comprise one or more sheets of material 55024 that contains or holds at least one spring 55080 in the fabric thickness compensator 55020. The sheets of material 55024 can be located above and / or below the springs 55080 and can securely hold each spring 55080 in the fabric thickness compensator 55020. As shown mainly in FIG. 55020 a tissue thickness compensator may comprise a first sheet of material 55024a and a second sheet of material 55024b Tubular elements 52080 may be located between the first and second sheets of material 55024a, 55024b. As shown mainly in FIG. 487, the fabric thickness compensator 55020 may further comprise a third sheet of material 55024c located adjacent to either the first or second sheet of material 55024a, 55024b. At least one sheet of material can be attached to the upper surface of the plate 30011 of the rigid support part of the cartridge with brackets 30000 so that the tissue thickness compensator 55020 is securely placed in the end clamp 12. In alternative embodiments, at least one sheet of material 55024 can be attached to the thrust member 30060 or otherwise held in the end clamp 12.

As shown already in FIG. 487, when the bracket 30030 is activated from the cartridge with the brackets 30000 (FIG. 485), the bracket 30030 may engage with the tissue thickness compensator 55020. The activated lap 30030 can capture tissue T and part of the tissue thickness compensator 55020 in the grip region of the bracket 30039. Springs 55080 can be deformed so that the fabric thickness compensator 55020 is compressed while being gripped by the activated bracket 30030. The springs 55080 can be positioned between the activated brackets 30030 in the fabric thickness compensator 55020. In alternative embodiments, at least at least one spring 55080 can be gripped in the grip region of the bracket 30039.

As shown in FIG. 488, the tissue thickness compensator 60020 may comprise at least two compensating layers 60022. The tissue thickness compensator 60020 may comprise a plurality of compensating layers 60022 that can be stacked on top of each other, located next to each other, or have a combined arrangement. As described in more detail in this document, the compensating layers 60022 of the thickness compensator fabric 60020 may have, for example, different geometric properties and / or material properties. Moreover, as described in more detail herein, recesses and / or channels may exist between adjacent compensating layers 60022. For example, the fabric thickness compensator 62020 may comprise six compensation layers 62022a, 62022b, 62022c, 62022d, 62022e, 62022f, which may be adjacent to each other (FIG. 503).

As shown in FIG. 489, 490, and 492-497, the tissue thickness compensator may comprise a first compensating layer 60122a and a second compensating layer 60122b. The first compensating layer 60122a may be adjacent to the top of the second compensating layer 60122b. Adjacent compensation layers 60122 may be separated by a separation gap or recess 60132. As shown mainly in FIG. 489, the fabric thickness compensator 60120 may also include at least one arm or support 60124 located between the first and second compensation layers 60122a, 60122b. The support 60124 may be arranged to position the first compensation layer 60122a relative to the second compensation layer 60122b so that the compensation layers 60122 are separated by a separation gap 60132. As described in more detail herein, the deformation of the support 60124 and / or the compensation layers 60122a, 60122b, for example , can reduce the separation gap 60132.

The support of the tissue thickness compensator may have various geometric parameters and sizes. For example, the support may be a simple I-beam, a centered one-time curved support beam 60124 (FIG. 489), a one-time curved support beam with an offset center 60224 (FIG. 490), an elliptical support beam 60324 (FIG. 492), a reusable curved support beam 60424 (FIG. 493) and / or a symmetrical two-console support beam 60524 (FIG. 494). Moreover, as shown already in FIG. 489, 495 and 496, the support beam 60624 may be thinner than at least one compensating layer 60122 (FIG. 495), the support beam 60724 may be thicker than at least one compensating layer 60122 (FIG. 496) and / or the support beam 60124 may be essentially the same thickness as at least one compensating layer 60122 (FIG. 489), for example. The material, geometry and / or dimensions of the support beam 60124, for example, can affect the deformability or springy elasticity of the fabric thickness compensator 60120.

As also shown in FIG. 489, the compensating layers 60122 and the support beam 60124 of the tissue thickness compensator 60120 may contain various materials, such as, for example, structural material, biological material and / or electrical material, for example. For example, at least one compensating layer 60122 may comprise a polymer composition. The polymer composition may contain at least partially elastic material so that deformation of the compensating layer 60122 and / or the support beam 60124 can create a spring force. The polymer composition of the compensating layer 60122 may contain non-absorbable polymers, absorbable polymers, or combinations thereof. Examples of absorbable polymers can be, for example, bioresorbable, biocompatible elastomer polymers. Moreover, the polymer composition of the compensating layer 60122 may contain synthetic polymers, non-synthetic polymers, or combinations thereof. Examples of synthetic polymers are, without limitation, polyglycolic acid (PGA), polylactic acid (PLA), polycaprolactone (PCL), polydioxanone (PDO) and their copolymers. Examples of non-synthetic polymers are, without limitation, polysaccharides, glycoprotein, elastin, proteoglycan, glutin, collagen, and oxidized regenerated cellulose (ORC). The polymer composition of the compensating layers 60122 may contain a varying amount by weight in percent, for example, absorbable polymers, non-absorbable polymers, synthetic polymers or non-synthetic polymers. Each compensating layer 60022 in the fabric thickness compensator 60120 may contain a different polymer composition or, as in alternative embodiments, at least two compensating layers 60122 may contain the same polymer composition.

As also shown in FIG. 488, at least one compensating layer 60022 may contain a therapeutic preparation 60098, such as a drug or pharmaceutically active agent. The compensating layer 60022 can release a therapeutically effective amount of the therapeutic drug 60098. The therapeutic drug 60098 can be released as the compensating layer 60022 is absorbed. Examples of therapeutic drugs 60098 include, but are not limited to, hemostatic agents and drugs such as fibrin, thrombin and / or oxidized regenerated cellulose ( ORC), anti-inflammatory drugs, such as, for example, diclofenac, aspirin, naproxen, sulindac and / or hydrocortisone, antibiotics and antimicrobials arats or agents, such as, for example, triclosan, silver ions, ampicillin, gentamicin, polymyxin B and / or chloramphenicol, anti-cancer agents, such as, for example, cisplatin, mitomycin and / or adriamycin. The therapeutic agent 60098 may comprise a biological cell, such as, for example, a stem cell. Each compensating layer 60022 in the tissue thickness compensator 60020 may contain a different therapeutic preparation 60098 or, as in alternative embodiments, at least two compensating layers 60022 may contain the same therapeutic preparation 60098. The compensating layer 60022 containing the therapeutic preparation 60098, such as a biological cell, for example, can be sandwiched between two structural compensating layers 60022 containing a polymer composition, such as, for example, polyglycolic acid foam (PGA). The compensating layer 60022 may also contain an electrically conductive material, such as, for example, copper.

As also shown in FIG. 503, the compensating layers 62022 in the tissue thickness compensator 62020 may have different geometric characteristics. When the layers 62022 are adjacent to the fabric thickness compensator 62020, the compensation layers 62022 can form at least one three-dimensional casing 62032 between the layers 62022. For example, if the second compensation layer 62022b containing the gutter is located above the substantially flat third compensation layer 62022c, the gutter and the flat surface of the third compensating layer 62022c may form a three-dimensional casing 62032a between them. Similarly, for example, if the fifth compensation layer 62022e containing the gutter is located under the fourth compensation layer 62022d containing the corresponding gutter, such gutters can form a three-dimensional casing 62032b formed by the gutters in adjacent compensation layers 62022d, 62022e adjacent to one another. The housings 62032 may direct therapeutic agents and / or body fluids when such fluids flow through the tissue thickness compensator 62020.

As shown in FIG. 499, the tissue thickness compensator 61020 may include compensating layers 61022, such as layers 60122a and 21022b, configured to receive brackets 30030 installed from the cartridge with brackets 20000 (FIG. 498). As the bracket 30030 moves from its initial position to the activated position, the geometric parameters of the at least one compensating layer 61022 can guide the bracket legs 30032 to the activated position. At least one compensating layer 61022 may include holes 61030 passing through it, and holes 61030 can be arranged so as to receive the legs 30032 of the installed bracket 30030 when the brackets 30030 are activated from the cartridge with brackets 20000 (FIG. 498), as in more detail described in this document. In alternative embodiments, as also shown in FIG. 503, the brace legs 30032 can pierce at least one compensating layer, such as the compensating layer 62022f, for example, and can pass through holes 62030 in at least one compensating layer, such as, for example, the compensating layer 62022a.

As shown mainly in FIG. 499, tissue thickness compensator 60120 may comprise at least one supporting tongue 61026 on one of the compensation layers 61022a, 61022b. The support tongue 61026 can penetrate into the separation gap 61032 formed between adjacent compensation layers, such as the gap 61032 between the first compensation layer 61020a and the second compensation layer 61020b. The reference tongue 61026 may penetrate from the longitudinal side of the first compensating layer 61022a. Additionally, the supporting tongue 61026 may extend along the length of the longitudinal side or only along part thereof. At least one supporting tongue 61026 may extend from two longitudinal sides of the compensating layer 61022a, 61022b. Additionally, adjoining compensating layers 61022a, 61022b may comprise respective supporting tabs 60126 so that that supporting tab 60126 that extends from the first compensating layer 60122a can at least partially align with the supporting tab 60126 that extends from the second compensating layer 60122b . As also shown in FIG. 497, tissue thickness compensator 60820 may comprise a restriction plate 60828 between adjacent compensating layers 60122a, 60122b. The restriction plate 60828 may be located in the gap 60132 formed between the first compensating layer 60122a and the second compensating layer 60122b, for example. As described in more detail herein, the support tab (s) 61026 and / or the restriction plate (s) 60828 can control the deformation and / or deflection of the support 60124 and / or the compensation layers 60122a, 60122b.

As described herein, the compensating layers 60022 of the thickness compensator fabric 60020 may contain different materials, have different geometric parameters and / or sizes. Such 60020 fabric thickness compensators can be assembled using various manufacturing techniques. As shown mainly in FIG. 488, fabric thickness compensator 60022 may be fabricated by lithography, stereolithography (SLA), or silk screen printing. For example, during the stereolithographic production process, a fabric thickness compensator 60020 can be created in which each compensating layer 60022 contains different materials and / or has different geometric features. For example, the ultraviolet used in the stereolithography machine can create such geometric parameters of the first compensating layer 60022 that the first compensating layer 60022, containing the first material, geometric parameters and / or dimensions, will be polymerized using ultraviolet light. The ultraviolet can subsequently create such geometric parameters of the second compensating layer 60022 that the second compensating layer 60022, containing the second material, geometric parameters and / or dimensions, will be polymerized using ultraviolet light. The sterolithography machine can create compensating layers 60022 on top of each other, next to each other or in a combined arrangement. Additionally, compensating layers 60022 can be designed so that pockets 60132 exist between adjacent compensating layers 60022. Since the sterolithography machine can create very thin layers having unique geometric parameters, the fabric thickness compensator 60020 made by stereolithography can have very complex three-dimensional geometry .

As shown in FIG. 498, a tissue thickness compensator 60920 may be located in the end clamp 12 of the surgical apparatus 10 (FIG. 1). The fabric thickness compensator 60920 may be positioned relative to the cartridge with brackets 20,000 of the end clamp 12. For example, the fabric thickness compensator 60920 may be detachably mounted in the cartridge with brackets 20,000. At least one compensating layer 60922 of the fabric thickness compensator 60920 may be adjacent to the upper surface plate 20011 (FIG. 408) of the cartridge with brackets 20,000. For example, a second compensating layer 60922b can be installed on the upper surface of the plate 20011 using adhesive or by winding similar at least least one winding as described herein (FIG. 218). The tissue thickness compensator 60920 may be an integral part of the cartridge with brackets 20000 so that the cartridge with brackets 20000 and the tissue thickness compensator 60920 are formed as a single assembly. For example, a cartridge with brackets 20000 may comprise a first housing part, such as a rigid support part 20010 (FIG. 408, and a second housing part, such as a fabric thickness compensator 60920.

As also shown in FIG. 498, the tissue thickness compensator 60920 may comprise a first part of the compensator 60920a and a second part of the compensator 60920b. The first part of the compensator 60920a can be located on the first longitudinal side of the cartridge with brackets 20,000, and the second part of the compensator 60920b can be located on the second longitudinal side of the cartridge with brackets 20,000. When the tissue thickness compensator 60920 is relative to the cartridge with brackets 20,000, longitudinal groove 20015 (FIG. .407) in the rigid support portion 20010 (FIG. 407) may extend between the first part of the compensator 60920a and the second part of the compensator 60920b. When the cutting element 20052 on the bracket-activated slider 20050 (FIG. 407) moves through the end clamp 12, the cutting element 20052 can pass through the longitudinal groove 20015 between the first part of the compensator 60920a and the second part of the compensator 60920b, without cutting the part of the tissue thickness compensator 60920, for example. In alternative embodiments, the cutting element 20052 may be configured to cut through a portion of the tissue thickness compensator 60920.

As shown already in FIG. 491, a tissue thickness compensator 63020 may be configured to fit in an end clamp 12 ′ of a circular surgical apparatus. The fabric thickness compensator 62030 may comprise a first circular compensation layer 63022a and a second circular compensation layer 63022b. The second compensating layer 63022b may be located on the upper surface of the round plate 20011 'of the round cartridge with brackets 20000', the second compensating layer 63022b may contain geometric parameters corresponding to the geometric parameters of the surface of the plate 20011 '. For example, the surface of the plate 20011 ′ may comprise a stepped portion, and the second compensating layer 63022b may comprise a corresponding stepped portion. The tissue thickness compensator may further comprise at least one support 63024 and / or support tabs 63026 extending, for example, around the tissue thickness compensator 63020.

As also shown in FIG. 499, the activated brackets 30030 may be configured to engage with the tissue thickness compensator 60920. As described herein, the activated bracket 30030 may grab a portion of the tissue thickness compensator 60920 and fabric T and apply a compressive force to the tissue thickness compensator 60920. Additionally as shown mainly in FIG. 500-502, tissue thickness compensator 60920 may be deformed. As described herein, the first compensating layer 60920a may be separated from the second compensating layer 60920b by a separation gap 60932. As shown in FIG. 500, before compressing the tissue thickness compensator 60920, the gap 60932 may be a first distance. When a compressive force A is applied to the tissue thickness compensator 60920 and fabric T, for example, using an activated bracket 30030 (FIG. 499), the support 60924 may be deformed. As shown already in FIG. 501, the one-time curved support beam 60924 can be bent by the compressive force A so that the separation gap 60932 between the first compensating layer 60920a and the second compensating layer 60920b is reduced to a second distance. As shown mainly in FIG. 502, the first and second compensation layers 60922a, 60922b may also be deformed by the compressive force A. The support tabs 60926 can control the deformation of the compensation layers 60920. For example, the support tabs 60926 can prevent excessive bending of the compensation layers 60920 by supporting the longitudinal sides of the compensation layer 60920 when they are brought into contact with each other. The supporting tongues 60926 can also be configured to bend or bend by the arc under the action of the compressive force A. Moreover, or in alternative embodiments, the restriction plate 60128 (FIG. 497), described in more detail herein, can limit the deformation of the compensation layers 60920 when the compensating layers 60920 and / or the supporting tongues 60926 come into contact with the restriction plate 60128.

Moreover, similarly to the various fabric thickness compensators described herein, fabric thickness compensator 60920 can create a spring or recovery force during deformation. The restoring force generated by the deformed tissue thickness compensator may at least depend on the orientation, size, material and / or geometry of the tissue thickness compensator 60920, as well as the degree of deformation of the tissue thickness compensator 60920 as a result of the applied force. Moreover, at least a portion of the tissue thickness compensator 60920 may be resilient so that the tissue thickness compensator 60920 creates a spring load or a restoring force upon deformation by the activated bracket 30030. Support 60924 may comprise an elastic material and / or at least one compensating layer 60922 may comprise resilient material so that the fabric thickness compensator 60920 is resilient.

As shown already in FIG. 504, the end clamp of the surgical stapler may comprise a first jaw and a second jaw, wherein at least one of the first jaw and the second jaw may be movable relative to the other jaw. The end clamp may comprise a first jaw containing a cartridge groove 19070 with brackets and a second jaw containing a stop element 19060, the stop element 19060 can be pivotally rotated to and / or in the opposite direction from the groove 19070 of the cartridge with brackets, for example. The cartridge groove 19070 with brackets may be configured to receive a cartridge with brackets 19000, for example, such a cartridge with brackets that can be removably held in the bracket groove 19070 for brackets. The cartridge with brackets 19000 may comprise a cartridge case 19010 and a tissue thickness compensator 19020, the tissue thickness compensator 19020 may be removably attached to the cartridge case 19010. As shown already in FIG. 505, the cartridge housing 19010 may comprise a plurality of brackets 19012 and a bracket 19030 located within each brackets 19012. Also, the brackets 19030 can be supported by ejectors 19040 located inside the cartridge body 19010, and the slide and / or trigger, for example, can be moved through the cartridge with brackets 19000 to raise the ejectors brackets 19040 up inside the cavities 19012 for brackets, as shown in FIG. . 506, and discard the brackets 19030 from the cavities 19012 for the brackets.

As shown mainly in FIG. 504 and 505, tissue thickness compensator 19020 may comprise elastic elements 19022 and a vessel 19024 tightly enclosing elastic elements 19022. Vessel 19024 may be sealed and may form a cavity containing an internal atmosphere having a pressure different from the pressure of the surrounding atmosphere. The pressure of the internal atmosphere may be greater than the pressure of the surrounding atmosphere, while in alternative embodiments, the pressure of the internal atmosphere may be less than the pressure of the surrounding atmosphere. If the vessel 19024 contains a pressure lower than the pressure of the surrounding atmosphere, the side wall of the vessel 19024 may enclose a vacuum. In such cases, the vacuum can cause the vessel 19024 to bend, flatten and / or become flat, and the elastic elements 19022 located inside the vessel 19024 can be elastically compressed inside the vessel 19024. When a vacuum is formed in the vessel 19024, the elastic elements 19022 can bend or deform downward and can be held in place by the side walls of the vessel 19024 in a compressed or vacuum packed state.

The elastic element 19022 and the vessel 19024 are composed of biocompatible materials. The elastic element 19022 and / or vessel 19024 may consist of biologically absorbable materials, such as, for example, PLLA, PGA and / or PCL. The elastic member 19022 may consist of an elastic material. The elastic member 19022 may also have structural elasticity. For example, resilient member 19022 may be in the form of a hollow tube.

In addition to the above, the tissue thickness compensator 19020 may be located opposite or adjacent to the surface of the plate 19011 of the cartridge case 19010. When the brackets 19030 are at least partially activated, as shown already in FIG. 506, the legs of the brackets 19030 can pierce or tear apart the vessel 19024. The vessel 19024 may comprise a central portion 19026 that can be located above the cutting groove 19016 of the cartridge body 19010 so that when the cutting element 19080 is advanced to cut tissue T located between the cartridge with brackets 19000 and a stop element 19060, the cutting element 19080 can also cut through the central part 19026 of the 19024 vessel, piercing or breaking the 19024 vessel. In any case, after the 19024 vessel has been torn, the internal atmosphere inside the 19024 vessel may to balance with the surrounding atmosphere of the fabric thickness compensator 19020 and allow the elastic elements 19022 to expand elastically or return or at least partially return their undistorted and / or flattened configuration. Under such circumstances, the elastic elements 19022 can exert a biasing force on the fabric T trapped inside the deformed brackets 19020. More specifically, after deformation by the forming surfaces of the pockets 19062 formed in the abutment element 19060, the legs of the brackets 19030 can trap the fabric T and at least part of the elastic element 19022 inside the brackets 19030 so that when the vessel 19024 ruptures, the tissue thickness compensator 19020 can compensate for the thickness of the tissue T trapped inside the brackets 19030. For example, when the tissue T trapped inside the brace the flanges 19030, are thinner, the elastic element 19022 gripped inside this bracket 19030 can expand to fill the gaps inside the bracket 19030 and exert sufficient compressive force on the fabric T. Accordingly, when the fabric T gripped inside the bracket 19030 is thicker, the elastic element 19022, trapped inside this bracket 19030, can remain compressed to form a space for a thicker fabric inside the bracket 19030 and, like the previous version, apply sufficient compressive force to the tissue T.

When the vessel 19024 is punctured, as described above, the elastic elements 19022 can expand in an attempt to resiliently return to their original configuration. In certain circumstances, a portion of the elastic elements 19022 trapped within the brackets 19030 may not be able to return to its original undistorted shape. In such circumstances, the elastic elements 19022 may comprise a spring that can exert a compressive force on the fabric T trapped inside the brackets 19030. The elastic element 19022 can simulate a linear spring, and the compressive force exerted by the elastic element 19022 will be linearly proportional to the degree or distance. on which the elastic element 19022 remains curved inside the bracket 19030. In alternative embodiments, the elastic element 19022 can simulate a non-linear spring, and the compressive force exerted by the elastic element 19022 is not will be linearly proportional to the degree or distance over which the elastic element 19022 remains curved within the bracket 19030.

As shown mainly in FIG. 507 and 508, the cartridge with brackets 19200 may comprise a tissue thickness compensator 19220, which may comprise one or more sealed vessels 19222 located therein. Each of the vessels 19222 may be sealed and may contain an internal atmosphere. The pressure of the internal atmosphere in the sealed vessel 19222 may exceed atmospheric pressure, while in alternative embodiments, the pressure of the internal atmosphere inside the sealed vessel 19222 may be lower than atmospheric pressure. If the pressure of the internal atmosphere inside the vessel 19222 is lower than atmospheric pressure, the vessel 19222 can be characterized as containing a vacuum. One or more vessels 19222 can be wrapped or placed in an outer casing, container, shell and / or film 19224, for example, with a tissue thickness compensator 19220 can be located above the surface of the plate 19011 of the cartridge housing 19010. Each vessel 19222 can be made of a tube, having a round or at least substantially circular cross section, for example, having a closed end and an open end. Vacuum can be created through the open end of the tube, and when a sufficient vacuum is reached inside the tube, the open end can be sealed or closed. For example, the tube may consist of a polymer material, the open end of the tube may be thermally closed to close or seal it. In any case, the vacuum inside each vessel 19222 can draw the side walls of the tube inward and elastically bend and / or flatten the tube. Vessels 19222 are depicted in an at least partially flattened state in FIG. 508.

When the brackets 19030 are in the inactive position, as shown in FIG. 508, the ends of the brackets 19030 can be located below the fabric thickness compensator 19220. For example, the brackets 19030 can be located inside the respective cavities 19012 for the brackets so that the brackets 19030 do not contact the vessels 19222 until the brackets 19030 move from the inactive positions shown in FIG. 508, to the activated positions shown in FIG. 509. Winding 19224 of tissue thickness compensator 19220 can protect vessels 19220 from being punctured prematurely by brackets 19030. When brackets 19030 are at least partially activated, as shown already in FIG. 509, the legs of the brackets 19030 can puncture or tear apart the vessels 19222. Under such circumstances, the internal atmospheres inside the vessels 19222 can balance with the atmosphere surrounding the vessels 19222 and expand elastically to resume or at least partially restore undistorted and / or non-flattened configurations. Under such circumstances, punctured vessels 19222 can exert a biasing force on the tissue T trapped inside the deformed brackets 19030. More specifically, after deformation by the forming surfaces of the pockets 19222 formed in the abutment element 19060, the legs of the brackets 19030 can trap the fabric T and at least part of the vessel 19022 inside the brackets 19030 so that when the vessels 19222 rupture, the vessels 19222 can compensate for the thickness of the tissue T trapped inside the brackets 19030. For example, when the tissue T captured inside the brackets 19030 is thinner, the vessel 19222, s grasped inside this bracket 19030, can expand to fill the gaps inside the bracket 19030 and then apply sufficient compressive force to the tissue T. Accordingly, when the tissue T captured inside the bracket 19030 is thicker, the vessel 19222 captured inside this bracket 19030 can remain compressed to form a space for the thicker fabric inside the bracket 19030 and, like the previous version, apply sufficient compressive force to the fabric T.

When the vessels 19222 are punctured, as described above, the vessels 19222 can expand in an attempt to resiliently return to their original configuration. A portion of the vessels 19222 captured inside the brackets 19030 may not be able to return to its original undistorted shape. In such circumstances, vessels 19222 may contain a spring that can exert a compressive force on the tissue T trapped inside the brackets 19030. Vessel 19222 can simulate a linear spring, and the compressive force exerted by vessel 19222 will be linearly proportional to the degree or distance that remains a curved vessel 19222 inside the bracket 19030. In alternative embodiments, the vessel 19222 can simulate a non-linear spring, and the compressive force exerted by the vessel 19222 will not be linearly proportional to the degree, or distance, to the cat Or the vessel 19222 remains inside the bracket 19030. The vessels 19222 can be hollow and empty when they are in a sealed configuration. In alternative embodiments, each of the vessels 19222 may form a cavity and may additionally contain at least one drug contained therein. Vessels 19222 may consist of at least one drug that can be released and / or biologically absorbed, for example.

Vessels 19222 compensator tissue thickness 19220 can be located in any suitable way. As shown in FIG. 507, the cavities for the brackets 19012 formed in the cartridge body 19010, and the brackets 19030 located the cavities for the brackets 19012, can be arranged in rows. As shown in the images, the cavities for the brackets 19012 can be arranged in six longitudinal linear rows, for example; however, any suitable arrangement of cavities for the brackets 19012 may be used. As also shown in FIG. 507, the tissue thickness compensator 19220 may contain six vessels 19222, each vessel 19222 can be aligned or located on top of a series of cavities for brackets 19012. Each of the brackets 19030 inside a series of cavities for brackets 19012 can be pierced with the same vessel 19222. In certain embodiments, some legs of brackets 19030 may pierce a vessel 19222 located above them; however, if the vessel 19222 forms a continuous internal cavity, for example, this cavity may be pierced enough by at least one of the brackets 19030 to allow the pressure of the atmosphere of the internal cavity to balance with the pressure of the atmosphere surrounding the vessel 19222. As shown already in FIG. 514, the tissue thickness compensator may comprise a vessel, such as vessel 19222 ′, for example, which can extend in a direction transverse to the line of brackets 19030. For example, vessel 19222 ′ can cross multiple rows of brackets. As shown already in FIG. 515, tissue thickness compensator 19220 ″ may comprise a plurality of vessels 19222 ″ that may extend perpendicularly or at least substantially perpendicular to the bracket line 19030. For example, some of the vessels 19222 ″ may be pierced with brackets 19030, while others may not be pierced with brackets 19030. Vessels 19222 ″ may pass through or through a dissection path through which the cutting element can cut or rupture vessels 19222 ″, for example.

As described above, a thickness compensator, such as, for example, a tissue thickness compensator 19220, may comprise a plurality of sealed vessels 19222, for example. As also described above, each of the sealed vessels 19222 may contain a separate internal atmosphere. Vessels 19222 may have different internal pressures. For example, the first vessel 19222 may contain an internal vacuum having a first pressure, and the second vessel 19222 may contain an internal vacuum having a second pressure different from the first, for example. For example, the degree of curvature or flattening of the vessel 19222 may be a function of the vacuum pressure in the internal atmosphere contained therein. For example, vessel 19222 with a higher vacuum may bend or flatten more than vessel 19222 with a lower vacuum. The cavity of the vessel can be divided into two or more separate sealed cavities, each individual sealed cavity may contain a separate internal atmosphere. For example, some of the brackets inside a row of brackets can be arranged and arranged to pierce a first cavity formed in a vessel, while other brackets inside a series of brackets can be arranged and arranged to pierce a second cavity formed in a vessel, for example . In such embodiments, especially if the brackets in the row of brackets are activated sequentially from one end of the row of brackets to the other end of the row of brackets, as described above, one of the cavities may remain intact and may retain the internal atmosphere when the second cavity is already punctured. The first cavity may have an internal atmosphere with a first vacuum pressure, and the second cavity may have an internal atmosphere with a second, different from the first, vacuum pressure, for example. The cavity remaining intact can maintain internal pressure until the vessel is biologically absorbed, thereby creating the possibility of delaying the release of pressure.

As shown already in FIG. 510 and 511, a tissue thickness compensator, such as a tissue thickness compensator 19120, for example, may be attached to the abutment member 19160. Similarly to the above, the tissue thickness compensator 19120 may comprise a vessel 19124 and a plurality of resilient elements 19122 located therein. Also, similarly to the above, the vessel 19124 can form a cavity containing an internal atmosphere with a pressure lower or greater than the pressure of the atmosphere surrounding the tissue thickness compensator 19120. If the internal atmosphere inside the vessel 19124 contains a vacuum, then the vessel 19124 and elastic elements 19122 located in it, they can bend, flatten and / or become flat under the pressure differential between the vacuum pressure in the vessel 19124 and the atmospheric pressure outside the vessel 19124. In use, the stop element 19160 can be intermittent In the closed position, in which it is located opposite the cartridge with brackets 19100 and in which the surface 19121 of the vessel 19124 that comes into contact with the fabric can mesh with the fabric T located between the tissue thickness compensator 19120 and the cartridge with brackets 19100. When using, the trigger element 19080 can be advanced in the distal direction to activate the brackets 19030, as described above, and simultaneously dissect the tissue T. The tissue thickness compensator 19120 may further comprise an intermediate part 19126, which could it is aligned with the cutting groove formed in the abutment member 19160, wherein when the trigger 19080 extends distally through the tissue thickness compensator 19120, the trigger 19080 can pierce or break the vessel 19124. Also, similarly to the above, the trigger 19080 can raise the bracket ejectors 19040 up and activate the brackets 19030 so that the brackets 19030 can contact the stop element 19160 and deform into deformed configurations, as shown in FIG. 512. When the brackets 19030 are activated, the brackets 19030 can puncture the tissue T and then puncture or tear the vessel 19124 so that the elastic elements 19122 located inside the vessel 19124 can at least partially expand, as described above.

In addition to the above, a tissue thickness compensator may consist of a biocompatible material. A biocompatible material, such as foam, may contain tackifying agents, surfactants, fillers, crosslinking agents, pigments, colorants, antioxidants and other stabilizers and / or combinations thereof to provide the desired material properties. The biocompatible foam may contain a surfactant. The surfactant may be applied to the surface of the material and / or dispersed in the material. Without reference to any particular theory, a surfactant deposited on a biocompatible material can reduce the surface tension of fluids in contact with the material. For example, a surfactant can reduce the surface tension of water in contact with the material in order to accelerate the penetration of water into the material. Water can act as a catalyst. A surfactant can increase the hydrophilicity of the material.

The surfactant may comprise an anionic surfactant, a cationic surfactant and / or a nonionic surfactant. Examples of surfactants include, without limitation, polyacrylic acid, metaloza, methylcellulose, ethylcellulose, propylcellulose, hydroxyethylcellulose, carboxymethylcellulose, polyoxyethylene cetyl ether, polyoxyethylene lauryl ether, polioksietilenoktilovy ether, polyoxyethylene octylphenyl ether, polyoxyethylene oleyl ether, polyoxyethylene sorbitan monolaurate, polyoxyethylene stearyl ether, polyoxyethylene nonylphenyl ether, dialkilfenoksi poly (ethyleneoxy) ethanol and polyaxamers and combinations thereof. The surfactant may contain a copolymer of polyethylene glycol and polypropylene glycol. The surfactant may contain a phospholipid surfactant. The phospholipid surfactant may confer antibacterial stabilizing properties and / or disperse other materials into a biocompatible material. The tissue thickness compensator may contain at least one drug. The tissue thickness compensator may comprise one or more natural materials, non-synthetic materials, and / or synthetic materials described herein. The tissue thickness compensator may contain a biocompatible foam containing glutin, collagen, hyaluronic acid, oxidized regenerated cellulose, polyglycolic acid, polycaprolactone, polyactic acid, polydiaxanone, polyhydroxyalkonate, polyglexaprone, and combinations thereof. The tissue thickness compensator may comprise a film containing at least one drug. The tissue thickness compensator may comprise a biodegradable film containing at least one drug. The medicine may contain a liquid, gel and / or powder. Medications may contain anti-cancer agents, for example, cisplatin, mitomycin and / or adriamycin.

The tissue thickness compensator may comprise biodegradable material to provide controlled release of at least one drug as the biodegradable material decomposes. The biodegradable material can decompose, decompose into components, or lose structural integrity when the biodegradable material contacts an activator, such as, for example, an activating fluid. The activating fluid may contain saline or any other electrolyte solution, for example. The biodegradable material may be brought into contact with the activating fluid by conventional methods, without limitation, by spraying, dipping and / or brushing. In use, for example, the surgeon may dip the end clamp and / or cartridge with brackets containing a tissue thickness compensator containing at least one drug into an activating liquid containing saline, such as a solution of sodium chloride, calcium chloride and / or potassium chloride . The tissue thickness compensator can release the drug as the tissue thickness compensator decomposes. Isolation of the drug from the tissue thickness compensator can be characterized by a quick release at the beginning and a slower subsequent release.

The tissue thickness compensator, for example, may consist of a biocompatible material, which may contain an oxidizing agent. The oxidizing agent may be an organic peroxide and / or inorganic peroxide. Examples of oxidizing agents include, but are not limited to, hydrogen peroxide, urea peroxide, calcium peroxide and magnesium peroxide, as well as sodium percarbonate. The oxidizing agent may contain peroxygen-based oxidizing agent and hypohalogenite-based oxidizing agents, such as, for example, hydrogen peroxide, hypochlorous acid, hypochlorites, hypocodites and percarbonates. The oxidizing agent may contain alkali metal chlorites, perborates and hypochlorites, such as, for example, sodium chlorite, sodium hypochlorite and sodium perborate. The oxidizing agent may contain vanadate. The oxidizing agent may contain ascorbic acid. The oxidizing agent may comprise an active oxygen generator. The fabric frame may contain a biocompatible material containing an oxidizing agent.

The biocompatible material may contain a liquid, gel and / or powder. The oxidizing agent may comprise microparticles and / or nanoparticles, for example. For example, the oxidizing agent may be milled into microparticles and / or nanoparticles. The oxidizing agent may be incorporated into the biocompatible material by suspending the oxidizing agent in a polymer solution. The oxidizing agent may be incorporated into the biocompatible material during freeze-drying. After freeze-drying, the oxidizing agent can be attached to the cell walls of the biocompatible material to interact with the tissue in contact. The oxidizing agent may not be chemically bound to the biocompatible material. The dry percarbonate powder can be incorporated into the biocompatible foam to provide a long lasting biological effect by slow release of oxygen. The dry percarbonate powder can be embedded inside the polymer fiber in a non-woven structure to provide a long lasting biological effect by slow release of oxygen. The biocompatible material may contain an oxidizing agent and a drug, such as, for example, doxycycline and ascorbic acid.

The biocompatible material may contain a fast-releasing oxidizing agent and / or a slower-releasing long-acting oxidizing agent. The selection of the oxidizing agent from the biocompatible material may be characterized by a quick release at the beginning and a slower subsequent release. The oxidizing agent can generate oxygen when the oxidizing agent is in contact with body fluids, such as, for example, water. Examples of body fluids include, but are not limited to, blood, plasma, peritoneal fluid, cerebrospinal fluid, urine, lymphatic fluid, synovial fluid, vitreous fluids, saliva, contents of the gastrointestinal lumen and / or bile. Without reference to a specific theory, an oxidizing agent can reduce cell death, increase tissue viability and / or maintain the mechanical strength of tissues that may be damaged during dissection and / or placement of brackets. The biocompatible material may contain at least one microparticle and / or nanoparticle. The biocompatible material may contain one or more of the natural materials, non-synthetic materials, and synthetic materials described in this document. The biocompatible material may contain particles with an average diameter of from about 10 nm to about 100 nm and / or from about 10 μm to about 100 μm, for example, 45-50 nm and / or 45-50 μm. The biocompatible material may contain a biocompatible foam containing at least one microparticle and / or nanoparticle embedded in it. The microparticle and / or nanoparticle may not be chemically bound to the biocompatible material. The microparticle and / or nanoparticle can provide controlled release of the drug. The microparticle and / or nanoparticle may contain at least one drug. The microparticle and / or nanoparticle may contain a hemostatic agent, an antimicrobial agent and / or an oxidizing agent, for example. The tissue thickness compensator may comprise a biocompatible foam containing a hemostatic agent containing oxidized regenerated cellulose, an antimicrobial agent containing doxycyline and / or gentamicin, and / or an oxidizing agent containing percarbonate. The microparticle and / or nanoparticle can provide controlled release of the drug for up to three days, for example.

A microparticle and / or nanoparticle can be incorporated into a biocompatible material during manufacture. For example, a biocompatible polymer, such as, for example, PGA / PCL, may be contacted with a solvent, such as, for example, dioxane to form a mixture. The biocompatible polymer may be ground to form particles. Dry particles, with or without ORC particles, may be contacted with this mixture to form a suspension. The suspension may be freeze dried to form a biocompatible foam containing PGA / PCL having dry particles and / or ORC particles embedded therein.

Tissue thickness compensators or layers described herein may consist of an absorbable polymer, for example. The tissue thickness compensator can consist of foam, film, fibrous woven and fibrous non-woven PGA, PGA / PCL (co-caprolactone polyglycolic acid), PLA / PCL (co-caprolactone polylactic acid), PLLA / PCL, PGA / TMC polyglycolic acid thimethylene carbonate), PDS, PEPBO or other absorbable polyurethane, polyester, polycarbonate, polyorthoesters, polyanhydrides, polyetheramides and / or polyoxyesters, for example. The tissue thickness compensator may consist of PGA / PLA (polyglycolic acid co-lactic acid) and / or PDS / PLA (poly (p-dioxanone co-lactic acid), for example. The tissue thickness compensator may consist, for example, of organic material. The tissue thickness compensator may consist of carboxymethyl cellulose, sodium alginate, cross-linked hyaluronic acid and / or oxidized regenerated cellulose, for example, the tissue thickness compensator may have a hardness in the range of 3-7 Shore A (30-50 Shore OO) with a maximum hardness of 15 Shore A (65 Shore OO), e.g. The fabric thickness compensator can be subjected to 40% compression under a load of 13 N (3 lb * force), 60% compression under a load of 27 N (6 lb * force) and / or 80% compression under a load of 89 N (20 lb * force) , for example, One or more gases, such as air, nitrogen, carbon dioxide and / or oxygen, for example, may be passed through and / or contained within the tissue thickness compensator. The tissue thickness compensator may contain bubbles located therein that contain between about 50% and about 75% stiffness of the material containing the fabric thickness compensator.

The tissue thickness compensator may contain hyaluronic acid, nutrients, fibrin, thrombin, platelet-rich plasma, sulfasalazine (azulfidine® - diazo compound 5ASA and sulfapyridine) - prodrug - intestinal bacteria (azo reductase), mesalamine (5ASA with various prodrug configurations) , asacol® (5ASA + E coated with S coating - pH> 7 (dissolved coating), pentase® (5ASA + coated with ethylene cellulose - slow release depending on the time / pH ratio), mesasal® (5ASA + Eudragit with L coated - pH> 6), about alazine (5ASA + 5ASA-intestinal bacteria (azo reductase)), balsalazide (5ASA + 4 aminobenzoyl-B-alanine) - intestinal bacteria (azo reductase)), granular mesalamine, liad (delay and SR formulation of mesalamine), HMPL-004 (herbal mixtures that can inhibit TNF-alpha, interleukin-1 beta and nuclear-kappa B activation), CCX282-B (an antagonist of chemokine receptors in the oral cavity that interferes with the traffic of T-lymphocytes in the intestinal mucosa), rifaximin (a non-absorbable broad-spectrum antibiotic), infliximab, mouse chemist (monoclonal anti anti-TNF-alpha body is approved for reducing signs / symptoms and maintaining clinical remission in adults / pediatric patients with moderate / severe luminal and fistulizing Crohn's disease who have an inadequate response to conventional therapy), adalimumab, human total IgG1 (anti TNF-alpha monoclonal antibody - approved to reduce the signs / symptoms of Crohn's disease, and to induce and maintain clinical remission in adult patients with moderate / severe active Crohn's disease with an inadequate response test for conventional methods of treatment, or those with intolerance to infliximab), certolizumab pegall, humanized anti-TNF FAB '' (a fragment of a monoclonal antibody associated with polyethylene glycol - approved to reduce the signs / symptoms of Crohn's disease and to induce and maintain response in adult patients with moderate / severe disease with an inadequate response conventional methods of treatment), natalizumab, the first non-TNF-alpha inhibitor (biological compound approved for the treatment of Crohn's disease), humanized monoclonal IgG4 antibody (pre started to fight alpha-4-integrin - approved by the FDA to stimulate and maintain a clinical response and remission in patients with moderate / severe disease with signs of inflammation, and who have an inadequate response to conventional methods of treatment of Crohn's disease or who cannot tolerate conventional methods of treatment of Crohn's disease and TNF-alpha inhibitors), concomitant immunomodulators potentially prescribed with infliximab, azathioprine 6-mercaptopurine (purine synthetic inhibitor - prodrug), methotrexate (binds farm dihydrofolate reductase (DHFR) nt, which is involved in the synthesis of tetrahydrofolate, inhibits all purine synthesis), and allopurinol therapy tioprinom, PPI, H2 for the suppression of acid to protect the wound line, CDiff- flag vancomycin (fecal translocation treatment; probiotics; repopulation of normal intraluminal flora) and / or rifaximin (treatment of bacterial growth (in particular, hepatic encephalopathy); is not absorbed in the gastrointestinal tract with action on intraluminal bacteria), for example;

As described herein, a tissue thickness compensator can compensate for changes in tissue thickness trapped in brackets ejected from the cartridge and / or contained in the line of brackets, for example. In other words, certain brackets in the line of brackets can capture thick parts of the fabric, while other brackets in the line of brackets can capture thin parts of the fabric. In such circumstances, the tissue thickness compensator may take different heights or thicknesses inside the brackets and apply a compressive force to the tissue trapped inside the brackets regardless of the thickness of the trapped tissue. A tissue thickness compensator can compensate for changes in tissue thickness and hardness. For example, certain brackets in the line of brackets can capture well compressible parts of the fabric, while other brackets in the line of brackets can capture less compressible parts of the fabric. Under such conditions, the tissue thickness compensator can be configured to accept a lower height inside the brackets that grab the fabric having a lower compressibility, or a higher hardness, and, accordingly, a larger height inside the brackets that grab the fabric that has a lower compressibility, or more low hardness, for example. In any case, a tissue thickness compensator, regardless of whether it compensates for changes in height and / or tissue hardness changes, for example, may be called a “tissue compensator” and / or “compensator”, for example.

The devices described in this application may be configured to be disposed of after a single use, or may be configured to be used multiple times. However, in each case, after at least one use, the device can be reused after recovery. Recovery may include any combination of the steps of disassembling the device, then cleaning or replacing individual items and then reassembling. In particular, it is possible to disassemble the device and selectively replace or remove in any combination any number of individual elements or parts of the device. After cleaning and / or replacing individual parts, the device can be reassembled in repair centers or in the operating unit immediately before surgery for subsequent use. Those skilled in the art will appreciate that various methods of disassembling, cleaning / replacing, and reassembling can be used in rebuilding a device. The use of such methods, as well as the resulting reconditioned device, are within the scope of this application.

Preferably, the present invention described in this application undergoes processing before use in a surgical operation. First a new or used tool is obtained and, if necessary, cleaned. Then the instrument can be sterilized. According to one sterilization method, the instrument is placed in a closed and sealed container, such as a plastic bag or a Tyvek bag (TYVEK). The container and instrument are then placed in a field of exposure to radiation that can penetrate into the container, such as gamma radiation, X-rays or high energy electrons. Radiation kills bacteria on the surface of the instrument and in the container. The sterilized instrument can then be stored in a sterile container. A sealed container keeps the instrument in a sterile condition until it is opened in a medical facility.

Any patent, publication, or other description that is fully or partially incorporated herein by reference is an integral part of this document to the extent that it does not contradict the definitions, provisions, or other description presented herein. In this regard, the description provided in this document, to the extent necessary, prevails over any information contrary to the provisions of this document, which was incorporated into this document by reference. Any material or part thereof that is incorporated herein by reference and which contradicts the definitions, provisions or other description presented herein is included in this document to the extent that between the material incorporated by reference and this description document is not contradictions arise.

Although examples of industrial designs are provided in the description of the present invention, the present invention can be further modified within the spirit and scope of the present description. Thus, it is intended that the present application cover all possible variations, methods of use, or modifications of the present invention using its basic principles. Moreover, it is intended that the present application cover such deviations from the present description as are included in known or accepted practice in the field to which the present invention relates.

Claims (29)

1. The product is selected from the thrust plate of the stapler and the cartridge with brackets for the stapler, containing: tissue thickness compensator comprising: the outer layer containing polyglycolic acid, polylactic acid, polydioxane, polyhydroxyalkonate, polyglexaprone, polycaprolactone or a combination of the above substances; an inner layer containing oxidized regenerated cellulose, a first encapsulated component containing a first hydrogel precursor, and a second encapsulated component containing a second hydrogel precursor; wherein the first hydrogel precursor and the second hydrogel precursor are adapted to form a hydrogel to expand the tissue thickness compensator when the first encapsulated component and the second encapsulated component are broken. 2. An article selected from a thrust plate of a stapler and a cartridge with brackets for a stapler, comprising: tissue thickness compensator comprising: biocompatible material; first component; and second component; in which the first component and the second component are adapted to form a reaction product to expand the tissue thickness compensator, the first component comprising a hydrophilic material embedded in a biocompatible material, and the second component being human body fluid. 3. An article selected from a thrust plate of a stapler and a cartridge with brackets for a stapler, comprising: tissue thickness compensator comprising: biocompatible material; first component; and second component; wherein the first component and the second component are adapted to form a reaction product for expanding the tissue thickness compensator, the tissue thickness compensator comprising a first encapsulated component containing a first component and a second encapsulated component containing a second component, wherein the first encapsulated component is configured to release the first component when the first encapsulated component is broken and the second encapsulated component is configured to release amb second component when the second component is encapsulated torn. 4. An article selected from a thrust plate of a stapler and a cartridge with brackets for a stapler, comprising: tissue thickness compensator comprising: biocompatible material; first component; and second component; wherein the first component and the second component are adapted to form a reaction product to expand the tissue thickness compensator, wherein the reaction product is formed in situ by contacting the first component and the second component. 5. An article selected from a thrust plate of a stapler and a cartridge with brackets for a stapler, comprising: tissue thickness compensator comprising: biocompatible material; first component; and second component; wherein the first component and the second component are adapted to form a reaction product to expand the tissue thickness compensator, wherein the first component contains a first hydrogel precursor, the second component contains a second hydrogel precursor, and the reaction product contains a hydrogel.

Images